Ram Concept

RAM Concept
Release 5.0
August 2012
RAM International
2744 Loker Avenue West
Carlsbad, CA 92010
Telephone: (760) 431-3610
Toll Free: (800) 726-7789
Fax: (760) 431-5214
DAA037480-1/0001
DISCLAIMER
The software and related documentation, including this documentation, are protected by both United States copyright law
and international treaty provisions. Any unauthorized copying or reproduction is strictly prohibited and subject to civil and
criminal penalties. Please refer to the License Agreement for authorization to make a backup copy of the software. You may
not sell this software or documentation or give copies of them away to anyone else.
Except as expressly warranted in the License Agreement, RAM International disclaims all warranties, expressed or implied,
including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the
software, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying hardware. All results should be verified to the user's
satisfaction. The contents of these written materials may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors and may be
revised without prior notice.
Copyright attribution: 2012, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Trademark attribution: RAM Concept and RAM Structural System are either registered or unregistered trademarks or
service marks of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or one of its direct or indirect wholly-owned subsidiaries. Other brands and
product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
DAA037480-1/0001
i RAM Concept
RAM Concept
Table of Contents
1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Comparing with traditional methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 RAM Concept options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.4 Structural systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.5 Learning RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.6 Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Looking at the Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 About the workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Creating and opening files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 Saving a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4 About templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.5 Expanding tool buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.6 Rearranging toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.7 Using the right mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.8 Undoing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 Understanding Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1 Modeling with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 Managing layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4 Using Plans and Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.1 Using plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2 Creating new plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3 Viewing perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.4 Creating new perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.5 Controlling views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.6 Setting up the grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5 Drawing and Editing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.1 Precision drawing with snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.2 Drawing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.3 Entering coordinate points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.4 Using relative coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.5 Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.6 Deselecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.7 Filtering selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.8 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.9 Copying and pasting objects by layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.10 Editing polygon objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.11 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.12 Using the Utility tool to move and stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.13 Manipulating the model as a whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.14 Editing object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.15 Setting default properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.16 Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1 Customizing tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7 Choosing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.1 About units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.2 Selecting units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.3 Specifying report as zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ii RAM Concept
8 Choosing Sign Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8.1 Selecting sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8.2 About plot sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
9 Specifying Material Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9.1 Viewing the available materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9.2 Material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9.3 Adding and deleting materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9.4 About post-tensioning systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10 Specifying Loadings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
10.1 About default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
10.2 Viewing the loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
10.3 Loading properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
10.4 About loading types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10.5 Available loading types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10.6 Changing Loading Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10.7 Changing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10.8 Adding and deleting loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10.9 About load pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
11 Specifying Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
11.1 About default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
11.2 Viewing the load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
11.3 Rebuilding load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
11.4 Adding and deleting load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
11.5 Load combination properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
11.6 About group load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
11.7 About alternate envelope factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
11.8 Summary of load combination types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
12 Selecting Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
12.1 Using rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
12.2 Rule set design properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12.3 Types of active rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12.4 Adding and deleting rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
13 Using a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
14.1 What can be imported from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
14.2 Controlling which concrete members are imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
14.3 About load importation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
14.4 Importing a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
14.5 Reimporting a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
14.6 Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
14.7 Tight integration with the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
15 Data Transfer from STAAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
15.1 STAAD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
15.2 RAM Concept Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
16 Data Transfer from ISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
16.1 What is ISM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
16.2 ISM Sync Tools Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
16.3 Import and Export Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
17 Defining the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
17.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
iii RAM Concept
17.2 About columns and walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
17.3 Column properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
17.4 Drawing columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
17.5 Wall properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
17.6 Drawing walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
17.7 About point and line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
17.8 Point support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
17.9 Drawing point supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
17.10 Line support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
17.11 Drawing line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
17.12 About springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
17.13 Point spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
17.14 Drawing point springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
17.15 Line spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
17.16 Drawing line springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
17.17 Area spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
17.18 Drawing area springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
17.19 About floor areas and members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
17.20 Slab area properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
17.21 Drawing slab areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
17.22 About beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
17.23 Beam properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
17.24 Drawing beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
17.25 Slab opening properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
17.26 Drawing slab openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
17.27 Checking the structure definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
18 Generating the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
18.1 Generating the mesh automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
18.2 Selectively refining the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
19 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
19.1 Using the Element layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
19.2 About column elements and wall elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
19.3 Column element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
19.4 Drawing column elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
19.5 Wall element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
19.6 Drawing wall elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
19.7 About point and line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
19.8 Point support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
19.9 Drawing point supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
19.10 Line support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
19.11 Drawing line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
19.12 About springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
19.13 Point spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
19.14 Drawing point springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.15 Line spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.16 Drawing line springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.17 Area spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.18 Drawing area springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.19 About floor areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.20 Slab element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
19.21 Drawing the slab elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
19.22 A few final words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
20 Drawing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
20.1 About self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
20.2 About superposition of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
20.3 Point load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
20.4 Drawing point loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
20.5 Line load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
20.6 Drawing line loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
iv RAM Concept
20.7 Area load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
20.8 Drawing area loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
20.9 Copying loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
21 Creating Pattern Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
21.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
21.2 Drawing load patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
21.3 Load pattern filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
22 Defining Design Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
22.1 Definition of a design strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
22.2 Design strip terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
22.3 Understanding how a design strip works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
22.4 The design strip process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
22.5 Span segment properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
22.6 Creating span segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
22.7 Creating span segment strips (design strips) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
22.8 Defining span segment widths and strip widths manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
22.9 Cross Section Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
22.10 Improving the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
22.11 Additional design strip information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
22.12 Irregular column layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
22.13 Miscellaneous tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
22.14 A final word on design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
23 Defining Design Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
23.1 Using design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
23.2 Design section properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
23.3 Drawing design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
23.4 About ignore depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
23.5 A final word on design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
24 Defining Punching Shear Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
24.1 About punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
24.2 Punching shear check properties and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
24.3 Drawing punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
24.4 A final word on punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
25 Drawing Reinforcement Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
25.1 Reinforcement bar definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
25.2 Reinforcement properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
25.3 About drawing reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
25.4 Drawing concentrated reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
25.5 Drawing distributed reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
25.6 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement drawing examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
25.7 Other reinforcement plan tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
25.8 Layout and Detailing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
25.9 Reinforcement Text Formatting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
25.10 About SSR callouts and SSR rails: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
26 Defining Tendons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
26.1 Tendon definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
26.2 Tendon Parameters Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
26.3 Tendon properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
26.4 About creating tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
26.5 Drawing banded tendon polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
26.6 Drawing distributed tendon quadrilaterals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
26.7 Defining profiles for banded tendon polylines and distributed tendon quadrilaterals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
26.8 Other tendon parameter plan objects and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
26.9 Tendon parameter drawing examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
26.10 Tendon parameter drawing and text formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
v RAM Concept
26.11 About drawing individual tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
26.12 Drawing single tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
26.13 Drawing multiple tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
26.14 Editing tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
26.15 About jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
26.16 Jack properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
26.17 Drawing the jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
27 Using Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
27.1 About Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
27.2 Live Load Reduction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
27.3 Setting the Live Load Reduction Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
27.4 Live Loading Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
27.5 Live Load Reduction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
27.6 Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
27.7 Implementation of Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
28 Calculating Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
28.1 Calculating the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
28.2 About analysis errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
28.3 Recalculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
28.4 Calculating load history deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
28.5 Calculating vibration analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
28.6 Reviewing the calc log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
28.7 Decreasing calculation time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
29 Viewing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
29.1 Type of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
29.2 Viewing frequently used results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
29.3 Viewing other results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
29.4 Section distribution plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
29.5 Miscellaneous results information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
30 Plotting Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
30.1 Setting the plotted results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
30.2 Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
30.3 Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
30.4 Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
30.5 Section Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
30.6 Section Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
30.7 Punching Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
30.8 Vibration Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
30.9 Plot Animation Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
30.10 Difference Plot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
31 Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
31.1 How the Auditor can assist the design process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
31.2 About the three design steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
31.3 About the information displayed by the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
31.4 Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
31.5 Using the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
31.6 About the information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
31.7 Using the Punching Check Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
32 Using the Report Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
32.1 Using the Report Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
32.2 Saving Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
32.3 Opening Previously Saved Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
32.4 Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
vi RAM Concept
33 Using the Estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
33.1 Viewing the estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
33.2 What the estimate calculates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
33.3 Editing the unit costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
33.4 About unit costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
34 Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
34.1 Basic printing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
34.2 General printing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
34.3 Select and Configure Printer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
34.4 Determining the fit of plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
34.5 Printing the desired perspective viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
34.6 Previewing the print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
34.7 Printing optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
34.8 Changing the report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
35 Exporting Plans and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
35.1 Exporting a plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
35.2 Exporting a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
36 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
36.1 About the export of reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
36.2 About the export of geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
37 Using Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
37.1 Starting Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
37.2 Specifying general parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
37.3 Entering span data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
37.4 Entering support data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
37.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
37.6 Entering the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
37.7 Specifying the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
37.8 Specifying reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
37.9 Completing Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
37.10 Generating the mesh and calculating results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
37.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
38 General Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
38.1 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
38.2 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
38.3 Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
38.4 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
39 Frequently Asked Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
39.1 Capabilities and Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
39.2 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
39.3 Plans and perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
39.4 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
39.5 Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
39.6 Sign Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
39.7 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
39.8 Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
39.9 Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
39.10 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
39.11 Design Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
39.12 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
39.13 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
40 Errors and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
40.1 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
vii RAM Concept
40.2 Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
40.3 Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
40.4 Load History Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
40.5 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
41 Simple RC Slab Tutorial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
41.1 Defining the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
41.2 Drawing the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
41.3 Defining the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
41.4 Drawing punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
41.5 Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
41.6 Drawing reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
42 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
42.1 Import the CAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
42.2 Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
42.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
42.4 Define the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
42.5 Create the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
42.6 Regenerate the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
43 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
43.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
44 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
44.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
45 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: EC2 / TR43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
45.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
46 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
46.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
47 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: CSA A23.3-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
viii RAM Concept
47.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
48 Mat Foundation Tutorial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
48.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
49 Strip Wizard Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
49.1 Start Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
49.2 Set the general parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
49.3 Enter the span data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
49.4 Create the supports below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
49.5 Add drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
49.6 Specify the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
49.8 Specify the reinforcement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
49.9 Complete the Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
49.10 Proceed with RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
49.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
49.12 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
50 Analysis Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
50.1 Review of plate behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
50.2 Finite element analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
50.3 Orthotropic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
50.4 Deep beam considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
50.5 Wall behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
50.6 Post-tensioning loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
50.7 Self-equilibrium analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
50.8 Design strip and design section forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
50.9 Result categories in RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
51 Section Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
51.1 General Design Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
52 Live Load Reduction Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
52.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
52.2 Tributary Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
52.3 Influence Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
52.4 ASCE-7 2002 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
52.5 ASCE-7 2010 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
52.6 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
52.9 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
52.10 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
52.11 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
52.12 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
52.13 Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
52.14 National Building Code of Canada 2005 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
52.15 Mat Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
52.16 Special Member Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
ix RAM Concept
53 Reinforcement Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
53.1 Span detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
53.2 Development lengths / anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
53.3 How RAM Concept lays out program reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
53.4 How Concept details user and program reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
53.5 How Concept treats transverse reinforcement and individual transverse bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
53.6 Example 1: reinforcement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
54 ACI 318-99 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
54.1 ACI 318-99 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
54.2 ACI 318-99 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
54.3 ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
54.4 ACI 318-99 material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
54.5 ACI 318-99 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
54.6 ACI 318-99 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
55 ACI 318-02 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
56 ACI 318-05 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
57 ACI 318-08 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
58 ACI 318-11 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
58.3 ACI318-11 / ASCE-7 / live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
59 AS 3600-2001 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
59.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
59.2 AS 3600-2001 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
59.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
59.4 AS 3600-2001 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
59.5 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
59.6 AS 3600-2001 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
60 AS 3600-2009 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
60.1 AS 3600-2009 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
60.2 AS 3600-2009 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
60.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
x RAM Concept
60.4 AS 3600-2009 material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
60.5 AS 3600-2009 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
60.6 AS 3600-2009 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
61 BS 8110: 1997 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
61.1 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
61.2 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
61.3 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
61.4 BS 8110/TR43 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
61.5 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
61.6 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
62 IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
62.1 IS 456 / IS 1343 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
62.2 IS 456 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
62.3 IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
62.4 IS 456 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
62.5 IS 456 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
62.6 IS 456 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
62.7 IS 1343 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
63 EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
63.1 EC2 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
63.2 EC2 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
63.3 Eurocode 1 Part 1-1 (UK National Annex) Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
63.4 EC2 Material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
63.5 EC2 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
63.6 EC2 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
64 CSA A23.3-04 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
64.1 CSA A23.3-04 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
64.2 CSA A23.3-04 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
64.3 CSA A23.3-04/NBC 2005 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
64.4 CSA A23.3-04 material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
64.5 CSA A23.3-04 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
64.6 CSA A23.3-04 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
65 Load History Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
65.1 About RAM Concepts load history deflection calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
65.2 The load history deflection calculation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
65.3 Load history calculations on the cross section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
65.4 Element stiffness adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
65.5 Why are load history deflection results different from Long Term Deflection results plotted for the strip? 645
65.6 Advice on drawing cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
65.7 A final word of caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
66 Punching Shear Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
66.1 Punching shear overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
66.2 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
66.3 Using Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
66.4 Column connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
66.5 ACI 318/CSA A23.3 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
66.6 AS 3600-2001 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
66.7 EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
66.8 Sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
66.9 Advice on the selection of punching check properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
66.10 Miscellaneous information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
66.11 Some final words of advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
xi RAM Concept
67 Vibration Analysis Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
67.1 Dynamic Characteristics of Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
67.2 Resonant Footfall Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
67.3 Impulsive Footfall Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
67.4 Evaluating Vibration Performance and Interpreting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
xii RAM Concept
1 RAM Concept
Chapter 1
1 Introduction
RAM Concept is an analysis and design program that uses
the finite element method for elevated concrete floor
systems, or mat foundations. The floors or mats can be
post-tensioned concrete (PT), reinforced concrete (RC), or
hybrid (a mixture of PT and RC). Concept is extremely
powerful and allows you to design an entire floor in one
model, or design individual strips or beams.
In this context, the term design means that:
The user defines the following: structural geometry,
loads, load combinations, and post-tensioning layout (if
applicable).
Concept calculates (for any number of load combina-
tions): the required amount of reinforcement for flexure
and one-way shear according to relevant code require-
ments; the stud shear reinforcement (SSR) for punching
shear, stresses for flexure, and deflections.
A model consists of anything from a single simply
supported beam or slab to an entire floor. All models are
three-dimensional (even those developed with Strip
Wizard).
Concept does not generally use strip methods other than to
replicate the intent of concrete code rules, and with the
Strip Wizard interface.
Note: The Equivalent Frame method is not used.
1.1 Comparing with traditional methods
Historically, the vast majority of concrete floors have been
analyzed by approximating a region of a slab as a frame (or
design strip), and then analyzing the frame/strip using
variations of conventional frame or moment distribution
analysis techniques. There are two limitations to this
approach. First, in irregular structures, the approximation
of the real structure into a frame model could be grossly
inaccurate and designing with the analysis results might not
even satisfy equilibrium requirements in the real structure.
The second limitation is that even in regular structures with
regular loadings, the frame analysis approximates the
slab/column interaction and provides no information
regarding the distribution of forces across the design strip.
RAM Concept enables you to design post-tensioned and
reinforced concrete slabs by using a finite element model
of the entire slab. Concept can predict the elastic behavior
of a slab much more accurately than frame models. In
addition, the finite element method guarantees that the
analysis satisfies all equilibrium requirements, regardless
of a structures irregularities.
1.2 RAM Concept options
RAM Concept is available in the core configuration which
is suitable for the analysis and design of reinforced
concrete mat foundations (rafts) of any size and shape as
well as reinforced concrete floor systems of any size and
shape.
Increase RAM Concepts analysis and design capabilities
by adding the Post-tension option:
RAM Concept PT option (post-tensioned option)
Analysis and design of post-tensioned floors or mats in
conjunction with reinforced concrete.
1.3 Strip Wizard
Strip Wizard uses text input to generate a model. This
allows the designer to perform quick preliminary design in
2-D, or final design of straightforward structures.
Strips generated by Strip Wizard are three-dimensional, but
boundary conditions are automatically introduced which
effectively model 2-D behavior. All models use the finite
element method.
You can use Strip Wizard to design a beam or one-way slab
without many mouse clicks. It can provide an initial design
of tendons and profiles, negating the need for the designer
to start with a guess.
1.4 Structural systems
You can use RAM Concept for models that contain any
combination of the following:
one-way slab systems
two-way slab systems
beams
girders
wide shallow beams (that behave similarly to slabs)
ribs (joists)
waffles (two-way rib systems)
mats (rafts)
openings
There may be steps and changes in thickness and elevations
for all of these items.
2
Chapter 1
RAM Concept
Concept is not effective, or you cannot use it directly, for
the following:
deep beams using the strut and tie method
I-shaped sections
ramps
concrete sections with internal voids or cells
In most cases, you could model ramps with a large number
of steps. The authors do not recommend that you do this for
evaluating post-tensioning behavior, as it is not particularly
relevant.
1.5 Learning RAM Concept
The RAM Concept design process could be considered to
comprise 5 stages:
Defining the concrete form (**)
Drawing loads (*)
Defining design strips (*****)
Defining tendons (if used) (***)
Interpreting results (****)
The (**) rating is meant to indicate relative degree of
difficulty, or relative time you would expect to spend on the
stage.
You should not use Concept for final design without a
sufficient grounding in concrete design, or adequate
understanding of the program.
The manual contains a large amount of information.Ideally,
you should read it all, but this may not be practical. We
recommend that you do the tutorials and read critical
chapters.
1.5.1 Tutorials
We recommend that you start by doing the tutorials:
Chapter 41, Simple RC Slab Tutorial.
One of the following PT Tutorial Chapters: 42, 43, 44,45
46, or 46.
Note: Even if you do not have access to the PT version, it
is advisable to do one of these tutorials as a thicker RC slab.
For Mat (Raft Users): Chapter 48, Mat Foundation
Tutorial.
The tutorials introduce you to the philosophy of the
program. They quickly give you experience in some basic
modeling and many of the tools. The descriptions are not
exhaustive, and you should reference the actual tool
description in the appropriate chapter for further
information. This should prove useful for real projects.
It is recommended that you redo the tutorials. The
completed tutorial files are available from the program
directory, so you dont have to start from scratch. For
example, you could open the ACI 318-02 PT Tutorial,
delete the design strips, and then start with the design strips
input.
1.5.2 Critical Chapters
We consider that you should at least read the following
chapters, together with the tips in this chapter before
starting your first design.
Chapter 1, Introduction.
Chapter 2, Looking at the Workspace.
Chapter 3, Understanding Layers.
Chapter 4, Using Plans and Perspectives
Chapter 5, Drawing and Editing Objects
Note: Chapter 5 describes snapping. Nearly all meshing
problems are due to the users failure to use snapping
properly.
Chapter 17, Defining the Structure
Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips.
Chapter 38, General Tips
Chapter 39, Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 40, Errors and Warnings
Chapter 65, Load History Deflections.
The appropriate code chapter. See the section below:
Know your building code.
1.5.3 Know your building code
RAM Concept does not replace the code. It implements
some, but not all, of the code. Using the program does not
absolve you of knowing your building code.
You should review the appropriate code chapter:
Chapter 58, ACI 318-11 Design
Chapter 60, AS 3600-2009 Design
Chapter 61, BS 8110: 1997 Design
Chapter 62, IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
Chapter 63, EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) With
TR43 Design
Chapter 64, CSA A23.3-04 Design
3 RAM Concept
Chapter 1
These chapters discuss the following code specific issues:
default loadings
default load combinations
live load reduction
assumptions on material behavior
rule selection
rule implementation
In particular, you should review what rules are used and
how the authors interpret and implement the rules.
Rules not considered
Specifically, Concept does not consider the following:
ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05, ACI 318-08,
ACI 318-11: Rule 13.5.3
AS3600-2001/2009 Rules 9.1.2 (detailing bars for 25%
of the negative moment) and 9.1.3
BS8110: 1997 Rule 3.7.3.1
1.5.4 Upgrading Old Files
Recommendations for Old Files
We do not recommend that you upgrade old files that
contain models that have been fully designed or are nearing
final design.
We recommend that you upgrade files that contain partially
designed slabs.
1.6 Technical support
Bentley Systems want you to get the maximum benefit
from your purchase of RAM Concept. If you have any
questions that are not answered in this manual, please
contact us.
For customer support, please contact:
www.bentley.com/serviceticketmanager
4
Chapter 1
RAM Concept
5 RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2 Looking at the Workspace
This chapter provides a basic orientation to the RAM
Concept interface.
2.1 About the workspace
When you create a new file, RAM Concept generates
layers, plans and perspectives for you to begin design. As
you open windows in the workspace, RAM Concept
activates the relevant toolbars.
Workspace with a plan open:
Figure 2-1 A.Standard toolbar for general operations. B. Menu Bar con-
tains the set of menus for the program. Includes the File, Edit, Criteria,
Layers, Tools, Process, Report, View, Window, and Help menus. C. Action
Tools for manipulating the current view. D. Snap toolbar for setting coor-
dinate snaps for the active plan. E. General Tools for editing the active
plan window. F. Layer Specific Tools for editing the active plan window.
G. Report Contents Window for viewing, opening, and reordering report
sections. H. The active window. I. Status Bar for program status informa-
tion. J. Command Prompt for displaying tool relative instructions and the
current cursor location in plan coordinates.
2.2 Creating and opening files
When you start RAM Concept, you can create a new file or
open an existing file. You can also create a new file based
on a template.
2.2.1 Starting a new file
When creating a new file, you make basic decisions about
your model in the New File dialog, which appears when
you choose File > New. You specify the type of slab, code
and units to use. You can copy an existing Concept file or
template by clicking Copy File on the New File dialog.
To start a new file:
1 Start RAM Concept and choose File > New.
2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click
OK.
To start a new file from a template:
1 Start RAM Concept, and choose File > New.
2 Click Copy File in the New File dialog.
3 Select the file or template you want to copy.
2.2.2 Opening an existing file
Use File > Open to open an existing RAM Concept file.
For quick access, Concept keeps track of the last ten files
you opened and lists them at the bottom of the File menu.
To open a file:
1 Choose File > Open.
2 Select the RAM Concept file you want to open.
Note: See Upgrading Old Files on page 3 for discussion
on using files from an earlier version.
2.3 Saving a file
Save your files often. When you save, you ensure that the
file is stored on your computer even in the event of a power
failure or system crash.
To save and name a file for the first time:
1 Choose File > Save As (since the file has not yet been
saved, you could also choose File > Save).
2 Select the folder in which to save the file.
3 Type a name for your file and click Save. Concept adds
the filename extension .cpt if not provided.
To save any open file:
1 Choose File > Save (if you have not yet saved the file,
and the Save As dialog box appears, follow the previous
steps for saving for the first time).
To save a file as a template:
1 Choose File > Save Template.
2 Click Continue on the warning message box.
3 Type a name for the template and click Save. Concept
adds the filename extension .cpttmp (if not provided) and
saves the file without the objects.
6
Chapter 2
RAM Concept
2.3.1 Saving a copy of a file with a new name
or location
Use the Save As command to create a copy of a file and
change its name or location. The original file and the copy
are completely separate and any work you do on one file
does not affect the other.
2.3.2 Reverting to a backup copy
For version control, Concept creates a copy of your last
save every time you save your file to allow you to go back
to an older version if necessary. Concept creates the file
with the filename extension .cpt.bak1.
If you need to revert to an older version of a file, use the
backup copy created by Concept.
2.3.3 Restoring an auto-save file
As a safety net, Concept automatically saves a copy of your
working file in the same folder as the original and with the
filename extension .autosave. Concept updates the auto-
save file approximately every 2 minutes if you have made
changes to your original file. Once you save your file,
Concept deletes the auto-save file since your saved version
is up to date. We recommend that you save often to prevent
loss of work.
If a computer malfunction or loss of power occurs while
you are using Concept, when you restart Concept it detects
the last auto-save file and open it automatically. If you open
a second copy of Concept while one is running, the second
copy may detect the auto-save file of the first and open it.
In this case, just close the auto-save file and continue.
2.4 About templates
A template file contains everything a normal file includes
(such as specification settings, plans, etc.) but has no
objects. You can create a template from any RAM Concept
file by choosing File > Save Template. Concept saves a
copy of your file without any objects and with the .cpttmp
filename extension. For details on how to save a template,
see To save a file as a template: on page 5. Copy an
existing template file by choosing File > New and clicking
Copy File to create a new file based on the template. For
more information on starting a new file from a template,
see Starting a new file on page 5.
2.5 Expanding tool buttons
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower
right corner ( ). This indicates that there are other similar
tools available for this button. Press down on the left mouse
button for one second over the tool button to reveal a pop-
up menu. Select a tool from the menu. The selected tool
becomes the new tool for that button.
Expanding tool button with pop-up:
Figure 2-2 Pressing down on the left mouse button for one second over the
Selection tool reveals a pop-up menu.
2.6 Rearranging toolbars
You can move the toolbars in RAM Concept to suit your
particular work habits. To move a tool bar, click on the
handle of the toolbar and drag the toolbar to its new
location. The toolbar handle is two lines on the right edge
of horizontal toolbars or at the top edge of vertical toolbars.
The toolbars snap to the edges of the application window or
can remain floating in the workspace.
2.7 Using the right mouse button
RAM Concept provides some of the commands available
from the menus or toolbars in a special context-sensitive
pop-up menu that appears when you click the right mouse
button. The contents of the menu vary depending on where
you click, what window is active, and whether there is a
current selection.
7 RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2.8 Undoing changes
RAM Concept provides multiple levels of undo to correct
mistakes or reverse actions you have taken. Concept limits
the amount of memory used to record undo information.
Concept is therefore able to undo more small operations
(deleting 10 objects) than large operations (deleting 1000
objects). Choose Edit > Undo to reverse the last action
taken. To redo a command that has been undone, choose
Edit > Redo.
Note: The Undo command cannot reverse the Generate
Mesh and Calc All commands. All changes you have made
are committed once you perform one of these operations.
8
Chapter 2
RAM Concept
9 RAM Concept
Chapter 3
3 Understanding Layers
In RAM Concept, objects (such as walls, columns, slab
areas, springs, loads, tendons, design strips, etc.) make up
the structural model. Since there are so many objects
involved in modeling a structure, Concept uses layers to
organize these objects.
A layer is a collection of related objects and each object in
Concept resides on one and only one layer. You can handle
all of the objects on a single layer as a group or
individually.
3.1 Modeling with objects
Since objects make up the structural model, they are more
than a combination of points and lines. Each object is an
individual entity with properties. Column object properties,
for example, include concrete mix, height, width, depth,
and more.
You draw some objects on plans, and RAM Concept
creates some objects automatically when you generate the
finite element mesh or run an analysis calculation. If you
have wall, column, and slab area objects on the Mesh Input
layer, Concept creates corresponding wall element, column
element, and slab element objects on the Element layer
when you generate the finite element mesh.
If you want to create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans
on that layer. When you draw columns on the Standard
Plan of the Mesh Input layer, you are creating objects on
the Mesh Input layer. These objects belong to the layer and
not the plan. They are editable by any plan on the Mesh
Input layer, but not by plans on any other layer. Each object
is an individual entity so you can manipulate it both
separately and together with other objects on the same
layer.
3.2 Managing layers
RAM Concept performs most of the layer management
automatically. Almost all of the layers you need to design a
structure are already in place when you start a new file.
Concept adds appropriate layers when you create new
Loadings, Load Combinations, and Rule Set Designs.
Note: You can create and edit a separate group of Line
Objects, Dimension Objects, and Text Note Objects on every
layer.
Drawing Import Layer
This layer contains all the imported CAD drawing
information. Concept automatically stores any imported
drawings on this layer.
Mesh Input Layer
This layer contains the objects that define the geometry of
the structure. Concept uses these objects to generate
corresponding finite element objects on the Element Layer.
Layer-Specific Objects: Column, Wall, Slab Area, Slab
Opening, Beam, Point Support, Line Support, Point Spring,
Line Spring, Area Spring.
Element Layer
This layer contains the finite element objects. These objects
can be generated by Concept based on the information on
the Mesh Input Layer, or can be created by hand.
Layer-Specific Objects: Column Element, Wall Element,
Slab Element, Point Support, Line Support, Point Spring,
Line Spring, Area Spring.
Loading Layers (Self-dead, Balance, Hyperstatic, Temporary
Construction (at Stressing), Other Dead, Live (Reducible), Live
(Unreducible), Live (Storage), Live (Roof) and User-defined)
These layers contain all the information that defines the
loads on the structure. In Concept, a loading is a set of
loads applied as a group, such as the live loads. The loading
layers also contain the loading analysis results.
Concept provides the self-dead, balance, and hyperstatic
loading layers by default and you cannot delete them.
You can define an unlimited number of loadings and
Concept creates a corresponding layer for each.
Layer-Specific Objects: Point Loads, Line Loads, Area
Loads.
Note: You cannot edit the load objects on the Self-Dead
Loading Layer, Balance Loading Layer, and Hyperstatic
Loading Layer.
Pattern Layer
This layer contains the load patterns for the structure.
Layer-Specific Objects: Load Patterns.
Design Strip Layer
This layer contains the design strips, design sections and
punching checks for the structure.
Layer-Specific Objects: Span Segments, Span Boundaries,
Strip Boundaries, Design Sections, Punching Checks.
10
Chapter 3
RAM Concept
Tendon Parameters Layers (Latitude and Longitude)
These layers contain high level post-tensioning objects.
Although there are two tendon layers, Latitude and
Longitude, there is no requirement to use both layers. You
can draw tendon parameters on the tendon parameters
layers in whatever manner you wish.
Layer-Specific Objects: Banded Tendon Polyline,
Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral, Tendon Void, Profile
Polyline.
Manual Tendon Layers (Latitude and Longitude)
These layers contain the layout of post-tensioning tendons
and jacks for the structure. Although there are two tendon
layers, Latitude and Longitude, there is no requirement to
use both layers. You can draw tendons on the tendon layers
in whatever manner you wish.
Layer-Specific Objects: Tendon, Jack.
Load Combination Layers (All Dead, Dead and Balance, Initial
Service, Service, Sustained Service, Factored and User-
defined)
These layers contain the load combination analysis results.
Note: The load combinations listed are for ACI318. Other
codes use some different terminology.
Rule Set Design Layers (Code Minimum, User Minimum, Initial
Service, Service, Sustained Service, Strength, Ductility)
These layers contain the rule set design analysis and design
results.
Note: The rule set designs listed are for ACI318, other
codesuse some different terminology.
Load History Deflection Layers
These layers contain the results of the load history
analyses.
Additional Mass Loading Layer
This layer contains loads that are converted to mass for the
vibration analysis.
Layer-Specific Objects: Point Loads, Line Loads, Area
Loads.
Vibration Analysis Layer
This layer contains vibration related analysis results.
Layer-Specific Objects: Excitation Areas.
Design Status Layer
This layer contains the summary of all the design results.
The summary information is automatically created by
Concept when you Calc All. You cannot create, edit, or
delete the objects on this layer but you can view them.
3.2.1 Determining which plans contain
objects
Some layer icons next to a layer name in the contents
window have a dot on the top sheet. This indicates that
there is at least one object resident on that layer. In other
words, the dot means there exists at least one object that
belongs to that layer.This is different to any visible objects
on one of the layers plans, which may or may not belong
to that layer.
Note: There may be a lag time (such as 10 seconds) for this
to happen after the first item on the layer is drawn.
Note: This feature is added in response to the frustration
of having to search every layer in support files to see if they
contained any items.
Note: Dots do not typically appear on Load Combination
layers as these layers have no items drawn on them. This
does NOT mean the load combo is not used in the design.
Figure 3-1 Layer icons indicating that there are objects on the following
layers: Mesh Input, Element, Design Strip, Reinforcement
11 RAM Concept
Chapter 4
4 Using Plans and Perspectives
Plan windows are used to create, view, and edit objects in
two dimensions while perspective windows provide a three
dimensional view of those objects.
4.1 Using plans
A plan is a view of the geometric model and results. You
can view any object on any plan. You can only create and
edit an object on a plan belonging to the objects layer. For
example, an other dead load can only be edited on a plan
belonging to the Other Dead Loading layer.
Objects are drawn and edited with tools located in Layer-
Specific toolbars, and the Tools menu. The available tools
are dependent on which plan is the active window in the
workspace. Once you draw an object on a plan, the object
belongs to that plans layer.
Note: For information on drawing and editing objects, see
the following chapter.
4.2 Creating new plans
Create new plans when you need additional ones to those
provided by default.
To create a new plan:
1 Choose Layers > New Plan.
2 Enter a name for the plan. (Concept automatically
prepends the layer name and appends the word Plan).
3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
4.3 Viewing perspectives
Perspectives provide a three dimensional view of the
model. You can view the model from any angle by rotating
the perspective about the x-, y-, and z-axes. The model can
be viewed in parallel projection or perspective projection
and can be modeled as a solid or wire structure.
4.3.1 Setting the projection
You can render the model in either parallel or perspective
projection. In parallel projection, lines that are parallel in
the original model are also drawn parallel in the three
dimensional image. In perspective projection, near objects
appear larger than far objects of the same size. The Parallel
Projection ( ) and Perspective Projection ( ) toggles
control which way the image is rendered. One, and only
one, of these toggles is always set.
4.3.2 Selecting the modeling
The Wire Frame Modeling ( ) and Solid Modeling ( )
toggles control how the image is rendered. The wire frame
is made of only the edges of the visible objects whereas the
solid model shows the visible objects surfaces. The solid
model is more realistic, however the wire frame image is
often useful since it allows you to see through the model.
One, and only one, of these toggles is always set.
4.3.3 Rotating the model
Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) and the
Rotate about z-axis tool ( ) to rotate the model about the
screens x-, y-, and z-axes.
To rotate the model:
1 Select the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) or the
Rotate about z-axis tool ( ).
2 Click once on the perspective window to begin and move
the cursor until you position the model as desired.
3 Click on the perspective again to set the view.
4.4 Creating new perspectives
Create new perspectives when you need additional ones to
those provided by default.
To create a new perspective:
1 Choose Layers > New Perspective.
2 Enter a name for the perspective. (RAM Concept
automatically prepends the layer name and appends the
word Perspective).
3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
4.5 Controlling views
You can manipulate the plan and perspective windows to
show the desired view or information. Zooming and
12
Chapter 4
RAM Concept
panning allow you to change what portion of the model you
are viewing. RAM Concept usually regenerates the view
automatically. It is sometimes necessary, however, to use
the Redraw command ( ) to update the image on the
screen.
Plans and perspectives represent unique views of the
model. You control which object types are visible and their
colors, font, and line type for each plan and perspective.
4.5.1 Zooming to magnify or diminish
Use zooming to magnify or diminish the plan or
perspective view. If you have a mouse with a wheel button,
roll the wheel to zoom in and out at the cursor location.
Zoom In ( ) and Zoom Rectangle ( ) magnify the
view. Zoom Out ( ) diminishes the view. You can set the
view to encompass the entire model by using Zoom Extent
( ).
To magnify or diminish the view with the mouse wheel button:
1 Place the cursor on a location over the active plan or
perspective window. This is the zoom center point.
2 Roll the mouse wheel button away from you to zoom in,
and toward you to zoom out.
To magnify a specific area in the view:
1 Select the Zoom Rectangle tool ( ).
2 Fence the area you want to magnify.
4.5.2 Panning to reposition
Panning allows you to reposition the view in the plan or
perspective window. If you have a mouse with a wheel
button, press down on the wheel over the view and pan.
You can use the Pan tool ( ) to move the view as well. In
addition, plans have scroll bars along the bottom and right
side of the window that you can use to reposition the view.
To reposition the view with the mouse wheel button:
1 Press down on the mouse wheel button over the active
plan or perspective window.
2 Pan the view into position and release the wheel button.
To reposition the view with a tool:
1 Select the Pan tool ( ).
2 Click once on the plan to begin panning, click again when
the view is in the desired position.
4.5.3 View History
The View Previous ( ) and View Next ( ) tools
implement a history of your views.
The view history operates much like the forward and
backward buttons in a web browser. Each zoom or pan
action is added to the view history. The View Previous
( ) button steps back through previous views and the
View Next button ( ) steps forward through the views.
The buttons are disabled if there are no views in that
direction. If you step back to a previous view and perform
a zoom or pan action, the new view will replace the entire
next view history.
The View History is implemented for plans and
perspectives. Each plan or perspectives view history is
maintained separately. Switching from one plan or
perspective to another does not affect the view history for
either plan.
All zoom, extent, pan, and rotation view changes are
recorded in the view history. Some consecutive view
changes of the same type are compressed into one view
history item to prevent the history from getting cluttered
with many similar views. For example, consecutive Zoom
In actions -- whether by the Zoom In tool or by mouse
wheel movements -- add only one new view to the history.
4.5.4 Regenerating
Regenerating the view is necessary when anything occurs
that invalidates the current view. When you generate the
mesh, analyze the model or change the settings, the open
windows may need updating. In most cases, RAM Concept
automatically regenerates for you. If you find that the view
is not up to date, click Redraw ( ) to regenerate the view
in the active window.
4.5.5 Setting the visible objects
Use the Visible Objects dialog box to set which objects
types are visible on a plan or perspective. Plans and
13 RAM Concept
Chapter 4
perspectives can show objects from any layer, but you can
only edit objects on a plan from the objects layer.
Figure 4-1 Visible Objects dialog box (Mesh Input tab)
To show or hide objects on a plan or perspective:
1 Make the plan or perspective the active window.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
3 Click on the tab for the objects layer.
The plan or perspectives layer is the one initially selected.
4 Check boxes to show objects and uncheck to hide
objects, then click OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
4.5.6 Changing colors, font, and line type
Each plan and perspective has an associated appearance
scheme that dictates the colors, font, and line type used for
the objects shown. When a plan or perspective is the active
window, you can select and modify its appearance scheme
using the Appearance dialog. If you change the settings of
an appearance scheme, it affects all the plans and
perspectives that use that scheme. You can create as many
appearance schemes as you need to customize the look of
your plans and perspectives. When you create a new plan
or perspective, the window initially uses the default
scheme.
Figure 4-2 Appearance dialog
To set the appearance scheme for a plan or perspective:
2 Choose View > Appearance ( ).
3 Select the scheme from the list of schemes on the left side
of the Appearance dialog and click OK.
includes the Appearance command.
To create a new appearance scheme:
2 Click New below the list of schemes in the Appearance
dialog.
3 Type a name for the new scheme and select the base
scheme. The settings from the base scheme initialize the
new scheme.
To delete an appearance scheme:
2 Select the scheme you want to delete from the list of
schemes in the Appearance dialog.
3 Click Delete below the list of schemes to delete the
highlighted scheme.
To set a new default scheme:
2 Select the scheme you want to make the new default
scheme from the list of schemes in the Appearance dialog.
3 Click Set As Default below the list of schemes to make
the highlighted scheme the new default scheme. RAM
Concept uses this scheme to initialize newly created plans
and perspectives.
14
Chapter 4
RAM Concept
You can select the color of every drawn object type for
each appearance scheme. You can also set the background,
grid and highlight colors. If an object type has no color
selected ( ), RAM Concept uses the color setting for the
objects layer. For example, you can set the Tendon object
color to no selection, and then set the Latitude Tendon layer
to red and Longitude Tendon layer color to blue. RAM
Concept uses the foreground color in the case that you have
selected neither the object type color nor the layer default
color.
To change the colors in an appearance scheme:
2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is
the active window, the selection is already the scheme set
for that window).
3 Select the item from the drop-down list (if changing
plotting colors skip this step).
4 Click on the color selection box for the item and choose
a color.
Lines of drawn objects can be set to solid, dashed, or
dotted. Reference lines have Line Type and Line Width
properties that are independent of the appearance scheme
setting.
The transparency of all Strip Plots in both 2-D and 3-D are
controlled via the Transp. % control in the Appearance
Settings dialog. This setting is used to modify the
transparency already set in the default strip plot colors
defined.
4.5.7 Changing font size
You can change the font size in two ways. In the
appearance schemes, you can select the font size for all text
other then text notes. With the font buttons, you can
temporarily change the font size.
To temporarily change the font size:
1 Click Enlarge Fonts ( ) or Shrink Fonts ( ).
Note: The temporary font size change only affects the
active window and RAM Concept discards the change when
the window is closed.
4.5.8 Changing font scale
You can select the font scale so that the font size either
changes or stays unchanged as you zoom in and out on a
plan.
To set the font scale:
2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is
the active window, the selection is already the scheme set
for that window).
3 Enter the font scale and click OK.
Note: A font scale of zero causes the font to stay a constant
size regardless of the plan scale. A non-zero value scales the
font to be the same relative size as you zoom in and out.
4.6 Setting up the grid
A grid can be set up to help you draw objects accurately by
providing snap points at a designated spacing. The Plan
Grid Setup dialog allows you to make the grid visible and
to change the spacing, origin, and rotation angle of the grid.
You can change the grid setting for the active plan window
or all plan windows at once.
Figure 4-3 Plan grid dialog box
To make the grid visible for a plan:
1 Make the plan the active window.
2 Choose View > Grid.
3 Check Show Grid and click OK.
Note: If you want the grid to be visible on all plans then
check Set for all Plans.
includes the Grid.
To change the grid settings for a plan:
1 Make the plan the active window.
2 Choose View > Grid.
3 Enter values in the Plan Grid Setup dialog box and click
OK.
Note: If you want the grid settings to apply to all plan
windows then check Set for all Plans.
15 RAM Concept
Chapter 4
16
Chapter 4
RAM Concept
17 RAM Concept
Chapter 5
5 Drawing and Editing Objects
Drawing objects is the cornerstone of using RAM Concept.
There are many tools available to make this as
straightforward as possible.
To create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans on that
layer. You draw and edit objects on plans using the tools
from the Layer-Specific toolbar.
5.1 Precision drawing with snaps
RAM Concept provides drawing tools and settings to help
you work precisely. Snap tools allow you to snap the cursor
to precise points on objects or locations on the screen.
Using snaps is a quick way to specify an exact location on
an object without drawing construction lines or knowing
the exact coordinate. Whenever you move your cursor over
an object, RAM Concept identifies snap points based on
what snaps are active. To turn on a snap, click on its button.
Click on the button again to turn off the snap.
Snap to Intersection ( ) snaps to the intersection of
any two lines including polygon vertices.
Snap to Point ( ) snaps to any defined point such as
the center of a column, end point of a line, or vertex of a
polygon.
Snap to End Point ( ) snaps to the end points of lines
(including vertices of polygons).
Snap to Mid Point ( ) snaps to the mid points of lines.
Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) snaps to the point
on a drawn object nearest to the cursor.
Snap Orthogonal ( ) snaps orthogonally in the
direction of the grids local x- or y-axis. This need not be
parallel with the global x- and y-axes.
Snap to Perpendicular ( ) snaps perpendicularly
from the last click to a line.
Snap to Center ( ) snaps the center of polygons and
columns.
Snap to Grid ( ) snaps to the grid.
Snap Extension ( ) does not create a snapping mode
by itself, but it affects the behavior of some of the other
snap settings.
In general, the snap extension setting causes the other snap
calculations to behave as if the line segments displayed
extended to be infinitely long lines. The specific changes to
the other snap settings are:
Intersection: intersections between infinite lines
(defined by visible line segments) are snappable points.
Point: no effect.
End Point: no effect.
Mid Point: no effect.
Nearest: nearby infinite lines (defined by visible line
segments) are snappable.
Orthogonal: no effect.
Perpendicular: perpendicular point on infinite lines
(defined by visible line segments) are snappable.
Center: no effect.
Grid: no effect.
5.2 Drawing objects
To draw objects on a plan, first select a drawing tool by
clicking on it or choosing it from the Tools menu. The
selected tool will be the active drawing tool for the plan
until you select a new tool. Follow the command prompts
for points to enter (see Figure 2-1 on page 5). For example,
with a Mesh Input layer plan open, and the Column tool
selected, the command prompt will read Enter column
center point:.
If you are drawing with a tool and wish to cancel what you
have drawn, click the right mouse button, or press the Esc
key.
If you need to reposition or magnify the view while you are
drawing and do not want to cancel the work you are doing,
use the mouse wheel button to pan or zoom. See
Controlling views on page 11 for more information on
how to use the mouse wheel button.
5.3 Entering coordinate points
Each point on a plan is a location represented by
coordinates. Many tools require you to locate one or more
points on a plan. With a tool selected, you can enter points
by clicking at a location on the plan, entering the
coordinates in the command line, entering the relative
coordinates in the command line, or by using snaps.
18
Chapter 5
RAM Concept
To enter coordinates:
1 With the appropriate tool selected, type the x- and y-
coordinates separated by a comma (e.g. 10, 5).
5.4 Using relative coordinates
Relative coordinates locate a point on a plan by referencing
it to the last point entered. They can be very useful for
moving and copying objects a set distance.
To enter relative coordinates:
1 With the appropriate tool selected, type the letter r
followed by the x- and y-coordinates separated by a comma
(e.g. r10, 5).
5.5 Selecting objects
Before you can edit objects on a plan, you must select
them. Use the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( )
to select objects on a plan. You select visible objects by
fencing the area in which they are located. For example, if
you have a slab opening (on the Mesh Input layer) in the
middle of a slab, fencing the opening selects both the
opening and the slab area because the rectangle crosses the
slab area and surrounds the opening. If you want to select
just the opening, double click on it. You can select any
single object by double clicking on it. To add objects to the
current selection, hold the Shift key down as you select.
To select an object or group of objects:
1 Choose the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ).
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle. This selects
objects within and crossing the rectangular selection area.
(Hold down the Shift key on the first click to add objects to
the current selection.)
To select only a single object:
2 Double click on the object you wish to select (Hold down
the Shift key as you click to add the object to the current
selection). When you are selecting, RAM Concept inter-
prets a very small rectangle as a double click.
5.6 Deselecting objects
You can deselect objects from the current selection by
holding the Shift key while you select objects to remove
from the selection.
To deselect an object or group of objects from a selection:
2 Hold down the Shift key as you fence the objects in the
selection you want to deselect. This deselects the selected
objects within and crossing the rectangular area, and selects
any objects in the rectangular area not previously selected.
To deselect only a single object from a selection:
2 Hold down the Shift key as you double click on the object
in the selection you wish to deselect. When you are
deselecting, RAM Concept interprets a very small rectangle
as a double click.
5.7 Filtering selected objects
You can deselect objects from the current selection set by
choosing the Selection Filter tool ( ). This tool will
invoke a dialog that lists all of the currently selected
objects grouped by object type. All of the objects of a
particular type can be removed from the selection set by
unselecting the objects in the list.
5.8 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects
To cut or copy objects, first select the objects then choose
the appropriate command from the Edit menu. RAM
Concept places objects that you cut or copy on the
Windows clipboard. The coordinate locations of objects
pasted from the clipboard are the same as the coordinate
location from where you copied or cut them. RAM Concept
makes the pasted objects the current selection, so you can
reposition them after you paste.
To cut objects:
1 Select the object or group of objects you want to cut.
2 Choose Edit > Cut (or right-click and choose Cut from
the popup menu that appears).
To copy objects:
1 Select the object or group of objects you want to copy.
2 Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy
from the popup menu that appears).
To paste objects from the clipboard:
1 Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from
You can also copy and move, rotate, stretch or mirror an
object in one step by pressing the Shift key while you use
19 RAM Concept
Chapter 5
the Move tool ( ), Stretch tool ( ), Rotate tool ( )
or Mirror tool ( ). See Moving, rotating, stretching, and
mirroring objects on page 19 for more information.
5.9 Copying and pasting objects by layer
The "layer" clipboard mode simplifies the process of
copying data from multiple layers of one Concept file to
another Concept file. Clipboard data is built up from
multiple objects on different layers. Each object added to
the clipboard data is tagged with its source layer. When the
layer clipboard data is pasted into a plan, only data that
originated from the same layer as the destination plan will
be pasted into the plan.
To append objects to the layer clipboard:
1 Select the object or group of objects you want to copy.
2 Choose Edit > Append (or right-click and choose Append
3 Repeat for each layer.
When objects are appended from a layer, they completely
replace the objects for that layer. Other layers are not
affected.
To paste objects from the layer clipboard:
2 Repeat for each layer.
When the clipboard contains layer data, the Paste menu
item is only enabled when the clipboard contains data for
the current plan's layer. The contents of the layer data
cannot be viewed directly, but the enabled Paste menu item
is an indication that the clipboard contains data from the
current layer.
The layer clipboard data is stored in the system clipboard
selection. This means that the layer clipboard data is
cleared any time another Copy operation is performed, by
Concept or by any other application on the system. The
selection is also lost if the system is shut down or restarted.
5.10 Editing polygon objects
Nodes can be add or removed from polygonal objects with
the Add Node ( ) and the Delete Node tools ( ).
To add a node to a polygonal object:
1 Select the object or group of objects to edit.
2 Select the Add Node tool ( ).
3 Click on any edge of a polygonal object.
Nodes must be added to an edge of a polygonal object. It is
possible to enter the new node coordinates, but it will be
ignored if the new location is not exactly on an edge. It is
better to add the node at an approximate location, then
stretch the node to the final position. The exact location
can be specfied as coordinates or by snapping with the
Stretch tool.
To delete a node from a polygonal object:
1 Select the object or group of objects to edit.
2 Select the Delete Node tool ( ).
3 Click on any node of a polygonal object.
A node cannot be deleted if it would create a misshapened
polygon (less than 3 points, or all points colinear).
Some polygonal objects may define a varying property, e.g.
the force constant of an Area Spring. The varying property
is defined by seed values of the first 3 nodes of the
polygon. Therefore, the first 3 nodes cannot be colinear
when the varying property is defined. Adding or deleting
nodes does not change the value of the varying property.
However, the start of the polygon may have to be shifted to
a new node, so that the first 3 nodes are not colinear. The
seed values will be adjusted accordingly for the new
locations.
5.11 Moving, rotating, stretching, and
mirroring objects
An object or group of objects must be selected before using
the Move tool ( ), Stretch tool ( ), Rotate tool ( )
or Mirror tool ( ) (See Selecting objects). If you hold
down the Shift key on the first click of a move, rotate, or
mirror, the operation will be performed on a copy of the
selection rather then the selection itself.
To move a selection:
1 Select the object or group of objects to move.
2 Choose the Move tool ( ).
3 Enter the point from which to move (hold down the Shift
key as you click to move a copy of the selection).
4 Click on the point to where you want the object, or group
of objects, to move.
To stretch the selection:
1 Select the object or group of objects to stretch.
2 Choose the Stretch tool ( ).
20
Chapter 5
RAM Concept
3 Snap to the point you want to stretch on the selection
(limited to highlighted control points).
of objects, to stretch.
To rotate a selection:
1 Select the object or group of objects to rotate.
2 Choose the Rotate tool ( ).
3 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key
as you click to rotate a copy of the selection).
4 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to
rotate.
5 Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an
end angle.
To mirror the selection:
1 Select the object or group of objects to mirror.
2 Choose the Mirror tool ( ).
3 Enter the two points that create the line across which you
would like to mirror the selected object(s). (Hold down the
Shift key as you click to mirror a copy of the selection.)
5.12 Using the Utility tool to move and
stretch
The Utility tool ( ) is a multi-purpose tool used for
selecting, moving, and stretching objects. See Selecting
objects on page 18 for information on how to select
objects with the Utility tool. Once you have selected an
object or group of objects, you can move or stretch a grip
point by snapping to it on the selection.
To move an object by one of its grips:
1 Choose the Utility tool ( ).
2 Select an object or group of objects.
3 Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the top half
of the snap area until you see the move cross cursor ( )
then click. (Hold down the Shift key as you click to move a
copy of the selection.)
of objects, to move.
To stretch an object by one of its grips:
1 Choose the Utility tool ( ).
2 Select an object or group of objects.
3 Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the bottom
half of the snap area until you see the stretch cursor ( )
then click.
of objects, to stretch.
5.13 Manipulating the model as a whole
The Move Model tool ( ), Mirror Model tool ( ), and
Rotate Model tool ( ) work just like the Move tool
( ), Mirror tool ( ), and Rotate tool ( ) except they
affect the whole model (all layers). You can also scale the
entire model with the Scale Model tool ( ).
To move the entire model:
1 Choose the Move Model tool ( ).
2 Enter the start point.
3 Enter the move point.
To rotate the entire model:
1 Choose the Rotate Model tool ( ).
2 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key
as you click to rotate a copy of the model).
3 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to
rotate.
4 Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an
end angle.
To mirror the entire model:
1 Choose the Mirror Model tool ( ).
2 Enter the two points that create the line across which you
would like to mirror the model (hold down the Shift key as
you click to mirror a copy of the model).
To scale the entire model:
1 Choose the Scale Model tool ( ).
2 Enter a scale center point.
3 In the Scale Model dialog box, enter the relative scale
factors and click OK.
5.14 Editing object properties
The properties of an object define its individual
characteristics. For example, the properties of a Line object
include the Line Type and Line Width. Some objects
properties can be edited together as a group. Specifically,
you can always modify objects of the same type together,
and you can often modify objects of different types but
with similar properties together. For example, you can edit
21 RAM Concept
Chapter 5
the Concrete Mix and Height properties of Column and
Wall objects together.
To change the properties of an object or group of objects:
1 Select the object or group of objects.
2 Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and
choose Selection Properties.
3 Specify the property values in the Properties dialog and
click OK.
5.15 Setting default properties
It is useful to set the default properties of object drawing
tools so that when you use the tool the drawn object has the
desired properties. This is valuable when many objects will
have the same properties.
To set the default properties for an object drawing tool:
1 Double click on the drawing tool or with the tool
selected, choose Tools > Current Tool Properties.
2 Specify default property values in the Properties dialog
and click OK.
When you now use the tool, it will draw objects with the
specified default properties.
Note: Changing the default properties of an object
drawing tool does not change the properties of such objects
already drawn.
5.16 Adding reference lines, dimensions,
and text notes
The Line tool ( ), Dimension tool ( ), and Text tool
( ) are all used to add information to plans. These
objects are not part of the structural model and RAM
Concept does not consider them when generating the mesh
or calculating results. As for all objects, the lines,
dimensions and text objects belong to the layer on which
they are drawn.
To draw a line:
1 Choose the Line tool ( ).
2 Click at the line start point (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
3 Click at the line end point (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
To draw a dimension line:
1 Choose the Dimension tool ( ).
2 Click at the start point.
3 Click at the end point.
4 Click at the offset point where the dimension line will be
located.
To draw text:
1 Choose the Text tool ( ).
2 Click at a point (or enter the coordinates in the command
line).
3 Right click and choose Selection Properties.
4 Enter the text and its properties.
22
Chapter 5
RAM Concept
23 RAM Concept
Chapter 6
6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables
A text table shows all the objects of a particular type on a
specific layer. Tables provide a customizable textual view
of each objects properties. You can access text tables from
the Tables folder of any layer.
To open a text table:
1 Go to the Tables folder of the object types layer.
2 Open the appropriate text table from the folder.
For example, the text table for Walls Below on the Mesh
Input layer can be opened by choosing Layers > Mesh
Input > Tables > Walls Below.
Figure 6-1 Mesh Input: Walls Below Table
6.1 Customizing tables
You can choose which columns and rows are visible in the
table, and the column widths. You can also sort the rows
based on a particular columns values in ascending or
descending order.
6.1.1 Choosing which rows and columns to
show
Customize the table columns and rows by clicking on the
Customize button above the table. In the Customize dialog
box, you can select which rows and columns are visible in
the table. Check the columns you want to see and uncheck
the columns you want hidden.
To make a table column visible or hidden:
1 Click on the Customize button above the table.
2 In the Customize dialog box, to make a column visible,
check the checkbox. To hide the column, uncheck the
checkbox.
3 Click OK.
6.1.2 Sizing table columns
You can resize columns by changing the width of the
column header.
To resize the width of the column:
1 Place your cursor on the line between two columns on the
table header and press down on the left mouse button.
2 Drag the table header to its new width and release the left
mouse button.
The table will print as seen on screen so the column widths
you set will appear the same way on paper.
6.1.3 Sorting table rows
To sort the table rows according to the values in a column,
click on the column header once for ascending order. Click
on the column header again to sort in the descending order.
24
Chapter 6
RAM Concept
25 RAM Concept
Chapter 7
7 Choosing Units
RAM Concept allows you to work with three unit systems:
US, SI and MKS.
Some designers refer to the US units system as US
customary units, and others call it Imperial. SI and
MKS are metric unit systems, with MKS using mass rather
than weight.
It is up to you which system you use but local practice
should dictate your choice.
The choice of actual units is more subjective. For example,
after choosing the US system, one designer might use the
default area load units of pounds per square feet, and
another might change the selection to kips per square feet.
7.1 About units
Internally, RAM Concept performs all calculations with the
SI unit system. It converts all property values into an
equivalent SI unit prior to calculation. Once complete, it
converts the values back into the selected units for
reporting.
It is possible to mix unit systems (e.g. pounds and meters)
but this is not advisable.
7.2 Selecting units
A new file has default units that you can change at any
time.
7.2.1 Selecting the default units
The default units depend on how you created the file. When
you use a template or an existing file, the default units are
those of the source.
When you create a file using the New command, you only
have a choice of default units for ACI 318 (US or SI). For
all other codes, the default units are SI.
7.2.2 Changing the units
You can change either the unit system or individual units.
To change the units:
1 Choose Criteria > Units.
2 Do one of the following:
Select each unit by accessing the appropriate drop
down box.
Select a unit system by clicking on US, SI, or
MKS at the top of the window.
Note: There is often a long list of choices for the units.
Scroll down the drop down menu to view the options.
Figure 7-1 Units Window
7.3 Specifying report as zero
RAM Concept allows you to filter out trivial results with
the Report as Zero option. For example, column reactions
have components for Fr, Fs, Fz, Mr and Ms. Some of these
values, such as Fr and Fs, may be very small and hence not
important. Filtering small values from plan plots can make
the results easier to read.
Note: Using this feature could result in human error, as
you might later assume zeroed values are exactly equal to
zero.
You specify Report as Zero in the Units window.
26
Chapter 7
RAM Concept
To specify Report as Zero:
1 Choose Criteria > Units.
2 Enter one or more Report as Zero values.
Note: You can also turn off plotted values such as Fr and
Fs with the plot menu. See Setting the plotted results on
page 165.
27 RAM Concept
Chapter 8
8 Choosing Sign Convention
RAM Concept allows you to choose the sign convention
for loads, analysis and reactions.
RAM Concept uses the Cartesian coordinate system with
the following sign convention for axes:
You cannot change the sign of the coordinates axes.
Sign convention dictates how you input parameters and
how RAM Concept displays results. For example, the sign
convention of an applied load dictates whether the input
value is positive or negative.
Note that changing a sign setting does not change the real
value of any previously specified data. For example if a
+10 kips downward load was specified when RAM
Concept had a downward-positive load sign convention
and then the load sign convention was changed to upward-
positive, the load value would now be reported as -10 kip,
but the load would still be a 10 kip downward load.
Similarly, a change in sign convention does not affect the
true value of results.
When you add loads after a change in sign convention, you
must observe the new sign convention.
8.1 Selecting sign convention
A new file has a default sign convention that you can
change at any time.
8.1.1 Default sign convention
The default sign convention depends on how you created
the file. If you use a template or an existing file then the
default sign convention is that of the source.
When you create a file (not from a template), the sign
convention is as follows:
Positive loads
Figure 8-1 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fz In the negative z-direction (see coordinate axes).
Mx (moment about the X-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
My (moment about the Y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Mz (moment about the Z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Positive analysis
Figure 8-2 Top row, left to right: Vertical Element Shear, Element Bending,
Element Axial, Vertical Deflection. Bottom row, left to right: Horizontal
Shear, Twist, Lateral Deflection, Angular Deflection.
Vertical element shear Positive z-shear on the positive
x- and y-faces.
Element bending Tension bottom face.
Element axial Tension.
Vertical deflection In negative z-direction (down).
Horizontal shear Positive y-shear on Positive x-face
(equivalent to Positive x-shear on Positive y-face).
Twist Positive x-axis moment on positive x-face
(equivalent to negative y-axis moment on positive y-face).
Lateral deflection Positive in x- and y-axes directions.
Angular deflection Per right-hand-rule about x- and y-
axes.
Positive reactions
Figure 8-3 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Coordinate Axis, Mx, My, Mz.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fz In the positive z-direction (see coordinate axes).
Mx (moment about the x-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
My (moment about the y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
28
Chapter 8
RAM Concept
Mz (moment about the z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Note: The only difference in defaults between Positive
Loads and Positive Reactions is Fz. This is because point
loads are usually down if positive, and vertical reactions are
usually up if positive.
8.1.2 Changing the sign convention
You can change the sign convention for any loads or
results, but only one at a time.
To change the sign convention:
1 Choose Criteria > Signs.
2 Change each positive sign by clicking the appropriate
graphic. The direction changes.
Figure 8-4 Signs Window
8.2 About plot sign convention
With the exception of vertical deflection, line plots show
positive results plotted above the axis line. This ensures
that plots do not appear upside down. For axis lines that are
parallel to the y-axis (and hence have no above the axis
line direction), line plots show positive results to the left
of the axis line.
Note: Line plots show positive vertical deflection below
the axis line.
Perspectives are plotted with positive results in the global
z-direction (what is considered positive is dependent upon
the sign convention of the Value Plotted). For example, a
perspective of deflection shows positive deflection up.
You cannot change the sign of the coordinates axes.
29 RAM Concept
Chapter 9
9 Specifying Material Properties
RAM Concept uses materials as part of the input and the
results. You specify concrete mixes and post-tensioning
systems as part of the input and Concept reports
reinforcement bar requirements as part of the results.
You can use the materials provided or create your own. For
example, you might want to redesign the floor with the
actual tested strength of the concrete poured on site. In this
case, you would create a new concrete mix defined with
that strength.
You can delete any of the materials that you find are
unnecessary.
9.1 Viewing the available materials
The Materials window shows the names and properties of
concrete mixes, PT systems and reinforcing bars.
To view the materials:
1 Choose Criteria > Materials.
Figure 9-1 The Materials window.
9.2 Material properties
The following is a list of Material properties:
9.2.1 Concrete Mix
Mix Name The label used to identify a concrete mix. The
mix name is not necessarily the concrete strength. Each
column, wall, slab and beam has a concrete mix property.
Density The concrete mass density used to calculate
various stiffness properties for Concrete.
Density for Loads The concrete mass density used to
calculate self weight.
f
ci
The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix
at the time of applying prestress (also known as initial
strength).
f
c
The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix.
Note: f
ci
and f
c
are used for all codes except BS8110.
f
cui
The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix at
the time of applying prestress (also known as initial
strength).
f
cu
The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix.
Note: f
cui
and f
cu
are only used for BS8110 and IS456.
Poissons Ratio The negative of the ratio of lateral
strains to axial strains for an axially loaded material. This is
usually 0.2 for concrete.
E
c
Calc The method used to calculate Youngs Modulus
(for both initial characteristic strength and characteristic
strength). This can be according to the active code rules or
a specified value.
User E
ci
The user defined Youngs Modulus used for
initial cross section analysis.
User E
c
The user defined Youngs Modulus used for
global analysis, service cross section analysis and strength
design.
9.2.2 PT Systems
System Name The label used to identify a PT system. It
usually describes the system, such as strand size and
bonding.
Type Whether the system has unbonded or bonded strand.
30
Chapter 9
RAM Concept
A
ps
The cross sectional area of one strand. Since strand is
usually comprised of seven wires then the area is more
complicated than d
2
/4.
E
ps
The Youngs Modulus of the strand at zero strain.
f
se
The assumed effective stress in the strand after all
losses. Using jacks overrides this assumption. See About
jacks on page 144 for further information.
f
py
The yield stress of the strand.
f
pu
The ultimate stress of the strand.
Duct Width The width or diameter of bonded tendon duct.
Max Strands Per Duct The maximum number of strands
in a bonded tendon (use 1 for unbonded tendons).
Minimum Radius The minimum vertical radius that
allows satisfactory placement of tendons in the field. You
should consult with a local PT supplier. A value of zero
disables radius checking for this PT system.
Jacking Stress / Anchor Friction / Wobble Friction
/ Angular Friction / Seating Distance / Long-Term
Losses
Friction loss calculations use these properties. They have
no effect unless tendon jacks are used. See Jack
properties on page 144 of Chapter 26, Defining Tendons
for further information.
9.2.3 Reinforcing Bars
Bar Name The label used to identify a reinforcing bar. It
usually refers to the bars diameter.
A
s
Cross sectional area of the bar.
E
s
The Youngs Modulus of the bar.
F
y
The yield stress of the bar.
Coating The coating type of the bar (epoxy coating)
Straight Ld/Db The development length of straight bars,
calculated either by Code or a user specified multiple of
bar diameter.
90 Hook Ld/Db The development length of 90 degree
hook bars, calculated either by Code or a user specified
multiple of bar diameter.
180 Hook Ld/Db The development length of straight
bars, calculated either by Code or a user specified
multiple of bar diameter.
9.2.4 SSR Systems
SSR System Name The label used to identify a SSR
(stud shear reinforcement) system. It usually describes the
system, such as stud size.
Stud Area Cross sectional area of the stud stem that is
used in strength calculations
Head Area The area of the stud head, generally about 10
times the stem area. Concept uses this to calculate the head
diameter for clear spacing calculations.
Min Head Spacing The minimum clear spacing between
stud heads along the length of a rail. The design will not
succeed if this value is too large.
Specified Stud Spacing The desired stud spacing for
the SSR design. If set to none, Concept automatically
designs the stud spacing.
F
y
The yield stress of the SSR reinforcement.
Stud Spacing Rounding Increment Specifies an
increment to which all stud designs are rounded down. For
example, specifying a larger number forces a larger number
of designs to have the same spacing, creating the potential
for grouping of designs at different columns.
Min Studs Per Rail Specifies the minimum number of
studs that Concept designs on any rail. This can be useful in
a number of situations. For example, if one face of a
column has a small overhang for which the designer does
not want SSR reinforcement, this minimum stud number
can be increased to prevent the design of rails on that face.
System Type The type of system to use in the SSR
design.
9.3 Adding and deleting materials
You can add materials to define properties of concrete
mixes, PT systems and reinforcing bars. You can delete
materials as long as at least one material of each type
remains.
To add materials:
2 Click Add Concrete Mix, or Add PT System, or Add
Reinforcing Bar, or Add SSR System.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new
material and click OK.
A new row appears at the bottom of the appropriate table.
4 Enter the property value for each cell in the new row.
31 RAM Concept
Chapter 9
To delete materials:
2 Click Delete Concrete Mix, Delete PT System, or Delete
Reinforcing Bar, or Delete SSR System.
A dialog box appears with a list of the available materials.
3 Choose the material to delete and click OK.
9.4 About post-tensioning systems
There are two types of systems considered in RAM
Concept.
Unbonded systems: greased strand encased in plastic
sheathing.
Bonded systems: bare strand within grouted ducts.
Strands are typically comprised of seven wires spirally
wound. There are two dominant strand sizes used in
building construction:
0.5 inch diameter (12.7 mm)
0.6 inch diameter (15.2 mm)
For further discussion on post-tensioning systems, see
Chapter 26, Defining Tendons.
32
Chapter 9
RAM Concept
33 RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10 Specifying Loadings
A loading is a set of point, line and area loads applied as a
group.
You define loading properties in the loadings window. You
draw the actual loads on the loading plans.
Loadings can be added (e.g. seismic, snow, soil and wind).
Loadings can be deleted (other than those of a special type,
as described in About loading types below).
RAM Concept can perform pattern (or skip) loading and
you define the factors that control this process in the
loading window.
10.1 About default loadings
RAM Concept provides default loadings for self-weight,
post-tensioning and gravity loads. For mat files, Concept
provides additional default loadings for wind and seismic.
Self-Dead Loading This is the self-weight of the
concrete. All other dead loading is superimposed.
Balance Loading Post-tensioning tendons and anchors
apply internal loads to the concrete structure. We call this
set of loads the Balance Loading because you normally
design the post-tensioning to balance or offset the other
loadings applied to the slab.
Hyperstatic Loading The hyperstatic loading is a
theoretical loading that considers the restraining effect of
the supports on the structure as it tries to deform due to the
application of post-tensioning. Many people use the term
secondary in place of hyperstatic. The loading is not
necessarily secondary in nature. Concept calculates the
effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects (elements,
springs, supports, design sections, design strip segments
and punching checks) as described in Post-tensioning
loadings on page 386.
Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading
This set of superimposed loads applies before stressing of
post-tensioning tendons. This loading is rarely used, and
you need not consider it for RC structures.
Other Dead Loading This set of superimposed dead
loads applies to PT structures after stressing of post-
tensioning tendons. It is simply the superimposed dead
loads for RC structures.
Live (Reducible) Loading
Live (Unreducible) Loading
Live (Storage) Loading
Live (Parking) Loading
Live (Roof) Loading
Different sets of live loads. See About loading types on
page 34 for further description.
Snow Loading The snow loads on the structure.
Service Wind North Loading The set of wind loads in
the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Service Wind East Loading The set of wind loads in
the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic North Loading The set of seismic
loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic East Loading The set of seismic
loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
10.2 Viewing the loadings
The Loading window lists the different loadings and their
type and pattern factors.
To view the Loadings:
1 Choose Criteria > Loadings.
2 If there are many loadings, scroll down to view them all.
Figure 10-1 Loadings Window
10.3 Loading properties
Loadings have the following properties:
Loading Name The label used to identify the loading.
Loading Type See About loading types on page 34 for
more information.
34
Chapter 10
RAM Concept
Analysis The type of analysis, which can be Normal,
Hyperstatic or Lateral SE.
A Hyperstatic analysis is used for only the Hyperstatic
Loading described in About default loadings on page 33.
For information on Lateral SE, see Self-equilibrium
analysis on page 387 of Chapter 50, Analysis Notes.
On-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that
are located within the loading pattern when performing
pattern-loading calculations. See About load pattern on
page 36 for more information.
Off-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that
are not located within the loading pattern when performing
pattern-loading calculations.
Note: Concept ignores the pattern factors if both factors
are the same value. Setting both factors to 2.0 is identical to
setting both factors to 1.0
10.4 About loading types
Every loading in RAM Concept has a loading type.
Concept uses loading type to generate the appropriate load
combinations from the defined set of loadings, and to apply
appropriate live load reductions.
See Rebuilding load combinations on page 39 for
information on how Concept generates load combinations.
10.5 Available loading types
The available loading types are:
Self-Weight The structures concrete self-weight loads
are always generated with this loading type. There is
always one and only one loading of this type.
Balance As described in About default loadings on
page 33. There is always one and only one loading of this
type.
Hyperstatic As described in About default loadings on
page 33. There is always one and only one loading of this
type.
Stressing Dead Loadings of this type contain
superimposed loads applied before stressing of post-
tensioning tendons.
This loading type is rarely used and is generally not
considered for other loading conditions. You need not
consider it for RC structures.
Dead Loadings of this type contain permanent dead loads
other than those from the self-weight type.
Live (Reducible) Loadings of this type contain typical
floor live loads that are reducible. See Chapter 52, Live
Load Reduction Notes for detailed information regarding
how each live load reduction code handles loadings of this
type.
Live (Unreducible) Loadings of this type contain typical
floor live loads that are not reducible (typically assembly
loadings - see About assembly loads on page 35).
Live (Storage) Loadings of this type contain typical floor
live loads that are reducible using special storage loading
reduction rules.
Live (Parking) Loadings of this type contain typical loads
for parking garages or car parks.
Live (Roof) Loadings of this type contain typical roof live
loads - except snow - that are reducible. RAM Concept
never reduces these loads (the RAM Structural System may
reduce these loads).
Snow Loadings of this type contain typical snow loads.
They generally do not consider drift or exceptional
circmstances, and they may be characteristic or design
loads. See the specific code chapters for further details.
Other Loadings of this type contain loads of an
unspecified nature. RAM Concept never considers these
loadings except in manually created or edited load
combinations (or load combinations created in previous
files). All loading from FLOOR versions 2.3 and before, and
RAM Concept versions 1.3 and before (except self-dead,
balance and hyperstatic) are given this type; it is often
useful to change the loading types of these loadings from
earlier program versions.
Service Wind Loadings of these types contain wind loads
at service force levels. Service Wind Loading N is assumed
to correspond to Ultimate Wind Loading N (if it exists).
Ultimate Wind Loadings of these types contain wind
loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Wind Loading N is
assumed to correspond to Service Wind Loading N (if it
exists).
Service Seismic Loadings of these types contain seismic
loads at service force levels. Service Seismic Loading N is
assumed to correspond to Ultimate Seismic Loading N (if it
exists).
Ultimate Seismic Loadings of these types contain
seismic loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Seismic
Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Seismic
Loading N (if it exists).
35 RAM Concept
Chapter 10
Most of these loading types are also available in a
transfer variation. See About Transfer Loading Types
on page 35 for more information.
Note: All loading types except self-weight, balance and
hyperstatic may be used for more than one loading.
10.5.1 About assembly loads
Assembly loadings deserve special consideration
Assembly loads It is recommended that, in order to get
the appropriate factors, you assembly loads on a Live
(Unreducible) layer.
Refer to the live load reduction section listed below for
detailed information regarding how a specific code handles
loadings of this type:
ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors on
page 431
ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors on
page 449
AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors on
page 527
BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors on page 558
IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction on
page 413
National Building Code of Canada 2005 Live Load
Reduction on page 413
10.5.2 About Transfer Loading Types
Almost all of the loading types previously discussed are
available with a transfer variation. The transfer variations
represent loads transferred from the structure above onto
the level under consideration (via columns or walls). A few
loading types are not available with a transfer variation, or
have a somewhat different meaning with a transfer
variation. These are:
Self-Weight There is no transfer variation of this loading
type.
Balance The transfer variation of this loading type is for
loads generated by the tendons in the structure above the
level under consideration. Unlike the non-transfer balance
type: multiple loadings of this type may exist; the loadings
do not contain loads generated from the tendons; and the
loadings of this type are user-editable. Loadings of this
type are considered in the calculation of hyperstatic effects.
Hyperstatic There is no transfer variation of this loading
type.
Stressing Dead There is no transfer variation of this
loading type.
10.6 Changing Loading Types
The type of any loading (except Self-Dead, Balance and
Hyperstatic) may be changed in the Loadings window.
To change a loading type:
2 Click the loading type of the loading name.
A drop down menu appears.
3 Select the new loading type.
10.7 Changing Analysis
The analysis of any loading (except Self-Dead, Balance
and Hyperstatic) may be changed in the Loadings window.
To change an analysis:
2 Click the analysis of the loading name.
A drop down menu appears.
3 Select the new analysis.
10.8 Adding and deleting loadings
At times, you may wish to add loadings such as seismic or
snow. Conversely, you may choose to delete loadings such
as Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading.
To add a loading:
2 Click Add Loading.
3 Enter a name for the new Loading in the Add Loading
dialog box and click OK.
The new loading appears in a row at the bottom of the
table.
4 Enter the Loading Type and Analysis for the new loading.
5 Enter the On-Pattern Factor and Off-Pattern Factor for
the new loading.
To delete a loading:
2 Click Delete Loading.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current loadings.
3 Choose the loading to delete and click OK.
36
Chapter 10
RAM Concept
10.9 About load pattern
In structural engineering, pattern loading refers to a load
arrangement that ignores or reduces loads on selected
spans for the purpose of maximizing moments, shears or
reactions. In 2D analysis, it is not difficult to create an
algorithm that determines the important patterns, but this is
extremely difficult for a 3D program, especially for
irregular column layouts and panels. To handle pattern
loading, RAM Concept uses the concept of load patterns.
Note: Some refer to pattern loading as skip loading.
10.9.1 How load patterns work
A load pattern creates a (invisible) pattern loading that
contains only filtered loads for each standard loading. The
On-Pattern and Off-Pattern factors control the filtering.
The inclusion and exclusion of loads within the pattern area
defines the pattern loading. Concept multiplies loads inside
the pattern area by the on-pattern factor and multiplies
loads outside the pattern area by the off-pattern factor. The
actual pattern area is dependent upon the finite element
mesh. See Chapter 21, Creating Pattern Loading, for
further explanation.
On-Pattern areas (shaded) for 6-panel slab:
Figure 10-2 Load Pattern for maximum positive moment (about Y-Y) in
end span
Figure 10-3 Load Pattern for maximum negative moment (about Y-Y) at
first interior column.
For the figures above, if the live load is 100 psf, the on-
pattern factor is 0.8 and the off-pattern factor is 0.1 then
two pattern loadings are created with a load of 80 psf on the
hatched areas and a load of 10 psf on the remainder of the
slab.
Concept uses the load patterns for a loading - along with
the full loading - to determine the design force envelopes
for design strip segments, design sections and punching
checks.
10.9.2 When to use load pattern
Whether you use pattern loading is a matter of which code
you are using and your engineering judgment. Some codes
allow you to ignore pattern loading for certain types of
structures and magnitudes of live loading. Common sense
should lead you to logical load patterns that produce very
close to the maximum moments, shears and reactions.
In most circumstances, you only pattern the live loading.
There could be circumstances where you pattern other
loadings.
For patterned loads, the on-pattern factor often has a value
of 0.75 and the off-pattern factor often has a value of zero.
For non-patterned loads, both factors should be 1.0. In
special circumstances, the on-pattern factor can exceed a
value of 1.0.
When in doubt, all on-pattern and off-pattern factors should
be 1.0. This results in no pattern loading.
See Chapter 21, Creating Pattern Loading, for further
discussion.
10.9.3 How load pattern can approximate
moving loads
You can approximate moving loads by using load patterns.
37 RAM Concept
Chapter 10
To approximate moving loads:
1 Specify an on-pattern factor of 10 and an off-pattern
factor of zero.
2 Specify load factors (in the load combinations window)
for the moving loading of one-tenth their actual values.
3 Define the movement using the load patterns.
4 Draw the load once in each pattern.
Note: Concept still analyses a load combination with all
the loads present that is included in the envelope. This is the
reason for scaling the on-pattern, off-pattern and load
factors - it diminishes the effect of the all the loads load
combination.
38
Chapter 10
RAM Concept
39 RAM Concept
Chapter 11
11 Specifying Load Combinations
A load combination is a factored linear combination of
loadings. Strictly speaking, we should call it loading
combination, but we have adopted the commonly used
terminology.
11.1 About default load combinations
Codes generally specify which loadings you need to
consider in the design of a structure and how you should
combine these loadings.
RAM Concepts default load combinations depend on how
you created the file. When you use a template or an existing
file then the default load combinations are those of the
source.
When you create a file using the New command the default
load combinations depend on the code selected. These load
combinations are usually appropriate for the selected code,
but there may be times when you need to modify the load
factors and add loadings.
The default load combinations for each code are described
in detail in the relevant chapter:
Chapter 61, BS 8110: 1997 Design
Chapter 62, IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
Chapter 63, EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) With
TR43 Design
Chapter 64, CSA A23.3-04 Design
11.2 Viewing the load combinations
The Load Combinations window lists the different load
combinations and their design criteria and load factors.
To view the Load Combinations:
1 Choose Criteria > Load Combinations.
2 If there are many load combinations, scroll down to view
them all.
Figure 11-1 Load Combination Window
11.3 Rebuilding load combinations
At times, you may wish to rebuild an existing load
combination that includes a new or revised loading. For
example, if a loadings type changes, it affects the load
factors and live load reduction process. You can account for
these changes by using the rebuild command.
RAM Concept will not automatically update load factors
when a loading's loading type changes. RAM Concept only
sets the load factors when rebuilding load combinations.
To rebuild load combinations:
1 Choose Criteria > Rebuild Load Combos
Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify if
the load combinations are for an elevated slab or mat
foundation.
2 Select elevated slab or mat foundation
3 Select Rebuild
40
Chapter 11
RAM Concept
11.4 Adding and deleting load
combinations
At times, you may wish to add load combinations such as
seismic plus dead or snow plus dead. Conversely, you
might choose to delete load combinations such as
Temporary Construction (At Stressing) LC.
To add a load combination:
2 Click Add Load Combination.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new
load combination and click OK.
Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify the
plans that you want RAM Concept to create (Slab Stress,
Slab Deflection and Slab Force). These plans appear in the
new load combinations folder.
4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
The new load combination appears at the bottom of the
window.
5 Select the active rule sets.
6 Enter the load factors and the alternative load factors for
each loading in the load combination.
To delete a loading:
2 Click Delete Load Combination.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current load
combinations.
3 Choose the load combination to delete and click OK.
11.5 Load combination properties
Load Combination Name The label used to identify the
load combination.
Combo Type The choices are:
Single: this is the standard type.
Lateral Group: this is used for a floor that is part of the
lateral force resisting system [especially mat foundations
(rafts)].
Note: The primary purpose of Load Combination types is
to reduce the number of lateral load combinations. A
secondary purpose is to provide easy enveloping for results
such as soil bearing pressure.
Analysis Type The choices are:
Linear: this is the standard type.
Zero-Tension: these load combinations do NOT have
alternate load factors and never consider pattern loading.
Active Rule Sets These control which rule sets are used
for design calculations. Up to six active rule sets can be
associated with each load combination. See Chapter 12,
Selecting Design Rules for further explanation.
Load Factor The factor applied to a particular loading in
the load combination.
Alternate Envelope Factor You should only use these
if you fully understand the principle involved. Do not set
these factors to zero without understanding their use. If you
are unsure then set them to equal the corresponding load
factors. See About alternate envelope factors on page 41.
11.6 About group load combinations
A group load combination has load factors for every non-
lateral loading and for one single lateral loading type.
Effectively, a group load combination's results are the
envelope of all the results from N invisible single load
combinations, where N is the number of loadings for the
given lateral loading type.
A linear group load combination has a standard and
alternate load factor for every non-lateral loading, and a
standard and alternate load factor for the selected lateral
loading type. It never has zero tension iterations.
A zero-tension group load combination has a single load
factor for every non-lateral loading, and a single load factor
for the selected lateral loading type. It has zero-tension
iterations as necessary for invisible (internal) component
load combo, and will be the envelope of all of the
component load combos combined. It never considers
pattern loading.
Figure 11-2 is intended to explain the ramifications of load
combination type selection.
41 RAM Concept
Chapter 11
Figure 11-2 Ramifications of Load Combination Type
Refer to Summary of load combination types on page 42
for more information.
11.7 About alternate envelope factors
There can be situations where the application of a loading
has an unconservative effect on the results.
For example
a retaining wall loading that applies compression to a
floor.
a cantilever live loading that reduces the internal span
moment.
In such circumstances, it is desirable to analyze
the structure both with and without the full loading. While
you could do this by creating an additional load
combination, RAM Concept provides a much simpler
solution - Alternate Envelope Factors (AEF).
Figure 11-3 This beam supports dead loads (not shown) and live loads
(shown). The live loading reduces the positive span moment. By using an
AEF less than the corresponding load factor, you create a load combina-
tion with a reduced live loading. Note that the AEF affects the entire live
loading, not just the live load on the cantilever.
Conceptually, Concept considers alternate envelope factors
by analyzing the load combination 2
L
times (where L is the
number of loadings) - once for every permutation of load
factors and alternate envelope factors for all of the
loadings. Concept then envelopes the design strip forces,
design section forces and punching shear reactions for all
of the load combination analyses. Concept uses these force
envelopes later for design purposes. You can also plot the
force envelopes or view them in tables.
Concept fully considers any pattern loading effects while
considering the load factors.
Note that the general analysis forces that are not used as
design forces by Concept - such as standard slab bending
moments and deflections - are only stored for the load
combination considering the standard load factors.
As stated above, you should only use alternate envelope
factors if you fully understand the principle involved. Do
not set them to zero without understanding their use. If you
are unsure then set them to equal the corresponding load
factors.
11.7.1 Example of Alternate Load Factors
Figure 11-4 shows the suggested way to use the factors for
a strength design of the ACI318-05 Factored LC.
Figure 11-4 Factored LC load factors and alternate envelope factors.
Load Combination TYPE
Single Lateral Group
- All loadings are listed
- Each loading has load factors
- Linear Load Combinations have
an Alternate Envelope Factor
- Zero-Tension Load Combinations
- All non-lateral loadings are listed
- One, and only one, key loading type
can be used (per load combination).
- All N loadings within the Key Loading
Type are used to generate N load
combinations.
do NOT have Alternate Envelope
Factors
Point Load
Area Load
42
Chapter 11
RAM Concept
11.8 Summary of load combination types
The effects of using different load combination types and
analysis types are summarized in Table 11-1.
Table 11-1 Load Combination Summary
Example 11-1 ACI 318-05 Elevated floor file with lateral
loadings added
To simplify the example, four loadings have been deleted
from the standard file.
Figure 11-5 Loading table for ACI 318-05 Elevated Floor - six wind load-
ings have been added (and one stressing dead and three live loadings have
been deleted)
After adding and deleting some loadings, the load
combinations have been rebuilt. See Rebuilding load
combinations on page 39.
The Rebuild operation adds the load combination
Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f
1
L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W, as shown
in Figure 11-6.
Figure 11-6 Rebuilt load combination: Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f
1
L+
0.5Lr + 1.6W
Concept now expands this load combination and calculates
the following load combinations:
1 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live
(reducible) + 1.6 North Wind + 1.6 North Wind (transfer)
(reducible) - 1.6 North Wind - 1.6 North Wind (transfer)
(reducible) + 1.6 East Wind
(reducible) - 1.6 East Wind
(reducible) + 1.6 Trade Wind + 1.6 Sirocco Wind + 1.6
Zephyr Wind
(reducible) - 1.6 Trade Wind - 1.6 Sirocco Wind - 1.6 Zephyr
Wind
Linear Zero-tension
Single Standard and
Alternate load factors
for every loading
No zero-tension
iterations
Considers pattern
loading
Standard load factor
for every loading
Zero-tension itera-
tions as necessary
Ignores pattern
loading
Group Standard and
for every non-lateral
loading
Standard and
for the selected lateral
loading type
No zero-tension
iterations
Considers pattern
loading
No results for point
springs, line springs,
point supports, line
supports, walls.
No Standard
results for any
quantity
See Figure 11-2 for
more information.
for every non-lateral
loading
for the selected lateral
loading type
Zero-tension itera-
tions as necessary
Ignores pattern
loading
No results for point
springs, line springs,
point supports, line
supports, walls.
No Standard
results for any
quantity
See Figure 11-2 for
more information.
43 RAM Concept
Chapter 12
12 Selecting Design Rules
You design concrete floors manually by calculating the
resultants (moments, shears and axial forces) of a load
combination and applying the appropriate code rules and
formula. You select code rules based upon the type of
member (reinforced slab, post-tensioned beam, etc.) and
the type of load combinations. For example, codes intend
some load combinations are for strength design and others
for serviceability design.
RAM Concept uses a similar method. It sorts code rules
into sets of rules and applies them to the resultant
envelopes of load combinations. Thus, a rule set design is
one or more code rules applied to the resultant envelope of
one or more load combinations.
For example, the set of code formula for bending and shear
strength is the strength rule set. Concept applies this rule
set to the envelope of all factored (or ultimate) load
combinations. The strength rule set does not apply to
service load combinations.
You design most floors or members for more than one rule
set. For example, a post-tensioned floor is usually checked
for initial service stresses, service stresses and strength, all
with different load combinations.
12.1 Using rule set designs
RAM Concept uses the concept of a design strip to link
finite element analysis with concrete code rules (see
Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips). Each design strips
properties include design system (beam / one-way slab /
two-way slab) and the considered as post-tensioned
option. Design strips contain design cross sections.
You assign each load combination active rule set designs in
the load combinations window.
How RAM Concept utilizes rule set designs:
1 Load combinations generate envelopes for resultants
(moments, shears, axial forces and torsions).
2 All load combination envelopes with the same rule set
design are in turn enveloped. This is a rule set design
envelope.
3 For each rule set design envelope, design strips generate
rule set design force envelopes.
4 Each design strip determines which code rules are appro-
priate for each rule set design. Design strip properties
impact which particular rules are used.
5 Design and checking rules are applied to the rule set
design section envelopes.
6 A design summary envelopes the reinforcement require-
ments and section status for all rule set design section
envelopes.
Example:
The following example describes how RAM Concept
selects the ACI 318-02 design rules for a post-tensioned
beam with live and wind loadings.
Figure 12-1 Example of load combinations and rule sets
RAM Concepts process is as follows:
The two load combinations generate envelopes for
resultants.
The five active rule set designs (service design, code
minimum design, user minimum design, strength design
and ductility design) each create envelopes from the load
combinations.
Each rule set design envelope creates a rule set design
section envelope.
The design strip properties of Structural system: beam
and consider as post-tensioned determines the following
rules from ACI 318-02 are applicable:
Strength Design: rules 18.7.2 (flexural strength)
and 11.4 and 11.5 (shear strength) are used with the
beam clauses.
Minimum Design: rule 18.9.2.
Service Design: rules 18.3.3 and 18.4.2 (b).
44
Chapter 12
RAM Concept
These rules are applied to the rule set design section
envelopes.
The reinforcement requirements and section status for
all rule set design section envelopes are in turn enveloped
for a design summary.
12.2 Rule set design properties
The following is a list of rule set design properties:
Name This relates to the rule set design. It most cases it is
the same as the active rules, but there can be exceptions
(see adding rule set designs - below).
Active Rules This describes the set of rules applied by
this rule set.
12.3 Types of active rules
The available ACI 318-02 active rules are:
Code Minimum Design
Rules for minimum reinforcement (shrinkage, detailing,
etc.) based upon geometry rather than stress or moment
level. Does not include shear reinforcement.
User Minimum Design
Reinforcement based on user defined reinforcement ratio.
See the design strip property description on page 99 of
Section 22.5.
Initial Service Design
Checks of PT floor stresses just after application of
prestress (when dead load is minimal).
Service Design
Checks of PT floor stresses due to service loads.
Rules for reinforcement bar based upon bar stress levels.
Sustained Service Design
Checks of PT floor compression stresses due to sustained
loads.
Strength Design
Rules to ensure section has sufficient strength in bending
and shear for factored (or ultimate) moments, and
minimum shear reinforcement.
Ductility Design
Rules intended to produce ductile behavior.
Soil Bearing
This is used in mat foundation (raft) files to facilitate the
enveloping of soil bearing pressure. It does not use any
active rules.
12.4 Adding and deleting rule set designs
Adding a duplicate rule set design allows you to separate
the results for different load combinations with the same
active rules. For example, if a strength design is required
for three different load combinations (1. Dead and Live; 2.
Dead, Reduced Live and Snow; 3. Seismic) then you could
keep the results separate by creating two new rule set
designs with names such as Snow and Seismic which
both use the code strength rules. This way you can view the
strength reinforcement requirements separately.
You can delete non-applicable rule set designs to simplify
the file. For example, in ACI 318-02, initial service design,
and sustained service design are not required for floors
without post-tensioning. Another example is DL + 0.25LL
Design is not required if the UBC is not used.
To add a rule set design:
1 Choose Criteria > Design Rules.
2 Click Add Rule Set Design.
3 Type a name for the new Rule Set Design in the Add Rule
Set Design dialog box and click OK.
A dialog box appears that requires you to specify the plans
that you want created (Top and Bottom Reinforcement,
Shear Reinforcement and Punching).
4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
The new rule set design appears at the bottom of the
window.
5 Select the active rules.
To delete a rule set:
2 Click Delete Rule Set Design.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current rule set
designs.
3 Choose the rule set design to delete and click OK.
45 RAM Concept
Chapter 13
13 Using a CAD Drawing
You can define the models geometry quickly if there is a
CAD file (with .dwg or .dxf filename extension) available
to use as a background. You trace the CAD drawing with
object tools to facilitate the finite element mesh generation.
You can also use the CAD drawing to locate other objects
such as loads. Snap tools make tracing the imported CAD
drawing easier.
Note: RAM Concept itself does not recognize the meaning
of actual drawing lines.
It is not necessary, however, to use a CAD file. If the floor
is straightforward, or there is no drawing available, you
should skip this chapter. For strip-like models that do not
warrant the use of a CAD file, it may be better to use Strip
Wizard.
13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a
drawing
To use a background drawing you import the drawing and
then verify that it is at the correct scale.
13.1.1 Importing a CAD file
You can import a drawing at any time. An imported
drawing overwrites any previously imported drawing.
RAM Concept can work with either a .dwg or a .dxf file. It
is typically best to use a .dwg file.
To import a CAD file:
1 Choose File > Import Drawing.
2 Select the CAD drawing file you want to import.
If Concept cannot determine the units of CAD file, the File
Units dialog box will appear with a list of units. The units
relate to the CAD file, not the Concept file.
3 Select the appropriate units and click OK.
Note: It is possible to import a CAD drawing with one set
of units into a model with another set of units.
13.1.2 Checking the imported information
When you import the drawing file, it will be visible on the
Standard Plan of the Drawing Import Layer. You should
verify that the plan scale is correct.
To check that the imported drawing is at the correct scale:
1 Choose Layers > Drawing Import > Standard Plan.
2 Click Zoom Extent ( ) to ensure that you are viewing
the entire CAD plan.
3 Select the Dimension tool ( ) and draw a dimension
line between two snapable points that are a known distance
apart. The distance between the two points will appear as a
dimension.
If this dimension is not as expected then the imported file
may be in the wrong scale. Consider importing the drawing
with different units to fix this problem.
13.1.3 Making the drawing visible on other
plans
You can make the imported drawing visible on any plan
through the Visible Objects dialog box. Usually you want
to make it visible on the Mesh Input Standard Plan (for
defining the floor geometry), and perhaps on some loading
plans (for locations of line and point loads). You may
choose to turn off some CAD layers if they clutter the
drawing. If you happened to bring in an architectural
drawing, it is probably a good idea to turn off the furniture.
See Controlling views on page 11 for more information
on making objects visible or hidden.
46
Chapter 13
RAM Concept
47 RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System
Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural
System is referred to as RSS.
RAM Concept can import concrete structure information
and loads from the RAM Structural System (Version 9.01
or higher) into a RAM Concept file.
RAM Concept can also export support member forces back
to RSS.
14.1 What can be imported from the RAM
Structural System
RAM Concept allows the selective import of concrete
members (slabs, beams, openings, columns and walls),
applied loads and member loads from one story of a RAM
Structural System database. Member loads can be from
gravity and / or lateral analyses.
14.2 Controlling which concrete members
are imported
A story defined in the RAM Structural System can have
two types of floors: elevated or mat foundation. The floor
type designation determines which concrete members in
the story are imported.
Figure 14-1 and Table 14-1 show the relationship between
the selected story, the import slab type and the slab area
imported. Note that mats are below the designated story.
For example, the 2nd story mat is the mat that supports the
second story elevated floor.
Figure 14-1 The slab areas shown above (A,B,C,D) will be imported based
upon the selections shown below.
Table 14-1 Relationship between the selected story, the import slab type,
and the slab area imported.
14.2.1 Definition of the import perimeter
The selected slab areas define the import perimeter. Only
RAM Structural System support members within the
import perimeter will be imported. For example, in Figure
14-1, if the 1
st
story elevated slab is imported with the
columns above setting, the two furthermost right
columns between the 1
st
story and 2
nd
story will not be
imported as they are not within the slab perimeter of the 1st
story elevated slab.
The following structural members can be imported:
1 Slabs
All slabs of the selected slab type.
2 Beams
All concrete beams from the selected story.
3 Openings and Penetrations
All openings and penetrations within the import perimeter.
4 Columns
Any column (below and / or above) whose center point lies
inside the import perimeter.
5 Walls
Any wall (below and / or above) whose center line is
contained by or crosses any part of the import perimeter.
6 Grids
All orthogonal and radial grids.
Note: All structural members are imported into RAM
Concepts Mesh Input layer. Grids are imported into the
Drawing Import layer.
Story
Import Type
Elevated Mat Foundation
1st A C
2nd B D
48
Chapter 14
RAM Concept
14.3 About load importation
RAM Concept imports applied loads and analyzed member
forces from the selected member group.
Certain components of member loads are ignored when
importing. The components that are ignored depend on the
slab type and whether the member forces are from gravity
and lateral loads.
The following table summarizes the force components that
are imported onto a mat foundation and an elevated slab.
Table 14-2 Relationship between the slab type, member loading type, and
imported force components for a slab.
Wall forces are resolved into a statically equivalent linearly
varying force applied along the length of the wall.
The following loads can be imported:
1 Direct gravity loads
Point, line and area gravity loads applied directly to the
imported slabs.
Table 14-3 shows how RSS load cases are mapped to
Concept loading layers.
Table 14-3 Mapping of RSS load cases
2 Transfer gravity loads
Concept imports transferred gravity loads from RSS
members above the import slabs. The loads include
member self-weight with the transferred gravity loads. The
loads are imported as point loads and line loads into
separate Concept loading layers.
A new Concept transfer gravity loading layer is created for
each RSS Load Case, as in Table 14-3, but with the string
(transfer) appended to the name. For example, transfer
loads from the RSS Dead load case are imported into the
Concept Dead Load (transfer) loading layer. The
Concept (transfer) loading layers are not created if the
Transfer Gravity Loads are not imported.
3 Lateral Member Loads
Lateral member forces (such as wind and seismic) from
members above and below the imported slab are imported
as point loads. The member loads are imported into a new
loading layer for each analyzed load case in RSS. Concept
creates the name for the new loading layer from the user's
label and the RSS load type.
For example, the name could be
mySeismic(EQ_UBC97_X_+E_F).
Note: Mat foundation loads imported from the RAM Struc-
tural System will always be reduced during the import. For
this reason you should always choose the live load reduction
code of None in these files.
Slab Type Loading
Type
Forces
Imported
Mat Transfer
Gravity
Fz, Mx, My
Mat Transfer
Lateral
Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx,
My
Elevated Transfer
Gravity
Fz
Elevated Transfer
Lateral
Fz, Mx, My
RSS Load Case RAM Concept Loading Layer
Dead Dead Load
Live Ignored (imported as 4 individual live
loadings)
Live Reducible Live Reducible
Live Unreducible Live Unreducible
Live Storage Live Storage
Live Roof Live Load Roof
Partition Partition (imported as Live Unreducible
type)
Construction Dead Construction Dead Load
Construction Live Ignored
Mass Dead Ignored
49 RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14.4 Importing a database
You can import from the RAM Structural System at any
time. An import overwrites some or all previously imported
data, and may overwrite information you have directly
input to RAM Concept. Refer to Reimporting a database
Note: Concept may not be able to import data correctly if
the RSS file does not pass the Data Check operation in
the RAM Modeler module. It is strongly recommended that
your RSS file have no errors before attempting to import it
into Concept.
To import from the RAM Structural System:
1 Choose File > Import RAM Structural System.
If there is no open RAM Concept file the Open RAM
Structural System Database dialog box will appear.
Browse and select a RSS database (.rss) file and click OK.
When a valid RSS database file is selected, the RAM
Structural System dialog box in Figure 14-2 appears.
The RSS filename selected appears after File: at the top
of the window.
You may click on the Browse button at the top of the
window to select a different file with the file browser.
Note: If you select a file with a version prior to 9.0, an
error will be displayed and you will be returned to the file
browser. Clicking the Cancel button cancels the import
operation.
Note: If you are running RSS version 9, select RSS
database files with the .ram extension.
2 Select the story and slab type.
3 Select the structural members from the check boxes
under Structure.
Figure 14-2 RSS import dialog box
The dialog box makes Columns Below Slab, Walls
Below Slab, Beams and Openings and Penetrations
unavailable for a Mat Foundation.
4 Select the loadings from the check boxes under
Loading.
The dialog box makes Direct Gravity Loads unavailable
for a Mat Foundation.
5 Click OK to import the file, or Cancel to cancel the
import operation.
After an RSS file is imported, a RAM Import Status dialog
box, similar to that shown in Figure 14-3, appears with a
summary and any warnings.
50
Chapter 14
RAM Concept
Figure 14-3 Example of an import summary with warnings
The RSS geometry definitions and loads are now imported
into RAM Concept.
You can now generate the finite element mesh. See Chapter
18, Generating the Mesh.
Note: If you are reimporting there could be additional
dialog boxes that appear with more warnings.
Note: Importing lateral analysis loads from RSS models
that contain a large number of lateral load cases will cause
Concept to create a large number of load combinations
which will result in sluggish performance.
14.5 Reimporting a database
If the information in the RAM Structural System database
changes, the RAM Concept model will not be
automatically updated. You can, however, reimport the
changed information.
Changes to structural members and loads made in RAM
Concept can be lost when importing an RSS file, so care
should be taken to avoid losing information.
14.5.1 Resolving loading conflicts
If the Concept file has existing loadings that do not match
the RSS loadings to be imported, a dialog box like that in
Figure 14-4 asks if you want to keep or delete the existing
loadings.
If you have already specified (drawn) loads in the loadings
that Concept has proposed to delete, then you should keep
the loadings that Concept offers to remove. If you want to
export the reactions from these pre-existing loads to RSS,
you need to copy the loads from the original loadings to the
corresponding RSS loadings that are being imported (after
which you should manually delete the non-RSS loadings).
Note: If you have used the Export Geometry to RAM Struc-
tural System feature (section 36.2) prior to importing, then
you always see this warning. The recommended workflow is
to either draw the loads in RSS or draw the loads in Concept
after importing from RSS; with either of these workflows,
you can safely allow the loadings proposed for removal to
be deleted.
Figure 14-4 Choices for dealing with new loadings
RAM Concept will also prompt you to determine if you
require rebuilding of the load combinations and design
rules, as shown in Figure 14-5.
You have three choices:
Rebuild: load combinations and design rules in the RAM
Concept file are rebuilt
Dont Rebuild: the new load cases are added to the RAM
Concept file, but not included in the load combinations.
Cancel: RAM Concept returns you to the file browser.
Figure 14-5 Choices for dealing with new loadings
Note: When reimporting a particular member type, e.g.
beams, all entities of that category are removed from the
RAM Concept file before importing. For example, if beams
are imported, all beams in the RAM Concept file are
51 RAM Concept
Chapter 14
removed first. Any beams you have added manually in RAM
Concept will be lost. If beams are not selected for import,
then beams in the RAM Concept file will not be affected
when the file is reimported.
Note: If any loading categories are selected, then ALL
loads in reimported loading layers are removed. Any loads
you have added manually on a loading layer being
reimported will be lost.You have the option whether to
regenerate load combinations or not.
RAM Concept always asks you to confirm a reimport
operation, because it may lead to loss of information. It
warns you if the data to be reimported would be
significantly different from the previously imported data,
or if significant information will be lost. For example,
RAM Concept warns you when reimporting a mat
foundation after previously importing an elevated slab, or
vice versa.
To reimport from the RAM Structural System:
1 Choose File > Import RSS.
A file dialog box will open with the name of the last RSS
file you imported into this RAM Concept file.
2 Select the RSS file and click OK.
The file can be a different RSS file which may have a
significant (and possibly negative) effect on the RAM
Concept model.
The RAM Structural System Import dialog box will appear
with a list of options. The default options will be the story
and slab type from the last import.
3 Select the story, slab type, structure and loading and click
OK.
A New Loadings confirmation box may appear that
describes loadings in the RSS file that are not in the current
RAM Concept file. Click Replace, Add or Cancel.
A confirmation box appears that warns about differences
from previously imported data.
Figure 14-6 Examples of warnings for an import operation with different
levels and structure type
4 Click Replace or Cancel.
A RSS Import Status dialog box will appear with a
summary and any warnings.
5 Click OK.
14.6 Limitations, Defaults and
Assumptions
14.6.1 Limitations
Not all information stored in a RAM Structural System
database can be transferred into RAM Concept.
RAM Concept models RAM Structural System data
using either the ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05,
AS 3600:2001, Eurocode 2: 2004, CAN/CSA A23.3-04 or
BS 8110: 1997 building code. A RAM Structural System
database that has live load reduction set to China GB or
Hong Kong will be imported using the BS 8110: 1997
building code; a live load reduction setting of NBC of
Canada will be imported using the CAN/CSA A23.3-04
standard; otherwise the building code set in RAM
Concrete is used to set the RAM Concept code. The
building code can be changed, if necessary after the
importation is complete.
RAM Concept does not model beam fixity.
RAM Concept models a column end as fixed if the RAM
Structural System column is fixed along either its major or
minor axis.
RAM Concept only models walls of constant height.
RAM Concept will create a wall with the average height
of the RAM Structural System wall.
The lateral loads applied to the structure in RAM Frame
Analysis are not imported.
Concept ignores holes in walls modeled in RSS version
10.
14.6.2 Defaults
RAM Concept uses the following defaults for properties
that are not defined in the RAM Structural System.
Beams
Surface elevation is 0.0.
Columns
Compressible is true.
Roller is false, except above mat foundations.
Columns above mat foundations are pinned at the top
regardless of the setting in the RAM database.
52
Chapter 14
RAM Concept
Walls
Neither the top nor the bottom is fixed.
Modeled as a Shear Wall.
Modeled as compressible.
The RAM Structural System cracked section factor is
ignored.
14.6.3 Assumptions
All loads are applied to the surface of the slab.
Wall forces are applied as a linearly varying force along
the length of the wall that is statically equivalent to the
wall forces and moments.
Refer to Table 14-4 and Table 14-5 for mapping of RAM
load cases and types to RAM Concepts loadings and force
levels.
Table 14-4 RAM Modeler Force Level Assumptions
Note: * denotes assumed
Table 14-5 RAM Frame Load Cases
Note: * denotes assumed
14.7 Tight integration with the RAM
Structural System
Starting with version 14.5, the RAM Structural System can
be used to control the model data exported, run Concept,
and manage the Concept data file as part of the RSS model
file. Selection of the data to be imported into Concept is
very similar to that described here. For more information,
refer to the RSS Structural System documentation.
Concept executes in a restricted mode when it is run from
RAM Manager. The following operations are disabled:
New
Open
Close
Save As
Save Template
Strip Wizard
Sync ISM / New from Repository
All Sync RSS Operations
All Sync STAAD Operations
RSS Load Type RAM Concept
Loading
RAM Concept
Loading Force
Level (Limit State)
Wind Wind Service *
Seismic Seismic Ultimate *
Other Seismic Ultimate *
Virtual Ignored
RSS Load
Case Type
Sub-Type RAM Concept
Loading
RAM Concept
Loading
Force Level
(Limit State)
Wind User defined
story forces
Wind Service *
Wind all others Wind Service
Seismic User defined
story forces
Seismic Ultimate *
Seismic UBC 94 Seismic Service
Seismic all others Seismic Ultimate
Dynamic Eigen solu-
tion
Ignored
Dynamic all others Ignored
User defined
story forces
Seismic Ultimate *
Center of
rigidity
Ignored
Virtual Work Ignored
53 RAM Concept
Chapter 14
These restrictions are in place primarily to maintain the
integrity of the Concept files when they are imbedded in
the RSS model file.
54
Chapter 14
RAM Concept
55 RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15 Data Transfer from STAAD
The STAAD analysis and design program can transfer
structure geometry and loading information to RAM
Concept.
15.1 STAAD Interface
In STAAD, you can select slabs elements, wall elements,
column elements and beams for export into RAM Concept.
You can also select STAAD load cases for export and
associate them with Concept loading types.
The STAAD interface allows you to either run Concept
immediately with the exported data or to save the data to a
GCFF file for later import into Concept.
If the STAAD file changes (perhaps loads or column sizes
change), you can update the Concept file by re-exporting
the STAAD information.
Please see the STAAD manuals for more information on
the STAAD interface.
15.2 RAM Concept Interface
15.2.1 Data Transfer Paths
RAM Concept can import STAAD information in four
ways:
1 Concept is started by STAAD to create a new file.
2 Concept is started by STAAD to update a previously
created file.
3 The Concept File menu item New From STAAD GCFF
file is chosen to create a new file.
4 The Concept File menu item Update from STAAD GCFF
file is chosen to update an already opened Concept file.
15.2.2 New file options in RAM Concept
When creating a new file from STAAD information - either
via the New from STAAD GCFF file menu item or by
STAAD starting Concept, the dialog box shown in Figure
15-1 opens.
Figure 15-1 File options dialog box
The options at the top of the dialog window are the same as
for creating any new Concept file and are not discussed
further here.
The checkboxes at the bottom of the window allow you to
import one or more of the following classes of information:
slabs (including beams), walls, columns and loads.
15.2.3 Update file options in RAM Concept
When updating a Concept file with new STAAD
information - either via the Update From STAAD GCFF
file menu item or by STAAD starting Concept, the dialog
box shown in Figure 15-2 opens.
56
Chapter 15
RAM Concept
Figure 15-2 Update file options dialog box
The options in the window are the same as those discussed
in New file options in RAM Concept on page 55, but
behave slightly differently due to the operation being an
update. For example if Columns is selected, all
existing columns will be removed and new columns
defined by the STAAD information. If Columns is not
selected, no changes will be made to the columns in the
Concept file.
57 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
16 Data Transfer from ISM
RAM Concept can exchange structure information with
Bentleys Integrated Structural Model (ISM) technology.
16.1 What is ISM?
Bentleys Integrated Structural Model (ISM) is a
technology for sharing structural engineering project
information among structural modeling, analysis, design,
drafting and detailing applications. ISM is similar to
Building Information Modeling (BIM), but focuses on the
information that is important in the design, construction
and modification of the load bearing components of
buildings, bridges and other structures.
16.1.1 Purpose
There are two related purposes for ISM:
The transfer of structural information between applica-
tions.
The coordination of structural information between
applications.
To provide for transferring information, ISM provides a
means of defining, storing, reading and querying ISM
models.
To provide for coordination of information, ISM can detect
differences between ISM models, allowing you to
selectively update either an ISM repository or an
applications data. This gives you control over the
consistency between the two data sets.
16.1.2 ISM and Application Data
ISM is not intended to store all of the information that all of
its client applications contain. Rather, it is intended to store
and communicate a consensus view of data that is common
to two or more of its client applications, such as Concept.
Concept continues to hold and maintain its own private
copy of project data. Some of Concepts data will duplicate
that of the associated ISM repository. Concepts data may
even conflict with that in the ISM repository. Concept (or
you as its user) may decide that maintaining conflicting
data is best for Concepts and ISMs different uses.
16.2 ISM Sync Tools Overview
Concept can send structural data to and from an ISM
repository through a set of ISM Synchronizing tools. These
tools allow you to both create and update Concept models
as well as ISM repositories. These flexible tools also allow
you to create models and move data as your workflow
dictates.
There are four ISM operations:
Create ISM repository: creates a new ISM repository
from the model currently open in Concept.
Create Concept file: creates a new Concept model from
an existing ISM repository.
Update ISM repository: transfers changes made to the
current Concept model into an existing ISM repository,
and allows you to accept some or all of those changes.
Update Concept model: transfers changes made to the
ISM repository into the current Concept model, and
allows you to accept some or all of those changes.
When the Update operations are executed, the Change
Management environment is invoked to coordinate which
changes are to be reflected in the models and repository.
Create ISM Repository:
To create an ISM repository from a Concept model:
1 Choose File > Sync ISM > Create repository. Select the
repository file and click OK.
2 The Export Story dialog will appear, as in Figure 16-1.
Figure 16-1 ISM Export Dialog
3 Enter a story name and elevation, and click OK. The
story name and elevation are both required.
4 If the Extended UI checkbox is enabled, the ISM Change
Management environment will be executed, enabling
manual inspection and filtering of the items to be exported.
Create Concept File:
To create a Concept File from one story defined in an ISM
repository:
58
Chapter 16
RAM Concept
1 Choose File > Sync ISM > New from repository, as in
Figure 16-2.
Figure 16-2 New from Repository Menu
2 Select the ISM repository file and click OK
3 The New File dialog will appear, as in Figure 16-3.
Figure 16-3 New File from ISM Dialog
4 Select the file's structure type, code and units.
5 Select the story to be imported under ISM Story and
click OK.
If the Extended UI checkbox is enabled, the ISM Change
Management environment will be executed, allowing you
to manually inspect and filter the items to be imported.
Update ISM Repository:
To update the ISM repository with changes made to the
Concept file, choose File > Sync ISM > Update repository.
The ISM Change Management environment will appear,
giving you control over each change to the repository. If the
ISM repository cannot be found, you are given the
opportunity to select its new location or cancel the
operation.
Update Concept Model:
To update the Concept File with changes made to the ISM
repository, choose File > Sync ISM > Update from
repository. The ISM Change Management environment
will appear, giving you control over each change to the
Concept file.
16.3 Import and Export Details
It is useful to describe here the differences between the
ISM and Concept models, the conversion process, and how
the Concept model is modified to make the conversion
process smoother.
16.3.1 Filtering
The ISM model is very general. It can represent diverse
structure types, such as buildings and bridges, and material
types like steel, wood and concrete. Concept filters out any
part of the ISM repository that it does not model or is not
relevant. The Update operations use the filtered model to
determine the context of the changes to be applied.
For example, Concept filters out all steel members. When
Concept updates the ISM repository, it does not need to
replicate steel members in the model. The Change
Management can deduce that Concept is not deleting the
steel members because it never read them in.
The Concept filter retains only the following objects from
the ISM model:
The imported story information
Concrete slabs, footings and beams on the imported
story
59 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
Concrete walls and columns that are connected to the
slabs or beams retained
Static Load Cases and their loads that are applied to the
slabs or beams retained
Concrete materials and curve member Sections that are
used by the members retained
Concentrated and Area surface rebar in slabs
Layer parallel rebar inside and parallel to a beam
Rebar materials used by imported rebar
Concept ignores the following ISM objects:
Non-planar slabs, walls and surface loads
Sloped slabs
Modifiers and openings in walls
Beams, columns and curve loads with geometry not
equivalent to a single line segment
Beams and columns that do not have the Orientation,
Section, and SectionPlacementPoint properties set
Beams with a non-vertical Orientation
Duplicate Load Cases that correspond to fixed Concept
loadings
Hyperstatic or Inset Load Case Cause
Rebar in walls or columns
Non-horizontal rebar
Concept and ISM use slightly different terminology for
structural members and loading types. Table 16-1 is a
cross-reference of Concept and ISM type names.
Table 16-1 Concept and ISM Type Name Cross-Reference
16.3.2 The ISM Model
ISM structure models consist of multiple stories. Each slab
or beam is on exactly one story. Wall and column
members may extend through multiple stories and are
connected to slab and beam members. Load Cases contain
point, line and area loads that are applied to exactly one
member.
16.3.3 Slabs and Openings
ISM and Concept model slab areas differently. It is
instructive to describe the differences in detail here to
explain how the import and export operations are affected.
Concept slabs are defined by a collection of slab areas and
openings with arbitrary overlapping polygonal boundaries.
Each slab area defines material, thickness and surface
elevation properties. An integer priority determines which
slab area or opening takes precedence where two or more
slab areas overlap.
ISM slabs are defined by a collection of surface members
with polygonal boundaries. Each surface member may
contain any number of surface member modifiers. The
Concept Name ISM Type(/Use)
N/A Story
Concrete Mix Concrete
Slab Area Surface Member/Slab or
Surface Member Modifier
Slab Opening Surface Opening
Beam Curve Member/Beam
Column Curve Member/Column
Wall Surface Member/Wall
Loading Load Case
Point Load Point Load
Line Load Curve Load
Area Load Surface Load
N/A Section
Rebar Rebar Material
Concentrated Rebar Concentrated Surface Rebar
Distributed Rebar Area Surface Rebar
Transverse Rebar Perpendicular Rebar
60
Chapter 16
RAM Concept
surface member and its modifiers define the slab material,
thickness and surface position properties. Modifier
boundaries must lie inside the parent surface member's
boundary. Modifier boundaries may overlap, so modifiers
have an integer priority to determine precedence in
overlapping areas. Modifiers always take precedence over
the parent surface member. Normal practice is for modifier
priorities to be sequential, starting at 1.
A surface member may also contain any number of surface
member openings. Like modifier boundaries, opening
boundaries must lie within the parent surface member's
boundary and may overlap. However, openings always take
precedence over the surface member and its modifiers. In
effect, surface members have an infinitely low priority,
surface member modifiers have an explicit integer priority,
and openings have an infinitely high priority.
Note: We use the term effective shape to mean the surface
member boundary minus all of its openings. This shape is
not necessarily polygonal. Although not common, it may
have holes and islands. The effective shape may also be
disjoint if surface member openings split it into pieces. We
also use the term outer boundary of an arbitrary shape. This
is the shape with all interior holes filled. It may consist of
more than one disjoint shapes, but each shape will be
polygonal.
Therefor, ISM surface member boundaries may overlap, as
long as there is no overlap between the surface member
effective shapes.
Importing ISM Slabs to Concept
Converting a single ISM surface member into a set of
Concept slab areas and openings is straightforward. The
surface members and surface member modifiers are
converted to Concept slab areas. The openings are
converted to Concept openings. The slab area created from
the surface member is assigned a priority of 0. The
openings are assigned a priority of 90. The slab areas
created from the surface member modifiers are assigned
priorities in the range 10-89, with an increment of at least
2. Modifier priorities are compressed where possible, e.g.
where two non-overlapping modifiers may be set to the
same priority. A surface member that overflows this range
(i.e. it contains modifiers in a configuration that requires
more than 45 distinct modifier priorities) should be very
rare. In this case, some of the modifiers will have duplicate
priorities. The user will need to fix this model in the
Concept modeler and then update the ISM repository.
The priority mapping is applied to each surface member on
the story. If the boundaries of surface members overlap, it
should only be in the opening of one surface member. The
priorities of the slab areas and openings of the overlapping
surface member are offset by a multiple of 100 to make the
Concept model unambiguous.
Exporting Concept slabs to ISM
Converting overlapping Concept slab areas and openings to
ISM surface members with modifiers and openings is more
complicated. The Concept model should map directly to
ISM surface members to make ISM repository creation and
update operations go smoothly. The Concept slab area and
opening geometries and priorities must sometimes be
modified.
If necessary, the lowest priority Concept slab area is
expanded to contain overlapping slab areas and is then
converted to a parent ISM surface member. Overlapping
slab areas are converted to surface modifiers of the parent
surface member. Concept slabs that do not overlap are
converted into separate ISM surface members. Any
Concept slab that does not have any effect on the slabs it
overlaps is not converted to an ISM modifier.
ISM surface openings effectively have an infinite priority.
In order to model ISM surface openings, any Concept slab
openings that are obscured by higher-priority slab areas are
first trimmed to their effective shape. New slab openings
are added to the Concept model if the trimming operation
splits an opening into two or more pieces. Openings that
are completely obscured by higher-priority slab areas are
not added to the ISM model.
The slab areas and slab opening priorities are compressed
and reassigned as described for importing ISM surface
members. You will be notified when the shape or priority
of a Concept slab area or opening is changed or when
openings are added or removed. You can stop the ISM
operation at any point and the Concept data will not be
changed.
Small Features
Changing the shape of a slab can sometimes introduce
small features that are not detected until the model is
meshed. For example, the corner of a drop cap might
extend slightly past the edge of the lowest priority slab.
When the lowest priority slab is extended to contain the
drop cap, it may have a very small (< 50 mm) edge. The
Line too short (39.1.2) or Feature eliminated (39.1.3)
warnings will be generated when meshing the model.
Removing these features will generally not hurt anything,
but it is best to fix them manually in Concept and update
the ISM repository to eliminate future warnings.
16.3.4 Slab Modeling Guidelines
Almost any Concept slab model can be converted to an
equivalent ISM model. Following these modeling
guidelines in Concept will reduce the chance of problems
in model consistency.
61 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
Drop Caps and Panels, on the interior or exterior, should
not be modeled by adding openings to a slab and filling
them with other slabs. Instead, increase the priority on the
drop panel slabs so that they override the base slab.
Slab area islands can be handled properly if modeled
with care. A slab area island is completely contained
within, and higher priority than, a slab opening. The slab
opening is contained within or on the edge of, and higher
priority than, another slab area. If the island slab area does
not overlap the outer slab area's effective shape, it will
converted into a separate ISM surface member. The
preferred ISM model is a surface member with an opening
and a modifier. This can be accomplished by splitting the
opening so that it surrounds the island slab without
covering the larger slab. If the Concept slab is constructed
with openings whose priorities are larger than all of the
slab areas, then it will map correctly to the ISM surface
member.
16.3.5 Support Members
ISM wall and column definitions are much more flexible
than Concepts. However, because most building structures
have regular features such as vertical columns, this
normally wont be a significant issue.
An ISM repository models an entire building. Support
members may extend through all stories of the building and
be connected to members on each story. ISM walls are
surface members; they may be as complex as slabs, with
openings, arbitrary shapes and thickness variations. Walls
and columns can also be sloped.
On the other hand, Concept only models vertical support
members, and their height is assumed to extend just to the
next slab above or below. Concept walls are rectangular
and openings are not supported.
Importing ISM Support Members to Concept
Concept imports only ISM support members that are
connected to a slab or beam that is on the story imported.
Concept creates one or two support members above and
below the imported slab. Concept models the support
member height from the imported story to the next
connected slab or beam above (or below), or to the end of
the member if it is not connected to another story above (or
below). If the ISM support member ends at the imported
story or the next connected story, Concept models the
complete support height to that end. If the support member
does not terminate on one of these stories, the Concept
member height is modeled from the elevation midpoint of
all slabs and beams connected to it on that story.
Concept will not create support members shorter than 500
mm for cases where the member extends only a short
distance past the import story. If the ISM support member
is sloped, Concept models the sloped length of the member,
not the difference in elevation of ends (i.e. the modeled
height will be greater than the elevation difference).
For example, consider a column that is connected to a slab
on the imported story and stories above and below, and
ends on the stories above and below. The column heights
will be computed relative to the elevation midpoint of the
imported slab. If a drop cap or deep beam is added to the
imported slab and connected to the column in the ISM
repository, the elevation midpoint imported slab will shift
downward. When the Concept model is updated, the
Concept column height above will increase and the column
height below will decrease by equal amounts.
Exporting Concept Support Members to ISM
When exporting support members to ISM, pairs of
matching support members at the same location are merged
to create a single ISM support member. Two support
members are merged only if all of their properties match
(e.g. Concrete mix, thickness, etc.), and either they were
imported from the same ISM support member, or they are
both new in Concept. If a pair of support members at a
location cannot be merged, then two ISM support members
are exported.
The support member exported by Concept extends only to
the ends of the heights modeled in Concept, relative to the
center of the slab or beam the support member passes
through. Dealing with this geometry approximation
requires some care when updating Concept or ISM. When
updating Concept from ISM, the Concept model may have
shortened support members. In general, the ISM geometry
can be accepted to capture changes made to the repository,
and Concept will just create a new approximation. There
are times when you should reject changes to the Concept
support member geometry. For example, when the Concept
support member geometry has been adjusted to compensate
for a problem in the Concept approximation. In those cases,
the Reject setting in the Changes Management environment
will prevent the Concept geometry from changing.
It is usually not desirable to update the ISM repository with
the approximate Concept support member geometry. For
this reason, updating the ISM repository support member is
disabled by default. See 16.3.10 for information on
enabling updates to support members. If updating support
members is enabled, you can decide which properties
should be changed. The support member geometry
defined by the Location or Boundary properties can be
updated for simple one or two story support members.
Changes to Concrete mixes, dimensions or column
orientation can also be updated.
16.3.6 ISM Section Shapes
ISM supports a wide array of section shapes, including
parametric sections, custom section shapes, composite
62
Chapter 16
RAM Concept
sections and linearly varying sections. Concept supports
only two section shapes: solid rectangles for beams and
solid rectangles or circles for columns. Concept must
therefore create a rectangular or circular approximation for
any non-rectangular or non-circular ISM section shape.
ISM Parametric Sections use a small number of parameters
to define the most common section shapes. For column
members, Concept maps solid and hollow circular ISM
parametric section shapes to solid circles. All other
parametric shapes for beams and columns are
approximated by rectangles.
Table 16-2 shows the width and height the Concept
rectangular section approximations for each ISM
Parametric Section Type:
Table 16-2 Rectangular Section Approximations to ISM Parametric Sec-
tion Shapes
ISM also defines Custom, Built Up and Varying section
shapes. ISM Custom sections are defined by an arbitrary
geometric shape. Concept approximates Custom sections
by a square of the same area. ISM Built Up sections are
composites of other parametric or custom sections.
Concept approximates Built Up sections by a square with
the area of the sum of the areas of the section's
components.
ISM Varying sections vary shape linearly along a member.
Concept approximates a Varying section shape by applying
the rules for constant sections to the start of the first
varying section segment.
When updating an ISM repository, Concept section
approximations will appear as changes in the Change
Management environment. The Change action on these
changes can be set to Always Reject to prevent the ISM
sections from being replaced.
16.3.7 ISM Load Cases and Loads
ISM Load Case objects and their Load Cause property are
analogous to Concept Loadings and their Loading Type
property. Table 16-3 gives the Concept Loading Type
imported for each ISM Dead Load Cause.
Table 16-3 Concept Dead Loading Types Imported
Table 16-4 gives the Concept Loading Type imported for
each ISM Floor Load Cause.
Table 16-4 Concept Floor Loading Types Imported
each ISM Roof Load Cause.
Table 16-5 Concept Roof Loading Types Imported
ISM Parametric
Section Type
Concept Width Concept Height
Solid Rectangle Width Height
Hollow Rectangle Width Height
Solid Circle Outer Diameter Outer Diameter
Hollow Circle Diameter Diameter
I Web Thickness Depth
T Web Thickness Depth
L Thickness Depth
C Web Thickness Depth
Double L 2*Thickness Depth
Ism Load Cause Concept Loading Type
DeadConstruction Stressing Dead
DeadStructure Other Dead
DeadSuperimposed Other Dead
DeadUnspecified Other Dead
FloorAssembly Live Unreducible
FloorOffice Live Reducible
FloorResidential Live Reducible
FloorRetail Live Reducible
FloorStorage Live Storage
FloorUnspecified Live Reducible
ParkingHeavy Live Parking
ParkingLight Live Parking
ParkingUnspecified Live Parking
RoofAccess Live Roof
RoofRain Live Roof
RoofSnowDrift Snow
RoofSnowUniform Snow
RoofSnowUnspecified Snow
RoofUnspecified Live Roof
63 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
each ISM Lateral Load Cause.
Table 16-6 Concept Lateral Loading Types Imported
each ISM Other Load Cause.
Table 16-7 Concept Other Loading Types Imported
Table 16-8 defines the ISM Load Cause exported for each
Concept Loading Type.
Table 16-8 ISM Load Cases Exported
The Balance loading is not exported to ISM by default. It is
not always useful to other programs, and it may
significantly increase the size of the ISM repository. See
the Options section below for information on enabling
Balance loading export.
16.3.8 Member Loading
Concept loads are applied to the highest priority slab or
beam they intersect. ISM loads are applied to a single ISM
member. When exporting loads to ISM, Concept must
determine which single ISM member the load should be
applied to. Concept may have to split line or area loads that
straddle more than one ISM member.
A Concept Point Load is applied to an ISM beam if it lies
on the beam centerline. Otherwise, it is applied to the
surface member whose effective shape contains the point.
A Concept Line Load that is completely contained in the
beam centerline is applied to that beam. Otherwise, the line
load is trimmed to the effective shape of each ISM surface
member it intersects. If the line load intersects more than
one surface member or has a disjoint intersection with a
single surface member, it is split into shorter line loads and
applied to the surface members they overlap.
Concept area loads are trimmed to the outer boundary of
the effective shapes of all ISM surface members that they
intersect. If the intersection is disjoint, the Concept area
SeismicService Seismic Service
SeismicUltimate Seismic Ultimate
SeismicUnspecified Seismic Ultimate
WindService Wind Service
WindUltimate Wind Ultimate
WindUnspecified Wind Service
EarthPressureService Other
EarthPressureUltimate Other
EarthPressureUnspecified Other
FloorConstruction Other
FluidContained Other
FluidUncontained Other
FluidUnspecified Other
GroundWaterPressure Other
Hydrodynamic Other
Hydrostatic Other
Ice Other
Other Other
PostTensioning Balance
Settlement Other
Shrinkage Other
Thermal Other
Concept Loading Type Ism Load Cause
Balance PostTensioning
Stressing Dead DeadConstruction
Other Dead DeadSuperimposed
Live Reducible FloorUnspecified
Live Unreducible FloorAssembly
Live Storage FloorStorage
Live Parking ParkingUnspecified
Live Roof RoofAccess
Snow RoofSnowUnspecified
Other Other
Wind Service WindService
Wind Ultimate WindUltimate
Seismic Service SeismicService
Seismic Ultimate SeismicUltimate
64
Chapter 16
RAM Concept
load is split into smaller polygonal area loads and applied
to the surface members they overlap.
It is possible to create a Concept model in a way that makes
it impossible for Concept to maintain the accuracy of both
the Concept and ISM models. For example, consider a
Concept slab containing an opening and a second slab
inside the hole (an island). Concept maintains the user's
intentions by creating an ISM surface member for each
slab. If there is an area load covering both slabs, Concept
must create an additional area load for the island slab.
However, the larger Concept area load will still cover the
island slab, so the next Update operation would create yet
another area load on the island slab. Instead, Concept does
not create a new area load for the island slab and will leave
the ISM surface member unloaded. The preferred method
for modeling this configuration is to split up the larger area
load so that it does not overlap the island slab.
16.3.9 Rebar
Exporting Concept Rebar to ISM
Concept exports three types of rebar to ISM:
User Concentrated Rebar
User Distributed Rebar
Program Transverse Rebar
Concept User Concentrated rebar are exported as ISM
Concentrated Surface Rebar. When the Concept rebar is
entirely contained within a beam and is parallel to the beam
centerline, it is exported as ISM Layer Parallel Rebar.
Plain, anchor, 90 degree and 180 degree hook types are
exported.
Concept User Distributed Rebar are exported as ISM Area
Surface Rebar. Plain, anchor, 90 degree and 180 degree
hook types are exported.
Concept Program Transverse Rebar are exported as ISM
Perpendicular Rebar. Depending on the number of Concept
transverse rebar, multiple ISM perpendicular rebar will be
exported. If the Concept transverse rebar has two or more
legs and is closed, a single ISM Rectangle Tie Rebar will
be exported. If open, a single ISM Open U Tie Rebar will
be exported. ISM Straight Perpendicular Rebar are
exported if there is one leg or as interior legs if there are
greater than two Concept legs.
ISM Perpendicular Rebar are defined by a parallelogram,
whereas Concept generates individual Transverse bars that
are adjusted to fit small variations in slab geometry. It is not
often impossible to fit the Concept Transverse rebar to the
ISM Perpendicular rebar parallelogram exactly. Concept
approximates the ISM parallelogram with the average
width, depth and midpoints of the first and last individual
transverse bars.
Importing ISM Rebar into Concept
Concept imports ISM Concentrated Surface Rebar and
ISM Area Surface Rebar into Concept as User
Concentrated and User Distributed rebar. ISM Layer
Parallel Rebar that are in an imported beam imported and
converted into User Concentrated rebar.
Concept does not import non-horizontal ISM rebar. It also
does not import any incompletely defined ISM rebar type.
ISM Concentrated Surface rebar must define the
BarDirection, BarSpacing, BarCount, BarLength,
LayoutDirection, LayoutPoint and HookLocalAxes
properties. ISM Area Surface rebar must define the
BarDirection, BarSpacing, LayoutBoundary and
HookLocalAxes properties. ISM Layer Parallel rebar must
define the LayoutPath property. ISM Anchor, Hook90,
Hook180 and None (straight) rebar end types are
supported. An Unset or Other hook type is imported as
straight. Hook135 is imported as a 90 degree hook.
LapSplice, OffsetLapSplice, MechanicalSplice and
WeldedSplice are imported as anchors.
Concept never imports ISM Perpendicular Rebar. Concept
only creates Transverse Rebar during a Calc All operation.
Therefore, it cannot be created in any other way, either by
the user or from imported ISM data.
16.3.10 Options
Options controlling the ISM operations are set by choosing
File > Sync ISM > Options. See Figure 16-4.
Figure 16-4 ISM Options Dialog
The options are:
Update Support Members in ISM Repository: Walls and
columns in the ISM repository are updated only when this
option is enabled. This option is stored in the file; by
default, support members are not updated. Support
members are always imported from the ISM repository to
create or update the Concept model and are always
exported when creating an ISM repository.
Export Balance Loading: the Balance loading is
exported to ISM only when this option is enabled. This
option is stored in the file. It is off by default, so the
Balance loading is not exported
65 RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17 Defining the Structure
The easiest and recommended way to define the concrete
structure is to use RAM Concepts automatic meshing
facility (otherwise known as the Mesher). This approach
requires that you define supports, slabs (of varying
thickness), beams and openings with objects that Mesher
uses to generate the finite element model. You do this on
the Mesh Input Layers Standard Plan.
17.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer
There is no set order in which you must define objects.
Some people choose to draw supports first, whereas others
draw the slab outline first. You can edit whatever drawn
objects later.
If you have imported a CAD drawing, make it visible on
the Mesh Input Plan before drawing the structure.
17.2 About columns and walls
RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you
define columns and walls below and above the slab.
Supports above the slab do not provide vertical support,
only horizontal support and bending resistance.
17.3 Column properties
RAM Concept column properties are separated into two
categories: general and live load reduction.
17.3.1 General column properties
Figure 17-1 Column properties: general
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in
Materials Specification).
Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to
far end of column.
Support Set Defines the column as below or above the
floor.
Width Measured along the columns r-axis. Set to zero for
round columns.
Depth / Diameter Measured along the columns s-axis.
Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the
global x-axis. It determines the columns r-axis (and is
usually zero).
Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending
stiffness without changing the dimensions or height. For
example, you may expect an edge column to crack and
rotate more than an internal column and so you might
consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to
increase a columns stiffness, but this is an unlikely
scenario.
Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in
column.
66
Chapter 17
RAM Concept
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and
y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-
axes) at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the z-
direction according to Hookes law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce
results that are more accurate.
17.3.2 Live load reduction column properties
See Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters on
page 148.
17.4 Drawing columns
Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two
columns cannot have the same coordinates unless one is
above and one is below.
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not
the Element layer.
Note: See Setting default properties on page 21 for
relevant information.
To draw a column:
1 Choose the Column tool ( ).
2 Click at the column center.
To copy columns from below to above:
1 Select the columns and choose Edit > Copy.
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column objects
in the same location as the original column objects. The
pasted columns are the active selection.
3 Change the Support Set property from below to
above in the Column Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation
then there are duplicated columns that do not allow the
model to run properly. If you have copied a large number, it
is tedious to delete the second column at each location (one
by one).
17.5 Wall properties
Wall properties are similar to column properties though
instead of width, depth and angle there is thickness. The
fixity settings are somewhat different, and there is no
Bending Stiffness Factor.
The following is a list of RAM Concept wall properties:
far end of wall.
Support Set Defines the wall as below or above the floor.
Thickness
Shear wall Locks the wall to the slab horizontally and
thus restrains it; otherwise, the slab can slide over the
wall.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between wall
and slab about the walls r-axis; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the walls
r-axis at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for the wall to elongate in the z-
incompressible. Compressible walls usually produce
17.6 Drawing walls
The wall tool is very similar to the column tool except that
it uses a line rather than a point. A wall can pass through a
column, or intersect another wall.
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not
the Element layer.
Note: The Wall tool ( ), Right Wall tool ( ) & Left Wall
tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific
toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To draw a wall:
1 Choose the Wall tool ( ).
2 Click at the wall end center points.
To copy walls from below to above:
1 Select the walls and choose Edit > Copy.
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall objects in
the same location as the original wall objects. The pasted
walls are the active selection.
above in the Wall Properties dialog box.
67 RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17.7 About point and line supports
The result of defining a point support is a single support at
a finite element node. The result of defining a line support
is one or more line supports that are each located at a finite
element edges. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
lowest numbered element in determining the support
elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point
supports or line supports at slab steps.
All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be
placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal
rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
Elevation above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab
depth).
Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point
and line supports, as RAM Concept automatically
stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can
turn this automatic stabilization off in the General tab of
the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you
might use a horizontal support is a structure braced against
sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps
something other than a concrete wall provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but Fixed in z-
direction for point supports and Translation in z-direction
fixed for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point
support in the r- or s-direction could result in arch /
membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab
translation along or across the support could result in arch /
membrane action.
17.8 Point support properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept point support
properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between
the point support and the soffit.
Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Allows you to set the local axes.
Fixed in r-direction Prevents movement along the local
r-axis.
Fixed in s-direction Prevents movement along the local
s-axis.
Fixed in z-direction Prevents movement along the
global z-axis.
Rotation about r-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the
local r-axis.
Rotation about s-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the
local s-axis.
17.9 Drawing point supports
Each point support is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
Two point supports cannot have the same coordinates.
Note: The Point Support tool ( ) and Line Support tool
( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar.
See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To draw a point support:
1 Choose the Point Support tool ( ).
2 Click at the point support location.
17.10 Line support properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept line support
properties:
the line support and the soffit.
Translation along support fixed (OFF for line of
symmetry) Prevents the slab from moving along the
support axis.
Translation across support fixed (ON for line of
symmetry) Prevents the slab from moving across the
support axis.
Translation in z-direction fixed (OFF for line of
symmetry) Prevents the slab from deflecting up or down
at the support axis.
Rotation about support axis fixed (ON for line of
symmetry) Prevents rotation of the slab about the
supports longitudinal axis.
Rotation about perp.-to-support fixed (OFF for
line of sym) Prevents rotation of the slab about the
supports transverse axis.
17.11 Drawing line supports
You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is
very useful if a floor is symmetrical and you wish to model
68
Chapter 17
RAM Concept
only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent
post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.
See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To drawing a line support:
1 Choose the Line Support tool ( ).
2 Click at the support end points.
17.12 About springs
The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a
finite element node. The result of defining a line spring is
one or more line springs that are each located at a finite
element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
lowest numbered element in determining the spring
elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate
springs at slab steps.
All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed
at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
depth). For slabs with varying centroid elevations, it can be
difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to the slab
when using lateral springs and supports.
Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as
Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the x- and
y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in
the General tab of the Calc Options dialog box). One
situation where you might use a horizontal spring is a
structure braced against sidesway but modeled without
bracing members (perhaps soil friction provides the
bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force
constant. R- and s-force constants could result in
membrane action.
17.13 Point spring properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept point spring
properties:
the point spring and the soffit.
Spring Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Orientation of the local
axes. The plan shows spring orientation.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
local r-axis.
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
local s-axis.
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
global z-axis.
R-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant
about the local r-axis.
S-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant
about the local s-axis.
17.14 Drawing point springs
Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
Two point springs cannot have the same coordinates.
Note: The Point Spring tool ( ), Line Spring tool ( ),
and Area Spring tool ( ) share the same button on the
Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on
page 6.
To draw a point spring:
1 Choose the Point Spring tool ( ).
2 Click at the spring location.
17.15 Line spring properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept line spring
properties:
the line spring and the soffit.
Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local
local r-axis at each end.
local s-axis at each end.
global z-axis at each end.
R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the
local r-axis at each end.
69 RAM Concept
Chapter 17
S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the
local s-axis at each end.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform
you need to enter only one value. Otherwise you need to
enter two values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This
allows linear variation of the force constant (or moment
constant).
17.16 Drawing line springs
The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool
except that it uses a line rather than a point.
page 6.
To draw a line spring:
1 Choose the Line Spring tool ( ).
2 Click at the line spring end points.
17.17 Area spring properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept area spring
properties:
the area spring and the soffit.
Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local
r-axis.
s-axis.
global z-axis.
R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the
local r-axis.
S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the
local s-axis.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform
you need to enter only one value.
Note: The force constant (or moment constant) can
linearly vary in any direction.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) varies you
need to enter three values, separated by commas (corners 1,
2 and 3). This allows linear variation of the force constant
(or moment constant) in two directions. See Figure 17-2.
Note: If you use the Area Spring tool to specify a varying
force constant (or moment constant), Concept calculates the
unique value of the fourth corner (three points define a
plane).
Figure 17-2 Area spring properties varying from 100 to 200 to 300 units
at the first three corners. For quad areas, Concept calculates the fourth
corner value.
17.18 Drawing area springs
You use the Area Spring tool ( ) to locate the spring area
corners.
page 6.
To draw an area spring:
1 Choose the Area Spring tool ( ).
2 Click at the vertices of the area spring (or enter the
coordinates in the command line).
70
Chapter 17
RAM Concept
3 Close the polygon by typing c in the command line or
clicking at the first vertex.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the
structure it supports.
17.19 About floor areas and members
Objects representing slabs, beams and openings define
floor areas and members. Often these objects overlap.
17.19.1 The priority method
At any floor location, only one thickness (depth) is used,
and the object with the highest priority defines that
thickness.
The thicknesses of overlapping objects do not add to define
the thickness.
For example, you would expect the overall thickness of a
drop panel located at a column to take priority over the slab
thickness. By assigning a Priority to each object, the
automatic mesh generator understands how to generate the
finite elements.
The lowest Priority is 1. This is so that you can keep adding
beams, thickenings and slab areas with higher priorities.
There is no limit to the highest priority (other than your
computer and text overflow).
Note: Overlapping objects for slabs, beams and openings
must have different priorities. Priority numbers need not be
sequential.
17.19.2 Meshing beams as slabs
Beam objects by default do not need to have priorities
specified. However, beams have an option to be meshed
Mesh as Slab using the priority method. Any beams
using the priority method will be meshed first along with
slab and opening areas. The remaining beams are meshed
last and are merged with the elements that result from the
mesh resulting from the priority method. Any gaps
between the beams and other meshed surfaces are filled
during the process, although this will result in a warning.
Note: Supports do not have priorities.
Figure 17-3 Slab, beam and opening objects defined in the Mesh Input
Standard Plan
Figure 17-4 The Element Slab Summary Plan after mesh generation from
Figure 17-3.
17.20 Slab area properties
Slab area properties fall into two categories: general and
behavior.
71 RAM Concept
Chapter 17
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area
properties:
Figure 17-5 Slab area properties - general
Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps
and drop panels, by specifying an increased thickness.
Surface Elevation It is customary to set the typical
elevation as 0. Setting the elevation to a very large value
(such as 100 feet or 30 m) may result in round off errors in
the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using
different surface elevations for different areas.
Priority Generally, the typical slab thickness has a Priority
of 1.
Figure 17-6 Slab area properties - behavior
R-Axis defines an orientation for the slab. If the slab is a
two way slab with identical properties in all directions
(isotropic), then the R-Axis is irrelevant, because there is
no inherent orientation of the slab. However, if the slab is
not isotropic, then this axis (defined as the counter-
clockwise angle from 3 o'clock) defines the r-axis which is
used along with the other slab area properties to define the
behavior of the slab. The s-axis is always 90 degrees
counter-clockwise from the r-axis.
Behavior This defines the slab areas behavior type. It has
four possible designations:
Two-way slab The slab is isotropic and behaves in the
same manner in all directions.
One-way slab The slab has normal bending stiffness
along the r-axis and about the s-axis (Ms). The slab has
only minimal bending stiffness in the perpendicular
direction (Mr). The slab also has reduced torsional
stiffness (Mrs). The in-plane stiffnesses are not affected by
this setting.
No-torsion 2-way slab The slab behaves like a two-
way slab, except that it has only minimal torsional
stiffness (Mrs).
Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic
slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These values
are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In
general, we do not recommend using this option.
Refer to Orthotropic behavior on page 380 for further
information on the use of Behavior properties.
17.21 Drawing slab areas
Use the Slab Area tool ( ) to define the slab area by
clicking on each consecutive point (vertex). To close the
polygon, click on the first polygon point or type c and
press Return.
To draw a slab area:
1 Choose the Slab Area tool ( ).
2 Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.
3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
type c and press Return).
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight
edges.
72
Chapter 17
RAM Concept
17.22 About beams
In RAM Concept, you model beams as thickened slabs
with the beam tool. You can assign properties that
differentiate beam behavior from slab behavior.
17.23 Beam properties
Beam properties fall into two categories: general and
behavior.
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept beam
properties:
Figure 17-7 Beam properties - general
Thickness is the same as beam depth.
Width The beam width automatically appears to scale.
Priority Generally, beams have higher priorities than
slabs.
Mesh As Slab If checked, this beam will be meshed
identically to slabs using the priority method.
Figure 17-8 Beam properties - behavior
The beam behavior properties are very similar to the slab
area properties. The beam R-Axis is automatically set to
the beam longitudinal axis.
Behavior This defines the beams behavior type. It has
four possible values:
Standard The beam is isotropic and behaves in the
same manner in all directions.
No-torsion The beam behaves like a two-way slab,
except that it has only minimal torsional stiffness (Mrs).
Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic
slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These values
are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In
general, we do not recommend using this option.
17.24 Drawing beams
You draw a beam by clicking the start and end points of its
centerline using the Beam tool ( ). Each beam has six
control points. The four additional points are automatically
located so that the beam-ends are perpendicular to the
sides. You can stretch the corner grip points to define
mitered corners.
Note: The Beam tool ( ), Right Beam tool ( ) & Left
Beam tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific
toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To draw a beam:
1 Choose the Beam tool ( ).
2 Click at the each end of the beam centerline.
73 RAM Concept
Chapter 17
To define mitered corners on a beam:
1 Select the beam and choose the Stretch tool ( ).
2 Snap to the beam corner grips and stretch them into
position.
17.25 Slab opening properties
There is only one slab opening property:
Priority Generally, openings have the highest priorities in
the floor.
17.26 Drawing slab openings
The Slab Opening tool ( ) defines an opening in the
slab.
To draw a slab opening:
1 Choose the Slab Opening tool ( ).
2 Click at each slab-opening vertex consecutively.
Note: You approximate curves with a series of straight
edges.
17.27 Checking the structure definition
After you have fully defined the structures geometry, you
should check for obvious errors. RAM Concept flags
illegal modeling when generating the mesh. A list of
possible errors appears in Chapter 18, Generating the
Mesh.
Once you have drawn all the support and floor objects on
the Mesh Input Plan, you must generate the actual finite
element mesh. The structure does not exist until you
generate the mesh.
74
Chapter 17
RAM Concept
75 RAM Concept
Chapter 18
18 Generating the Mesh
There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in
RAM Concept:
Using the automatic meshing facility that uses the mesh
input objects described in Chapter 17, Defining the
Structure.
Using the manual meshing tools.
The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the
recommended method for nearly all models.
The second method allows more control over mesh
intensity. The mesh size can be more widely varied in
different areas of the floor, but editing is more difficult.
Instructions for the second (manual) method are in Chapter
19, Manually Drawing the Finite Elements.
18.1 Generating the mesh automatically
Finite elements do not exist (and hence there is no
structure) until the mesh has been generated. You need to
have defined the mesh input objects (using the procedure
described in the preceding chapter) before generating the
mesh.
It is preferable to generate the mesh as soon as possible,
although it is possible to draw additional objects on other
layers (such as loads) before generation.
18.1.1 Deciding what mesh element size to
use
When generating the mesh you need to decide what
element size to use. The maximum is 32.8 feet (10 meters).
To speed the analysis, it is useful to choose a coarse mesh
for preliminary design and a fine mesh for final design.
A coarse mesh might have an element size of span length /
6. A fine mesh might have an element size of span length /
12. If in doubt, you should investigate the effects of
different mesh element sizes.
To generate the mesh automatically:
1 Click Generate Mesh ( ).
The dialog box shown in Figure 18-1 will appear.
Figure 18-1 Generate mesh dialog box
2 Specify the Element Size in the Generate Mesh dialog
box.
3 Click Generate.
The time taken to generate the mesh depends upon the size
of the floor and the specified mesh element size. For most
models, the mesh generates in less than 15 seconds.
Note: Every time you generate a mesh, RAM Concept
deletes any existing mesh and generates a new one.
18.1.2 Limitations of the automatic meshing
The main automatic meshing limitation is that the
minimum element size is 50 mm (0.164 feet). Concept can
usually overcome this limitation by adjusting the mesh
input objects to generate a mesh. Concept moves mesh
input line objects (for example, walls, line supports) to
accommodate point objects (for example, columns, point
supports).
Concept automatically adjusts the mesh input objects if:
Two control points are closer than the minimum element
size.
A control point is closer to a line than the minimum
element size.
Note: Concept generates warnings during the meshing if it
was necessary to make adjustments. You can stop the
meshing and make corrections. If you continue, you should
check the mesh to see if the adjustments are satisfactory.
Note: Concept generates a warning if two slab areas (or
beams or openings) with the same priority overlap. You can
stop the meshing and make corrections. If you continue you
76
Chapter 18
RAM Concept
should check the mesh to see if the adjustments are satis-
factory as the choice of which slab area (or beam) governs
the elements is effectively random.
Note: Concept moves two columns to the same point that
you draw closer than the minimum element size.
A mesh generates but the model does not run properly if:
A column or point support is outside of the slab areas.
A wall or line support is partially outside the slab areas.
An area spring is completely outside the slab areas.
Two columns or walls of the same support set are dupli-
cated (intersecting walls are allowed).
To avoid mesh warnings:
Do any one of the following:
1 Adjust objects on the Mesh Input plan so that the
minimum element size dimension (or more) separates them.
2 Edit priorities so that slab areas, beams and openings
with the same priorities do not overlap.
18.1.3 Viewing the finite element mesh
You can view the finite element mesh on any plan, but the
Standard Plan of the Element layer is the preferred plan to
use.
To view the finite element mesh:
1 Open Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
The mesh generated at this stage appears to be somewhat
random. This is normal and in fact, for sensible mesh sizes
it produces highly satisfactory design results. At times,
however, such a mesh (adversely) affects the contour plots.
18.1.4 Improving the mesh
You can significantly improve the mesh once design strips
are drawn. The following diagrams show the differences.
Figure 18-2 Mesh before Design Strips
Figure 18-3 Mesh after drawing Design Strips and Regenerating.
18.2 Selectively refining the mesh
Although there is no setting that makes the mesh finer in
some areas than others, you can employ a trick to achieve
this.
18.2.1 Using point and line supports to refine
the mesh
You can draw dummy point or line supports to ensure
that the mesh is finer in particular areas. You must ensure
that all fixity boxes are unchecked, as shown in Figure 18-4
and Figure 18-5.
A refined mesh example is shown in Figure 18-6.
77 RAM Concept
Chapter 18
Figure 18-4 Point support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked.
Figure 18-5 Line support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked
Figure 18-6 Two slabs, identical in every way except for the implementa-
tion of line supports to refine the mesh.
78
Chapter 18
RAM Concept
79 RAM Concept
Chapter 19
19 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements
Note: In most cases, you do not need to draw the finite
element mesh manually. If you have used the automatic
method, there is no need to read this chapter
There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in
RAM Concept:
Using the automatic meshing facility, described in
Chapter 18, Generating the Mesh, that uses the mesh
input objects, described in Chapter 17, Defining the
Structure.
Using the manual meshing tools described in this
chapter.
The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the
recommended method for nearly all models.
The second method allows more control over mesh
intensity: the mesh size can be more widely varied in
different areas of the floor. The method is, however, more
prone to user error and editing is more difficult.
Do not use the manual method to supplement a mesh made
with the automatic meshing facility. This is because manual
elements would be lost if you used the mesh generation
facility. For example, if you added a column element above
in the element layer it would be lost when you regenerated.
19.1 Using the Element layer
There is no set order in which you must define objects.
Most people choose to draw supports first.
If you have imported a CAD drawing, make it visible on
the Element Standard Plan before drawing the structure.
19.2 About column elements and wall
elements
RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you
define columns and walls below and above the slab.
Supports above the slab do not provide vertical support,
only horizontal support and bending resistance.
19.3 Column element properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept column element
properties:
far end of column.
Support Set Defines the column as below or above the
floor.
Width Measured along the columns r-axis. Set to zero for
round columns.
Depth / Diameter Measured along the columns s-axis.
Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the
global x-axis. It determines the columns r-axis (and is
usually zero).
Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending
stiffness without changing the dimensions or height. For
example, you may expect an edge column to crack and
rotate more than an internal column and so you might
consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to
increase a columns stiffness, but this is an unlikely
scenario.
Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in
column.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and
y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-
axes) at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the z-
incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce
19.4 Drawing column elements
Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two
columns cannot have the same coordinates unless one is
above and one is below.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw
column elements at slab element nodes.
To draw a column element:
1 Choose the Column Element tool ( ).
2 Click at the column center.
To copy columns from below to above:
1 Select the column elements and choose Edit > Copy.
80
Chapter 19
RAM Concept
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column
elements in the same location as the original column
elements. The pasted column elements are the active
selection.
above in the Column Element Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation
then there are duplicated column elements that do not allow
the model to run properly. If you have copied a large
number, it is tedious to delete the second column element at
each location (one by one).
19.5 Wall element properties
Wall element properties are similar to column element
properties though instead of width, depth and angle there is
thickness. The fixity settings are somewhat different, and
there is no Bending Stiffness Factor.
The following is a list of RAM Concept wall element
properties:
far end of wall element.
Support Set Defines the wall element as below or above
the floor.
Thickness
Shear wall Locks the wall element to the slab
horizontally and thus restrains it; otherwise, the slab can
slide over the wall.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between the
wall element and the slab about the wall elements r-axis;
otherwise pinned
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the wall
elements r-axis at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for wall element to elongate in the
z-direction according to Hookes law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible walls usually produce
19.6 Drawing wall elements
The wall element tool is very similar to the column tool
A wall element can pass through a column element, or
intersect another wall element.
wall elements along the edge of the slab elements. The ends
of the wall elements must be at slab element nodes. Wall
elements cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To draw wall elements on slab elements:
1 Choose the Wall Element tool ( ).
To draw wall elements where there are no slab elements:
1 Choose the Wall Element tool ( ).
3 Specify the number of elements in the Wall Element Tool
dialog box and click OK.
To copy walls from below to above:
1 Select the wall elements and choose Edit > Copy.
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall elements
in the same location as the original wall element objects.
The pasted wall elements are the active selection.
above in the Wall Element Properties dialog box.
19.7 About point and line supports
The result of defining a point support is a single support at
a finite element node. The result of defining a line support
is one or more line supports that are each located at a finite
lowest numbered element in determining the support
elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point
supports or line supports at slab steps.
All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be
placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
depth).
Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point
and line supports, as RAM Concept automatically
stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can
turn this automatic stabilization off in the General tab of
the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you
might use a horizontal support is a structure braced against
sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps
something other than a concrete wall provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but Fixed in z-
direction for point supports and Translation in z-direction
81 RAM Concept
Chapter 19
fixed for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point
support in the r- or s-direction could result in arch /
membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab
translation along or across the support could result in arch /
membrane action.
19.8 Point support properties
See Point support properties on page 67 for more
information on point support properties.
19.9 Drawing point supports
You draw point supports by clicking at their location with
the Point Support tool ( ).
point supports at slab element nodes.
To draw a point support:
1 Choose the Point Support tool ( ).
2 Click at the point support location.
19.10 Line support properties
See Line support properties on page 67 for more
information on line support properties.
19.11 Drawing line supports
You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is
very useful if a floor is symmetrical and you wish to model
only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent
post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.
line supports along the edge of the slab elements. The ends
of the line supports must be at slab element nodes. Line
supports cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To drawing a line support on slab elements:
1 Choose the Line Support tool ( ).
2 Click at the support end points.
19.12 About springs
The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a
finite element node. The result of defining a line spring is
one or more line springs that are each located at a finite
lowest numbered element in determining the spring
elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate
springs at slab steps.
All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed
at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
depth). For slabs with varying centroid elevations, it can be
difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to the slab
when using lateral springs and supports.
Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as
RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the
x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic
stabilization off in the General tab of the Calc Options
dialog box). One situation where you might use a
horizontal spring is a structure braced against sidesway but
modeled without bracing members (perhaps soil friction
provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force
constant. R- and s-force constants could result in
membrane action.
19.13 Point spring properties
See Point spring properties on page 68 for more
information on point spring properties.
82
Chapter 19
RAM Concept
19.14 Drawing point springs
Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
Two point springs cannot have the same coordinates.
Layer Specific toolbar.
point springs at slab element nodes.
To draw a point spring:
1 Choose the Point Spring tool ( ).
2 Click at the spring location.
19.15 Line spring properties
See Line spring properties on page 68 for more
information on line spring properties.
19.16 Drawing line springs
The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool
line springs along the edge of the slab elements. The ends of
the line springs must be at slab element nodes. Line springs
cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To draw a line spring:
1 Choose the Line Spring tool ( ).
2 Click at the line spring end points.
19.17 Area spring properties
See Area spring properties on page 69 for more
information on area spring properties.
19.18 Drawing area springs
You use the Area Spring tool ( ) and locate the spring
area corners.
To draw an Area Spring:
1 Choose the Area Spring tool ( ).
2 Click at the four corner point locations of the area spring.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the
structure it supports.
19.19 About floor areas
You define floor slabs and beams manually with the slab
meshing tools. Drawing elements manually requires more
thought on the drawing process. Poor decisions could
require a significant amount of editing and duplication of
work.
Drawing elements manually also requires careful
application of the tools to ensure that the side of each
element is the same length as the adjacent element. In other
words, each element node must be at the corner of any
element that touches it. Elements cannot overlap.
You model beam elements as thickened slab elements with
the same slab element tools. You model openings as empty
spaces in the mesh.
19.20 Slab element properties
Slab area properties fall into two categories: general and
behavior.
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area
properties:
Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps
and drop panels, by specifying an increased thickness.
83 RAM Concept
Chapter 19
Figure 19-1 Slab element properties - behavior
R-Axis defines an orientation for the slab. If the slab is a
two way slab with identical properties in all directions
(isotropic), then the R-Axis is irrelevant, because there is
no inherent orientation of the slab. However, if the slab is
not isotropic, then this axis (defined as the counter-
clockwise angle from 3 o'clock) defines the r-axis which is
used along with the other slab area properties to define the
behavior of the slab. The s-axis is always 90 degrees
counter-clockwise from the r-axis.
KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs, KVrs Relative stiffnesses
(compared to isotropic slab stiffness).
Refer to Orthotropic behavior on page 380 for further
information on the use of Behavior properties.
19.21 Drawing the slab elements
You can draw slab elements one or more at a time. Usually
you would attempt to draw as many as practical in one
operation using the Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) or
the Poly Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ). This would often
mean drawing slab panels (with columns in the corners) in
one operation.
Note: The Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) and Poly
Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) share the same button on the
Element layer toolbar.
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight
edges.
To draw a rectangular slab mesh area:
1 Choose the Rect Slab Mesh Elements ( ) tool.
2 Click at two opposite corners of the rectangle.
3 Specify the element size in the Rect Mesh Tool dialog
box and click OK.
To draw a polygon slab mesh area:
1 Choose the Poly Slab Mesh Elements ( ) tool.
2 Click at each slab panel vertex consecutively.
4 Specify the element size in the Poly Mesh Tool dialog
box and click OK.
To draw a single mesh element:
1 Choose one of the single element tools ( ).
2 Click at each of the three (or four) slab panel vertices
consecutively.
19.22 A few final words
Do not click Generate Mesh ( ) after drawing the mesh
elements manually. It deletes all the elements that you have
drawn.
84
Chapter 19
RAM Concept
85 RAM Concept
Chapter 20
20 Drawing Loads
RAM Concept allows you to draw point, line and area
loads and moments on any loading plan. These loads can be
in the directions of the global x-, y- and z-axes and the
moments can be about the global x- and y-axes.
Each load belongs to a loading layer, such as Live Loading.
You define each loading in the loadings window, and draw
the loads on plans.
There is no limitation to the number of loads defined.
Loads are independent of the finite element mesh and have
no effect on the automatic mesh generation. This is
satisfactory for most loads. For very heavy point or line
loads (such as on a mat or transfer slab), however, the loads
should correlate with the finite element mesh nodes. You
can do this by drawing pinned columns and walls above the
floor, and drawing the loads at these locations with the help
of snaps. Alternatively, you can refine the mesh locally
with the use of dummy slab objects. Refer to Selectively
refining the mesh on page 76 for further information.
Horizontal loads may cause applied moments depending
upon the elevation above the slab surface of the loads. If a
load is located at a slab surface step, RAM Concept uses
the thickness of the lowest numbered slab element in
determining the load elevation. For this reason, it is not
advisable to locate point or line loads at steps.
Importing a CAD drawing may assist you in drawing loads.
20.1 About self-weight
RAM Concept automatically calculates the floors self-
weight for the Self-Dead Loading.
20.2 About superposition of loads
Point loads cannot be at the same location on the same
loading layer.
Line loads can intersect or overlap, but cannot have the
exact same length and location on the same loading layer.
Area Loads can overlap, but cannot have the exact same
shape and location on the same loading layer.
Overlapping loads are additive.
20.3 Point load properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept point load
properties:
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance
between the point load and the slab surface.
Fx Point force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal
force).
Fy Point force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal
force).
Fz Point force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical
force).
Mx Point moment about the global x-axis.
My Point moment about the global y-axis.
Note: Although point loads need not be located at a finite
element node, you should consider locating very large loads
at nodes. Point loads must be located on finite elements;
Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs. See
Chapter 8, Choosing Sign Convention.
Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments
unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply the
load at the slab centroid.
20.4 Drawing point loads
Each point load is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
To draw a point load:
1 Choose the Point Load tool ( ).
2 Click at the load location (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
20.5 Line load properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept line load
properties:
between the line load and the slab surface.
Fx Line force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal
force).
86
Chapter 20
RAM Concept
Fy Line force in the direction of global y-axis at each end
(horizontal force).
Fz Line force in the direction of global z-axis at each end
(vertical force).
Mx Line moment about the global x-axis at each end.
My Line moment about the global y-axis at each end.
Note: If the line force (or moment) is uniform you need to
enter only one value. Otherwise you need to enter two
values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This allows
linear variation of the line force (or moment). See Figure
20-1.
Note: Although line loads need not be located at a finite
element node, you should consider locating very large loads
at element edges. Line loads must be completely located on
finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this
rule.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs.
Figure 20-1 Line load properties varying from 10 to 20 units.
20.6 Drawing line loads
There are two line load tools.
20.6.1 Standard line load
The line load tool is very similar to the point load tool
except that it uses two points rather than one point.
To draw a line load:
1 Choose the Line Load tool ( ).
2 Click at the load end points (or enter the coordinates in
the command line).
20.6.2 Perimeter line load
The perimeter line load tool facilitates the drawing of
multiple line load objects around the perimeter, with or
without an offset.
To draw a perimeter line load:
1 Choose the Perimeter Line Load tool ( ).
2 Click anywhere on the slab.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter the Inset Distance,
and click Apply.
20.7 Area load properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept area load
properties:
between the area load and the slab surface.
Fx Area force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal
force).
Fy Area force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal
force).
Fz Area force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical
force).
Mx Area moment about the global x-axis.
87 RAM Concept
Chapter 20
My Area moment about the global y-axis.
Note: If the area force (or moment) is uniform you need to
enter only one value per axis.
Note: The area force (or moment) can linearly vary in any
direction. The area force variation could be for snowdrift,
or sloping soil.
Note: If the area force (or moment) varies you need to
enter three values, separated by commas (vertices 1, 2 and
3). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment)
in two directions. See Figure 20-2.
Note: If you use more than three vertices, Concept calcu-
lates the unique value at all vertices (three points define a
plane).
Note: Area loads must be at least partially located on finite
elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule.
Concept ignores any part of an area load not on a finite
element.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs.
Figure 20-2 Area load properties varying from 10 to 20 to 30 units at the
first three vertices. Concept calculates the values at all other vertices.
20.8 Drawing area loads
You use the Area Load tool ( ) to locate the area load
vertices.
While it is neater to draw area loads that match the floor, it
is satisfactory to make the load oversize. RAM Concept
ignores any part of an area load that is not on a floor
element. Exaggerating the size too much affects the
automatic printing and zooming bounds.
To draw an area load:
1 Choose the Area Load tool ( ).
2 Click at the vertices of the area load (or enter the coordi-
nates in the command line).
3 Close the polygon by typing c in the command line or
clicking at the first vertex.
20.9 Copying loads
You can copy loads from one Loading plan to another. This
is convenient since in practice most loads have values for
more than one loading.
To copy a load from one loading to another:
1 Select the load and choose Edit > Copy.
2 Open the loading plan to which you wish to paste.
3 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new load in the same
plan location as the original load. The pasted load is the
active selection.
4 Edit the properties of the new load.
Note: You can copy, paste and edit multiple loads simulta-
neously.
88
Chapter 20
RAM Concept
89 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21 Creating Pattern Loading
RAM Concept generates pattern loadings based upon the
load patterns that you draw. About load pattern on
page 36 explains the principle of load pattern.
21.1 Deciding how many load patterns to
use
Mathematically, there could a large number of floor pattern
loadings, which would all have different results. For
practical reasons, the maximum number of load patterns is
ten. This allows you to draw five load patterns in each
direction.
Typical pattern loading configurations are:
Figure 21-1 Beam Pattern Loadings. Note that these will not necessarily
produce the maximum negative moments, but they will produce moments
that are very close to the maximum and represent a practical solution in
most situations.
21.2 Drawing load patterns
You draw load patterns as part of the pattern loading
process.
To Draw Load Patterns:
1 Choose Layers > Pattern.
2 Open one of the load pattern plans (from Load Pattern 1
through Load Pattern 10).
3 Double click the Pattern Load tool ( ).
4 Specify which pattern number you wish to use (the
number should correspond to the load pattern plans
number).
Draw the on-pattern areas with a polygon.
5 Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.
7 Repeat for all patterns.
Note: Regardless of which load pattern plan you are using,
the pattern number will be the last one specified. You will
need to change this for each different pattern plan.
21.3 Load pattern filtering
Internally, RAM Concept resolves a pattern loading by
determining which slab and beam finite elements are
partially or wholly within the related load pattern. The
loads on these elements (the element loads) are multiplied
by the on-pattern factor. For elements totally outside the
pattern, the element loads are multiplied by the off-pattern
factor.
Thus, RAM Concepts calculation pattern areas
approximate the pattern areas that you draw. You should
consider this when drawing load patterns and choosing
mesh size as it will affect the actual pattern loadings
generated.
21.3.1 Effect of mesh on load pattern
The finite element mesh regularity and intensity has an
effect on the load pattern process. The following example
best explains the process.
90
Chapter 21
RAM Concept
Load pattern for four-panel slab
Figure 21-2 To generate the maximum My at midspan you would use this
load pattern.
Actual pattern areas for an irregular coarse mesh
Figure 21-3 The point load and some additional area load will be included
in the pattern loading.
Actual pattern areas for an irregular fine mesh
Figure 21-4 With the finer mesh, the point load will not be included and
there will be less additional area load in the pattern loading.
Actual pattern areas for a regular coarse mesh
Figure 21-5 This mesh generates a pattern loading with an area that
closely resembles the load pattern.
91 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Drawing design strips significantly improves the mesh. See
Chapter 18, Generating the Mesh for more information
on improving the mesh.
Note: The mesh becomes more regular if you generate or
regenerate after design strips are drawn.
92
Chapter 21
RAM Concept
93 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
22 Defining Design Strips
Note: Design strips are perhaps the most important tool in
RAM Concept. It is highly recommended that the designer
takes the time to fully understand what a design strip does,
and how to use them. If you use design strips improperly
then the results will be meaningless.
Finite element analysis often produces high peak moments
and stress concentrations which are inappropriate for
calculation of reinforcement and evaluating performance.
Code rules are generally intended for strip methods that
assume an averaging (or smearing) of moment and shear
across a designated width, such as a column strip. RAM
Concept uses design strips and design sections to link finite
element analysis with concrete code rules and concrete
design.
22.1 Definition of a design strip
A design strip is an object that:
contains a series of cross sections at specific locations
is usually the length of a span, or part of a span, but can
in fact have any length within the structure
integrates resultants (moments, shears, axial forces,
torsions) for all load combinations along each cross
section (and, hence, across the design strips width)
applies appropriate code rules to the resultants
A design strip is the same as a span segment strip.
22.2 Design strip terminology
It is important to understand the different objects used to
define design strips.
Span segment A line segment-line entity that is intended
to indicate a portion of a structural span or a whole
structural span. The at support properties of the Span
Segment indicate where the span starts and stops.
Span One or more connected Span Segments that together
make up a single structural span. Nearly all spans require
only one Span Segment.
Frame One or more Spans that are connected together to
form a continuous line of spans.
Span Segment Strip A set of cross sections associated
with a Span Segment. The Span Segment can have up to
three Span Segment Strips (left, center and right). These are
known as design strips.
See Figure 22-1 for further explanation.
Figure 22-1 Design strips for a two-way flat plate.
22.3 Understanding how a design strip
works
RAM Concept generates design strips from span segments.
A design strip is normally the length of a span with a
logical width.
Concept subdivides each individual design strip segment
according to the following parameters:
minimum number of divisions
94
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
maximum division spacing
support width
changes in concrete section along the span
Concept locates a design strip cross section at the start of
each division, plus one at the end. The length of each cross
section equals the width of the design strip at that location.
See Figure 22-2.
Concept modifies the geometrical properties of each design
strip cross section according to the cross section trimming
and inter cross section slope limit settings.
Concept integrates the resultants for each load combination
along the length of each design strip cross section (and
hence across the width of the design strip). See Figure 22-
3.
Concept uses some properties of each span segment to
determine applicable code rules (beam or slab, post-
tensioned or reinforced) for the corresponding design strip.
Concept applies the code rules to the envelope of the load
combination integrals within a rule set. Other span segment
properties (reinforcement bar sizes, cover) facilitate the
actual code rule calculations. See Span segment
properties on page 96 for more information.
Concept separates design strips into two sets: latitude and
longitude. The two sets are for convenience and recognize
that concrete floors should be designed in two directions.
Note: As with all plans, you can rename the Latitude
Design Strip Plan and Longitude Design Strip Plan by
choosing Layer > Rename.
Figure 22-2 Column strip and two middle strips belonging to one span
with cross sections visible.
Figure 22-3 Moment about the y-axis (My) plotted across one cross sec-
tion of three design strips.
22.4 The design strip process
This is best explained by Figure 22-4.
95 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Figure 22-4 Flow diagram of the design strip process
You create Span Segment Strips from Span Segments with the Generate Strips
Step 2 - Create Span Segment Strips
Step 1 - Create the Span Segments
Step 3B - Edit Span Segment Properties
Use the strip generation tab of the Span Segment
Step 3C - Edit Span Segments manually
Use the Span Boundary, Strip Boundary, and Orient Span
Step 3D - Set cross section trimming
This enables you to modify the concrete section
used for shear and flexure calculations.
properties dialog to modify the Span Segment Strips.
Generate Span Segments
Specify the default span segment properties
(and supplement and adjust if necessary)
Draw Span Segments
(manually)
Step 3A - Examine Span Segment Strips
Check the Lock Generated Strips box of any
Span Segment that has satisfactory strips.
Cross Section tools to control the strip generation.
command. You cannot draw or directly edit Span Segment Strips.
Continue
AND / OR EITHER
96
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
22.5 Span segment properties
Span segment properties serve different purposes. RAM
Concept uses properties to determine the following:
design method (e.g. inclusion of axial force)
design strip width and cross section geometry
appropriate code design rules (e.g. beam or slab)
reinforcement
live load reduction
The following is an explanation of Concept span segment
properties:
Figure 22-5 Span segment properties - General
Span Set Determines the set the span segment belongs to:
latitude or longitude.
Environment The environment setting affects which
service rules Concept selects in some codes.
Refer to the appropriate code discussion chapter for more
information:
Section 55.5.4 on page 452 and Section 55.6.10 on
page 458 for relevance to ACI318-02.
Section 59.6.15 on page 536 for relevance to AS3600.
Section 61.5.4 on page 563 for relevance to BS8110.
Section 62.5.4 on page 585 for relevance to IS 456.
Section 63.5 on page 585 for relevance to EC2.
Section 64.5 on page 629 for relevance to CSA A23.3.
Note: This setting has a significant effect on reinforcement
quantities.
Consider Axial Force in Strength Design Uses the
net section axial force in bending design.
This is a very important setting related to the effect of axial
force resultants (not necessarily axial loads) in a cross
section. If you select this option, Concept includes the
interaction of the axial force with the bending in the cross
section strain calculations, similar to typical column design
using strain compatibility. We generally recommend the
consideration of axial forces in strength design. For
sections with net axial compression this will tend to reduce
the reinforcement demand while for sections with net axial
tension it will typically increase the reinforcement demand.
Consider as Post-Tensioned Enables Concept to
decide which code rules are used.
This determines if the design strip segment is checked for
initial service design code rules (for the Initial Service LC)
and whether RC or PT code rules are used (some codes do
not make this distinction).
Note: If consider as post-tensioned is not used then
Concept ignores tendons in strength calculations.
Dont reduce integrated M and V due to sign
change The intent of this option is to allow for safe,
conservative designs where cross sections include regions
of moment (or shear) with opposite signs that cause the
moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be less
than that for a shorter sub- cross section.
When this option is selected, the design forces are always
more conservative than when the option is not selected.
This option should not be used without due consideration.
See Using the Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to
Sign Change option on page 391 for explanation.
Figure 22-6 Span segment properties - Strip Generation
97 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Span Width Calc This determines how Concept
calculates the span width.
The choices are:
Automatic: this applies (sometimes fallible) logic to
calculate the span width as the closest of:
the Span Boundaries (in the same
latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment)
the slab edges
half-way to the nearby spans or walls
Manual: this overrides the automatic calculation and
determines span widths by the closest Span Boundary
items (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span
Segment). See Drawing span segments manually on
page 100 for further information.
Note: When the Manual setting is used in a strip segment,
all of the span boundaries for that strip segment must be
defined. A strip segment generates a span width of zero
when some of its length does not have any span boundaries
defined.
Column Strip Width Calc This determines how the
column strip width is determined. The term column strip
width is used for more than flat slabs with column and
middle strips. The choices are:
Full Width: this is typical for PT slabs designed to
ACI318 and TR43. The column strip width is the same as
the span width.
Code Slab: this is typical for two-way RC slabs, and
two-way PT slabs designed to AS3600. The column strip
width is the narrower of:
the span width
the Strip Boundaries (in the same
a fraction of the distance to the adjacent spans or
supports (for all current codes this fraction is 0.25)
a fraction of the span length on each side of the
span line (for all current codes this fraction is 0.25)
Code T-beam: the column strip width is the narrower of:
the span width
the web width plus 8 times the flange thickness on
either side (ACI codes only)
25% of the span length (ACI codes only)
the web width plus 0.07 times the span length on
either side (AS 3600 and BS 8110 only)
the web width plus 0.058 times the span length
plus 3 times the flange thickness on either side (IS
456 only)
the web with plus 0.07 times the span length plus
0.2 times the overhanging flange width on either
side, not to exceed 0.14 times the span length (EC2
only)
The web width plus 12 times the flange thickness
on either side (CSA A23.3 codes only)
The web width plus 0.1 times the span length on
either side (CSA A23.3 codes only)
Manual: the column strip width is the narrower of:
the span width
Design Column Strip for Column + Middle Strip
Resultants instructs Concept to combine the column and
middle strip forces into a single resultant at the centroid of
the column strip cross section. The middle strip cross
sections will still be generated, but the resulting forces in
them will be zero.
This can be useful, for example, when designing a beam
with a column strip sized for the effective flange width and
middle strips for the slab between the beam effective
flanges. Using this option in this scenario will result in the
beam cross section being designed for all forces in the
entire bay. The middle strip cross sections will not have any
design forces, but can still be designed for minimum
reinforcement.
Skew Angle The angle between the design strip cross
section and a line perpendicular to the span segment. The
typical value is zero.
Min Number of Divisions Determines how many design
cross sections per span.
For N divisions there are N+1 design cross sections. It is
generally advisable to make N an even number. The upside
of more divisions is greater design accuracy; RAM
Concepts ability to find critical design locations and length
of reinforcement is a function of the number of divisions.
The downside of more divisions is that calculating takes
longer; for large models, you might consider using a small
number of divisions (say, 4) and then increasing the
number for final design (but you should consider the effect
of the next property).
There is no reason for all design strips to have the same
number of divisions. Should you be designing a transfer
beam within a flat plate it would probably make sense to
have more divisions for the beam design strip.
Max Division Spacing Overrides the Min Number of
Divisions with an upper bound on division spacing.
Detect Supports and Edges Automatically (resets
supports and widths below) This detects:
98
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
the presence of supports at ends of span segments and
overrides Consider End as Support and Support
Width.
where the span spine is near the slab edge and pulls
back the closest cross section by x, where x is the bar
end cover plus 1 inch / 25 mm.
This is done by setting the support width to x.
If the spine end near the slab edge has detected a
support, then the slab edge detection is NOT
performed (and the regular support width calcs are
used).
Consider End 1 as Support These checkboxes allow
Concept to determine your interpretation of spans in the
structure. This determination of spans affects how Concept
applies code rules that are span-related, including
determining support regions, span regions and areas used in
live load reduction.
Support Width at End 1 The dimension of the support
parallel to the design strip. The support width determines
where the first and last design strip cross sections are
located. Their locations are at half the support width
(measured in the direction of the span) from the ends of the
design strip. This is to facilitate reduction of moments to
face of supports (it is thus important to start and end design
strips at the center of supports). It is conservative to enter
the support width as zero.
Figure 22-7 Span segment properties - Column Strip
Cross Section Trimming Reduces design strip cross
sections based on geometry. See About cross section
trimming on page 105 for more information.
Inter Cross Section Slope Limit Reduces design strip
cross sections based on slope limits. See Inter Cross
Section Slope Limit Trimming on page 108 for more
information.
CS Top Bar The label used to identify the top face
reinforcing bar used for flexural design.
CS Bottom Bar The label used to identify the bottom
face reinforcing bar used for flexural design.
CS Shear Bar The label used to identify the reinforcing
bar used for one-way shear design.
The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement bar
labels (and their properties) are specified in the Criteria >
Materials. It is possible for different design strips to have
different bars.
After completing the calculation process, RAM Concept
reports design strip reinforcement requirements based upon
the bars specified in the design strip properties. You can
view the required reinforcement area in plots and tables.
CS Top Cover Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars.
CS Bottom Cover Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal
bars.
CS Legs in Shear Reinforcement Determines the area
of vertical shear reinforcement by multiplying the number
of legs by the Shear Bar area.
CS Torsion Design The method used for torsion design.
See Torsion Considerations on page 405 of Chapter 51,
Section Design Notes for further explanation.
CS Design System The design system (beam / one-way
slab / two-way slab) for the design strip.
Minimum reinforcement and other rules are dependent
upon what type of system is in use in the span. For
example, the minimum requirements for beam stirrups are
different to those for a one-way slab.
CS Service Design Type (Eurocode 2 only) The
service design type for members defined as PT for the
design strip.
The choices are:
Stress: Perform a hypothetical stress limit design as
prescribed in TR43.
Crack Width: Perform a crack width design in accordance
with Eurocode 2 clause 7.2/7.3.
Stress & Crack Width: Perform both Stress and Crack
Width design.
See Chapter 57, BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) with
TR43 Design for additional information.
99 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
CS Crack Width Limit (Eurocode 2 only) The crack
width limit w
max
to use when designing for Eurocode 2
clause 7.3. When Code is selected the values in UK
National Annex Table NA.4 are used.
CS Span Detailer The detailing system used. See Span
detailing on page 415 of Chapter 53, Reinforcement
Notes.
The choices are:
None
Code
User-defined
CS Min. Reinforcement Location Determines the face
for minimum reinforcement.
The choices are:
Elevated Slab: Some minimum tensile reinforcement code
rules do not consider flexural stress conditions; they
determine minimum reinforcement based solely on
geometry and the expected tensile face. For example,
ACI 318-99 Rule 18.9.3.3 stipulates that the minimum
reinforcement at a column in an elevated slab should be in
the top face. This setting ensures RAM Concept uses that
face.
Mat Foundation: Similar to above, you would expect the
minimum reinforcement at a column in a mat to be in the
bottom face.
Tension Face: This setting details the minimum
reinforcement on the tensile face, or the face with the least
amount of compression.
Top: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the
top face, regardless of the concrete stresses.
Bottom: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on
the bottom face, regardless of the concrete stresses.
None: No minimum reinforcement is detailed.
CS Min. Top Reinforcement Ratio The user defined
reinforcement ratio for the top face. Concept multiplies the
trimmed cross sectional area by this ratio.
CS Min. Bottom Reinforcement Ratio The user
defined reinforcement ratio for the bottom face.
Figure 22-8 Span segment properties - Middle Strip
Note: Middle strips have one additional property to
column strips. The rest of the properties are the same, but
can have different values to those of the column strips.
Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties Sets the
middle strip properties to those of the column strip.
Figure 22-9 Span segment properties - Live Load Reduction
Max live Load Reduction See Chapter 52, Live Load
Reduction Notes for information on Concepts
implementation of live load reduction.
100
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
User specified LLR parameters See Chapter 52, Live
Load Reduction Notes for information on Concepts
implementation of live load reduction.
22.6 Creating span segments
You can create span segments in two ways: automatic and
manual. For most models you use the automatic feature to
generate span segments once in each orthogonal direction,
and then make manual adjustments.
22.6.1 Generating span segments
automatically
Unless you have a truly one-way concrete floor, it would be
usual to first generate one set of span segments (and hence
design strips) on the Latitude Design Spans Plan, and then
an orthogonal set on the Longitude Design Spans Plan.
To generate latitude span segments:
1 Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process >
Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box appears.
2 Set Spans to Generate to latitude.
3 Select other options and click OK.
The span segments appear (with nominated orientation) on
the Latitude Design Spans Plan.
You should repeat this process for the longitude direction.
22.6.2 Drawing span segments manually
You sometimes need to manually draw or adjust span
segments for floors that are not rectilinear or have
complications.
To draw a single span segment:
1 Choose the Span Segment tool ( ).
2 Click at the span segment start point.
3 Click at the span segment end point.
The two clicks define the span segment spine.
To draw multiple span segments:
1 Choose the Span Segment Polyline tool ( ).
2 Click at the first span segment start point.
3 Click at the first span segment end point.
4 Click at the second span segment end point.
5 Continue to click segment end points until all related
segments are drawn.
6 Right click and select enter to close the operation.
Note: Start and end points are normally supports. There
are, however, exceptions, such as a design strip used for a
pour strip to discriminate between PT and RC areas, or
used for a span with user-defined reinforcement in discrete
locations.
22.7 Creating span segment strips
(design strips)
You generate span segment strips from span segments. This
can be done for all strips (on both latitude and longitude
plans) or just selected strips.
To generate span segment strips
1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process >
Generate Strips.
Note: The Generate Strips command does not generate
strips for any span segment with the Lock Generated Strips
checked. This is useful when you are satisfied with some, but
not all, of the design strips.
Note: Each span segment can generate up to 3 strips: a
center (column) strip, a left (middle) strip and a right
(middle) strip. Together, these three strips form the entire
span strip.
To generate some span segment strips
1 Select one or more span segments
2 Choose the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).
101 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Concept recalculates the span segment strips for the
selected span segments.
22.8 Defining span segment widths and
strip widths manually
Concept often generates span segment widths and strips
that require modification. This tendency becomes apparent
once you have tried the span segment generation a few
times. You should always examine the strip widths to
determine that they are to your satisfaction.
22.8.1 Defining span segment boundaries
manually
You can manually define the span segment width when the
automatic span width calculation has not provided a
satisfactory result.
To set the span segment width:
1 Choose the Span Boundary Polyline tool.
2 Click at the span boundary start point.
3 Click at the next span boundary point.
4 Continue to click span boundary points until all are
defined.
5 Right click and select enter to close the operation.
Note: Boundaries with a span set of latitude (longitude)
only affect latitude (longitude) span segment strips.
Example 22-1
Figures 22-10 through 22-12 show the use of span
boundaries to control the span segment width.
Figure 22-13 shows an alternative.
Figure 22-10 Slab with span segments.
102
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
Figure 22-11 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 22-10.
One span has some illogical design strips because the calculated span
width is excessive.
Figure 22-12 Regenerated design strips after modification of span width
with span boundaries (shown inside ellipses).
Figure 22-13 The same span segment strips with the cross sections orient-
ed to ninety degrees. This did not require manual span boundaries.
22.8.2 Defining strip boundaries manually
You can manually define the column strip boundaries
when the Column Strip Width Calc has not provided a
satisfactory result.
To set the strip boundary:
1 Choose the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
2 Click at the strip boundary start point.
3 Click at the next strip boundary point.
4 Continue to click strip boundary points until all are
defined.
Unequal spans are a source of varying column strip widths.
You can choose to accept the column strip widths that
Concept calculates, or make some modifications.
BS8110 Clause 3.7.2.9 states the following:
Columns strips between unlike panels: Where there is a
support common to two panels of such dimensions that the
strips in one panel do not match those in the other, the
division of the panels over the region of the common
support should be taken as that calculated for the panel
giving the wider column strip.
The column strips in the following example are modified
with logic derived from this clause.
103 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Example 22-2
Figures 22-14 through 22-16 show the use of strip
boundaries to control the column strip width
Figure 22-14 Slab with span segments.
Figure 22-16 Strip boundaries have made transitioning column strip
widths
Note: The short span segments in Figure 22-16 have
Column Strip Width Calc set to Manual
Example 22-3
Figures 22-17 through 22-20 show the use of strip
boundaries to control the column strip width.
Figure 22-17 Slab with span segments
104
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
One span (with gray shading) has illogical span width and column strip
width.
Figure 22-19 Span boundaries have made a logical span width, but the
column strip width is still a problem.
Figure 22-20 Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
Example 22-4
Short spans and cantilevers present problems for the design
because Concept will generate narrow column strips.
Codes recommend that columns strips are no more than
half the span in width. Concept makes the (commonly
used) assumption that the equivalent length of a cantilever
is 2L. The cantilever column strip width is thus L. This can
be quite narrow for short cantilevers.
Figure 22-21 Slab with span segments
105 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Figure 22-23 Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
22.9 Cross Section Trimming
RAM Concept automatically trims cross sections in span
segment strips according to the trimming settings in the
associated span segments.
22.9.1 About cross section trimming
True cross section shapes in a slab can be quite irregular
due to slab steps and other forming or architectural
considerations. While it is generally advised to model the
geometry of the concrete as per the form in the constructed
building, it is not advised to always use the true geometry
in design. It is often better to modify cross sections
considering both their own shape and that of the nearby
concrete.
Concept offers two types of cross section trimming: Single
Cross Section Trimming and Inter Cross Section Slope
Limits.
Single Cross Section Trimming considers one cross-section
at a time and modifies the cross-section based on the user-
specified trimming type.
Inter Cross Section Slope Limits trims the top and/or
bottom of cross-sections based on the adjacent cross-
sections, their elevations, and the distance between the
cross-sections.
Inter Cross Section Slope Limit trimming always occurs
after Single Cross Section Trimming.
22.9.2 About shear core
It is important to understand shear core before using
cross section trimming.
Concept defines the shear core as the parts of the trimmed
cross section that include any vertical slices that extend
from the top of the cross section to the bottom of the cross
section, as shown in Figure 22-24.
Concept bases one-way shear calculations on the entire
shear force and shear core. For example, in a T-beam the
shear calculations are based on the cross-sectional area of
the stem and the flange immediately above the stem.
Cross-sections can have multiple separate cores. For
example, in a double-T-beam, the core is the two stems and
the flange areas above the two stems. Concept typically
106
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
considers this core to be the same as a single core with the
same (total) width.
Note: The shear core is modified for post-tensioning ducts
as described in Concrete Core Determination on
page 405.
Figure 22-24 Shear core (shaded) for various cross sections
Some odd shaped cross-sections do not have a shear core.
In such cases, Concept cannot calculate some capacity
values (such as shear capacity). See the example in Figure
22-25.
Figure 22-25 One cross section with a narrow shear core and one with
zero shear core.
22.9.3 Shear core in slabs
It is common for Concept to report unexpected shear
reinforcement in slabs with section changes when the
trimming is not set appropriately.
It is quite possible for a slab cross section with a small
shear core to show large amounts of shear reinforcement or
even design failure, even when the shear force is small. See
Section 22.9.5 for trimming settings for rectification.
Figure 22-26 Slab depression showing shear core (right). Such narrow
shear core slivers often result in shear reinforcement and design failure.
22.9.4 Viewing a perspective of design strip
cross sections
Viewing a perspective of the design strip cross sections is a
useful way of checking the validity of the design strip cross
section trimming settings.
To view the latitude design strip cross section perspective:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Cross Sections
Perspective
Figure 22-27 Design strip cross section perspective. Parts of the cross sec-
tion not in the shear core are a different color.
22.9.5 Single Cross Section Trimming
Concept offers six different types of single cross section
trimming:
Max Rectangle The top and bottom of the cross section is
trimmed, and other pieces may be removed to produce a
cross section with a uniform top and bottom elevation, and
a maximum area. The rectangle formed may actually be
zero shear core:
no vertical slice extends
from top to bottom
narrow shear core
107 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom
elevations.
Figure 22-28 Untrimmed slab showing cross-section (left) and shear core
(right).
Figure 22-29 Beam rectangle trimming (left) and Slab Rectangle
trimming (right) showing revised cross-sections. The shear core is now the
same as the cross section.
Beam Rectangle Vertical slices of the cross section are
removed until the remaining portion is the maximum
height rectangle possible. This rectangle can be multiple
separated rectangles with the same top and bottom
elevations. See the example in Figures 22-28 and 22-29.
Slab Rectangle The top and bottom of the cross section is
trimmed to produce a cross section with a uniform top and
bottom elevation, and a maximum width. If multiple
maximum-width rectangles are possible, the deepest on
(maximum area) is used. The rectangle formed may
actually be multiple separated rectangles with the same top
and bottom elevations. See the example in Figures 22-28
and 22-29.
T or L The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed,
and other pieces may be removed to produce a cross
section with a uniform top elevation, and only two bottom
elevations (flange bottom and web bottom). The Tees and
Els formed can be joined (such as double-tees) or
separated. Rectangles are considered the same as flangeless
Tees. See the example in Figures 22-30 and 22-31.
Figure 22-30 Untrimmed beam showing cross-section (left) and shear
core (right).
Figure 22-31 T or L trimming showing revised section (left) and shear
core (right).
Inverted T or L Same as T or L, but with the flange on the
bottom.
Max Shear Core The top and/or bottom of the cross
section is trimmed to produce a cross section with the
maximum shear core area. See the example in Figures 22-
32 and 22-33.
Figure 22-32 Untrimmed beam showing cross- section (left) and shear
core (right).
Figure 22-33 Max Shear Core trimming showing revised section (left)
and shear core (right).
None - No (single) cross section trimming is performed.
108
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
22.9.6 Selecting cross section trimming
You must determine which cross section trimming is most
appropriate, but the following is provided for guidance:
Typical slabs with drop caps (but not drop panels):
The best trimming is usually Max Rectangle.
Slabs with drop panels (but not drop caps):
The best trimming is usually T or L.
Slabs with drop panels and drop caps:
The best trimming is usually T or L, but this assumes that
the drop cap cross-sectional area is smaller than the drop
panel cross sectional area.
Down-turned beams:
The best trimming is usually T or L.
Up-turned beams:
The best trimming is usually Inverted T or L.
After a Calc-All, you can view the actual cross-section
perspectives. See Viewing a perspective of design strip
cross sections on page 106.
22.9.7 Inter Cross Section Slope Limit
Trimming
Once cross sections have been individually trimmed, they
are trimmed relative to each other. This Inter Cross Section
Slope Limit trimming effectively trims the top and bottom
elevations of adjacent cross section to limit the slopes
between them.
This is done because compression and tension forces
cannot flow at sharp angles from one cross-section to the
next.
Figures 22-34 through 22-37 show two examples with the
Inter Cross Section Slope Limit set to 0.25.
Figure 22-34 Elevation of thickened slab. It would be unrealistic to use a
design depth of t
2
at cross-section A-A.
Figure 22-35 Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope
limit of 0.25.
A slope limit of 0.0 will not allow any change between
adjacent cross sections top elevations and bottom
elevations. This effectively trims all the cross sections in a
span segment strip to have the same top and bottom
elevation.
In general, we do not recommend using a slope limit over
0.25.
Figure 22-36 Elevation of stepped slab. It would be unrealistic to use the
full depth for all cross-section design.
Figure 22-37 Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope
limit of 0.25.
22.10 Improving the mesh
The presence of design strips can significantly improve the
regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that
once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate
the mesh. See Chapter 18, Generating the Mesh for more
information.
span direction
t
1
t
2
A
A
4
1
span direction
109 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
22.11 Additional design strip information
RAM Concept automates a large percentage of the design
strip process. It is relatively straightforward to rationalize
the layout of design strips when the support arrangement is
rectilinear.
The more complicated the geometry the more you have to
think about the design strip layout and make manual
changes.
If there is a lot of repetitive geometry in a floor then it
should not be necessary to use design strips everywhere.
You should only use as many as required to adequately
design the floor. For example, if a floor has many beams of
the same loading, tributary area, span and size then there is
no need to use design strips for each similar beam. This is
just as you would not perform hand calculations for each of
twenty identical beams. Not withstanding, although slabs
or beams may appear identical, continuity effects and other
considerations may have a significant influence and the
results could be different.
It is better to define design strips properly in some critical
areas than to cover the floor with unsuitable strips.
When in doubt, draw a design strip, but keep in mind that
the number of design strips affects the calculation time.
Some engineering judgement is always a good thing.
Keep in mind that any area without strips will not have the
finite elements improved when you regenerate the mesh.
In general, design strips for one span set (latitude or
longitude) should not overlap.
For beam and slab systems, you might consider placing
design strips parallel and in between the beams. This is
because the beam strips only collect the moments and
shears over the width of the strip. If the beams are not
significantly stiffer than the slab, there may be design
reinforcement required for the slab.
The following sections discuss some situations with
irregular geometry.
Note: See Miscellaneous tips on page 114 for some
more tips and hints.
22.12 Irregular column layouts
Laying out design strips for irregular column layouts
requires consideration of a number of issues.
These include:
1 Skew angles: whether latitude and longitude design strips
should be strictly orthogonal.
2 If tendons components from two directions are affecting
the design strip.
The following sections discuss these issues.
22.12.1 Design Strip Skew Angles
It is intuitive that there would be a limit on the skew angle
of design strips. One reference guideline is the Eurocode
(EC2: 4.3.1.1 P(8)): For slabs, deviations between the
direction of the principal stress and the main reinforcement
of less than 15 degrees may be ignored.
This suggests that flat slabs / flat plates should be designed
for two directions that are between 75 and 105 degrees
apart, which means the skew angle should not exceed
fifteen degrees.
The span segment property Skew Angle enables you to
manipulate span segments such that design strip cross
sections are normalized in each direction. This is shown in
figures 22-38 through 22-41.
Figure 22-38 Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew an-
gle is zero so the cross sections (shown in Figure ) are perpendicular to the
span segment.
110
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
Figure 22-39 Design strip cross-section
Figure 22-40 Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew an-
gle is minus fifteen degrees so the cross sections (shown in Figure 22-41)
are parallel to those of adjacent spans
Figure 22-41 Revised design strip cross sections.
22.12.2 Effect of tendon components on
design strip cross sections
In many instances the latitude and longitude tendons
may be detailed and constructed in a non-orthogonal
manner. This is often ignored in hand or strip calculations
but it is a real issue that can affect design criteria such as
service, strength and ductility.
RAM Concept considers the force components of all
tendons that cross a design strip cross section (or a design
section). The following figures show an example.
Figure 22-42 A skewed design strip with three design cross sections. The
latitude tendons are not orthogonal to the longitude tendons.
Figure 22-43 Perspective shows the central cross section is perpendicular
to the latitude tendons which are at the low point. Due to the layout the strip
collects a component of the longitude tendon which is at its high point. This
configuration may cause design issues.
111 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
22.12.3 Examples of irregular grids
The following examples show design strip layouts for non-
rectilinear grids.
Example 22-5 Column and middle strips
Figures 22-44 through 22-46 show the process of
generating column and middle strips for an irregular grid.
Figure 22-46 shows design strips, a number of which are
not satisfactory. In particular, the 3-2 span segment strips
do not adequately consider the slab near the irregular
columns.
Figures 22-47 through 22-50 show a better solution
enabled with manual modifications.
Figure 22-44 Irregular column layout
Figure 22-45 Spans generated by Concept.
Figure 22-46 Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatis-
factory design strips.
Figure 22-47 Span 2-1, 3-2 and 4-1 deleted
Figure 22-48 Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renum-
bering
112
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
Figure 22-49 Regenerated design strips based on revised spans.
Figure 22-50 Regenerated design strips after using the Orient Span
Cross Section tool.
Example 22-6 Full panel design strips for an irregular grid
(ACI318 and TR43 post-tension design)
Figure 22-51 Irregular column layout
Figure 22-52 Spans generated by Concept.
Figure 22-53 Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatis-
factory design strips.
113 RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Figure 22-54 Span 2-1, 3-2 and 4-1 deleted
Figure 22-55 Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renum-
bering
Figure 22-56 Regenerated design strips based on revised spans.
Figure 22-57 Regenerated design strips after using the Orient Span
Cross Section tool.
22.12.4 Drawing design strips near walls
There are some considerations for drawing design strips
near walls.
Omission of design strips parallel to walls
Since a wall is a continuous support, there is usually no
need to design a floor over, and parallel to, a wall for
strength.
You may, however, be interested in the minimum
reinforcement requirements and so a design strip could be
warranted.
Strips over or under walls will occasionally have unrealistic
stress peaks as the forces and moments are continually
transferred back and forth between the wall elements and
the slab elements. For this reason, some designers
eliminate span segments over and under walls.
Figure 22-58 Column and middle strips with strip omitted over wall.
22.12.5 Changing from PT to RC design
It is quite common for a floor to have a mixture of PT and
RC areas. For example, a pour strip (an area with no post-
tensioning that joins two post-tensioned slabs).
114
Chapter 22
RAM Concept
For most codes, PT design rules are different from those for
RC. As such, you should use multiple design strip
segments in one span.
Figure 22-59 shows two examples of a slab with tendons
stopping either side of a pour strip (in gray).
On the left, span segment 2-1 has been generated and
extends from support to support. This means that the entire
segment is designed according to the Consider as Post-
Tensioned option. If the option is checked, then the pour
strip design is wrong.
On the right, span segments 1-1, 1-2(2) and 1-1 (3) have
been drawn manually. The Consider End x as Support
options have been unchecked, and support widths set to
zero, where end x is at the pour strip.
The Consider as Post-Tensioned option is checked for 1-
1 and 1-1(3), but not 1-1(2). The pour strip is thus designed
as reinforced, not post-tensioned, concrete. Concept
designs the PT span segments for service stress rules and
checks initial stresses, but not the RC areas.
Figure 22-59 Multiple span segments used to model an RC pour strip.
Note: You could define the pour strip to have orthotropic
behavior such that it is very flexible in the Y direction. This
is done in the Mesh Input Layer. See Slab area properties
on page 70 of Chapter 17, Defining the Structure.
22.13 Miscellaneous tips
Middle strip support widths
Middle strip support widths are the same as those of the
associated column strip. Should you require to use middle
strips with a different support width (say, zero), you need to
manually draw span segments for the column and middle
strips and use the span boundary tool.
Span segments that have no width
A span segment has zero width if the Span Width Calc is
set to manual and some of its length does not have any
span boundaries defined.
Design strips (span segment strips) with no cross sections
You can specify a design strips minimum number of
divisions as zero. Combined with a large maximum
spacing, the number of cross sections could then be zero.
This could be useful in affecting other span segments strip
generation, without slowing down the calculations. (The
overall number of cross sections has a significant effect on
calculation time).
For an example of this application, see steps 13 to 15 on
page 365 of Chapter 48, Mat Foundation Tutorial.
22.14 A final word on design strips
Design strips are extremely powerful tools, but that is all
they are: tools. It is important that you understand the
calculations that these tools perform, so you can determine
the appropriateness of the calculation for the situation
under consideration, and so you can set the tools
parameters correctly.
115 RAM Concept
Chapter 23
23 Defining Design Sections
A design section is the equivalent of one design strip cross
section. You draw design sections manually to supplement
design strips.
23.1 Using design sections
There are situations where you may choose to use design
sections rather than design strips. This would include:
In some areas, you may only require design information
at one cross section rather than for an entire span.
A design strip may not provide sufficient design infor-
mation.
A design strip may be inappropriate. For example, a slab
step may not be orthogonal to the span (and design strip)
and you want the reinforcement bars designed perpen-
dicular to the step. In this case, you might draw a design
section parallel to the step.
You find it is too difficult to define a design strip for an
area with very complicated structural geometry.
23.2 Design section properties
Design sections have similar properties to design strips.
See Span segment properties on page 96 for definitions
and explanations.
The following properties are unique to design sections:
Figure 23-1 Design section properties - General
Top Ignore Depth The top concrete ignored in flexural
and one-way shear design. See About ignore depths on
page 116 for more information on this important issue.
Bottom Ignore Depth The bottom concrete ignored in
flexural and one-way shear design. See About ignore
depths on page 116 for more information on this
important issue.
Figure 23-2 Design section properties - Design Parameters
Span Length Used to calculate the following:
Minimum reinforcement rules for some codes.
The upper bound on f
ps
for unbonded tendons based
upon the selected codes criteria (these criteria often
include a span length parameter).
Tributary Length This creates a zone over which the
reinforcement required by the design section must be
provided (development lengths, if required, are in addition
to this zone).
The zone length on the right side of the design section is
the smaller of these two values:
TributaryLength/2.0
(SpanRatio - 0.0) * SpanLength
The zone length on the left side of the design section is the
smaller of these two values:
TributaryLength/2.0
(1.0 - SpanRatio) * SpanLength
The intent of the span-ratio-based limit is to restrain the
reinforcement zone to within the span, even if the design
section is at the beginning or end of a span.
Note: The Visible Objects dialog can be used to show the
reinforced zone to be outlined and hatched. The region
displayed also considers all the span ratio implications. The
hatched region does not display before a calc-all.
Span Ratio Determines the location of the design section
relative to supports and midspan.
116
Chapter 23
RAM Concept
Strip Type (Eurocode 2 only) Determines the type of
strip defined by this design section.
The choices are:
Col. Strip (Full Width): Use design rules for full bay width
cross sections (generally used without middle strips).
Col. Strip (w/ Mid. Strips): Use design rules for partial bay
width column strips (generally used in conjunction with
middle strips).
Middle Strip: Use design rules for partial bay width middle
strips (generally used in conjunction with column strips).
CS Service Design Type (Eurocode 2 only) The
service design type for members defined as PT for the
design strip.
The choices are:
Stress: Perform a hypothetical stress limit design as
prescribed in TR43.
Crack Width: Perform a crack width design in accordance
with Eurocode 2 clause 7.2/7.3.
Stress & Crack Width: Perform both Stress and Crack
Width design.
See Chapter 57, BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) with
TR43 Design for additional information.
CS Crack Width Limit (Eurocode 2 only) The crack
width limit w
max
to use when designing for Eurocode 2
clause 7.3. When Code is selected the values in UK
National Annex Table NA.4 are used.
23.3 Drawing design sections
When using design sections it is advisable to draw one set
on the Latitude Design Spans Plan, and the other on the
Longitude Design Spans Plan.
Design sections are located by a line that has a start point
and an end point.
To draw a design section:
1 Choose the Design Section tool ( ).
2 Click at the design section start point.
3 Click at the design section end point.
Note: You can use relative coordinates to define exact
lengths. Alternatively, you can draw User Lines to provide
snap points to define exact lengths.
23.4 About ignore depths
Design sections use the full concrete section available
unless overridden by Top Ignore Depth or Bottom
Ignore Depth.
In many instances, it is inappropriate to use the full
concrete cross-section properties of a design section for
flexural and one-way shear design since some concrete is
not effective.
Note: Design section ignore depth settings are the
equivalent of design strip cross section trimming settings.
See Cross Section Trimming on page 105 of Chapter 22,
Defining Design Strips for more information.
23.4.1 When to use ignore depths
It is sometimes obvious when to use ignore depth. Often,
however, engineering judgement is required to determine
the use of ignore depth.
You should decide if the concrete is effective based on code
rules and a practical assessment of the situation. There are
too many permutations of concrete form to lay down rules,
and, as such, the following is for discussion purposes only.
23.4.2 Examples of concrete form that should
use ignore depth
The following are examples of when design sections
should ignore part of the concrete cross-section:
Example 1
A two-way slab thickening that the building code deems
does not comply as a drop panel. That is, a drop cap. You
should ignore the incremental thickness of the drop cap
below the slab. RAM Concept then only uses the drop cap
for punching checks.
Figure 23-3 Two-way slab with drop cap that should be ignored for flex-
ure.
117 RAM Concept
Chapter 23
Example 2
A beam or slab that supports an upstand that is not an
effective part of the concrete section. You should enter an
appropriate Top Ignore Depth value.
Figure 23-4 Beam with upstand to be ignored.
Example 3
A beam or slab that deepens abruptly and the full depth of
the concrete cannot be mobilized for flexure. You should
enter an appropriate Bottom Ignore Depth value.
Figure 23-5 shows bending moments in a slab
perpendicular to a beam. For such an arrangement you need
to decide if the slab should be designed for the bending
moment at the face of the beam, or within the beam.
Figure 23-5 Slab bending moments
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment at the
face of beam, then it is a matter of locating a design section
within the slab depth.
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment within
the beam then you should consider the actual depth that can
be mobilized for bending.
Figure 23-6 Slab supported by a beam that is effective for slab bending.
Figure 23-7 Slab supported by a deep beam that is not fully effective for
slab bending. Ignore depth should be used for the design sections to utilize
a shallower section.
23.4.3 Effect of ignore depth on
reinforcement location
RAM Concept locates reinforcement based upon the covers
and ignore depth settings. You should consider this to
ensure that reinforcement bars are designed at the
appropriate depth.
Figure 23-8 Using ignore depth to locate reinforcement bars at the correct
elevation.
23.5 A final word on design sections
Design sections are powerful tools, but that is all they are:
tools. It is important that you understand the calculations
118
Chapter 23
RAM Concept
that these tools perform, so you can determine the
appropriateness of the calculation for the situation under
consideration, and so you can set the tools parameters
correctly.
119 RAM Concept
Chapter 24
24 Defining Punching Shear Checks
Punching shear is often a critical consideration when
designing slabs, In particular, post-tensioned slabs are
usually thinner than their reinforced counterparts and hence
punching considerations are even more important.
24.1 About punching shear checks
RAM Concept can calculate punching failure planes and
the punching shear stresses due to column reactions (Fz,
Mx, My).
RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of
potentially critical sections. For unusual geometries, RAM
Concept may not check the appropriate section and / or
may check inappropriate sections that give higher than
appropriate stress ratios. You should review RAM
Concepts selections of potentially critical sections and use
engineering judgment to decide if RAM Concepts
selections and the application of the ACI 318 model are
appropriate.
24.2 Punching shear check properties
and options
The following explains the general and code specific
Punching Shear Check properties and options.
24.2.1 General
Maximum Search Radius The radius that defines the
area RAM Concept searches for potential failure locations.
The analysis is conservative when you set a very large
radius, but this has two detrimental effects: Concept will
need to review a larger area of slab and hence take longer
to check that punching location. More importantly,
Concept will consider slab openings that are far from the
column in determining the potentially critical section that
may result in a smaller critical section than is appropriate.
Cover to CGS The distance that will be subtracted from
the slab depth in each region to determine the effective
depth for critical section calculations.
For columns under, this is usually the distance from the top
of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. Concept subtracts
this distance from the slab thickness to determine the d
distance.
If the depth in any region is smaller than the specified
Cover to CGS, the region is treated as a hole.
Angle This is the angle of the first ray measured counter-
clockwise from the global x-axis.
Number of Desired Sections per Zone A zone can be
envisioned as a region outside a column, drop cap, beam,
etc. A column connection in a simple plate will have only
one zone. A column connection with a drop cap will have
multiple zones. This property enables Concept to determine
how many sections you want to generate in each of these
zones.
This property can be used to eliminate unwanted sections,
but caution should be used when reducing the desired
number of sections. The sections generated are based upon
the minimum critical section cross-sectional area, and they
are not actually analyzed until after they are generated. By
setting this value to 1 you would be likely to get only the
most critical section in each zone but this is not guaranteed.
Edge Treatment This determines how RAM Concept
treats edges and openings.
An edge treatment of Sector Voids is always conservative.
For columns near a slab edge, however, the Sector Voids
setting stops the critical section before it reaches the slab
edge (at a ray from the column center to the slab edge that
has a length equal to the search radius).
An edge treatment of Failure Planes probably produces
better results for critical sections at edge and corner
locations. This setting, however, requires you to review the
results more carefully to ensure that Concept has checked
all the appropriate sections.
An edge treatment of Ignore Edges is generally
unconservative. You may want to try this setting to see if
Concept finds a critical section that it missed with the other
settings.
Connection Type This determines which column
classification Concept uses for calculating allowable
stresses.
A Corner type uses corner column rules (post-tensioning is
ignored).
An Edge type uses edge column rules (post-tensioning is
ignored).
An Interior type uses interior column rules (Concept
considers the section as post-tensioned if the P/A exceeds
125 psi).
An Auto type determines if the column is corner, edge or
interior type based upon the total void angle around it. If
the void angle is less than 90 degrees then the column is an
interior type. If the void angle is between 90 and 180
120
Chapter 24
RAM Concept
degrees then the column is an edge type. If the void angle is
180 degrees or more then the column is a corner type.
See Column connection type on page 650 of Chapter 66,
Punching Shear Design Notes for more information.
Use Ancon Shearfix SSR System If this option is
selected then the Ancon Shearfix system will be used for
any necessary SSR design.
SSR System The stud shear reinforcement system used,
if required, for design. These systems can be edited on the
Materials page. This selection is only applicable if the
Use Ancon Shearfix SSR System is not selected.
Max Overhang Factor The maximum distance, as a
function of effective depth d, to allow the critical
sections to extend from the originating shape.
Align with Rectangular Columns Aligns the punch
check angle with the rectangular column angle during a
calc all.
Design SSR if Necessary Generates an SSR design (if
possible) where the unreinforced strength is insufficient.
Align SSR w/ Punch Check Axis Aligns the SSR with
the punch check axis. For example, it is intended to be used
when the slab edge is not parallel to the column faces and it
would be preferable to have the rails align with the slab
geometry instead of the column face.
Note: This last option is not available for AS3600 as the
SSR are always aligned with the punching check axis.
24.2.2 Ancon Shearfix Parameters
Top and Bottom Cover The cover is used in
conjunction with the slab depth to determine the physical
rail depth.
Stud Size The Ancon Shearfix stud size (diameter) to use
in the design. If auto is selected, RAM Concept will
design the smallest stud size possible for the maximum
stud spacing and fixed rail layout.
Note: These parameters are only used when the Use
Ancon Shearfix SSR System option is selected.
Use ACI 421.1R-99 Increased Max V
n
Suggestion
Allows the use of a higher maximum for SSR design.
Use ACI-421.1R-99 Increased V
c
Suggestion
Allows the use of a higher v
c
value for use in strength
computations for SSR design.
Use ACI-421.1R-99 Increased Max Stud Spacing
Suggestion Allows higher maximum stud spacings,
depending upon the stress levels in the critical sections.
Note: Although ACI 421.1R-99 is an ACI publication, it is
not officially recognized by the ACI 318 standard. As such,
it should only be utilized under the discretion and judgment
of an Engineer with a full understanding of the provision
and its recommendations.
24.2.3 AS3600 specific options
Closed Ties In R/S-Axis Torsion Strip Use these
options if you are providing minimum closed ties in the
torsion strips in accordance with AS3600. Concept does
not actually design this reinforcement, but uses the
appropriate code provisions in calculating the punching
capacity. You should ensure that this reinforcement is
provided if using these options.
24.2.4 BS 8110/EC2 specific options
Rail Layout Pattern Controls the layout of the primary
rails around a column. The cruciform layout selection will
provide parallel rails along each column face and a
diagonal rail in each corner. The radial layout selection will
provide rails that are radial from the punch check center.
Note that for columns with small dimensions it is possible
for the layout selection to produce identical layouts.
Apply supplemental max stress limit This option
provides a supplemental maximum stress limit on the basic
control perimeters as suggested in the paper Effectiveness
of punching shear reinforcement to EN 1992-1-1:2004 in
The Structural Engineer 87 (10) May 2009.
Reinforcement Ratio For specification of for
equation 6.47. You should calculate the input value using
the equation in clause 6.4.4 of the EN 1992-1-1:2004 code.
Beta Factor This represents a ratio of the maximum stress
on a critical section (including shear and moment transfer)
over the maximum stress due to shear only. This option
allows the user to select Auto Calc, 1.15 (interior), 1.4
(edge), 1.5 (corner), or input any positive value for Beta
directly.
The factors for each column condition are taken from
clause 6.4.3 (6) of the EN 1992-1-1:2004 Code and are
meant to be used only when lateral stability does not
depend upon frame action and where adjacent spans do not
differ in length by more than 25%.
Auto Calc uses the model and calculation methods
described in Chapter 66, Punching Shear Design Notes.
V
n
1
121 RAM Concept
Chapter 24
24.3 Drawing punching shear checks
You can draw punching shear checks for all columns
simultaneously.
To draw punching shear checks:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan.
2 Select the Punching Shear Check tool ( ).
3 Fence the columns.
A circle of the prescribed radius appears at each column
within the fence.
24.4 A final word on punching shear
checks
Punching shear checks are extremely powerful tools, but
that is all they are: tools. It is important that you understand
the calculations that these tools perform, so you can
determine the appropriateness of the calculation for the
situation under consideration, and so you can set the tools
parameters correctly.
122
Chapter 24
RAM Concept
123 RAM Concept
Chapter 25
25 Drawing Reinforcement Bars
Note: Drawing your own reinforcement bars is not
necessary but an advanced feature you may wish to utilize
once you are experienced with the program.
The Reinforcement layer allows you to:
supplement the Program reinforcement by drawing
actual (User) bars on plans using various tools
change some Program bars to User reinforcement
The Reinforcement layer facilitates a production quality
reinforcement layout.
25.1 Reinforcement bar definitions
25.1.1 About User and Program
Reinforcement
There are two types of reinforcement bar: Program and
User. All reinforcement is tagged (identified) as one type or
the other.
When performing design calculations, Concept generates
Program reinforcement required in addition to any existing
User reinforcement. In subsequent calculations, Concept
removes all of the Program reinforcement before starting
the calculations.
You can change Program Concentrated Reinforcement to
User Concentrated Reinforcement merely by changing its
tag (in the object properties window). You might do this to
modify Concept's design. When performing subsequent
calculations, Concept only designs reinforcement needed in
addition to the reinforcement tagged as User.
You could also change User reinforcement to Program
reinforcement, but this has no value since Concept removes
all existing program reinforcement when it generates new
Program reinforcement.
25.1.2 Reinforcement object types
There are seven object types in the Reinforcement layer:
Concentrated Reinforcement - a fixed number of bars
over a parallelogram area
Distributed Reinforcement - a bar spacing applied over
a polygon area.
Individual Bars - single bars that are generated from
Concentrated and Distributed Reinforcement.
Transverse Reinforcement - a fixed number of trans-
verse bars at a fixed spacing.
Transverse Individual Bars - single transverse bars
(strirrups/links/ligatures) that are generated from Trans-
verse Reinforcement
Stud Shear Reinforcement (SSR) Callouts - a fixed
number of SSR rails with a fixed number of studs.
SSR Rails - individual rails that are generated from SSR
Callouts.
You can directly create (by drawing) Concentrated
Reinforcement and Distributed Reinforcement. You cannot
directly create any of the other types of reinforcement.
25.2 Reinforcement properties
Figure 25-1 Concentrated rebar properties - General
Figure 25-2 Distributed rebar properties - General
124
Chapter 25
RAM Concept
Span Set Determines the set the reinforcement belongs to:
latitude or longitude.
Elevation Reference The choices are:
Absolute: the elevation relative to the zero datum. This
is not recommended other than for very complicated
geometry.
Above Soffit: The elevation is measured from the soffit
elevation to the center of the bar.
Above Surface: The elevation is measured from the
surface elevation to the center of the bar. The value is
almost always negative
Top Cover: The elevation is measured from the surface
elevation to the top of the bar. The value is always
positive.
Bottom Cover: The elevation is measured from the soffit
elevation to the underside of the bar. The value is always
positive.
Elevation The distance used with the elevation reference.
Ending at End 1 The choices are:
Straight:
90 Hook:
180 Hook:
Anchored:
Ending at End 2 Similar to End 1
Slab Face This is used for (1) graphic display purposes
(2) design rules.
The choices are:
Per Elev. Reference - the default and typical setting
Top
Bottom
Both
Auto
Note: Special Caution - Reinforcement set to Auto face
will not appear on either the top or the bottom
reinforcement plans. If you use Auto face reinforcement,
change the default plan settings (or add some plans) to be
certain that all of the reinforcement used is visible on the
plans in your report.
Bar Type The label used to identify the reinforcing bar.
The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement bar
labels (and their properties) are specified in the Criteria >
Materials.
Bar Extent Skew The orientation of the bars extent line
in degrees (concentrated reinforcement only - see The
Skew Reinforcement Extent tool on page 128 for more
information).
Quantity Type The choices are:
Quantity: number of bars
Spacing: bar spacing
Number of bars Only editable if Quantity Type is set to
Quantity
Spacing Only editable if Quantity Type is set to Spacing.
Orientation The plan angle of the reinforcement
(distributed reinforcement only - see The Orient
Reinforcement tool on page 128 for more information).
Zone Width The width of the concentrated reinforcement
zone.
Designed By The choices are:
User: Bars drawn by the user
Program: Bars calculated and drawn by Concept.
Note: See Concentrated and distributed reinforcement
callouts on page 131 for discussion on the second (Presen-
tation) tab.
25.3 About drawing reinforcement
You can draw reinforcement in a number of ways:
A group of one or more concentrated reinforcement bars
using one of the three Concentrated Reinforcement tools.
A group of distributed reinforcement bars using one of
the three Distributed Reinforcement tools
25.3.1 Expected workflows
It is expected that you will typically convert the Program
reinforcement to User reinforcement and modify it. One
common exception to this might be that you may want to
specify a bottom mat of reinforcement. There is no
difficulty if you convert some reinforcement and directly
draw other reinforcement.
25.4 Drawing concentrated reinforcement
Concentrated reinforcement consists of one or more bars
located within a parallelogram.
125 RAM Concept
Chapter 25
The parallelogram is initially a rectangle with a default
width, but you can use the stretch tool to edit the width and
the skew tool to change the shape.
25.4.1 Drawing concentrated reinforcement
You can draw concentrated rebar by specifying the end
points or specifying the midpoint and one endpoint.
To draw concentrated reinforcement #1:
1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement tool ( ).
2 Click at one endpoint.
3 Click at the other endpoint.
Note: See Example 25-1 Drawing concentrated bottom
bars on page 126 for more information.
To draw concentrated reinforcement #2:
1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement tool ( ).
2 Click at the midpoint.
bars by defining the midpoint on page 126 for more infor-
mation.
25.4.2 Drawing concentrated reinforcement
in two directions
You can draw concentrated rebar in two directions by
specifying the midpoint and one endpoint.
To draw concentrated reinforcement in two directions:
1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool
( ).
2 Click at the midpoint.
Note: This creates two reinforcement objects: one that
belongs to the latitude reinforcement layer and one that
belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer.
bars in two directions on page 126 for more information.
25.5 Drawing distributed reinforcement
Distributed reinforcement consists of a group of bars
located within a polygon.
25.5.1 Drawing distributed reinforcement
You draw distributed reinforcement within a polygon. This
is done by defining the polygon with mouse clicks or using
the slab perimeter.
To draw distributed reinforcement #1:
1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. tool ( ).
2 Click at each polygon vertex consecutively.
Note: This creates two objects: a polygon and a
reinforcement object that belongs to either the latitude
reinforcement layer or longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: Once the file is run you can view the individual bars
through the Visible Objects dialog box.
Note: See Example 25-4 Drawing distributed bottom
bars over part of the floor on page 127 for more infor-
mation.
1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. in Perimeter tool ( ).
2 Click somewhere on the slab.
3 Click at another point to define the orientation of the
reinforcement.
Note: This creates two objects: a polygon matching the
slab outline and a reinforcement object that belongs to
either the latitude reinforcement layer or longitude
reinforcement layer.
Note: Once the file is run you can view the individual bars.
Note: See Example 25-5 Drawing distributed bottom
bars over the entire floor on page 127 for more infor-
mation.
1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. Cross in Perimeter tool
( ).
3 Click at another point to define the orientation of the
reinforcement.
126
Chapter 25
RAM Concept
A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the
file is run you can view the individual bars.
Note: This creates three objects: a polygon matching the
slab outline, a reinforcement object that belongs to the
latitude reinforcement layer and a reinforcement object that
Note: See Example 25-6 Drawing a bottom mat over the
entire floor on page 128 for more information.
25.6 Concentrated and distributed
reinforcement drawing examples
Example 25-1 Drawing concentrated bottom bars
Figure 25-3 Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with
the first Concentrated Reinforcement tool.
Example 25-2 Drawing concentrated bottom bars by defin-
ing the midpoint
Figure 25-4 Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with
the second Concentrated Reinforcement tool.
Example 25-3 Drawing concentrated bottom bars in two
directions
Figure 25-5 Concentrated bars in two directions drawn by clicking at
points A and B with the Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool.
127 RAM Concept
Chapter 25
Example 25-4 Drawing distributed bottom bars over part
of the floor
Figure 25-6 Distributed bar polygon drawn over part of the slab by click-
ing at 5 vertices with the Distributed Reinforcement tool. Hatching is
turned ON.
Figure 25-7 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog
box. Hatching is turned OFF.
Example 25-5 Drawing distributed bottom bars over the
entire floor
Figure 25-8 Distributed bars polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at
points A and B with the Distributed Reinforcement in Perimeter tool.
Hatching is turned ON.
128
Chapter 25
RAM Concept
Example 25-6 Drawing a bottom mat over the entire floor
Figure 25-10 Distributed bottom mat polygon drawn over the slab by
clicking at points A and B with the Distributed Reinforcement Cross in Pe-
rimeter tool. Hatching is turned ON.
25.7 Other reinforcement plan tools
There are three special tools in the Reinforcement layer
that you can use to edit the plan properties of
reinforcement.
25.7.1 The Orient Reinforcement tool
This tool allows you to draw a line segment that represents
the desired orientation of selected reinforcement objects
individual bars.
After you draw this line, Concept rotates any selected
concentrated reinforcement objects, and orients any
distributed reinforcement parallel to the drawn line. The
selected reinforcement creates individual bars of the same
orientation after calculation.
To change the reinforcement orientation:
1 Select the reinforcement object.
2 Choose the Orient Reinforcement tool ( ).
3 Click anywhere on the plan.
4 Click at a location on the plan to create a line parallel to
the desired direction of the reinforcement.
Note: Use snap orthogonal or snap to perpendicular to
help with orientation where appropriate
Note: Selecting both reinforcement objects created with
the Concentrated Rebar Cross tool or the Distributed Rebar
Cross in Perimeter tool orientates both reinforcement
objects.
Note: See Example 25-7 Orientating concentrated
reinforcement on page 129 for more information.
25.7.2 The Skew Reinforcement Extent tool
This tool allows you to draw a line segment that represents
the desired orientation of selected Concentrated
Reinforcement objects' extent line. This tool allows you to
create parallelogram regions of Concentrated
Reinforcement. Distributed reinforcement cannot be
skewed.
To skew the reinforcement extent
1 Select the concentrated reinforcement object.
2 Choose the Skew Reinforcement Extent tool ( ).
3 Click anywhere on the plan (but preferably near the
reinforcement object)
4 Click at a location on the plan to create a line parallel to
the desired extent line.
Note: See Example 25-8 Skewing concentrated
reinforcement on page 130 for more information.
25.7.3 Auto Hook tool
This tool allows you to automatically extend concentrated
rebar callouts in close proximity to the slab edge and apply
hooks to a selected set of user reinforcement.
129 RAM Concept
Chapter 25
To apply hooks to reinforcement near the slab edge
1 Select the user concentrated reinforcement that you wish
to modify.
2 Choose the Auto Hook tool ( ).
3 Select the hook type from the drop down menu.
4 Set the Edge Detection Tolerance. Only bar ends within
this distance of a slab edge will be modified.
5 If you want the bar end extended to the slab edge, check
the Perform Bar Extension box and set the desired edge
cover and bar rounding length.
6 Click OK.
Note: See Example 25-10 Automatically applying hooks
to user reinforcement on page 131 for more information.
Example 25-7 Orientating concentrated reinforcement
Figure 25-12 Using the Orient Reinforcement tool to define the line A B
parallel to the desired orientation
Figure 25-13 The reoriented concentrated reinforcement
130
Chapter 25
RAM Concept
Example 25-8 Skewing concentrated reinforcement
Figure 25-14 Using the Skew Reinforcement tool to define the line A B
parallel to the desired skewed ends
Figure 25-15 The skewed concentrated reinforcement with the extent line
parallel to line AB.
Example 25-9 Stretching concentrated reinforcement
Figure 25-16 Using the stretch tool at point A to widen the concentrated
reinforcement parallelogram
Figure 25-17 The stretched concentrated reinforcement
131 RAM Concept
Chapter 25
Example 25-10 Automatically applying hooks to user rein-
forcement
Figure 25-18 Use the auto hook tool to apply hooks to all four concentrat-
ed bar callouts
Figure 25-19 Hooks applied and bars extended to the slab edge
25.8 Layout and Detailing Parameters
There are five calculation option parameters that influence
how Concept lays out and details reinforcement. Refer to
Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters on
page 151 of Chapter 28, Calculating Results.
25.9 Reinforcement Text Formatting:
Concentrated Reinforcement, Distributed Reinforcement
and SSR Callouts all have format specifiers that you can
modify so the reinforcement is described per your office
standards.
25.9.1 Concentrated and distributed
reinforcement callouts
Figure 25-20 Concentrated rebar properties - Presentation
Figure 25-21 Distributed rebar properties - Presentation
The Concentrated and Distributed Reinforcement format
specifiers use the following key values:
$Q - Bar quantity
$F - Bar face
$B - Bar name
$L - Bar length
$U - Bar length units
$u - Bar spacing units
$S - Bar spacing
\n - Start new line
132
Chapter 25
RAM Concept
25.9.2 Examples of reinforcement text
formatting
The following examples show generated text for different
codes.
Example 25-11 ACI 318-05
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B
x $L $U $F@$S $u would generate text on the plan view
such as:
28 #5 x 15 feet T @ 12.1 inches
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format
specifier ($Q)$Bx$L$F would generate the text:
(28)#5x15T
Example 25-12 AS 3600-2001
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x
$L $U $F@$S $u would generate text on the plan view
such as:
28 N16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm
(28)N16x4.57T
Example 25-13 BS 8110 : 1997, EC2 and IS456-2000
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x
$L $U $F@$S $u would generate text on the plan view
such as:
28 T16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm
(28)T16x4.57T
25.9.3 SSR Callout
The SSR Callout format specifiers use the following key
values:
$R - Rail quantity
$S - Studs per rail
$F - First stud spacing
$T - Typical stud spacing
$N - SSR system name
$U - Stud spacing units
$S - Stud spacing
\n - Start new line
The SSR Callout format specifier ($R)$S@$T First
Spacing = $F $U\n$N would generate text on the plan
view such as:
(12)8@3 First Spacing = 2.5 inches
3/8 SSR
For the same SSR Callout, the format specifier $R rails
with $S studs would generate the text:
12 rails with 8 studs
25.10 About SSR callouts and SSR rails:
Concept generates SSR Callouts and SSR Rails from the
results of its punching shear calculations. This generated
reinforcement is for display purposes only - it is not used in
calculations and cannot be changed to user
reinforcement.
133 RAM Concept
Chapter 26
26 Defining Tendons
Note: You could bypass this chapter if you are designing a
structure with only bar reinforcement.
There is no unique quantity or layout of post-tensioning
that provides a satisfactory PT design. This is particularly
true with partial prestress design where the emphasis is on
strength, deflection and crack control rather than
hypothetical service stresses.
Historically, many 2D programs have used allowable
service stresses to drive their algorithms for providing a PT
solution. This is fast losing favor; some codes have all but
abandoned using (hypothetical) service stresses as a design
criterion, and other codes (such as ACI 318) are moving in
that direction. Some computer generated tendon layouts are
not practical for real design.
Whereas you expect a 2D program to help provide a
workable tendon design based upon spans, sections and
loads, the possible randomness of supports makes this
extremely difficult in 3D.
Thus, in RAM Concept, it is necessary for you to define the
tendons by generating or drawing them in plan and
specifying parameters such as profile and number of
strands. For guidance, you should use one of the following
for your first estimate:
your experience
a preliminary run with Strip Wizard
a logical guess based upon precompression (P/A)
considerations
a random guess (correctly drawn design strips flag
incorrect guesses, and you can use The Auditor for help
in iterating)
26.1 Tendon definitions
26.1.1 Post-Tensioning terminology and
definitions
Strand - a single wire or group of bundled wires. In post-
tensioned construction a strand is a unit of post-tensioning
reinforcement, similar to a reinforcing bar being the unit
of RC reinforcement.
Duct - a tube, conduit, or sheathing containing one or
more strands with a single anchorage. The maximum
number of strands in a duct is defined in the prestressing
material properties. For monostrand tendons (bonded or
unbonded), each duct contains a single strand.
Tendon - In practice, the PT industry defines a tendon as
a group of strands that share a common anchorage. The
group may be just one strand, as is the case with most
unbonded systems, or monostrand. It is not always
necessary for real tendons to match Concept tendon
exactly. For example, it is common practice in monostrand
to group tendons together in the field. For this situation, it
is usually convenient to specify the total number of strands
in the group in a single Concept tendon. In this case the
correct number of ducts can still be calculated correctly
using the input duct properties.
26.1.2 Using the latitude and longitude
prestressing folders
RAM Concept has two folders for prestressing called
latitude and longitude.
By using Concepts two tendon folders, you can separate
tendons and tendon parameters into two groups. Separating
orthogonal tendons allows for easier editing and a clearer
presentation.
Each folder contains three layers:
Tendon Parameters Layer - defines high level objects
used for the generation of individual tendons. This layer
facilitates a production quality presentation of high level
tendon layout information.
Generated Tendon Layer - contains the individual
tendons generated from the parameter objects on the
Tendon Parameters Layer. The generated individual
tendons can not be edited, but can be selected and copied
to the Manual Tendon Layer for further manipulation.
Manual Tendon Layer - contains individual tendons
drawn or otherwise manipulated manually by the user.
During analysis and design, all tendons on the generated
tendon layers (latitude and longitude) and the manual
tendon layers (latitude and longitude) are included in the
calculations. Therefore it is important not to duplicate
tendons on the generated and manual layers.
Note: Latitude and longitude are just names. You could
define all tendons, which might be at various plan angles,
on one plan.
134
Chapter 26
RAM Concept
26.2 Tendon Parameters Layer
26.2.1 Tendon Parameters object types
There are five object types in the Tendon Parameters
Layer:
Banded Tendon Polyline - a polyline representing a
specification for generation of a group of tendons at a
fixed spacing and parallel to the polyline segments.
Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral - a quadrilateral repre-
senting a specification for generation of an array of
tendons at a specified angle within the shape.
Distributed Tendon Overlap - a graphical only object
that displays the cumulative force or number of strands in
an area of overlapping distributed tendon quadrilaterals.
Tendon Void - a polygon shape that represents an area
where no tendons are to be generated. Typical usage might
be stressing blockouts or small slab areas that are too short
for tendons to get stressed.
Profile Polyline - a polyline that defines a tendon
elevation at the location where any banded tendon
polyline or distributed tendon quadrilateral intersects it.
26.2.2 Banded Tendon Polyline and
Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral Properties
Figure 26-1 Distributed tendon quadrilateral properties - General
Figure 26-2 Banded tendon polyline properties - General
Tendon Specification Type Determines the mode for
specifying strand quantities that go into the generated
tendons. The choices are:
Force
Strands
Effective Force Only enabled when force is selected
for Tendon Specification Type. For banded tendon
polylines, this value represents the total effective force to
be generated in the banded group. For distributed tendon
quadrilaterals, this represents the effective force per unit
width of slab to generate in the distributed tendon array.
135 RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Number of Strands Only enabled when strands is
selected for Tendon Specification Type. For banded
tendon polylines, this value represents the total number of
strands to be generated in the banded group. For distributed
tendon quadrilaterals, this represents the number of strands
per unit width of slab to generate in the distributed tendon
array.
Max Strands/Tendon For banded tendon polylines, this
value defines the maximum number of strands to put into a
single generated tendon.
Layout Type For banded tendon polylines, this value
defines the layout type of the generated tendons. The
choices are:
Spacing
Width
Tendon Spacing Defines the lateral spacing between
generated tendons.
Layout Width For banded tendon polylines, defines the
total width of the generated tendon layout when width is
selected for Layout Type. The width includes a half
space on each side of the outermost generated tendons.
Tendon Type For banded tendon polylines, defines the
behavior of the banded tendon polyline and the properties
of the generated tendon. The choices are:
Primary
Added
Added Tendon Generation For banded tendon
polylines, controls the behavior of the automatic generation
of added tendons to balance forces at connected banded
tendon polyline ends. The choices are:
None
Fixed Length
Span Fraction
Added Tendon Length For banded tendon polylines
when Fixed Length is selected for Added Tendon
Generation, controls the length of the automatically
generated banded tendon polyline.
Added Tendon Span Fraction For banded tendon
polylines when Span Fraction is selected for Added
Tendon Generation, controls the length of the
automatically generated banded tendon polyline as a
function of the span containing the joint that the added
tendon is attached.
PT System The label used to identify the PT system for
the generated tendons. The label is not necessarily the size
and type of strand. The Materials Specification defines the
PT system properties. It is possible to mix systems in a
single tendon parameters layer.
Inflection Point Ratio Determines the distance, x, from
end 1 in the span to the point where the tendon curvature
changes sign. The inflection point ratio is the ratio of x to
the distance from end 1 to end 2. A value of 0.2 places the
inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end
2 is at midspan. This is a commonly used value.
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple
parabola.
Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight
profile (as opposed to a parabolic profile).
26.2.3 Distributed Tendon Overlap and
Tendon Void Properties
These objects have no user editable properties
26.2.4 Profile Polyline Properties
Elevation The vertical distance from the elevation
reference to the centroid of the tendons strands, also
referred to as CGS (center of gravity of strand).
Note: This version of RAM Concept measures the top and
bottom cover to the CGS of the strands. Future versions will
allow inputting of duct dimensions and allow a top and
bottom cover to the outside of the duct to be input.
Note: The CGS is not the same as mid-depth of a bonded
tendons duct.
geometry.
elevation to the CGS of the tendon.
surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is
almost always negative.
elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is always
positive.
positive.
Profile Location Determines the orientations of the
created tendon half-spans (and the corresponding inflection
point location). The choices are:
Support
Span
136
Chapter 26
RAM Concept
The support profile polylines are displayed graphically as
solid lines on plan, while the span polylines are displayed
as dashed lines.
26.3 Tendon properties
Before you begin drawing tendons, specify the default
properties for the tool(s) you will use. The default values
are set in the Default Properties dialog box. Double click
one of the tendon drawing tools (Half Span Tendon ( ),
Full Span Tendon ( ), Half Span Tendon Panel ( ), or
Full Span Tendon Panel ( )) to edit its properties.
Note: Setting the default properties for one tendon
drawing tool sets properties for all the tendon drawing
tools.
The following is a list of RAM Concept tendon properties:
PT System The label used to identify the PT system for
the generated tendons. The label is not necessarily the size
and type of strand. The Materials Specification defines the
PT system properties. It is possible to mix systems in a
single tendon layer.
Strands per Tendon Specifies the number of strands in
the selected tendon(s). It need not be an integer value.
While the total number of strands in Concept and the real
structure must match, the grouping of strands into tendons
need not be the same in Concept as in the real structure. It
is usually not necessary to model each real tendon as a
Concept tendon - fewer Concept tendons (with a larger
number of strands per tendon) are often used. An exception
is for specific code rules that require a deduction in shear
area for duct size. In those situations you should specify the
correct duct size and number of strands per tendon.
For example, if you model six 4-strand ducts containing 2
strands each, as three 4-strand ducts containing 4 strands
each, Concept considers the correct number of strands (12),
but only three of the six ducts.
Elevation (Elevation Value at end 1 and Elevation
Value at end 2) The vertical distance from the elevation
reference to the centroid of the tendons strands, also
referred to as CGS (center of gravity of strand).
Note: This version of RAM Concept measures the top and
bottom cover to the CGS of the strands. Future versions will
allow inputting of duct dimensions and allow a top and
bottom cover to the outside of the duct to be input.
Note: The CGS is not the same as mid-depth of a bonded
tendons duct.
geometry.
elevation to the CGS of the tendon.
surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is
almost always negative.
positive.
positive.
The dimension from the elevation reference (at that exact
plan location) to the CGS is the Elevation Value. Thus, if a
profile point is located over a slab thickening (drop cap,
beam etc.) then the thickening should be taken into account
if the elevation reference refers to the changing surface.
Concept does not currently use dimensions to underside of
duct, or cover, to determine elevation values. Future
versions will incorporate this calculation.
The path of a tendon along with the number of strands
determines the forces the tendon exerts on the concrete.
Profile points (that are usually the tendon high and low
points) define this path. If necessary, you can introduce
intermediate profile points.
Tendons are comprised of segments. For elevated floors,
each segment has a high point (end 1) and a low point (end
2). For mats, the reverse is generally true. Each segment
can represent a half of a span, or a partial half span.
Most user defined spans have a tendon with two segments.
Cantilevers and some user defined spans have tendons with
one segment.
Selections for Elevation Value and Elevation Reference
should consider cover and load balancing. Profiles
typically vary according to span lengths.
Note: Profile values displayed in RAM Concept are always
from the soffit. When structure and/or tendon changes are
made, the profile values can be temporarily out of date and
incorrect. In order to update the profile values, use the
Generate Tendons command or run a Calc All.
Inflection Point Ratio Determines the distance, x, from
end 1 in the span to the point where the tendon curvature
changes sign. The inflection point ratio is the ratio of x to
the distance from end 1 to end 2. A value of 0.2 places the
137 RAM Concept
Chapter 26
inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end
2 is at midspan. This is a commonly used value.
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple
parabola.
Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight
profile (as opposed to a parabolic profile).
Half Span Ratio (Half Span Ratio End 1 and Half
Span Ratio End 2) Specifies the portion of the half span
that this segment represents. The end 2 half span ratio must
always be greater than the end 1 half span ratio. Half span
ratios of 0 and 1 represent an entire half span. It is not
recommended that these values be changed by the user.
Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads If
two entire half span tendon segments in a single span have
different values for end 1 then the Position Profile Point 2
for equal balance loads option moves the low point in plan
to equilibrate the uplift during an analysis calculation.
Note: Do not select this option if the half span ratios of
both tendon segments are not 0 and 1 or if the profile values
are at the same elevation. A segment with such profiles
would have zero uplift and so the formulation does not work.
26.4 About creating tendons
There are two ways to generate tendons:
Specification of objects on the tendon parameters layers,
resulting in generated tendons on the generated tendon
layers.
Drawing individual tendons directly on the manual
tendon layers.
These tendon generation schemes support a number of
workflows related to tendon generation and design. The
most common are outlined here:
26.4.1 All tendon definition done on the
tendon parameters layers
The Engineer specifies all prestressing on the tendon
parameters layers, allowing RAM Concept to automatically
generate individual tendons from the tendon parameters
objects. When making changes to the tendon layout the
Engineer will add, delete, or edit objects on the tendon
parameters layer only. The Engineer might use the tendon
parameter plans or the generated tendon plans for their
tendon design plans.
26.4.2 Most tendon definition done on the
tendon parameters layers
The Engineer specifies most prestressing on the tendon
parameters layers but wants to supplement with isolated
individually drawn tendons on the manual tendon layers.
This might be faster to make minor adjustments than
changing tendon parameter objects. The drawing
production workflow might be to export tendon parameter
and manual tendon plans on the plan(s), then modify those
objects in CAD to product the final drawings.
26.4.3 All work done on manual tendon
layers
The Engineer prefers working with individual tendons for
both design and production of final tendon plans. The
Engineer can draw the individual tendons on the manual
tendon layers, or define objects on the tendon parameters
layers to quickly generate a large number of tendons that
can then be manipulated manually. Since the tendon objects
on the generated tendon layers can not be edited, they will
need to be copied and pasted from the generated tendon
layers to the manual tendon layers. The objects on the
tendon parameters layers would then be deleted to avoid
duplication.
26.5 Drawing banded tendon polylines
Banded tendon polylines consist of two or more connected
points that define a polyline. Once drawn the stretch tool
can be used to modify the location of any of the points.
To draw a banded tendon polyline:
1 Choose the Banded Tendon Polyline tool ( ).
2 Click at the tendon polyline start point.
3 Click the next tendon polyline point (can be drawn across
multiple spans or partial spans).
4 Continue to click tendon polyline points until all are
defined.
5 Right click and select enter to complete the operation.
Note: Banded tendon polylines can be connected at their
end points to single or multiple other banded tendon
polylines. However, it is an error to define banded tendon
polylines that overlap.
138
Chapter 26
RAM Concept
26.6 Drawing distributed tendon
quadrilaterals
Distributed tendon quadrilaterals define a specification to
generate a specific force or number of strands per unit
width at a given angle within a defined 4 sided polygon.
To draw a distributed tendon quadrilateral:
1 Choose the Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral tool ( ).
2 Click each of the four vertices of the quadrilateral vertex
sequentially (the quadrilateral can extend across multiple
spans or bays).
Since distributed tendon quadrilaterals are meant to
represent a smeared tendon force, the spacing specified
isnt typically critical. However, due to geometrical
irregularities inaccuracies can be introduced near the edges
of the shape. RAM Concept automatically attempts to
provide a half space at each edge of the tendon layout area
to minimize this effect. This effect can also be minimized
by specifying a smaller spacing, at the expense of a larger
number of generated tendons and increased run time. A
spacing of 2 ft (0.75 m) will normally provide a good
balance between accuracy and computational expense.
Note: Distributed tendon quadrilaterals with common
spacing, PT System, inflection point ratio, and harped
property can be drawn overlapping and RAM Concept will
consider the cumulative force/strands in overlapping
regions.
26.7 Defining profiles for banded tendon
polylines and distributed tendon
quadrilaterals
Profiles are determined for banded tendon polylines and
distributed tendon quadrilaterals by creating profile
polylines. Tendon half spans are created wherever a
generated tendon intersects a profile polyline.
The generated half span tendons are oriented in the
following direction (which will determine the inflection
point location):
support polyline - span polyline
support polyline - slab edge
slab edge - span polyline
Where generated tendons intersect identical profile
polyline types (i.e, both supports), the tendon is oriented
from the location of highest absolute elevation to the
location of lowest absolute elevation. If the end elevations
are the same then the orientation will be random (and not
important).
Where banded tendon polylines end away from a profile
polyline or intersect a slab edge, the tendon is profiled to
the mid-depth of the slab at the end or slab edge
intersection location.
Where distributed tendon quadrilaterals end between two
profile polylines or the slab edge, the tendons are profiled
as if they were extended to the next adjacent profile
polyline or slab edge (representing a partial half span). This
allows two distributed tendon quadrilaterals with different
angles to be drawn adjacent to each other along a span and
represent continuous span tendons. Where distributed
tendon quadrilaterals intersect the slab edge and there is no
profile polyline near the edge, the tendons are profiled to
the mid-depth of the slab.
Profile polylines can be created in a number of ways:
Drawing them manually.
Generating them for the entire floor in one span
direction using the Generate Profile Polylines tool.
Generate span polylines from already defined support
polylines using the Generate Span Polylines tool.
26.7.1 Drawing Profile Polylines
To draw a profile polyline:
1 Choose the Banded Tendon Polyline tool ( ).
2 Click at the profile polyline start point.
3 Click the next profile polyline point.
4 Continue to click profile polyline points until all are
defined.
5 Right click and select enter to complete the operation.
26.7.2 Defining profile polylines using the
Generate Profile Polylines tool
This tool allows you to generate profile polylines
automatically using span segments that have already been
defined on the design strip layer. Support polylines are
generated from existing span segments. Latitude tendon
support polylines are generated from longitude span
segments and vice-versa. Span polylines are created from
the support polylines created in the first step of the
operation. If no span segments are drawn on the
corresponding layer then no profile polylines will be
created.
To generate profile polylines
1 Choose the Generate Profile Polylines tool ( ).
2 Select the span set to generate profile polylines for.
Generally you will select the layer in the prestressing folder
you are currently working in.
139 RAM Concept
Chapter 26
3 To generate support polylines from the span segments,
check the generate support polylines box and set the
elevation reference and elevation desired for the generated
support polylines.
4 If support polylines are generated, to generate span
polylines check the generate span polylines box and set
the elevation reference and elevation desired for the
generated span polylines. If the tendon span angle is
consistent throughout the floor then set it in the Span Orien-
tation Angle box. This will generate the span polylines in
the specified direction between the generated support
polylines. If there is more than one span orientation angle in
the floor then Use Medial Axis can be selected. The Use
Medial Axis option will generate span polylines that are
equidistant from the generated support polylines. For a
single spanning direction, the best results will normally be
achieved by setting this angle.
Figure 26-3 Generate profile polylines tool
26.7.3 Defining span polylines using the
Generate Span Polylines tool
This tool allows you to generate span polylines
automatically using support polylines that have been
previously generated.
To generate profile polylines
1 Select the support polylines that you want span polylines
generated between ( ).
2 Choose the Generate Profile Polylines tool ( ).
3 Set the elevation reference, elevation, and span orien-
tation angle for the generated span polylines.
4 Set the span ratio for the generated span polylines. This
is the desired span control point. For a profile control point
at mid-span, set this value to 0.5.
Figure 26-4 Generate span polylines tool
26.8 Other tendon parameter plan objects
and tools
26.8.1 Drawing tendon voids
Tendon void polygons can be defined in areas where
generated tendons are not desired. This might be used to
create a stressing blockout in a banded tendon polyline or
to prevent very short tendons from being created in an area
covered by a distributed tendon quadrilateral. Tendon void
polygons prevent creation of tendons inside their
boundaries and apply only to the layer on which they are
drawn. These objects do not affect the manual tendon
layers.
To draw a tendon void:
1 Select the Tendon Void tool ( ).
2 Click at each polygon vertex consecutively.
26.8.2 Segment banded tendon polyline tool
The segment banded tendon polyline tool is used to
segment previously created banded tendon polylines where
they cross the defined segmentation line. This can be
useful, for example, where tendons need to be added in an
end span of a previously defined banded tendon polyline.
To segment banded tendon polylines:
1 Select the Segment Banded Tendon Polylines tool ( ).
2 Click two points defining a line that will segment all
banded tendon polylines that cross it.
140
Chapter 26
RAM Concept
26.8.3 Generate program tendons tool
The generate program tendons tool is used to create
tendons on the generated tendon layers from the objects on
the tendon parameters layer. It also updates the graphical
representation of the objects on the tendon parameters layer
such as the fillet data for the banded tendon polylines.
These operations will also be performed during a calc all,
if they are out of date.
To generate program tendons
1 Click the generate program tendons tool ( ).
2 A log will be displayed if any warnings or errors occurred
during the generation.
26.9 Tendon parameter drawing
examples
Example 26-1 Drawing banded tendon polylines
Figure 26-5 Banded tendon polylines drawn by clicking on points
A,B,C,D,E in sequence with Banded Tendon Polyline tool.
Example 26-2 Drawing distributed tendon quadrilaterals
Figure 26-6 Three distributed tendon quadrilaterals drawn by clicking on
points A-D with distributed tendon quadrilateral tool.
26.10 Tendon parameter drawing and text
formatting
Banded tendon polylines, distributed tendon quadrilaterals,
and distributed tendon overlap areas have drawing controls
and format specifiers intended to aid in the production of
design quality drawings.
26.10.1 Banded tendon polyline formatting
options
Banded tendon polylines have a number of formatting
properties to aid in the production of drawings:
Description - a user formatted string used to describe the
banded tendon polyline properties.
The formatted description strings for the banded tendon
polyline use the following key values:
$F - force
$f - force units
$N - number of strands
$P - PT system name
$I - inflection point ratio
$S - spacing
$s - spacing units
$T - number of tendons
\n - new line
Draw Fillets - displays filleted connections between
segments of banded tendon polylines using the Fillet
Radius property set. The Fillet Radius property can be set
to Use Maximum or a value smaller than the maximum
can be typed into this box.
Profile Points - displays the profile control point infor-
mation for the banded tendon polyline. The profile values
are always referenced from the slab soffit to the CGS of
the strands.
Symbol @ End 1,2 - displays the symbol at the end of
the banded tendon polyline. Choices are:
None
Stressing End
Dead End
26.10.2 Distributed tendon quadrilateral
formatting options
Distributed tendon quadrilaterals have a number of
formatting properties to aid in the production of drawings:
141 RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Description - a user formatted string used to describe the
distributed tendon quadrilateral properties.
The formatted description strings for the banded tendon
polyline use the following key values:
$F - force/width
$f - force/width units
$N - number of strands
$n - number of strands/width units
$P - PT system name
$I - inflection point ratio
$S - spacing
$s - spacing units
$A - angle and units
\n - new line
Profile Points - displays the profile control point infor-
mation for the banded tendon polyline. The profile values
are always referenced from the slab soffit to the CGS of
the strands. In addition to the profile points where the
main tendon intersects profile polylines, the following
additional points are provided to describe the distributed
tendon profiles:
Edges - profiles at the edge of the distributed
tendon quadrilaterals or slab edges.
Span Changes - profiles at drastic changes in span
profiles.
Concrete Elevation Changes - profile changes
where the concrete reference plane changes such as
beams or drop caps.
Profile Polyline Ends - profiles at the ends of
profile polylines
The intent is that with all these points displayed the
profiling of all tendons within the distributed tendon
quadrilateral are defined by connecting support and span
profile points. Profile points are not displayed at slab edges
where no profile polylines are used.
Symbol @ End 1,2 - displays the symbol at the end of
the distributed tendon quadrilateral main tendon. Choices
are:
None
Stressing End
Dead End
Break
Symbol @ Extent Ends - displays the symbol at the end
of the distributed tendon quadrilateral extent line. Choices
are:
None
Arrow
26.11 About drawing individual tendons
You can draw individual tendons on the manual tendon
layers in a number of ways:
A single tendon one segment at a time using the Half
Span Tendon tool (typically used for cantilevers).
A single tendon one span at a time using the Full Span
Tendon tool.
A single tendon with numerous spans using the Tendon
Polyline tool.
A number of tendons one segment at a time using the
Half Span Tendon Panel tool.
A number of tendons one span at a time using the Full
Span Tendon Panel tool.
You use these tools in different situations. You might find
drawing one tendon and then copying it is quicker than
using the polyline and panel tools.
26.12 Drawing single tendons
The following instructions are relevant for elevated floors
where the tendon has a high point at supports and a low
point near midspan. For mats, the reverse is generally true.
26.12.1 Drawing a half-span tendon
You might use the half-span tendon tool for cantilevers and
short end spans. For such uses, the Profile at End 2 value
would commonly be half the slab thickness or the beam
centroid dimension.
To draw a half-span tendon:
1 Select the Half Span Tendon tool ( ).
2 Click at the tendon high point.
3 Click at the tendon low point.
Note: The order of mouse clicks is very important when
drawing half-span tendons because the tool measures the
inflection point from the high point (end 1).
26.12.2 Drawing a full-span tendon
You typically use the full-span tendon tool for conventional
spans.
142
Chapter 26
RAM Concept
To draw a full-span tendon:
1 Select the Full Span Tendon tool ( ).
2 Click at the two tendon high points. The low point (End
2) automatically locates at the midpoint of the tendon.
Note: The low point can be adjusted with the Stretch tool
( ) or the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance
loads option in the Tendon Properties dialog box.
26.12.3 Drawing a multi-span tendon with the
tendon polyline
The Tendon Polyline tool ( ) allows you to draw a series
of full span tendons with fewer mouse clicks.
To draw a tendon polyline:
1 Select the Tendon Polyline tool ( ).
2 Click a series of tendon high points. The low points (End
2) automatically locate at the midpoint of high points.
3 Right-click after clicking the last high point.
4 Click Enter
26.13 Drawing multiple tendons
You can draw a group of tendons in one operation with the
tendon panel tools. You designate the panel to lay out the
tendons, along with the desired tendon spacing, and RAM
Concept draws the tendons.
The drawing process requires you to draw the panel points
sequentially in a clockwise or counter-clockwise manner to
form a quadrilateral.
26.13.1 Tendon panel layout options
Layout The choices are Parallel and Splayed.
Figure 26-1 Tendons with parallel layout and spacing not to exceed five
feet.
Figure 26-2 Tendons with splayed layout and spacing not to exceed five
feet.
Tendon Spacing The choices are Fixed, Equal and Auto
Connect.
143 RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Fixed draws tendons at exactly the specified spacing
distance apart. It is not available with splayed tendons.
Equal (not to exceed maximum) draws tendons an equal
distance apart that is at most the spacing value.
Auto connect (based on last edge) draws tendons
connected to the profile points on the last edge of the
tendon panel area.
Skip Start Tendon / Skip End Tendon Omits edge
tendons.
Figure 26-3 Tendons after Auto Connect.
Figure 26-4 Tendons after Auto Connect.
To draw a Half-Span Tendon Panel:
1 Select the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ).
2 Click at the tendon high and low points of the first tendon
in the tendon panel area.
3 Click at the tendon low and high points of the opposite
edge of the tendon panel area.
The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4 Select options (see discussion above).
To draw a Full-Span Tendon Panel:
1 Select the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ).
2 Click at the tendon high points of the first tendon in the
tendon panel area.
3 Click at the tendon high points of the opposite edge of the
tendon panel area (following a clockwise or counter-
clockwise direction).
The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4 Select options (see discussion above).
Note: A low point (End 2) automatically locates at the
midpoint of each tendon.
144
Chapter 26
RAM Concept
26.14 Editing tendons
As with any object, you can edit tendons on the manual
tendon layers after they are drawn.
26.14.1 Calc profile tool
You can adjust profiles manually or use the Calc Profile
tool ( ) for automatic adjustment.
Too much uplift in a tendon can cause deflection reversals
that may crack the slab. For this and other reasons, it is a
good idea to have the amount of uplift or load balance
somewhat consistent from span to span.
To edit a tendon based on uplift:
1 Select a tendon segment.
2 Click the Calc Profile tool ( ).The Calc Tendon
Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance
load.
3 Input the desired balance load (values are typically
negative) in the Calc Tendon Profile dialog box and click
Calc.
The low point (end 2) adjusts to provide the desired uplift.
You can select two segments in the same span and Concept
calculates the low point based on average uplift. It is
generally not necessary to balance exactly the same amount
of load in each span. It is not advisable to have an excessive
number of different low points. Manually rounding the
profile values can produce a more practical design.
If the desired balance load is too high then Concept could
calculate a negative profile that causes an error when
calculating the results.
Note: Concept does not check cover violations
26.14.2 Change profiles tool
When a plan viewing one of the tendon layers is active,
Concept adds a Change Profiles items to the Tools menu.
This menu item allows you to change all tendon profiles
with a given value to a new value. This can be very useful
in circumstances such as change slab or beam depths.
To change the profile of a number of tendons:
1 Open a plan from the Latitude Tendon or Longitude
Tendon layer.
2 Choose > Tools > Change Profiles.
The Change Tendon Profiles dialog box appears.
3 Enter the profile value that you wish to change.
4 Enter the new profile value.
5 Uncheck either tendon layer that you do not want edited.
6 Uncheck either end number that you do not want edited,
and click OK.
Figure 26-5 Change tendon profiles tool
26.15 About jacks
Jacks can be specified for tendons on manual tendon layers.
RAM Concept calculates the force losses in a tendon if you
draw jacks at live (stressing) ends. If you draw a jack at
each end of a tendon then it is double end stressed. If only
one jack is drawn then the other end of the tendon is a dead
end. If you draw a single jack on a tendon layer then every
tendon on that layer must have at least one jack attached.
Concept uses the relevant value of f
se
(specified in the
Materials criteria page) as the effective stress for any
tendon without a jack.
26.16 Jack properties
Set the default jack properties in the Default Jack
Properties dialog box by double clicking the Jack tool
( ). You can choose to ignore the jack property values in
the Jack Properties dialog and instead use the PT System
values.
The following is a list of jack properties:
Jacking Stress The stress in the strand at the jack at
jacking.
145 RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Anchor Friction Coefficient Loss of stress due to
friction in the anchorage. It is a fraction with no units. You
would enter a 2% loss as 0.02. Most PT suppliers
recommend a value of zero for unbonded tendons. You
might consult with a local PT supplier regarding bonded
tendons.
Wobble Friction Coefficient Friction calculations use
this property (k) to estimate losses due to accidental
curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). It is the
product of the angle friction coefficient and the accidental
angular change per unit length.
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in
particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the
accidental angular change per unit length. These commu-
nities can calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept
uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWob-
bleCoefficient * mu.
Angle Friction Coefficient Loss due to deliberate
curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). Most
designers know it as mu.
Seating Distance The distance that the wedges recede
into the anchorage. This occurs when the field operator
releases the tension in the jack.
Long Term Losses The sum of losses such as creep and
shrinkage of concrete, and relaxation of strand. It also
includes the loss due to elastic shortening of the concrete
even though it is a short-term loss.
26.17 Drawing the jacks
You draw jacks with the Jack tool ( ) by clicking a
rectangle around the stressed ends of the tendons.
To draw tendon jack(s):
1 Select the Jack tool ( ).
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle encompassing the
tendon live ends.
Note: You can delete a single jack by double clicking it. To
delete multiple jacks, consider making all objects except the
jacks invisible, then select and delete the jacks.
146
Chapter 26
RAM Concept
147 RAM Concept
Chapter 27
27 Using Live Load Reduction
RAM Concept can automatically perform live load
reduction calculations on columns, punching checks,
design strip segments and design sections per the
requirements of the selected live load reduction code.
27.1 About Live Load Reduction
Most design codes allow the design of members supporting
large areas to ignore a fraction of the live load effects on
the member. This live load reduction is allowed because
the probability of all of a large supported area being
simultaneously fully loaded is small. While each code has
its own rules, the common approach is that the larger the
supported area, the larger the allowed reduction, up to a
limit.
27.2 Live Load Reduction Options
RAM Concept currently allows several different live load
reduction calculation options:
ASCE 7-02 Reduction using ASCE 7-02, section 4.8.
ASCE 7-10 Reduction using ASCE 7-10, section 4.7.
IBC 2003 Reduction using IBC 2003, section 1607.9.
UBC 1997 Reduction per UBC 1997, section 1607.5.
AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Reduction per AS/NZS 1170.1,
section 3.4.2.
BS 6399-1:1996 Reduction per BS 6399, sections 6.1
through 6.3.
IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction
Reduction per IS 875 (Part 2) section 3.2
Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Reduction per clause
6.3.1.2 and UK Annex 2.5-2.6
National Building Code of Canada 2005 Reduction
per clause 4.1.5.9
None No live load reduction is performed.
27.3 Setting the Live Load Reduction
Code
You choose the live load reduction code in the Calc
Options. The default live load reduction code is None,
causing no reductions to be used.
To set the live load reduction code:
1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options
2 Choose the General tab
3 Choose the live load reduction code, as shown in Figure
27-1.
Figure 27-1 Calc Options Dialog
27.4 Live Loading Types
RAM Concept allows several different live loading types.
These types are affected by live load reduction in different
ways, depending upon the design code. The types are:
Live (Reducible) Loading Standard live load reduction
is performed
Live (Unreducible) Loading No live load reduction is
performed
Live (Storage) Loading Special storage live load
reduction is performed if allowed in the specified code.
Live (Parking) Loading Special parking live load
reduction is performed if allowed in the specified code.
Live (Roof) Loading No live load reduction is
performed.
148
Chapter 27
RAM Concept
These loading types are specified in the Loadings window.
See section 10.2 though section 10.6 of Chapter 10,
Specifying Loadings for more information.
Note: Live (Roof) Loading is reducible in the RAM Struc-
tural System, but not in RAM Concept.
27.5 Live Load Reduction Parameters
RAM Concept uses up to six parameters to determine the
allowed reduction factors:
Loading type - Only certain loading types may be
reduced (as is discussed above)
Member type - Most codes have special reduction rules
for certain member types (such as columns)
Maximum allowed reduction - The user may specify a
maximum reduction value for each member.
Number of levels supported - Most codes consider the
number of levels supported when calculating the allowed
reductions. If RAM Concept's automatic calculation of
areas is used, then the number of levels supported is
assumed to be one.
Tributary area - Most codes use the tributary area of the
member as the primary live load reduction parameter.
Influence area - RAM Concept has options for two codes
that use the influence area of the member as the primary
live load reduction parameter.
RAM Concept calculates the last three parametric values.
You can view the values on plan as described in To view
the column element LLR results and To view the latitude
design strip LLR results on page 157.
You can override the calculation by specifying the
parameters values. The next section describes how to edit
these values.
27.6 Specifying Live Load Reduction
Parameters
You can specify live load reduction values for columns,
punching checks, design strip segments and design
sections.
To specify overriding values for number of levels supported,
tributary area, and influence area:
1 Open the appropriate plan
2 Select the object(s)
3 Choose Edit > Selection properties
4 In the Default Properties dialog box (see Figure 27-2):
Click the Live Load Reduction tab
Check the Use Specified LLR Parameters box
Set the values for LLR Levels, Trib Area, and
Influence Area.
5 Click OK.
Figure 27-2 Live Load Reduction Properties
27.7 Implementation of Live Load
Reduction
See Chapter 52, Live Load Reduction Notes for
information on RAM Concepts implementation of live
load reduction.
149 RAM Concept
Chapter 28
28 Calculating Results
You generally calculate results many times during the
modeling and design process. You can calculate as soon as
elements have been generated (e.g. self-weight deflection)
or wait until modeling is close to finished.
It is conceivable that you would not calculate results until
all tendons, loads and design strips are drawn. It makes
sense, however, to run the file during modeling to check
for errors. That way you could avoid repeating the same
modeling error.
28.1 Calculating the results
You can calculate all or some of the results with or without
a review of the calculation options.
28.1.1 Calculating all of the results
To calculate results:
1 Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
Modeling errors are common and you may encounter error
messages when calculating results. If the file runs
successfully without errors, the Calc All icon becomes
grayed-out. If errors occur then the calculator does not
become grayed-out. See About analysis errors on
28.1.2 Partially calculating the results
To partially calculate results:
1 Click Calc Partial ( ), or choose Process > Calc Partial.
The dialog box shown in Figure 28-1.
Figure 28-1 Calc dialog box
The slider on the left side of the Calc dialog box determines
the level to which Concept performs the calculations. The
options are:
Through analysis Calculations are performed up to and
including the global slab analysis (slab moments
deflections, etc.) and the strip and section forces.
Through design Concept performs the design of strips,
sections and punching shear checks, in addition to all the
Through analysis calculations.
Through layout Concept performs the layout of program
reinforcement on the Reinforcement layer, in addition to all
the Through design calculations.
All Concept performs the detailing of program
reinforcement into individual bars (viewable in
perspectives), in addition to all the Through layout
calculations.
The checkboxes on the right side of the Calc dialog
window provide options on how Concept performs the
calculations. The options are:
Skip warnings Optional warnings do not stop the
calculations, but are added as notes to the Calc Log. This
setting is off by default.
Calculate only out-of-date items Existing calculation
results are not replaced by new calculations unless Concept
detects that the existing calculations are out-of-date. This
setting is on by default.
Warnings invalidate calculations Previous
calculation warnings are considered to invalidate their
associated results, causing the re-calculation of the item
that caused the warning. This setting is on by default.
28.1.3 Calculation options
You can review and change the calculation options.
To access the Calc Options:
1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options.
2 Choose the General tab.
150
Chapter 28
RAM Concept
Figure 28-2 Calc options dialog, General tab
The following describes the calculation options:
28.1.4 General options
Auto-stabilize structure in X- and Y-directions
Auto-stabilization introduces a small horizontal brace for
structures that have no horizontal restraint. This is only
suitable for structures with no external horizontal loads.
Create viewable self-dead loading This setting
controls whether RAM Concept creates loads that are
viewable in plans and perspectives for the self-dead
loading. This setting has no effect on the actual loading
calculations. You would normally leave this unchecked.
Include supports above slab in self-dead loading
This includes the weight of supports (columns and walls)
as loads. You should consider that Concept bases punching
shear calculations at columns below on the total column
reaction that includes any loads applied directly above.
Include tendon component in punch check
reaction This includes the vertical component of the
tendon force within the punch zone (which often reduces
the punch check reaction). See Contribution from the
Vertical Component of Prestress on page 648 of Chapter
66, Punching Shear Design Notes for more information.
Check capacity of long. user reinf. without
designing additional program reinf. This option
instructs RAM Concept to perform a check of the existing
defined longitudinal user reinforcement and post-
tensioning and report any failed locations. Since RAM
Concept does not currently have user defined transverse
(shear) reinforcement, Concept always performs a
transverse shear (and SSR design for punching shear)
design for the given longitudinal reinforcement. When a
calc all is run using this option, any program
reinforcement will be deleted before the start of the
analysis and no additional program reinforcement will be
designed.
28.1.5 Code options
Design The applicable design code.
You can switch design codes during the design process.
Note that switching codes does not automatically change
the load factors. See Rebuilding load combinations on
page 39 for information on changing code specific load
factors.
Live load reduction The applicable loading code.
See Chapter 27, Using Live Load Reduction, for
information on the loading code.
28.1.6 Zero tension iteration options
If a mat is flexible or there are large overturning loads then
the springs may initially be resisting tension. You can
reduce this tension by iteration.
Zero tension iterations use an accelerator factor to make
convergence faster. An accelerator value of 1 results in no
acceleration, while a value that is too large may result in
wild oscillations instead of convergence. RAM Concept
calculates the accelerator value as follows:
accelerator = (T
j
/ T
i
)
power

maxAccelerator
where
T
j
= the tension force offset in iteration j (j = i+1)
T
i
= the tension force offset in iteration i
power = the user-controlled Accelerator Power (typically
1.0)
maxAccelerator = the user-controlled maximum allowed
acceleration (typically 1.5)
Iterations to use The number of iterations used in
calculations. The higher the number of iterations, the closer
the tension is to zero.
Accelerator Power The power in the above formula;
typically this is 1.
Max. Acceleration The maximum allowed acceleration.
151 RAM Concept
Chapter 28
28.1.7 Reinforcement layout and detailing
parameters
There are five parameters that influence how Concept lays
out and details reinforcement.
Three of the parameters are layout cost values that affect
Concept's priorities when laying out program
reinforcement. They have no effect on user reinforcement.
The cost parameters are:
Bar Length Cost When this value is increased Concept
gives a higher priority to minimizing the weight of the
reinforcement. This also causes Concept to create a larger
number of callouts.
Bar Group Length Cost When this value is increased
Concept gives a higher priority to minimizing the total
length of all of the callouts summed together. This also
causes Concept to use more reinforcement than necessary
in some areas.
Bar Callout Cost When this value is increased Concept
gives a higher priority to minimizing the total number of
callouts. This also causes Concept to use more
reinforcement than necessary in some areas, and may cause
Concept to provide reinforcement where none is required.
Using the default values for these three cost parameters
usually results in acceptable program reinforcement
layouts. However, you may want to try adjusting these
parameters if you want Concept to arrive at different
layouts.
The other two parameters are as follows:
Bar Rounding Length Concept lays out the program
reinforcement with lengths that are a multiple of this value.
The only instance where the program reinforcement does
not use this rounding length is where both ends of a
reinforcement callout are not straight (they are hooked or
anchored).
Bar End Cover Concept uses this value when detailing
both user and program reinforcement. Bar ends - except for
bar ends with anchors - are always pulled back from slab
edges by this amount.
28.1.8 Load History / Effective curvature ratio
options
Load history and effective curvature ratio options are
accessible on the Load History / ECR tab.
Figure 28-3 Calc options dialog, Load History / ECR tab
RAM Concept calculates an effective curvature ratio
(ECR) at every cross section:
ECR = C
e
/ C
g
Where
C
e
= the effective cross section curvature
C
g
= the gross section curvature
RAM Concept calculates C
e
by the approximate formula:
C
e
= (k
c
BSR C
g
) + ((1 BSR) C
ccs
)
where
k
c
= the concrete design creep factor (often 3.35) = total
strain / elastic strain
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average
creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a
default.
BSR = Bransons Stress Ratio
C
ccs
= the cross section curvature considering cracking,
creep and shrinkage.
See Chapter 51, Section Design Notes for further
explanation.
Creep factor k
c
as defined above. See Chapter 65, Load
History Deflections for additional information.
152
Chapter 28
RAM Concept
Shrinkage strain The design shrinkage value used to
determine long-term curvature in cross sections. See
Chapter 65, Load History Deflections for additional
information.
28.1.9 Load History
These are parameters that apply to RAM Concept's load
history calculations.
Initial Load Application The time of application of the
initial loads. This becomes the start time of the first load
history step specified in the Load History Criteria page.
Moist Cure Duration The duration of the moist cure
period. This is used in the calculation of shrinkage strains.
Convergence Tolerance The maximum specified
difference in calculated deflection between iterations in
order to consider RAM Concept to have converged upon
the solution.
Ageing Coefficient The coefficient that accounts for
various behaviors in the calculation of sustained loads. See
Chapter 65, Load History Deflections for additional
information.
Shrinkage Restraint % A percentage of the free
shrinkage strain to consider as externally restrained. The
shrinkage restraint is used to calculate a hypothetical
tension strain which is included in the tension stiffening
calculations. A normal range for this value will be 0 to
20%. See Chapter 65, Load History Deflections for
additional information.
Iterations to Use The maximum number of iterations to
use to calculate instantaneous or sustained portion of a
unique load history step.
Accelerator Power A value that determines how much
weight to give newly calculated curvatures in an iteration
compared to the average curvatures from the previous
iteration. A value of 1.0 indicates to give the newly
calculated curvature equal weight as the previous average
curvature. A value of greater than 1.0 will give the newly
calculated curvature more weight than the previous average
curvature.
28.1.10 Vibration options
Vibration and footfall analysis options are accessible on the
vibrations tab.
Figure 28-4 Calc options dialog, Vibrations tab
These are parameters that apply to RAM Concept's
vibration calculations.
Number of modes The number of modes for RAM
Concept to calculate in the Eigenvalue analysis.
Dynamic concrete modulus factor The ratio of
concrete modulus of elasticity to use in the dynamic
analysis over the concrete modulus of elasticity defined for
the static analysis.
Stiffness matrix Controls the stiffness matrix that is used
to solve the Eigenvalue analysis. The global linear elastic
analysis model can be used, or any load history step can be
selected.
Minimum footstep frequency The minimum footstep
frequency to consider in the footfall analysis. Normal
footstep rates range from 1.5 to 2.5 Hz.
Maximum footstep frequency The maximum footstep
frequency to consider in the footfall analysis. Normal
footstep rates range from 1.5 to 2.5 Hz.
Damping Ratio The damping ratio to use in the vibration
analysis, as a fraction of critical damping (damping ratio =
1). Normal range for concrete buildings is 0.01 to 0.04.
Simplifed (fast) calculation This analysis uses a fast
calculation technique that is generally suitable for day to
day design where RMS velocity values are not required.
Modal Analysis This analysis uses a comprehensive
dynamic modal superposition analysis which is suitable for
structures that are vibrationally sensitive or if RMS
velocity values are required.
153 RAM Concept
Chapter 28
Duration, Time Increment Defines the number of time
points that are used to calculate the modal analysis. The
duration should generally be set to capture at least 30
cycles of forcing and the time increment should be set to at
least 10 times shorter than the 4th harmonic of the fastest
walking frequency.
Weight of Person The static weight of the person
walking.
Max natural frequency Defines the maximum natural
frequency that is used in the dynamic analysis for the
resonant response.
All nodes Will consider excitation at every node.
Critical Nodes Will consider excitation only at nodes
where the expected response factor is greater than or equal
to the Excitation Response Factor Threshold.
Excitation Response Factor Threshold When
considering Critical Nodes, the threshold value of interest.
All DOF at all nodes Will calculate a response at every
DOF at every node for the Modal Analysis (not
recommended).
Vertical DOF at all nodes Will calculate a response at
every node, but only for vertical DOF.
Vertical DOF at all nodes Will calculate a response
only at the excited nodes.
28.2 About analysis errors
Two types of errors can occur during calculation: fatal and
non-fatal. RAM Concept generates an Analysis Error
message if an error occurs.
If a fatal error occurs, analysis cannot continue. You must
correct the problem, then recalculate. For example, if the
structure is unstable then Concept cannot triangularize the
stiffness matrix.
After non-fatal error occurs, you can choose whether to
continue the analysis calculation or not. For example, if a
point load is not located on the structure, you can do one of
the following:
continue the analysis and ignore the point load
fix the problem and continue calculation
stop the analysis
28.3 Recalculating
Some or all of the calculation analysis information
becomes out-dated when you edit the model. Click Calc All
( ) to run a new analysis calculation. If the Calc All
option is grayed-out ( ), the analysis results are current.
When you recalculate, the analysis starts from the point
where the information is no longer valid. For example, if
you were to add a load, it would not affect the stiffness
matrix. The recalculation would start with the analysis of
loads and then move on to design. If you were to edit the
concrete elements however, the calculation would start
from the beginning.
28.4 Calculating load history deflections
1 Click Calc Load History Deflections( ), or choose
Process > Calc Load History Deflections.
If any calculations are out of date at the time, a Calc All
will effectively be performed prior to calculating the Load
History Deflections.
28.5 Calculating vibration analysis
1 Click Calc Vibration Analysis( ), or choose Process >
Calc Vibration Analysis.
Note: If a load history stiffness matrix is selected, the load
history analysis must be run after specifying the load history
step to use and prior to running the vibration analysis.
28.6 Reviewing the calc log
After RAM Concept calculates results, you can review the
calc log to check for detected errors.
To open the Calc Log:
1 Choose Report > Calc Log.
154
Chapter 28
RAM Concept
To open the Load History Calc Log:
1 Choose Report > Load History Calc Log.
To open the Vibration Calc Log:
1 Choose Report > Vibration Calc Log.
28.7 Decreasing calculation time
The time it takes RAM Concept to calculate results is
dependent upon a number of parameters. You have control
over some of these parameters.
Desired Element Size
The time to analyze the stiffness matrix is a function of the
number of finite element nodes. You can speed up the
analysis time by using larger finite elements for
preliminary work. This means specifying a large Desired
Element Size when generating the mesh.
Design Strip Min Number of Divisions and Max Division
Spacing
The calculation time is a function of the number of span
segment strip cross sections and design sections on the
slab. Each span segment strip with n internal divisions
produces at least n+1 design cross sections; more if the
maximum spacing governs. You can speed up the analysis
time by using a small number of divisions and large
maximum spacing for preliminary design.
Enveloping
Load patterns and alternate envelope factors produce
additional calculations. The Concept algorithms for
enveloping are quite efficient and so do not slow down the
calculations very much. You could, however, speed up the
calculation time by eliminating load patterns and setting
alternate envelope factors to the same as load factors in the
Load Combinations window (Choose Criteria > Load
Combo to open the Load Combinations window).
SSR Design
Stud shear reinforcement design adds significantly to the
calculation time. You might consider delaying the drawing
of punching checks until most of the design is close to
finish.
Detailed Section Analysis
A cracked section analysis takes significant time. If you are
not interested in these results or they are not appropriate
then you can turn the detailed section analysis off.
To turn off Detailed Section Analysis:
2 Uncheck the Include detailed section analysis boxes.
Load History Deflections
Load history deflection calculation time is affected
significantly by the number of cross sections and the
convergence tolerance/iterations to use. Calculation time
can be reduced by reducing the number of cross sections or
increasing the convergence tolerance and/or reducing the
iterations to use.
155 RAM Concept
Chapter 29
29 Viewing the Results
RAM Concept produces a large volume of results from the
model analysis.
If you take the time to understand how Concept calculates
results (and their accessibility), Concept can be a much
more powerful tool in your workplace.
29.1 Type of results
You can view the results generated via text tables, plans,
and perspectives on layers of the following types:
Loading
Load Combination
Rule Set Design
Load History Deflections
Vibrations
Design Status
To locate a particular result, you need to know on which
layer it belongs. Only that layer contains the plans,
perspectives and text tables that show those results. For
example, you find the Live Loading: Deflection Plan on the
Live Loading layer, but the service deflection is in the
Service LC layer.
29.2 Viewing frequently used results
In general, using plans is the most useful way to view
results. Most results of interest relate to the following:
reinforcement quantities
status
deflections
support reactions
precompression
load balance
bending moment contours
section stresses (for some codes)
punching shear
bearing pressures
This section explains how to find such results.
Note: When you create a new file without using a template,
the file has RAM Concepts default new file setup. The
default new file setup provides preconfigured plans to show
some of the results in an organized way. You can change
these plans by editing the visible objects and plots. Keep in
mind that this may void or make irrelevant some of the
instructions below.
29.2.1 Viewing reinforcement results
RAM Concept stores the envelope of all required
reinforcement for all rule set designs in the Design Status
folder. There are a number of plans available to show
different reinforcement. The names of reinforcement plans
in the default new file setup match the visible
reinforcement.
To view reinforcement
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
If this plan shows more information than you require,
consider using an alternate plan such as the Longitude
Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
To view longitudinal direction bottom reinforcement
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Longitude Bottom
Reinforcement Plan.
To view a reinforcement plot
1 Choose a reinforcement plan.
2 Choose View > Plot ( ).
The Plot dialog box appears with the Section Design
dialog.
3 Check the Active box.
4 Select a reinforcement radio button.
5 Enter the Min Frame # and Max Frame #, and click OK.
29.2.2 Viewing status
It is possible for a concrete member not to comply with
code irrespective of the reinforcement provided. For
example, there is a limit on how much shear a member can
resist. RAM Concept reports a violation when the shear
exceeds the limit.
Status refers to code violations. When a design strip
complies with all code rules in a rule set design then its
status is OK. If there are violations then the status is
Failed or Exceeded (depending on the rule) and RAM
Concept identifies the code rule.
156
Chapter 29
RAM Concept
Concept stores the envelope of status for all rule set designs
in the design status layer folder.
To view the status
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Status Plan.
Note: There is no consideration of deflection limits in the
status report.
29.2.3 Viewing deflections
You may be interested in a number of different deflection
plans. Usually these are for vertical deflection but RAM
Concept does calculate lateral deflections and hence these
are viewable.
All deflection intensity and contour plots use uncracked
section (I
gross
) results and do not consider cracking (unless
the load factors have been increased for this purpose).
Note: Intensity and contour plots are accessed via the plot
Slab tab.
Deflection results that do consider cracking are available
via plots that use the Section Analysis tab and L.T.
Deflection plot.
Note: You could change these plans with the plot setting
such that the plot is no longer consistent with the plan name.
As such, changing the plot is discouraged.
See Chapter 65, Load History Deflections for more
information.
Note: Slab (identified by the plot tab) deflection plots
are available for loadings and load combinations. Section
Analysis (identified by the plot tab) deflection plots are
available for rule sets.
To view service deflection
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC >
Max Deflection Plan.
To view the strip-based long term deflection for ACI318 or
BS8110
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
L.T. Deflection Plan.
To view the strip-based long term deflection for AS3600
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design
> L.T. Deflection Plan.
To view the strip-based long term deflection for EC2
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Quasi-Permanent
Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.
29.2.4 Viewing support reactions
Support reaction plans are available by default for most
loadings and some load combinations.
Filtering can make trivial reactions invisible.
To view self-weight reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Self-Dead Loading >
Reactions Plan.
To view live load reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Std
Reactions Plan.
To view dead load reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > All Dead LC >
Std Reactions Plan.
To view factored load reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC >
Std Reactions Plan.
29.2.5 Viewing post-tensioning
precompression (P/A)
Precompression plans can be useful for viewing the level of
tendon prestress and the effect of restraining supports. The
default plans are for the x and y directions.
To view the precompression in the x-direction
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Balance Loading > Fx
Precompression Plan.
29.2.6 Viewing balanced load percentages
You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the
post-tensioning within design strips.
To view the balanced load percentages on the latitude design
strips plan
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips
Plan
3 Check the Balanced Load Percentages box, and click
OK.
Note: See Calculating the balanced load percentages
on page 389 for more information.
29.2.7 Viewing bending moment contours
Bending moment contour plans can be useful for
understanding the flexural behavior of complicated floors.
157 RAM Concept
Chapter 29
The Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ) increases the
usefulness of the plan.
To view the factored moments about the x-axis
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC >
Mx Plan.
29.2.8 Viewing section stresses
Some codes have concrete stress limits for post-tensioned
floors. You may want to know these stresses for the Initial
Service Design and Service Design. Usually you want to
view stresses based upon the design strips rather than
contours, as the design process rarely uses peak stresses
derived from contours.
To view the strip-based initial top stresses
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service
Design > Top Stress Plan.
To view the strip-based initial bottom stresses
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service
Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
To view the strip-based service top stresses
Top Stress Plan.
To view the strip-based service bottom stresses
Bottom Stress Plan.
Note: If too much information is visible then edit the plot.
You could make the capacities invisible, or limit the range
of strip numbers
29.2.9 Viewing punching shear results
RAM Concept checks punching (or two-way) shear for the
appropriate code. It calculates the stresses at each vertex of
a potential failure plane and compares the calculated
stresses to allowable values.
To view the punching shear status
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status
Plan.
Note: USR is unreinforced stress ratio
Note: RSR is reinforced stress ratio
Note: CTSR is closed ties stress ratio. This is only
available for AS3600. See The AS 3600 Punching Shear
Model on page 656 of Chapter 66, Punching Shear
Design Notes.
To view the punching shear SSR
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
29.2.10 Viewing live load reduction results
You can view live load reduction results for each
member (columns, punching checks, design strip
segments and design sections) and some loadings.
To view the column element LLR results
1 Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan.
3 Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.
To view the latitude design strip LLR results
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Strip
Plan.
3 Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.
29.2.11 Viewing soil bearing pressures
Files created with Mat foundation checked in the New
File dialog box have bearing pressure plans provided.
To view live loading soil bearing pressure
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Max Soil
Bearing Pressure Plan.
To view service soil bearing pressure
Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Note: You can add soil bearing pressure plans to files. See
Creating new result plans on page 158.
29.3 Viewing other results
There are times when the result you seek is not visible on
the default plans. The following describes how to show
such results.
29.3.1 Changing which result objects are
visible
In the default new file setup, specific objects are visible by
default. You can modify the visible objects to show less or
more results.
To change the visible objects:
158
Chapter 29
RAM Concept
2 Choose options in the Visible Objects dialog box and
click OK
Note: See Controlling views on page 11 for more infor-
mation.
29.3.2 Changing which results plot
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a
perspective. The default file setup has specific plot settings
for particular plans or perspectives. You may decide to
change the settings to suit your requirements, or to make
the plan easier to read.
To change a plot setting:
The Plot dialog box appears.
2 Make changes and click OK.
Note: The way plans and perspectives are named is often
a reflection of the plot settings used. If you change the plot
settings, you might make the names inaccurate.
Note: You must first open the plan or perspective before
you can use the plot command.
Example 29-1 Plotting the strip bending moment on an ex-
isting plan
The following example demonstrates plotting the bending
moment envelope on the Strength Design: Reinforcement
Plan:
Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design >
Reinforcement Plan.
Choose View > Plot ( ).
On the Strip tab, check Active.
Select Bending
Check Maximum Moment, and Minimum Moment.
Click OK.
29.3.3 Creating new result plans
You can create new plans for results that are not available
in the plans in the default new file setup. See Creating new
plans on page 11 and Creating new perspectives on
page 11 for more information on how to create new plans
and perspectives.
Example 29-2 Creating a new bending moment plan
The following example demonstrates creating a bending
moment plot plan for the Strength Rule Set.
Choose Layers > New Plan.
Enter a name such as Strength BMD.
RAM Concept automatically appends the word plan
to the name and prepends the layer name.
Select the Strength Design layer, and click OK.
The Visible Objects dialog box appears.
Click Show Nothing, and click OK.
Select the Section Analysis tab.
Check Active.
Keep the Value as Bending Moment
Uncheck Maximum Capacity and Minimum Capacity.
Click OK.
Note: You can select specific frame numbers in the dialog
box. This could be used to show a plot for, say, a single
beam.
Note: You can selectively turn off left, middle and right
strips. Left and right are the half middle strips. Center is
the column strip.
Example 29-3 Creating a new reactions plan
The following example demonstrates creating a Service LC
reactions plan:
Choose Layers > New Plan.
Enter a name such as Reactions.
RAM Concept automatically appends the word plan
to the name and prepends the layer name.
Select the Service LC layer, and click OK.
Click OK.
Select the Reaction tab.
Check Active.
Select Standard.
Check the supports (under Value) for which you want to
view reactions.
29.4 Section distribution plots
RAM Concepts section distribution plots allow you to see
the variation of analysis values across any line drawn on
the structure. These distribution plots can be very helpful in
159 RAM Concept
Chapter 29
understanding the behavior of the structure (especially for
moments and deflections), but they are not intended to be
used for quantitative design purposes.
29.4.1 Distribution plot values
Distribution plots are created using the Bending Moment
Distribution tool ( ), Vertical Shear Distribution tool
( ), Axial Force Distribution tool ( ) and Selected
Plot Distribution tool ( ). These plots display
predictions of values along the lines drawn across the slab.
RAM Concept bases these predictions on the calculated
results of the individual elements.
RAM Concepts calculation method guarantees that the
results for design strip segments and design sections are in
equilibrium with the nodal loads. The results for plots
across elements are not necessarily exact, however, and can
be much less accurate for coarse meshes or elements with
high aspect ratios. Even though RAM Concepts
calculation method guarantees stored elastic energy of the
stresses in each element is equal to the energy of the loads
applied to the element, for some oddly shaped elements
(such as pointy triangles), the energy formulation can result
in local fictitious stress spikes. Note that this limitation
does not affect design strip segments or design sections and
does not affect RAM Concepts reinforcement calculations.
29.4.2 Moment distribution plots
You can create moment distribution plots using the
Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ). The plot
displayed along the drawn line shows the distribution of
bending moment about the axis of the line. The values in
the main 2D plot (if any) controlled by the Plot ( )
dialog box have no effect on the moment distribution plot.
The integrated moment value shown below the moment
distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot, but does
not include the bending moment that is due to axial forces
and variations in the centroid elevation of the slab (such as
the bending moment caused by axial forces in the web and
flanges of a T-beam). You should use design strips and
design sections to determine design quantities as they
capture both components of the bending moment.
Figure 29-1 on page 159 shows a moment distribution plot
for My moments drawn on a contour plot for Mx moments.
The distribution plot shows My moments because the line
drawn on the plan is parallel to the y-axis. The distribution
plot has an integrated value of 657 kip-ft and a peak value
of 73.9 kips (or -73.9 kip-ft/foot). The contour plot
values have no effect on the distribution plot values. If you
used the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ) instead of the
Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ), the contour plot
and the distribution plot would display the same values.
Figure 29-1 Moment distribution plot showing My moments on an Mx con-
tour plot.
29.4.3 Shear distribution plots
You can create shear distribution plots using the Vertical
Shear Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along the
drawn line shows the distribution of vertical shear force
across the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if any)
controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on
the shear distribution plot. The integrated shear value
shown below the shear distribution plot is the sum of the
area of the plot. Design strips and design sections provide a
more accurate calculation of this integrated value.
29.4.4 Axial force distribution plots
You can create axial force distribution plots using the Axial
Force Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along the
drawn line shows the distribution of axial (horizontal) force
across the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if any)
160
Chapter 29
RAM Concept
controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on
the axial force distribution plot. The integrated axial force
value shown below the axial force distribution plot is the
sum of the area of the plot. Design strips and design
sections provide a more accurate calculation of this
integrated value.
29.4.5 Selected distribution plots
You can create selected distribution plots using the
Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed
along the drawn line shows the distribution of the values
shown in the main 2D plot (controlled in the Plot ( )
dialog box). The integrated value shown below the
distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. This
integrated value may or may not be useful depending upon
the plotted quantity (for example, the integration of a top-
stress plot is a force/length value, which is largely useless).
You need to take special care when using the Selected Plot
Distribution tool ( ) with the max and min axis
contour plots (such as a Service LC Max Bottom Stress
Plan). The max and min stress plots show the
maximum or minimum principal value at every point in the
slab. At each point along a selected plot distribution of the
principal values, the principal axes may be different. The
integrated value for the distribution plot has mathematical
meaning, but does not have any structural meaning.
If you want to see the distribution of stresses (or moments,
etc.) about a particular axis, you can use the Plot ( )
dialog box to set the contour plot axis (using the Value
Plotted Axis) to be the axis of the results you want to view.
The Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ) then shows the
values for that axis.
29.4.6 Effects of averaging
Distribution plots display the calculated results of the
individual elements. At the shared edge of two elements,
RAM Concept uses simple averaging. This produces
reasonable results in most cases, but can cause distortions
of the integrated result when RAM Concept averages a
small elements result with a large elements result. The
selected distribution plots are additionally affected by the
plan averaging that occurs in the 2D plot controlled by the
Plot ( ) dialog box.
This distortion caused by averaging is another reason why
you should always use design strips and design sections to
determine design quantities.
29.4.7 Summary
Section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of
analysis values across any line draw on the structure. These
distribution plots are very helpful in understanding the
behavior of the structure, but you should not use them for
quantitative design purposes. You should always use design
strips and design sections to determine design quantities
29.5 Miscellaneous results information
The following sections are for clarification of some results.
29.5.1 Top and bottom longitudinal
reinforcement
RAM Concept shows longitudinal reinforcement on plan
with the following parameters:
number of bars
bar type (as defined as a design strip property)
length of the bars
bar spacing
The reinforcement shown on the Rule Set Designs and
Design Status layers represents what is required in addition
to any specified user reinforcement and does not include
development length considerations. For a complete
consideration of all parameters including development
length refer to the Reinforcement Layer.
Figure 29-2 and Figure 29-3 show top reinforcement at a
column. There are two callouts because the design strips
terminate at the column. The required reinforcement is
different on each side, as often happens. You need to
rationalize this information and detail the bars in a logical
manner. The left hand reinforcement is nine #5 bars, each
6.5 ft. long [nine 16 mm bars, each 1.8 m long].
Figure 29-2 Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (US units)
Figure 29-3 Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (metric)
161 RAM Concept
Chapter 29
Figure 29-4 and Figure 29-5 show bottom reinforcement.
The reinforcement is thirteen #4 bars, each 9.5 ft. long
[fifteen 12 mm bars, each 2.9 m long].
Figure 29-4 Design Status: Bottom Reinforcement Plan (US units)
Figure 29-5 Design Status: Bottom Reinforcement Plan (metric)
29.5.2 Reinforcement bar lengths
Concept calculates the reinforcement bar lengths by
determining termination points. The termination points are
located at design strip segment cross sections where the
bars are no longer required for any rule set design.
The bar lengths shown on plan do not include development
or embedment lengths.
29.5.3 Orientation of reinforcement
Concept draws and plots reinforcement along an axis
determined by the first and last cross section of the design
strip.
Top bars appear over the axis and parallel to it. Bottom
bars appear under this axis and parallel to it.
Reinforcement plots are perpendicular to the axis.
Figure 29-6 shows the axis, line A-B, for a middle strip.
Point A is at the midpoint of the first middle strip cross
section, and point B is the midpoint of the last middle strip
cross section.
Design and capacity calculations always assume that the
reinforcement (other than tendons) is perpendicular to the
cross sections. If the reinforcement is placed away from the
perpendicular orientation (such as that shown in Figure 29-
6), the reinforcement quantity may need to be increased.
Figure 29-6 Reinforcement drawing and plotting relative to local axis
29.5.4 Shear reinforcement
Concept shows shear reinforcement zones on plan with the
following parameters:
number of spaces in the zone
number of legs per shear reinforcement set
spacing of the sets
length of the zone
Figure 29-7 shows shear reinforcement.
For US units and bar size, the zone is 2.78 ft. long and has
4 spaces with two #4 legs @ 8.34 centers.
For metric units and bar size, the zone is 0.772 m long and
has 4 spaces with two 12 mm legs @ 193 centers.
For both unit systems, there are five shear reinforcement
sets (spaces + 1).
162
Chapter 29
RAM Concept
Figure 29-7 Design Status: Shear Reinforcement Plan (US and metric
units).
29.5.5 Punching Shear Results
Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 66,
Punching Shear Design Notes.
Non-Standard Sections: ACI 318 and CSA A23.3
Some times the punching shear status is Non-Standard
Section. This is a warning, not an error. Non-Standard
Section means that at least one of the critical sections that
RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not
perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and
corner.
When you get a Non-Standard Section, you need to
inspect the critical sections that Concept has defined, and
use your engineering judgment to determine if you feel
they fit the ACI/CSA punching model (you should always
visually inspect the critical sections, even if Concept does
not flag them as non-standard). Concept still calculates a
stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456
Some times the punching shear status is Non-Standard
Section. This is a warning, not an error. Non-Standard
Section means that at least one of the critical sections that
RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not
perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and
corner.
When you get a Non-Standard Section, you need to
inspect the critical sections that Concept has defined, and
use your engineering judgment to determine if you feel
they fit the code punching model (you should always
visually inspect the critical sections, even if Concept does
not flag them as non-standard). Concept still calculates a
stress ratio for non-standard sections.
If a punching section can be classified by any of the
standard rules, it is considered to be a standard section.
The rules for standard sections are:
1 Interior Rectangular:
must be uniform thickness
must have 4 sides
section centroid must coincide with column centroid
opposite sides must be parallel and have same length
adjacent sides must be perpendicular
must be continuous (no gaps)
2 Edge Rectangular:
must have 3 sides
opposite sides must be parallel and have same length
adjacent sides must be perpendicular
can only have two discontinuous ends (assumed at slab
edge)
3 Corner Rectangular:
must have 2 sides
sides must be perpendicular
edge)
4 Interior Round (circular shape idealized into straight line
segments):
section centroid must coincide with column centroid
all segment ends must be on same radius from the center
of the column
must be continuous (no gaps)
5 Corner or Edge Round (circular shape idealized into
straight line segments):
column must be round
edge)
can only have two segment end points that are a different
radius from the center of the column than all other
segment end points (assumed at slab edge)
discontinuous segment end points must be the off
radius points (at slab edge)
Note: The rules are applied to EC2 sections before the
corners are filleted.
163 RAM Concept
Chapter 29
164
Chapter 29
RAM Concept
165 RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30 Plotting Results
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a
perspective. The default file setup has specific plot settings
for particular plans and perspectives. You can customize
these settings or create new plans and perspectives that
show your desired plots.
Plot settings are controlled via the Plot dialog which is
accessed through the Plot command ( ).
30.1 Setting the plotted results
You may decide to change the settings to suit your
requirements.
To change a plot setting:
1 Open the plan or perspective you want to change.
3 Select a tab and check Active to make that plot active.
4 Make changes and click OK.
Note: The name of a plan or perspective is often indicative
of its plot settings. If you change the plot settings, you may
want to rename the plan or perspective.
30.2 Slab
Checking the Active box in the Slab tab allows you to
display and control various slab analysis plot quantities
such as moment, shear, axial, torsion, deflections, and area
spring reactions. For plotting axial stresses or in-plane
shear stresses, select the depth at which to plot the value.
Other plot values are not dependent upon depth.
We recommend curve smoothing for contour plots. Without
curve smoothing, contours will be plotted element by
element, which can make it difficult to observe the results
of a larger region (also, for some plotted quantities, nothing
will be shown unless curve smoothing is on). RAM
Concept allows you to define a resolution for the selected
plot value. Finer plot resolutions require longer screen
regeneration times.
For contour plots, you can control the frequency of the
contour lines by unchecking Use default magnitudes and
entering the desired contour value. For color contour plots,
you can set the upper and lower limits of the contour values
by entering the minimum and maximum values.
Slab plots are available for loading, load combination and
rule set layers.
Figure 30-1 The plot dialog with slab result plotting active.
The Animation Control is described in more detail in the
section, Plotting Results.
30.2.1 About slab plotting contexts
There are three possible contexts: Standard, Max and
Min. The Max and Min context are used to envelope the
maximum and minimum values for each point in the slab.
While the meaning of the Standard, Max and Min contexts
is somewhat self-evident, Table 30-1 lists how Concept
calculates these values considering load patterns and
standard and alternate load factors.
30.2.2 Max and Min context slab plot
limitations
Concept stores only a limited number of slab analysis
values. For example, standard, maximum and minimum
Mx, My and Mxy values are stored, while moment values
about other axes (not x- or y- axis) are calculated via
Mohrs Circle calculations. Similarly, standard, maximum
and minimum Px, Py, Vxy, Mx, My and Mxy values are
used to calculate stress values at the top, center and bottom
of the slab.
Because minimum and maximum values are not stored for
these derived values, the calculation of the minimum and
maximum values is approximate.
Example: if one loading pattern gives an x-deflection of 10
and a y-deflection of 0, while another pattern gives a x-
deflection of 0 and a y-deflection of 10, the Max context
166
Chapter 30
RAM Concept
deflection will be reported as 14.4, even though the true
maximum deflections never exceeded 10.
The following slab maximum and minimum context plot
values should always be considered approximate:
Values for any axis that is not the x- or y- axis.
Stress values for any depth that is not mid-depth.
Lateral deflection values for any depth that is not mid-
depth.
Lateral deflection values where the center of the slab is
not at elevation zero.
Layer Type Standard Max Min
Loading Values with full applied
loads (no pattern loading)
Maximum values that occur consid-
ering each pattern loading (complete
with pattern factors) and the full
loading.
Minimum values that occur consid-
ering each pattern loading (complete
with pattern factors) and the full
loading.
Single
Load Combination
Linear combination of
Loading Standard values
using the Standard load
factors
Values that occur when combining
all loadings, taking the maximum
value of the following four values
for each loading:
Standard Load Factor * Max
Alt Load Factor * Max
Standard Load Factor * Min
Alt Load Factor * Min
all loadings, taking the minimum
value of the following four values
for each loading:
Standard Load Factor * Max
Standard Load Factor * Min
Lateral Group
Load Combination
(not available) Values that occur when combining
all gravity loadings, taking the
maximum value of the following
four values for each loading:
Std Load Factor * Max
Std Load Factor * Min
Plus the maximum single value of
all of the lateral loadings' (of the
correct type) values:
Std Lateral Load Factor * Max
Alt Lateral Load Factor * Max
Std Lateral Load Factor * Min
Alt Lateral Load Factor * Min
all gravity loadings, taking the
minimum value of the following
four values for each loading:
Std Load Factor * Max
Std Load Factor * Min
Plus the minimum single value of all
of the lateral loadings' (of the correct
type) values:
Std Lateral Load Factor * Max
Alt Lateral Load Factor * Max
Std Lateral Load Factor * Min
Alt Lateral Load Factor * Min
Rule Set (not available) Maximum of all of the related load
combination values
Minimum of all of the related load
combination values
Table 30-1 Calculation of Standard, Max and Min values
167 RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30.3 Reaction
Checking the Active box in the Reaction tab allows you to
display and control analysis reaction quantities. Selecting
the Standard context button displays reactions
corresponding to the standard results (more information
about standard and enveloping results is available in
Chapter 50, Analysis Notes). For the standard results,
you can display any number of reactions for column
above/below, wall above/below, point spring/support, line
spring/support, and the standard reactions used for the
punching checks. If a column above and below occur at the
same location in plan, and both Column Above and
Column Below boxes are checked, the sum of the reactions
is shown at that location. The same holds true for walls
above and below.
The other buttons in the Context group are for the
enveloped results. Concept displays reactions for columns
(above/below) and punching checks for the envelope result
of the selected context. Wall reactions will be enveloped
and available for plotting in future versions.
The standard reaction context values are only available
for loading and load combination layers, while the six
enveloped contexts are available for loading, load
combination and rule set design layers.
Figure 30-2 Plot dialog reaction tab
30.4 Strip
Checking the Active box in the Strip tab allows you to
display analysis results for the design strips. Each plot
value represents the variation of the selected value at each
design strip segment cross section (along the axis of each
strip selected). Plots related to the maximum and minimum
moments and shears can be displayed, enabling the
envelope for a particular plot value to be displayed.
The Torsion value is the torsion about the centroid of the
design strip segment, in equilibrium with the element nodal
forces.
The Twist value is the component of the torsion due to the
slab twisting moment (Mxy for design strips parallel to the
x- or y- axes) calculated from the element stress predictions
168
Chapter 30
RAM Concept
(and is not necessarily in equilibrium with the element
nodal forces). The Twist value is not recommended for use
in torsion design.
Absolute Twist is the sum of the absolute value of the twist
along the cross section. This value differs from the Twist
value in that it is always positive, and that in its calculation,
twist values of different signs do not cancel out.
The Absolute Twist value is not used in design unless
Wood-Armer torsion design is selected.
Note: The accuracy of the Twist and Absolute Twist values
are determined from element stress predictions and are
dependent upon the quality and the refinement of the mesh.
Unlike the Torsion value, there is no guarantee that these
values will be in equilibrium with the applied nodal loads.
Definitions of other values can be found in Chapter 50,
Analysis Notes.
The standard strip context values are only available for
loading and load combination layers, while the four
enveloped contexts are available for loading, load
combination and rule set design layers.
Figure 30-5 Plot dialog strip tab.
30.5 Section Analysis
Checking the Active box in the Section Analysis tab allows
you to display analysis and design results for the design
strips including moments, shears, stresses, crack width, and
effective curvature ratio. The plotted analysis results are for
the envelope results. They can be plotted against the design
capacity resulting from RAM Concepts final design. Note
that some quantities may not have capacity values defined.
Section analysis plots are only available for rule set design
layers.
Figure 30-6 Plot dialog section analysis tab.
30.6 Section Design
Checking the Active box in the Section Design tab allows
you to plot top, bottom and shear reinforcement quantities
corresponding to Concepts final design or a design for a
particular rule set.
The Top Developed and Bottom Developed values
represent the amount of fully developed top and bottom
reinforcement that is required at each location.
Section design plots are only available for rule set designs
and the design status layers.
Figure 30-7 Plot dialog section design tab
169 RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30.6.1 About section design context plots
The Section Design plot group box, Context allows for
three possible contexts:
With Span Detailing
Without Span Detailing, and
User Provided Reinf.
Span detailing is explained in Section 53.1 on page 415 of
Chapter 53, Reinforcement Notes.
The effects of the Span Detailing Contexts on plots are
explained in Table 30-2 and Table 30-3.
For the Design Status layer, the context of With Span
Detailing includes the effects of the assumed
reinforcement development calculations in the plots of
developed reinforcement.
30.6.2 About skyline plots
When you select the With Span Detailing or User
Provided Reinf contexts, Concept plots the reinforcement
with a skyline plot.
In a skyline plot, each calculated value is valid for a portion
of the span (as shown by a horizontal line) instead of the
values being interpolated between cross sections. While
this is primarily just a graphical difference, the actual
detailing of the reinforcement into bar callouts is
performed using the skyline plot values.
For rule set designs, the effects of the Span Detailing
Context (other than the skyline plotting) are as shown in
Table 30-2 below.
For the Design Status layer, the effects of the Span
Detailing Context (other than the skyline plotting) are as
shown in Table 30-3 below.
Table 30-2 Effects of span detailing context on rule set plots
Value Without span detailing With span detailing User provided reinforcement
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom
As calculated per section Values calculated per section are
lengthened according to the span
detailer rules (see Section 53.1 Span
detailing of Chapter 53, Reinforce-
ment Notes).
Vector component of area of user
individual bars intersected by the
cross sections
Top Dev
Bottom Dev
As calculated per section As calculated per section Vector component of developed area
of user individual bars intersected by
the cross sections
Shear
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
As calculated per section As calculated per section (none)
170
Chapter 30
RAM Concept
Table 30-3 Effects of Span Detailing Context on Design Status Plots
30.7 Punching Analysis
Checking the Active box in the Punching Analysis tab
allows you to display information about the punching
analysis including stresses for each critical section for any
of the enveloped force sets. The values displayed are for
the selected critical section(s) with the selected force set,
and are not necessarily the worst case for the column. The
most critical punching case can always be displayed by
selecting the Max Stress Ratio button and checking Section
1.
Punching analysis plots are only available for rule set
design and the design status layers.
Figure 30-8 Plot dialog punching analysis tab
30.7.1 Punching Shear Results
Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 66,
Punching Shear Design Notes.
There is discussion of Non-Standard Section in
Punching Shear Results on page 162.
Value Without span detailing With span detailing User provided reinforcement
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom
As calculated per section Values calculated per section are
lengthened according to the span
detailer rules (see Section 53.1 Span
detailing of Chapter 53, Reinforce-
ment Notes).
Vector component of area of user
individual bars intersected by the
cross sections
Top Dev
Bottom Dev
As calculated per section Plotted values are the maximum of
the reinforcement calculated per sec-
tion and the amount of developed
reinforcement calculated from the
span-detailed amounts of non-devel-
oped reinforcement (see Section 53.1
Span detailing of Chapter 53,
Reinforcement Notes).
These values are used in the final
capacity check calculations.
Vector component of developed area
of user individual bars intersected by
the cross sections
Shear
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
As calculated per section As calculated per section (none)
171 RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30.8 Vibration Analysis
30.8.1 Vibration Results
Vibration analysis notes appear in Chapter 67, Vibration
Analysis Notes.
Figure 30-9 Plot dialog vibration analysis tab
30.9 Plot Animation Controls
Slab and Vibration plot data can be animated in an endless
loop. The animation scales most plot values from their
normal values to zero and back. Vibration mode plot
values are scaled from +1 to -1 to simulate oscillating
values. You have control over playing the animation, the
number of animation frames, and the animation speed.
Figure 30-10 Plot animation setup
To enable animation:
1 Check the Enable Animation box.
2 Enter a positive number in # Frames.
When the Plot Settings dialog is confirmed, the first frame
of the animation is displayed with the maximum plot
values. When the animation is played, the data will shrink
to the minimum values, then grow to the maximum and
repeat.
Figure 30-11 Plot animation controller
Playing the animation is controlled by buttons in the main
tool bar. Press the play/pause button to play or pause the
animation. The slider controls the duration of the
animation. When set at the leftmost value (-), the duration
of the animation (from minimum to maximum values) will
be approximately 10 seconds. The next slider positions set
the duration to 5 seconds, 2 seconds and 1 second. The
rightmost value (+) plays the animation as fast as possible.
Many Concept functions, such as zooming and panning,
will function while the animation is playing, although some
mouse motions will freeze the animation temporarily. The
animation speed slider can be changed at any time.
The geometry for each animation frame is cached the first
time the frame is displayed. A small status box is displayed
when the frame is being computed. Each subsequent
display of a frame uses the cached geometry for fast
display. Pausing or resuming the animation while the
animation frames are being computed does not affect the
cached data. However, the animation geometry cache is
discarded when switching to another plan or perspective
view, and must be recomputed when switching back. Any
change to the plot settings also invalidates the cached
geometry.
The cached geometry can consume a significant amount of
process memory. Memory consumption grows linearly
with the number of frames. Intensity plots generally
consume more memory than Color Contour plots, and
Color Contour plots consume much more memory than
Contour line plots. The static portions of the scene, e.g.
slabs, walls and columns, do not contribute to the memory
consumption.
30.10 Difference Plot Controls
The difference between two plot layers can be plotted if the
results of the two layers are compatible. Select the layer to
be subtracted from the Diff Layer choice box, or None if no
difference is desired.
Figure 30-12 Plot difference control
Section Analysis, Section Design, Punching Analysis and
Vibration results cannot be differenced. Otherwise, a
172
Chapter 30
RAM Concept
difference layer is compatible with the plot layer if the
difference layer has results available for the data selected in
the plot layer. The dialog cannot be be confirmed if there is
a difference incompatibility.
For example, consider Plot Layer set to Self-Dead Loading
and Diff Layer set to Code Minimum Design. The Code
Minimum Design layer has results for Slab, Reaction and
Strip, therefore any (or all) of these layers can be active.
The Code Minimum Design layer does not have standard
context results; selecting the standard context on any of the
tabs will be incompatible. The text next to the Diff Layer
choice box will describe the first incompatibility detected.
Now consider the layers reversed, Plot Layer set to Code
Minimum Design and Diff Layer set to Self-Dead Loading.
Any settings can be differenced on the Slab, Reaction and
Strip tabs, because the Code Minimum Design layer
contains a subset of the results available in the Self-Dead
Loading layer. However, activating any one of the Section
Analysis, Section Design or Punching Analysis tabs will be
incompatible.
173 RAM Concept
Chapter 31
31 Using the Auditor
There will be times when a design result calculated by
RAM Concept may be confusing or unexpected. This could
be due to incorrect input, an unusual set of resultants (for
example: a negative moment at mid-span), or a code rule
interpretation. The Auditor assists in displaying design
information for you to review.
31.1 How the Auditor can assist the
design process
The Auditor is a tool that displays input data, parameters,
resultants and code specific results for design strip cross
sections, design sections and punching checks, in text
format.
The Auditor displays information that could be useful for:
1 Checking input data such as reinforcement bar cover.
2 Checking calculated data such as the elevation of the
center of a reinforcement bar.
3 Reviewing the rule set designs (service, strength etc.)
4 Checking the envelope of resultants (moment, shear
force, axial force etc.).
5 Revising the number of strands in a tendon to satisfy code
stress limits.
31.2 About the three design steps
RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps:
Step 1: Each Rule set performs its Pass 1 selection of
reinforcement. For most rule sets this is the entire design.
Step 1b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is
summarized.
Step 2: Each Rule set performs its Pass 2 selection of
reinforcement needed in addition to that summarized in
step 1b. For most rule sets nothing happens in this step, but
for some rule sets such as shear design and ductility
design the summarized step 1 reinforcement needs to be
known before the design can be performed.
Step 2b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is
summarized.
Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no
reinforcement is added in this step) and final analysis.
The Auditor reports the three steps as the following:
Pass 1
Pass 2
Final check
31.3 About the information displayed by
the Auditor
The information displayed by the Auditor is for a single
cross section of one span segment strip, or a design section.
The Auditor displays the following:
1 Design strip and cross-section number, or design section
number
2 Concrete components for a cross section
number of concrete blocks
top and bottom elevation of each block
depth and width of each block
initial and final strengths (cylinder and cube)
initial and final E
c
(modulus of elasticity) values
density
inclusion or exclusion of block from shear core
See Concrete Core Determination on page 405 for
discussion of shear core.
3 Reinforcement properties for each bar type
elevation
yield stress
E
c
(modulus of elasticity) value
bar area
bar diameter
4 Tendon properties for each tendon type
elevation of cgs (center of gravity of strand) above
datum
ultimate strength (stress)
yield stress
effective stress
E
c
(modulus of elasticity) value
area of strand
bonding
R-component [the component of the tendon parallel to
the design strip cross section (perpendicular to the design
strip spine)]
174
Chapter 31
RAM Concept
S-component [the component of the tendon perpen-
dicular to the design strip cross-section (parallel to the
design strip spine)]
Z-component [the vertical component of the tendon
across the cross-section (only used for hyperstatic calcula-
tions)]
length
initial concrete strain
duct width
number of strands per duct
cross sectional area per strand
number of ducts
5 Base design envelopes (for each Rule Set Design):
The envelopes for maxima and minima of moment and
shear force are displayed. These are modified, as
appropriate, for torsion and axial force design. The
envelopes list the following resultants:
Vr (horizontal shear)
Ps (axial tension)
Vz (vertical shear)
Mr (bending)
Ts (torsion)
Mz (diaphragm bending)
6 Reinforcement (for each Rule Set Design):
Depending upon the rule set, RAM Concept adds
reinforcement to the cross section.
As Top
As Bot.
As Shear Density
As Shear Spacing
As Shear (density multiplied by spacing)
Brackets appear after each result showing which code rule
governed.
7 Cross Section Forces (Analysis)
Depending upon the rule set, the Auditor displays cross
section forces and other information.
Cross Section Strains
curvature
top, centroid and bottom strains
Concrete Forces for each block
top and bottom stress
force
force elevation
Untensioned reinforcement forces for each bar
elevation
strain
stress
bar area
force
Post-tensioning forces for each tendon
elevation
cross-section strain
component cross-section strain (considers tendon
angle)
Tendon Force (effective force in cross section
plane)
31.4 Using the Auditor
The Auditor can be used for specific rule set designs, or for
the design summary.
Note: A rule set audit has significantly less data than a
design summary audit. As such, a rule set audit may be more
useful.
To use the Auditor for a rule set design:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Selected Design >
Selected Plan
2 Select the Auditor tool ( ).
3 Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section, or
design section, you wish to audit.
The Auditor window opens.
4 Scroll to find the information you require.
Note: You may find it convenient to make the design cross
sections visible for the purpose of selecting the correct one.
Note: The Auditor selects either (i) the nearest cross-
section (of a visible span segment strip) to the point you
click, or (ii) nothing, if there is no cross section within 3 feet
[1m] of the point you click. The cross-sections themselves
do not need to be visible.
Note: The Auditor will not work if a Calc All has not been
performed.
Note: The Auditors results may not be current if the
analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out
( ), the analysis results are current).
175 RAM Concept
Chapter 31
To use the Auditor for the design summary:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Selected Plan.
2 Follow instructions for rule set design above.
31.5 Using the Auditor for guidance on
post-tensioning
Certain codes limit the service stresses and designers are
required to comply with the limits. The Auditor displays
advice on how much additional post-tensioning strand is
required in a design strip to satisfy certain code clauses.
This information is accessible from many plans, but the
instructions below are for using the Service Rule Set
Design.
To use the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning:
Status Plan
2 Select the Auditor tool ( ).
3 Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section which
has failed a stress criterion and for which you require
guidance.
4 Scroll to the text bordered by two lines of asterisks (top
and bottom) near the bottom of the audit.
If the maximum tensile stress is within code then no
information will be displayed. If the calculated concrete
tensile stresses exceed the allowable limit then the Auditor
suggests the percentage increase in strand required to
satisfy the stress limit.
Figure 31-1 Auditor text indicating percentage increase required to com-
ply with code.
Note: The precompression and balance effects of a tendon
are not necessarily limited to the area (and design strip)
where the tendon is located. Due to the diversion of
prestress (bleed of P/A) beyond the design strip the
suggested percentage increase may not be exact.
Note: If there are tendons intersecting the cross-section at
an angle other than ninety degrees then the suggested
percentage increase may be inaccurate.
31.6 About the information displayed by
the Punching Check Auditor
The information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor
is for a punching check at a single column.
The Auditor displays the following:
1 Punching check number
2 Location (coordinates)
3 Geometry
axis angle
radius
4 Cover to CGS
5 Concrete Strength
6 Precompression
7 Resultant envelopes
8 Critical section perimeter properties
number of critical sections
perimeter length
perimeter depth
torsion strip properties (for AS3600)
9 Unreinforced stress ratio
10Stud shear reinforcement rail properties (if required for
design).
11Summary
31.7 Using the Punching Check Auditor
The Auditor can be used for the strength rule set design, or
for the design summary.
To use the Punching Check Auditor for the strength rule set
design:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design >
Selected Plan
2 Select the Punching Check Auditor tool ( ).
3 Click on the plan at the punching check location you wish
to audit.
4 Scroll to find the information you require.
Note: The Auditor will not work if a Calc All has not been
performed.
Note: The Auditors results may not be current if the
analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out
( ), the analysis results are current).
176
Chapter 31
RAM Concept
To use the Auditor for the design summary:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Selected Plan.
Follow instructions for the strength rule set design above.
177 RAM Concept
Chapter 32
32 Using the Report Viewer
It will sometimes be desirable to save or print a report for a
particular aspect of the design. The report viewer enables
this functionality for punch check results.
32.1 Using the Report Viewer
The Report Viewer can be invoked for punch checks from
the design strip layer, the design summary layer, or for an
individual rule set design layer. The information the report
contains will always be the entire design summary.
To use the Report Viewer:
1 Select the Report Viewer tool ( ).
2 Draw a rectangle around all the punch checks you wish
to generate a report for.
The Report viewer window opens.
3 A report for each punch check will be contained on an
individal tab. Select the tab for the desired punch check.
Note: The Report will not be displayed if a Calc All has not
been performed.
Note: The generated reports results may not be current if
the analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-
out ( ), the analysis results are current).
32.2 Saving Reports
It will sometimes be desirable to save generated reports.
To save reports displayed in the Report Viewer:
1 Select File>Save from the Report Viewer menu.
2 Enter a filename to save the file. The default file
extension will be .crvz for RAM Concept Reports.
32.3 Opening Previously Saved Reports
To open reports previously saved in the Report Viewer:
1 Select File>Open from the Report Viewer menu or the
RAM Concept menu. If opening from the RAM Concept
menu, select RAM Concept Reports under Files of
type:.
2 Type or select the filename of the file to be opened.
32.4 Printing Reports
To print reports generated in the Report Viewer:
1 Select File>Print from the Report Viewer menu.
2 After configuring the desired print settings, select the
print icon from the toolbar.
Note: The resolution of the printed report can be
controlled by using the zoom controls on the View menu of
the Report Viewer.
178
Chapter 32
RAM Concept
179 RAM Concept
Chapter 33
33 Using the Estimate
When preparing a design, it can be useful to know the
amount and cost of the materials used in the model. The
estimate window serves this purpose.
The estimate is particularly useful for comparing
preliminary schemes. You can also use it to compare
changes made to a design.
RAM Concept automatically calculates material quantities.
Specified unit costs allow supply and installation costs to
be calculated
33.1 Viewing the estimate
The Estimate window lists the different material quantities
and their unit costs for supply and installation (labor).
To view the Estimate:
1 Choose Report > Estimate.
33.2 What the estimate calculates
The material quantities calculated are:
Concrete
The volume of the concrete floor excluding supports.
Formwork
The area of horizontal soffit formwork.
Post-Tensioning
The weight of strand based upon tendon plan length. This
does not include stressing tails or allowance for drape.
Mild Steel Reinforcing
The weight of reinforcement based upon the detailed
reinforcement in the Reinforcement layer. This does
include bar hooks, but does not include laps. The quantities
do not include bars not shown in the Reinforcement layer
such as detailing or tendon support bars.
33.3 Editing the unit costs
You can only edit unit costs. The estimate separates unit
costs into materials and installation (labor).
To edit the unit costs:
1 Choose Report > Estimate.
2 Enter the costs for each material.
Note: The costs update when you press Enter or Tab.
33.4 About unit costs
Unit costs can vary for many reasons, including the
following:
Region (labor availability and skill).
Size of the floor and the project.
Formwork system (usually flat slabs are more
economical to form than beams).
Post-tensioning costs are not the same for different
systems. Unbonded systems are often less expensive in
some countries, but this may not be true if large bonded
tendons are used in beams.
Large diameter reinforcing bar is generally less
expensive than small diameter bar for materials and labor.
180
Chapter 33
RAM Concept
181 RAM Concept
Chapter 34
34 Printing
RAM Concept provides a range of printing customization
options to help you create professional printouts and
reports. You control the information included on a page and
in a report. Every window in RAM Concept can be printed
individually or as part of a report. This chapter describes
the printing features you can use to achieve the result you
want and offers techniques for printing efficiently.
Note: See Determining the fit of plans on page 182 for
more information on setting the print scale of plan windows.
34.1 Basic printing instructions
You can selectively print windows, or the entire report.
To print a window:
1 Make the window you want to print the active window.
2 Choose Report > Print Window.
3 Select the printing options you want. See General
printing options on page 181 for more information.
4 Click Print.
To print the report:
1 Choose Report > Print Report
2 Select the printing options you want. See General
printing options below for more information.
3 Click Print.
Note: To make sure you get the desired printing results,
preview the print job before you print. See Previewing the
print job on page 183 for more information.
34.2 General printing options
The Print dialog tells RAM Concept what printer to use,
which pages to print, and how many copies you need.
Review these settings every time you print a window or
report.
34.2.1 Printer selection
Specify the printer you want RAM Concept to print via the
Select and Configure Printers menu item. The printer can
also be selected in the Select Printer section of the Print
dialog, but the per printer stored settings will not be used.
With the latest compatible drivers installed, RAM Concept
can print on any Windows printer or plotter connected
directly to your computer or connected via a network.
Consult your printer documentation for information on
setting up your printer and selecting the appropriate printer
driver.
34.2.2 Page range
In the Page Range section of the Print dialog box, select
which pages to print:
Use the All option to print all the pages in the report, or
all the pages that are required to print the active window.
Specify the range of pages you want to print. Type a
hyphen between two numbers to print the pages in that
range (inclusive). You must type the numbers separated by
hyphens in ascending order (4-7, not 7-4).
34.2.3 Number of copies
In the Print dialog box, the Number of copies option
indicates the number of printed copies of the print job you
want. Enter a value from 1 to 9999.
34.2.4 Printing to PDF
RAM Concept has the ability to print directly to the .pdf
file format. Desired paper size, orientation, and margins
can be set up by choosing the Report > Setup PDF Export
dialog.
34.3 Select and Configure Printer options
In the Select and Configure Printer dialog box, you can set
the printer, page size and source, default orientation, and
margin size for your printed pages. These per-printer
settings are stored on your system and are used as the
default settings every time you print.
To change the print setup options:
1 Choose Report > Select and Configure Printers.
2 Select the printer that is of interest.
3 Click on the Page Setup button and select the options that
you want in the dialog that opens.Click OK.
4 Click OK.
34.3.1 Printer selection
The last printer selected in the Select and Configure
Printers dialog is the default printer for RAM Concept.
182
Chapter 34
RAM Concept
RAM Concept can print on any printer with the appropriate
printer drivers installed.
34.3.2 Paper size and source
Select the paper size and paper source the printer uses from
the Paper section of the Page Setup portion of the Select
and Configure Printer dialog. The printer selection dictates
the options for the size and source.
34.3.3 Default orientation
In the Orientation section of the Page Setup portion of the
Select and Configure Printers dialog, select the default
page orientation:
Use Portrait for a vertical page orientation.
Specify Landscape for a horizontal page orientation.
Page orientation is also customizable for each individual
printed window in the Report Contents window. See
Printing optimizations on page 183 for more
information.
34.3.4 Margin size
Set the page margins in the Margins section of the Page
Setup portion of the Select and Configure Printers dialog. If
the left, right, top, or bottom margin sizes you select
overlap, or they are off the paper, an alert message appears.
34.4 Determining the fit of plans
Plans print according to their Print Area and Print Scale
settings. Everything within the printing area boundary
prints using as many pages as necessary to print at the
desired scale.
To specify the print scale:
1 Select the Print Scale tool ( ).
2 Enter the scale in the Print Scale dialog and click OK.
Note: Typically, you want to check Set for all plans in
the Print Scale dialog if you are printing a report.
To specify the printed area on the plan:
1 Select the Print Area tool ( ).
2 Click at two opposite corners to identify the rectangular
boundary.
To specify the printed area with coordinates:
1 Choose View > Print Area or double click on the Print
Area tool ( ).
2 Uncheck the option to Automatically calculate printing
area and enter the left, right, top, and bottom coordinates in
the Printing Area Setup dialog. Check Set for all plans if
you want this printing area to be used by all plans.
3 Click OK.
34.5 Printing the desired perspective
viewpoint
The saved print viewpoint determines how a perspective
window prints. Sometimes a viewpoint that looks good on
screen may not appear as desired in print due to the
dimensions of the page. Remember to examine the print
preview carefully after setting the print viewpoint to verify
that the scale and orientation of the model fit on the page as
intended.
Use the Set Print Viewpoint tool ( ) to save the print
viewpoint to what is visible on screen. This viewpoint does
not change unless you reset it. You can manipulate the
model on screen without affecting the saved print
viewpoint. To display the saved print viewpoint, use the
Show Print Viewpoint tool ( ).
To set the print viewpoint:
1 Adjust the on screen viewpoint by:
Setting the relative scales of the coordinate axes
using the Scale tool ( ).
Rotating the model with the Rotate about x- and
y-axes tool ( ) and the Rotate about z-axis tool
( ).
Zooming to show the desired portion of the
model.
Setting the projection to Parallel Projection ( )
or Perspective Projection ( ) and the modeling to
Solid Modeling ( ) or Wire Modeling ( ).
2 Click Set Print Viewpoint ( ).
To show the set print viewpoint on screen:
1 Click Show Print Viewpoint ( ).
183 RAM Concept
Chapter 34
34.6 Previewing the print job
Preview the print job before you send it to the printer to
ensure the images and text fit as desired on the chosen
paper with the specified margin, and orientation settings.
See Select and Configure Printer options on page 181 for
more information on how to change the page setup.
To preview the active window print job:
1 Choose Report > Window Preview.
2 Examine the preview as described in the following
sections and click Close.
To preview the report print job:
1 Choose Report > Report Preview.
2 Examine the preview as described in the following
sections and click Close.
34.6.1 Zooming
Scale the print preview by setting the zoom percentage in
the print preview window. You can choose a zoom factor of
500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, Fit
Page or Fit Width, or you can type a numeric percentage of
your choice (between 5% and 500%).
34.6.2 Viewing multiple pages at once
You can view the print preview one, two, or four pages at a
time. Use One Page ( ) to view one page of the print job
at a time. Click Multi Page ( ) and select 2-up to view
two pages at a time or 4-up to view four pages at once.
34.6.3 Paging through the print job
The print preview automatically opens to the first page in
the print job. Use Next ( ) to page forward through the
print job and Previous ( ) to page back.
34.7 Printing optimizations
To achieve the best possible results when printing, you may
need to customize the page orientation and appearance
settings for the individual report items (or windows).
34.7.1 Customizing page orientation
You can print each window or report item in RAM Concept
in Portrait or Landscape orientation. The default page
orientation is set in the Select and Configure Printer dialog
box. See Select and Configure Printer options on
page 181 for more information on setting the default
orientation. You may want some items in a report or a
specific window to print in a different orientation than the
rest. Use the Orientation column of the Report Contents
window to specify the orientation of an item. Choose
Default to use the Page Setup settings, or Portrait or
Landscape to override the Page Setup orientation.
To set the orientation of a particular window or item:
1 Make sure the Orientation column is visible in the Report
Contents window. You may need to widen the window or
scroll horizontally.
2 Click on the Orientation column value for the item to
toggle between Default, Portrait and Landscape. A value of
Default in the Orientation column sets the orientation to the
default orientation set in the Page Setup dialog box.
34.7.2 Customizing the printed appearance
of plans and perspectives
In the same way that you change the colors, font, and line
type of plan and perspective windows on the screen, you
can customize their appearance in print.
Use the Print tab for schemes in the Appearance dialog to
set the appearance settings for a plan or perspective you
wish to print. See Changing colors, font, and line type on
page 13 for more information about appearance schemes
and changing appearance settings.
If you want the printed plan or perspective to have the same
appearance settings as what you see in the respective
window, click Set Same As Screen on the Print tab. In most
cases, you want:
background color in printing to be white (no printed
background)
print font size to be smaller then the screen font
print line scale to be larger then on screen
To change the printed appearance of a plan or perspective:
1 Make the Plan or Perspective the active window.
2 Choose View > Appearance.
3 Specify options on the Print tab of the Appearance
Settings dialog box and click OK.
184
Chapter 34
RAM Concept
34.8 Changing the report contents
The contents of the report are customizable to suit your
specific needs. You have control over what plans,
perspectives and text items are included in a report and
their order and orientation. You change the report contents
through the Report Contents window.
Figure 34-1 In the Report Contents Window, you can change the order of
report items, set whether an item is included in the report, and change the
printed orientation or an item.
34.8.1 Including items in the report
Any window can be included as an item in the report.
Modify the selection of plans, perspectives and tables to be
included in the report via the Report Contents window.
Toggle the Include column value to specify whether an
item is included in the report or not.
For something to print in the report, it requires that its
Include value is Yes and every item above it in the report
hierarchy is also Yes. For example, if you want the
Standard Plan on the Latitude Tendon Layer to be included
in the report, the plan itself should have an Include value of
Yes, the Latitude Tendon layer should be Yes and the
Layers folder should be Yes. Likewise, with an Include
value of No for the Criteria folder, RAM Concept does
not include anything in that folder in the report.
This functionality is especially useful if you want to omit
everything on a particular layer from the report. You can do
so with one click, rather then changing the Include value of
every plan, perspective, and text table on that layer to
No.
To include or exclude a report item:
1 Make sure the Include column is visible in the Report
Contents window. You may need to widen the window or
scroll horizontally.
2 Click on the Include column value for the item you wish
to include or exclude to toggle between Yes and No. A value
of Yes in the Include column includes the item in the report
printout while a value of No excludes the item.
Note: If you want to include an item in the report, make
sure every item in the hierarchy above it is also included.
The following is an example list of windows you might
include in a report for an elevated PT slab using the ACI
318 design approach:
Report Cover
Units
Signs
Materials
Loadings
Load Combinations
Design Rules
Estimate
Element: Standard Plan
Element: Slab Summary Plan
Element: Structure Summary Perspective
Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan
Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan
Temporary Construction (at Stressing) Loading: All
Loads Plan (if used)
Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
Live (Unreducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
[other live loadings (Storage, Roof) if used]
Service LC: Deflection Plan
Factored LC: Mx Plan
Factored LC: My Plan
Factored LC: Reactions Plan
Reinforcement: Latitude Bars Plan
Reinforcement: Longitude Bars Plan
Reinforcement: SSR Plan
Design Status: Status Plan
Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan
185 RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Load History Deflection Plans
34.8.2 Reordering report items
The order of report items in the Report Contents window is
the order they print in the report. You can reorder items that
are within the same folder or layer by dragging them to a
new position. You cannot move items outside their folder
or layer. For example, you can move the Units item to a
new location inside the Criteria folder but you cannot move
it into the Layers folder.
To change the location of a report item:
1 In the Report Contents Window, press down on the left
mouse button over the report item you want to move.
2 Drag the report item to its new location and release the
left mouse button. (RAM Concept does not allow you to
move a report item outside of its folder or layer)
186
Chapter 34
RAM Concept
187 RAM Concept
Chapter 35
35 Exporting Plans and Tables
You can export any plan or text table in RAM Concept.
Concept supports export of plans as .dwg or .dxf files in
AutoCAD R12 through AutoCAD 2004 format. Tables
export as text files, which you can open with most
spreadsheet software.
35.1 Exporting a plan
RAM Concept exports a plan with whatever information is
visible at the time. You need to open a plan and make it the
active window before exporting. You make a plan the
active window by clicking on it.
To export the active plan:
1 Choose File > Export Drawing.
The Export Drawing dialog box appears.
2 Choose a name and type for the AutoCAD file and click
Save.
The File Units dialog box appears.
3 Select the units for the AutoCAD file and click OK.
35.1.1 Selecting the text size
The exported text size depends on the visible text size on
the screen. You can change the text size to suit the export.
To choose a text size:
1 Choose View > Appearance.
2 In the Font section of the Appearance dialog box, click
AaBbZz to select a font.
The point size of text is 72 times the actual size. Thus, 9
points is one-eighth of an inch.
3 In the Select Font dialog box, choose the font size and
click OK.
4 Set the font scale to zero and click OK.
Note: Do not use Enlarge Fonts ( ) or Shrink Fonts
( ) to change the text size before exporting.
35.2 Exporting a table
Text tables export to tab-delimited text files that you can
open with most spreadsheet software.
To export a text table:
1 Open the text table you wish to export.
2 Click Export (at the top of the window).
3 Enter a name for the text file and click Save.
188
Chapter 35
RAM Concept
189 RAM Concept
Chapter 36
36 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System
Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural
System is referred to as RSS.
RAM Concept has functions that can export reactions and
geometry to the RAM Structural System.
36.1 About the export of reactions
RAM Concept has a function that exports wall and column
reactions to the RAM Structural System.This export
capability allows RSS to use Concept's accurate load
distribution to calculate wall, column and foundation
gravity forces. The export capability also allows RSS to
consider the effects of floor tendons on columns and walls
for post-tensioned structures.
This export capability only applies to elevated slab models
created in RAM Concept by importing from the RAM
Structural System.
Note: The RAM Structural System requires RAM Concrete
to consider the exported Concept reactions.
The RAM Concept force export function transfers column
and wall reactions to the RAM Structural System database.
The export only sets the wall and column reactions for the
end of the columns and/or walls that are touching the
elevated slab. Exporting of reactions does not affect the
support axial force of walls and columns above the slab.
The structure above the column or wall determines the
axial force.
RAM Concept only exports reactions from gravity loadings
imported from RSS back to RSS. For example, if you add
Swimming Pool Loading to a Concept file, the export
function will not transfer reactions from that loading to
RSS.
Note: RAM Concept does not export Construction Dead
Loading reactions, as they would have no further use in
RSS.
Note: RAM Concept never exports lateral loadings
(imported from RSS or otherwise) to RSS.
Note: Loadings in RAM Concept are analogous to
load cases in RSS.
36.1.1 Special handling of the Self-Dead
Loading and the Balance Loading during
export
Concept adds the Self-Dead Loading reactions to the
Dead Load reactions during export. This ensures that the
RAM Concrete Analysis of the structure considers the self-
weight of the slab.
Note: The RAM Structural System provides the option to
have beam and slab self-weights calculated automatically,
or input manually as part of the dead load case. Conversely,
RAM Concept always automatically includes beam and slab
self-weights in its analysis. We recommend that, when using
RSS in combination with Concept, you have RSS automati-
cally calculate the beam and slab self-weight loads. That
will eliminate any confusion regarding whether self-weight
loads are included in the analysis or need to be manually
specified as part of the dead load case, even when some
levels are designed with RSS and some levels are designed
with Concept.
RAM Concept does not currently export Transfer loading
reactions to RSS. When analyzing a building with a
transfer slab, RSS uses its own internal distribution of the
transfer forces in the slab rather than forces from Concept's
floor analysis. Concepts exported Direct loading
reactions will be used by RSS, if you so direct. See Using
RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete on page 190
for further information.
RAM Concept exports the balance loading reactions to a
hyperstatic load case that is only visible in RAM
Concrete. Generally, balance forces and hyperstatic forces
are not the same, but for a support that contains no tendons,
however, the balance forces are equal to the hyperstatic
forces.
Note: See Post-tensioning loadings on page 386 for a
discussion of balance and hyperstatic loadings.
36.1.2 Special handling of the Partition
Loading during export
Concept adds the Partition Load reactions to the Live
Load Unreducible reactions during export.
36.1.3 The export of reactions process
You can export reactions to RSS at any time after you
perform a Calc All operation and you save the file.
190
Chapter 36
RAM Concept
To export to the RAM Structural System
Choose File > Export Reactions to RAM Structural
System.
A dialog box, as shown in Figure 36-1, opens with a list of
RSS story names to which you can export reactions.
Concept labels one story name as Source Story. This is
the RSS story previously imported to create this Concept
file. Concept lists other stories in the RSS file with the
same floor type, and labels them Identical Story or
Compatible Story. A story is compatible with, but not
identical to, the source story if it has a different story
height, member sizes, or (for the top story of the type) any
columns above it have different orientations.
Select any combination of stories, and click OK. RAM
Concept displays a log detailing the results of the export
operation when the export is completed.
Figure 36-1 Export Reactions to RAM Structural System dialog box
36.1.4 About export reactions access and
consistency checking
RAM Concept performs consistency checking before the
actual export operation to ensure that it can export
reactions correctly. Concept performs the checks before
and after choosing the export stories.
36.1.5 Checks performed before choosing
export stories
The first check performed is your access to the RSS file
from which the RAM Concept floor was imported. The
export operation can proceed only if the RSS file exists, it
is not currently open in RSS and you are able to access and
modify it.
Concept also checks the RSS file for changes made to the
source story since importation into the Concept file. If
someone has made a major change to the source story,
you must reimport from RSS and recalculate results before
exporting. If someone has made a minor change to the
source story, Concept gives you the option of reimporting.
Major changes include adding or deleting columns or
walls. Changing a column size is a minor change.
Concept cannot export the file if someone has added
columns or walls after importing from RSS, or if any
springs or rigid supports are present in the Concept model.
36.1.6 Checks performed after choosing
export stories
RAM Concept checks each story you choose to export
against the RSS file in detail. If Concept detects any errors,
you may cancel the export operation or return to the story
selection window to deselect the stories with errors. If
Concept issues only warnings, you may continue with the
export or return to the story selection window.
Concept generates warnings for any columns or walls
above the Concept slab that do not have matching columns
or walls above the export story selected. This typically only
happens at the highest story of the floor type, where it
transitions to a different floor type or the roof.
Concept also generates warnings if a selected story's height
is different from the source story height.
36.1.7 Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM
Concrete
Once you export the column and wall reactions to RSS,
they become available to RAM Concrete for analysis and
design purposes, but only if you inform RSS that you want
to use them.
To set RAM Concrete to use RAM Concepts reactions
1 Start RAM Concrete
2 Choose Criteria > Column Forces
Select the button at the top to Use RAM Concept Analysis
Forces at selected levels. Select the levels by checking the
box in the Use column.
You can use this dialog to review the RSS levels that have
Concept forces and the Concept file name from which you
exported the forces. The Read column displays the date
you imported each level from RSS into Concept. The
Saved column displays the date you exported member
reactions from Concept to that level. The Source Story
column indicates the source story of the RSS file used to
import data into the Concept file. If the Source Story,
Saved and Concept File entries are empty, then you
have not exported member forces to that level. If the
191 RAM Concept
Chapter 36
Read entry is empty, then you have never imported that
level to Concept.
Note: RSS uses Concept wall reactions on all levels where
Concept column reactions are used.
Note: After exporting Concept reactions to RSS, you will
need to perform a RAM Concrete reanalysis of the structure
before designing any members or importing any member
forces from RSS to Concept (such as for a mat foundation).
36.1.8 How the RAM Structural System - RAM
Concept link works
The key to the export of Concept's reactions to RSS are the
imported walls and columns and the imported direct
gravity loadings.
Walls and columns that you import from RSS have special
RSS identifiers tagged to them. These identifiers allow
Concept to match its column and wall elements to the
corresponding members in RSS. Concept will even allow
you to move the walls and columns slightly (up to 50mm or
2").
Concept will not allow you to export if you add, delete, or
significantly move imported columns or walls (or do not
import walls and columns). Concept does this to ensure
transfer of the full equilibrium gravity load between
Concept and RSS.
Note: If you accidentally delete an imported support, or
the supports change in RSS, you can always reimport the
walls and columns.
RSS tracks a fixed set of gravity loadings through the
structures. These loadings are Dead Load, Live Load
Reducible, Live Load Unreducible, Live Load Storage and
Live Load Roof (when Concept and RAM Concrete are
used the Hyperstatic loading is tracked as well). To ensure
compatibility with RSS, Concept will not allow you to
delete these imported gravity loadings.
Concept does allow you to modify the imported RSS
gravity loading and to add more gravity loadings. Concept
assumes that you are fully aware that it considers only the
loads that appear in the imported RSS loadings in the
reactions it exports back to RSS.
36.2 About the export of geometry
Column and wall geometry can be exported to a new or
existing RAM Structural System database file. This
geometry can only be exported to a new RSS floor type.
To export geometry to the RAM Structural System
1 Choose File > Export Geometry to RAM Structural
System.
Note: The menu item is disabled if there is no model
currently open.
A file browser appears which allows the selection of an
RSS file.
2 Select a RSS file or enter a new filename.
If a new RSS filename is entered, a new RSS database is
created with the current Concept models units. If the
Concept model design code is ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02,
ACI 318-05 or BS8110, the design code of the RSS
database is set accordingly. Otherwise the database design
code of the new RSS database will be the user's default
design code.
After a file is selected, the Export Geometry to RAM
Structural System dialog appears, as shown in Figure 36-
2.
Figure 36-2 Export Geometry to RAM Structural System dialog box
The dialog lists the floor types present in the RSS file.
3 Enter the new floor type name in the New Floor Type
Name text field.
A popup notifies you if the floor type name entered is
already defined.
The General snapping distance is the maximum distance
structural features could be moved in order to merge
closely spaced objects together.
If the Snap slab/deck edges to wall centerlines box is
checked, Concept will attempt to move slab and deck edges
that are close to wall centerlines to be coincident in the
exported data. The originating RAM Concept data will not
be modified. This will potentially eliminate small elements
in the RSS mesh and thus improve run times.
If the Export uniform thickness deck box is checked,
RAM Concept will export a single deck to RSS of a
192
Chapter 36
RAM Concept
uniform thickness designated. The concrete properties from
the largest slab area in Concept are used if this option is
selected.
The Columns (below), Walls (below), Beams, and
Slabs check boxes select whether columns, walls, beams,
and slabs are exported. Concept exports only the columns
and walls below the floor, because it is those elements that
are associated with a floor type in RSS.
If you check Start RSS after Export, then RSS starts on
the file after the geometry is exported. This has no effect if
RSS is already running.
4 Click Create New Floor Type to export the selected
members to the new floor type.
Note: Column, wall, beam, and slab geometry can only be
exported to a new RSS floor type.
36.2.1 About errors and ambiguities
Errors and ambiguities in a Concept model are normally
detected and corrected when the model is meshed. Concept
allows models to be exported before they are meshed, so
some errors are detected and arbitrarily corrected when the
geometry is exported.
If two or more walls overlap, completely or partially, only
one of the overlapping segments will be exported. If two or
more columns have the same location, only one column at
that location will be exported. In either case, a pop-up
dialog describes the columns and wall segments that were
not exported.
If any columns or wall segments are not exported, the user
should check the material properties of the elements that
were exported to RSS. If the overlapping columns or walls
had different properties, the user may have to reassign the
desired values in RSS. The user can also mesh the model
and resolve such errors within Concept before exporting.
Walls defined in RSS may not intersect other walls or span
columns or the ends of other walls. Each Concept wall is
split into segments at each of these locations before being
exported. The splitting of walls is not reported, but the
effect will be seen as individual walls in RSS.
193 RAM Concept
Chapter 37
37 Using Strip Wizard
Strip Wizard is a dialog that automates the initial steps in
the process of creating a model in RAM Concept. When
modeling a straightforward slab or beam, you can
efficiently use Strip Wizard to enter the structural data
without having to draw in a plan window. With the wizard,
you can enter the spans, tributaries, loads and post-
tensioning in the same way you would with a conventional
two-dimensional program. Since entering the structural
data in Strip Wizard is so quick and easy, it is particularly
useful for preliminary design of slabs, beams, and joists.
Strip Wizard uses the structural information you provide to
build a model in a new Concept file. You can then modify
the file by drawing openings, surface steps, point loads, and
such using plan windows. Strip Wizard is deliberately
simple, so use it to create the basic structure, and then
modify the structure in plans if necessary.
The authors intend that Strip Wizard be largely for
assessment of two-dimensional behavior. The (automatic)
design results are only for one direction (the x-axis). Since
Concept is a three-dimensional program, line supports are
automatically included along the edges of the model that
allow deflection but no rotation. This closely simulates
two-dimensional behavior.
37.1 Starting Strip Wizard
When you start Strip Wizard, it prompts you to create a
new RAM Concept file. This file is where the wizard
generates your model once you enter all the structural data.
Strip Wizard uses all the generic settings defined in the new
file (such as units, materials, loadings, etc). If you want
Strip Wizard to use your custom settings, create the new
file from a template. For example, if you want certain
concrete mixes to be available when specifying general
design parameters, you should create the new file from a
Concept template with these concrete mixes.
After you have chosen options in the New File dialog, the
Strip Wizard dialog appears. At this point, you can load
previously saved Strip Wizard settings if you want (see
Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings on page 197
for more information). To start defining your strip, proceed
to the next page in the wizard by clicking Next.
To start Strip Wizard:
1 Choose File > Strip Wizard.
2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click
OK. The Strip Wizard dialog appears.
3 Click Next to proceed or you can load Strip Wizard
Settings (see Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings on
page 197 for more information).
37.2 Specifying general parameters
Specify the structure type, spans and concrete mixes on the
General Parameters page of the Wizard.
Structure Type
Decide what type of structure you want Strip Wizard to
create and whether to use post-tensioning. The floor can be
set up as post-tensioned or reinforced and can be one of the
following systems:
Two-way slab
One-way slab
Beam
Joist
Spans
Enter the number of spans for the strip (not including
cantilevers). Decide if you are using start or end
cantilevers. Check Asymmetric to allow the model to
have different tributaries on either side of the columns.
Concrete Mixes
Choose a concrete mix for the slabs and beams and one for
the supports.
Note: The concrete mixes available are the mixes in the
new file created when you started Strip Wizard. If you want
to use specific mixes, use a template when creating the new
file.
37.3 Entering span data
The table you see on the Span Data page depends on the
information you entered on the General Parameters page.
The cantilevers and spans appear as rows in the table. The
table columns depend on whether you are modeling a one-
way or two-way system, beam system, or joist system.
For this table and subsequent pages, the top data rows
name is Typical. Data entered here automatically copies
to the rows below. You can overwrite the copied data.
194
Chapter 37
RAM Concept
37.3.1 One-way and two-way systems
Span length, slab thickness and tributary width define these
systems. They can vary span by span.
Length
The span length from center to center of supports.
Thickness
The slab structural depth.
Start Width
The slab width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the
span. For asymmetric strips, L Start Width is the left start
width, and R Start Width is the right start width.
End Width
The slab width at the end of the span. For asymmetric
strips, L End Width is the left end width, and R End Width
is the right end width.
37.3.2 Beam systems
Span length, beam depth, beam width, slab thickness and
tributary width define these systems. They can vary span
by span.
Length
W Depth
The beam web structural depth (including the flange
depth).
W Width
The beam web width.
F Depth
The flange (slab) depth (thickness).
Start Trib Width
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the beginning (or
left hand end) of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Trib
Start Width is the left tributary start width, and R Trib Start
Width is the right tributary start width.
End Trib Width
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the end of the span.
For asymmetric strips, L Trib End Width is the left
tributary end width, and R End Width is the right tributary
end width.
37.3.3 Joist systems
Span length, web properties (depth, width, spacing and
number), slab thickness and tributary width define these
systems. They can vary span by span. This system does not
allow asymmetry.
Length
W Depth
The joist web structural depth (including the flange depth).
W Width
The joist web width.
F Depth
The flange (slab) depth (thickness).
Pan Start Offset
The distance from the beginning (or left hand end) of the
span to the pan (or void former).
Pan End Offset
The distance from the end of the pan (or void former) to the
end of the span.
Additional Web Properties
The following properties determine the tributary width for
the whole model. The width cannot vary span by span.
Spacing
The center-to-center spacing of the webs.
Number
The total number of webs.
37.4 Entering support data
The Support Data page is for entering supports above and
below. You must specify supports below but they are
optional above.
37.4.1 Support (above and below) properties
Depth, width, height, bottom fixity and top fixity define the
supports. They can vary span by span.
Strip Wizard interprets a support with a width four or more
times the depth as a wall. Otherwise, it is a column.
195 RAM Concept
Chapter 37
Depth
The support dimension parallel to the span.
Width
The support dimension perpendicular to the span (enter
zero for round columns).
Height
The supports height from its base to mid-depth of the floor.
Bottom Fixity
The moment connection at the base of the support.
Top Fixity
The moment connection between the support and the floor.
37.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels
The Drop Caps and Drop Panels page is for entering drop
caps and drop panels for two-way slabs. The page is not
available for one-way slabs, beams or joists.
Strip Wizard uses drop caps for punching shear only; it
ignores them for flexural design. Some codes provide
guidance on what dimensions are required to consider a
thickening as a drop panel. Strip Wizard does not check
such rules.
37.5.1 Drop cap and drop panel properties
Thickness, width, before length and after length define the
drops. They can vary span by span.
It is possible to have drop caps and drop panels at the same
support. The drop cap should be the thicker of the two.
Thickness
The total thickness (structural depth) of the drop. This is
not the incremental increase in thickness.
Width
The drop dimension perpendicular to the span.
Before Length
The dimension parallel to the span from the beginning of
the drop to the support center.
After Length
The dimension parallel to the span from the support center
to the end of the drop.
37.6 Entering the loads
The Loads page is for entering area and line loads in the z-
direction for two standard loadings.
37.6.1 Load properties
Area and line loads can be input for two different loadings
on each span.
Dead Area Load
The area load over the entire span.
Dead Line Load
The line load from the first support center to the second
support center for each span.
Live Area Load
The live load over the entire span.
Live Line Load
The live load from the first support center to the second
support center for each span.
Loadings to use
The Dead and Live are just names. You can specify the
loads as belonging to any of the Standard loadings in the
RAM Concept file.
Dead
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM
Concept file.
Live
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM
Concept file (except for that used for Dead).
37.7 Specifying the post-tensioning
The Post-Tensioning page is only available if you checked
Post-Tensioned in the Structure Type section of the
General Parameters page.
Most of the data entered on this page relates to minimum
precompression, load balancing and tendon cover. Strip
Wizard uses this data in conjunction with data for spans,
depths and loads to generate a single profiled tendon.
196
Chapter 37
RAM Concept
37.7.1 General PT information
You specify the type of tendon and information that helps
to determine the number of strands.
PT System
Specifies the size and type of strands for the tendon (as
defined in the Materials Specification of the RAM Concept
file).
Stressing
Specifies the stressing (jack) locations. Concept calculates
tendon friction and other losses if jacks are located at one
or both ends.
Min P/A
The minimum average precompression required for the
concrete. Following the code minimum does not usually
result in the most economical design.
37.7.2 Balance load
Balance load refers to the amount of uplift provided by the
tendons. The industry has traditionally expressed this as a
percentage of gravity loads.
Min Balance Load Percentage:
The percentage of the specified load balanced by tendons.
Balance Load Considers:
Specifies the loadings that the balance loading is based
upon. The choices are self-weight of concrete, self-weight
plus dead, or total load.
37.7.3 Profiling
These selections vary the tendon profile shape.
Straight Profile Distance at Supports
The length of tendon that is horizontal at a support. The
dimension is the total flat distance, not the distance each
side of the support.
Round Profiles to Nearest
The profile distance increment. This allows rounding of
tendon high and low points to convenient values. If this
value is too large it may cause cover violations.
37.8 Specifying reinforcement
The Reinforcement page is for specifying reinforcement
bars and general covers.
37.8.1 Reinforcing bar
You specify the bars from those available in the RAM
Concept file.
Top
Name of reinforcement bar used in the top face for flexural
design.
Bottom
Name of reinforcement bar used in the bottom face for
flexural design.
Shear
Name of reinforcement bar used for one-way shear design.
37.8.2 Reinforcement clear cover
The covers are for bars and tendons. Rounding of tendon
profiles could override the tendon covers.
Top
Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars and tendons.
Bottom
Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal bars and tendons.
37.8.3 Punching shear checks
You decide if Concept performs punching shear
calculations.
Perform punching shear checks
Checking this box instructs Concept to draw punching
shear checks at each column.
Cover to CGS
The distance from the top of the slab to the centroid of the
top reinforcement. Usually this is the distance from the top
of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. Concept subtracts
this distance from the slab thickness to determine the d
distance.
197 RAM Concept
Chapter 37
37.9 Completing Strip Wizard
The Completing Strip Wizard page is the final page in the
wizard dialog. At this point, you can choose to save the
information you have just entered so that you may load it
into the wizard later. See Loading and saving Strip Wizard
settings on page 197 for more information.
When you click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard
page, Strip Wizard draws your model in the RAM Concept
file based on the data you have provided. The leftmost
support of your model is located at the origin (0,0).
Open plans on the Mesh Input, Latitude Tendon, and
Design Strip layers to view your model. You cannot view
the finite element mesh, however, until you generate the
mesh.
To complete the wizard:
1 Click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard page.
37.10 Generating the mesh and
calculating results
After completing Strip Wizard, you are ready to generate
the mesh and run an analysis calculation on your model.
To get the best finite element mesh you need to regenerate
twice: once before, and once after, calculating.This is
because calculating generates the design strips, which in
turn can be used to improve the mesh the second time you
generate.
See Chapter 18, Generating the Mesh and Chapter 28,
Calculating Results for further information.
37.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard
settings
The data you entered into the Strip Wizard can be saved as
a Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename extension of
.cptstrip) and reloaded into the wizard later. The Strip
Wizard Settings file contains only the information you
entered into the wizard pages. Save your Strip Wizard
Settings before you click Finish on the final page of the
dialog.
Loading Strip Wizard Settings just sets the values in the
Strip Wizard dialog to the values stored in the Settings file.
After you load your Strip Wizard Settings, you then page
through the dialog as usual by clicking Next. You can
change the data in the wizard to create a different strip.
This does not affect the Settings file you loaded. You must
save a new Strip Wizard Settings file if you want your
changes to be stored for later use.
To load strip wizard settings:
1 Click Load on the Welcome to Strip Wizard page.
2 Select the Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename
extension of .cptstrip) and click Open.
To save strip wizard settings:
1 Click Save on the Completing the Strip Wizard page
(before you click Finish).
2 Enter the name of your Strip Wizard Settings file and
click Save.
198
Chapter 37
RAM Concept
199 RAM Concept
Chapter 38
38 General Tips
This chapter provides advice on learning RAM Concept
and tips that are not explained elsewhere.
Note: It is strongly suggested that you refer to Learning
RAM Concept on page 2 of Chapter 1, Introduction
before reading this chapter.
38.1 Beams
You should be careful when modeling beams. If you use
standard finite elements then the beams torsional stiffness
could be overestimated, which could erroneously reduce
the deflection in the adjacent slabs.
In Concept, there is no difference between standard slab
and beam elements, and standard elements have a torsional
stiffness that is proportional to their depth cubed.
The actual torsional stiffness of a beam is proportional to
the cube of the lesser value of depth and width. Standard
elements thus overestimate the torsional stiffness of beams
that are deeper than they are wide.
For this reason, you should consider using the No-torsion
behavior for beams, especially deep edge beams. See
Beam properties on page 72 for more information.
Figure 38-1 No-torsion beam setting
38.2 Walls
38.2.1 Drawing connecting walls
It is recommended that intersecting walls are drawn such
that one wall terminates at the centerline of the other, as
shown in 38-2.
Figure 38-2 Connecting walls
38.2.2 Walls above
Walls above behave similarly to beams: they stiffen the
floor. This is especially relevant in transfer floors. The
floor moments DO NOT include the bending moments in
the actual walls.
We recommend that if you are in doubt as to the effect of
walls above, do not model them.
Figure 38-3 Comparison of two floors identical in all respects except that
one has a wall above (Two images with slab shown, two with no slab
shown).
200
Chapter 38
RAM Concept
Figure 38-4 Effect of wall modeled above: no wall (left) vs. wall above
(right) - plot of slab moment about x-axis.
38.2.3 The difference between walls above
and upstand beams of similar proportions
Concept treats walls above the slab similarly to beams.
Using wall-beams instead of just thickened slab elements
has both advantages and disadvantages; overall it is not
recommended to model walls above the slab as beams.
Slab elements have two major advantages over wall
elements (wall-beams):
Concept design strip cross sections automatically integrate
the forces across slab elements. Wall-beam elements are
ignored in these integrations. Also, Concept provides you
many controls over how slab element results can be
displayed; wall-beam elements (like wall elements) can
only plot their reactions to the slab.
However, as discussed in Beams on page 199, Concepts
standard slab elements have a torsional stiffness that is
proportional to their depth cubed. This can cause a large
over-estimation of the torsional stiffness for a very thick
slab element if it is adjacent to relatively thin elements.
Wall-beam elements do not have this problem.
As such, walls above that are modeled as upstand beams
should use the No-torsion beam setting discussed in
Beams on page 199.
When modeling wall-beams, Concept interprets some of
the wall element parameters differently. If the wall-beam is
not rotationally fixed to the slab then the wall-beam will
have zero torsional stiffness. If the wall-beam is not a shear
wall then it will have zero axial stiffness. The vertically
compressible and rotationally fixed at far end parameters
are ignored.
Wall-beam elements have one advantage over slab
elements. Slab elements of drastically differing thicknesses
in the same structure can cause the automatic plotting
controls to show (correctly) huge force variations in and
adjacent to thick slab elements and almost no variation
within the thin slab element areas. This does not generally
happen if walls above are modeled as wall-beams.
38.3 Restraint
Columns and walls restrain the floor against (post-
tensioning induced) axial deformations unless you model
columns with rollers and walls as slip walls (shear wall
property unchecked).
It is unlikely that columns above restrain the floor so a
roller above will generally be appropriate
Restraint generally reduces the precompression and hence
increases the service reinforcement. It usually increases
strength reinforcement too.
38.4 Miscellaneous
There are many tools and capabilities described in the
preceding chapters that are useful but often overlooked.
38.4.1 Templates
We have created a template (for the purpose of starting a
file) that may or may not suit your needs. You can create
your own template with additional plans, materials and
settings that you can use when you start a new file. See
About templates on page 6.
38.4.2 Adding plans
You can add plans. SeeCreating new plans on page 11
and Creating new result plans on page 158.
38.4.3 Copying and moving objects
Many users do not appreciate that selected objects can be
copied and moved through a combination of holding down
the shift key and using the move command (or similar). See
Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects on
page 19.
You should also familiarize yourself with using the relative
coordinates command. See Using relative coordinates on
page 18.
To copy and move an object using relative coordinates
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select the object.
3 Hold down the Shift key and click anywhere on the
workspace.
4 Type the letter r followed by the x- and y-coordinates
separated by a comma (e.g. r10, 5), and press Return.
201 RAM Concept
Chapter 38
This moves a copy of the selection x units to the right and y
units upward.
38.4.4 Expanding tool buttons
You can expand many tools to reveal additional
capabilities. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
38.4.5 The Utility tool
The Utility tool can save you a lot of time when you need
to move and stretch many objects or control points. See
Using the Utility tool to move and stretch on page 20.
38.4.6 Left Wall and Right Wall tools
The Left Wall and Right Wall tools can be very useful. See
Drawing walls on page 66.
38.4.7 Changing multiple tendon profile
points
You can seek and change profile points that have the same
value in one operation. See Change profiles tool on
page 144.
38.4.8 Plotting Results
Many users are unaware of the power of the plot
capabilities. You can plot many results including (strip
based) moments (actual and demand), crack widths and
reinforcement, to name just a few.
Some clients prefer to plot the reinforcement on new plans
rather than use the template plans that show bar call-outs.
38.4.9 Reducing the information shown on
plans
You can remove trivial results such as small reactions in
two different ways. See Specifying report as zero on
page 25, and Reaction on page 167 and Figure on
page 167.
38.4.10 Load balancing
You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the
post-tensioning within design strips. See Viewing
balanced load percentages on page 156.
38.4.11 The Auditor
This can be invaluable in unlocking the black-box of
calculations. See Chapter 31, Using the Auditor.
Note: Many users complain that there is too much infor-
mation revealed by the auditor. You can reduce the infor-
mation by auditing a rule set rather than the design
summary.
202
Chapter 38
RAM Concept
203 RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39 Frequently Asked Questions
This chapter addresses many of the questions that we are
frequently asked.
It should be read in conjunction with:
Learning RAM Concept: Section 1.5 of Chapter 1
Chapter 38, General Tips, and
Chapter 40, Errors and Warnings
39.1 Capabilities and Modeling
What can Concept design?
Elevated (suspended) concrete floors and mat foundations
(rafts). They can be reinforced concrete, post-tensioned
concrete or hybrid. See Structural systems on page 1 for
more information.
Is there a limit on the size of structure modeled?
The only limit is the performance of the computer
hardware. The analysis run time is approximately
proportional to the square of the number of nodes in the
model, so large structures may take a significant amount of
time to analyze. Design time is approximately proportional
to the number of span segment strip cross sections. See
Decreasing calculation time on page 154 for more
information. The file size can also be limited by the amount
of RAM the computer has available.
Is there any restriction to the maximum thickness of slab that
can be modeled?
Concept's analysis of slab elements considers shear
deformation as well as bending deformation. This ensures
that Concept gives reasonable results for both thin slabs
and thick slabs.
In general, Concept's design provisions apply the code
requirements that are appropriate for slabs with typical
span-to-depth ratios. If the geometry of your slab is outside
the usual ranges, you may need to consider if any special
design considerations are necessary.
Can Concept design more than one story at a time?
Not by itself. You can use the RAM Structural System to
integrate numerous floors into one large model.
Can I use Concept to design slab-on-ground?
The expression slab-on-ground is often used to described
residential house slabs. The designer has to use engineering
judgment to determine if mat analysis and design
techniques are suitable for such structures. See the FAQ for
Mats (rafts) on page 206.
Is Concept capable of running a single design strip for quick
preliminary runs without modeling the whole building?
Yes. See Chapter 37, Using Strip Wizard and Chapter 49,
Strip Wizard Tutorial.
Can I model a pour strip?
Yes, although there are limitations.
1 Use the orthotropic properties for the pour strip area such
that the axial stiffness perpendicular to the strip is signifi-
cantly reduced. See the discussion below Figure 17-6 on
page 71
2 Terminate tendons either side of the pour strip.
Note: Modeling a pour strip in this manner does not
consider the temporary situation before the strip is poured
back. This could affect deflections and resultants.
How can I model curved edges or walls?
Use a series of straight lines. The approximation should
have negligible effect.
Can Concept be used to design retaining walls by drawing the
wall as a slab?
While Concept is not optimized for this use, it can perform
most of the analysis and design tasks if you are very
careful.
Care must be used as Concept assumes that gravity loads
are in the downward Z direction. You need to set all of the
self-dead loading load factors to zero and create your own
self-weight loadings. You probably want to apply these
loads at the mid-slab depth; otherwise the eccentricity will
add a self-weight moment to the slab.
While Concept's design cross sections reports all of the
moments and forces on the design cross section, Concept
does not perform design considering all of the forces and
moments. Specifically, Concept does not consider the Mz
value in design, because Concept does not specify the
positioning of reinforcement that is important for Mz
design.
Concept does not consider P-delta effects.
What does hybrid mean?
A hybrid floor is one that contains both PT and RC areas.
Most post-tensioned floors have some RC elements such as
pour strips and elevator core slabs. By selecting the
appropriate design rules these regions can be designed at
the same time as the PT elements.
204
Chapter 39
RAM Concept
39.2 Files
What is the difference between creating a mat (raft) file and an
elevated slab file?
There is really no difference; all files give you the same
capabilities. The default files are setup differently because
there are usually additional load cases and plans for a mat
(lateral load cases, soil bearing plans, etc.). With some
work, you could turn any elevated slab file into a mat file
and vice versa.
Can I save the data file with results?
This cannot be done with the current version - you need to
open the file and recalculate. We expect to add this feature
in a future version (but the save with results files will be
huge).
Can I work from CAD drawings?
Yes. See Chapter 13, Using a CAD Drawing.
Is it necessary to start a model with a DWG or DXF file?
No. For straightforward geometry it may be quicker to
draw from scratch. It can be useful to specify a grid and
then use snap to grid to locate columns and walls.
I deleted the imported drawing can it be brought back?
Yes. It is sometimes a good idea to delete the imported
drawing as it affects the extent that Concept displays and
prints. Any DWG or DXF file can be re-imported if
necessary.
If you moved the imported drawing or structure after the
first import then the new import will not match. You can
move the new drawing if necessary.
Can Concept export to a drawing file to aid in drafting?
Yes. See Exporting a plan on page 187 of Chapter 35.
Can I export results?
Yes. See Exporting a table on page 187 of Chapter 35.
Can I change the default new file settings?
Yes. See About templates on page 6.
Can I set the default file for an RC design?
Yes. You could create a template that is suited to RC
design, such as eliminating the Initial Service Load
Combination and Initial Service Rule Set, and unchecking
the Consider as Post-Tensioned option in the span segment
properties. See About templates on page 6.
39.3 Plans and perspectives
What's the difference between a plan and a layer?
A layer is an organizational concept. A layer is a collection
of related objects and results and each object and result
resides on one and only one layer. For example, all slab
elements are on the Element layer.
Plans, on the other hand, are a display and editing concept.
Each plan is a filtered view of all of Concepts layers. A
plan can be set up to edit a particular layer, but the plan
does not own the layer. All changes that are made to the
layer using the plan will be visible in all other plans,
because all plans are viewing the same set of layers.
See Chapter 3, Understanding Layers and Chapter 4,
Using Plans and Perspectives for more information.
How do I delete unwanted plans?
1 Choose Layers > Delete.
A dialog box appears.
2 Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Can I view all information on one plan?
Yes, but it is generally not advised. You can turn on all
objects from one layer in one operation, and then repeat for
the next layer.
3 Click on the tab for the objects layer.
The plan or perspectives layer is the one initially selected.
4 Check the Show All box, and click OK.
How can I tell if there is an object on a layer?
See Determining which plans contain objects on page 10
of Chapter 3, Understanding Layers.
I have two items at the same location, how do I select just one
of them?
Double click at the location and you should select just one
object. Hold down shift and double click again and you
select the other object.
Why do I see nothing in a perspective display?
The perspective camera may be looking in the wrong
direction. Click Zoom Extent ( ) or Show Print
Viewpoint ( ).
205 RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Why can I not see the area springs in a perspective?
Area springs can take a long time to generate in a
perspective and so are not turned on in the default files.
You need to turn them on with the Visible Objects dialog.
What does conflicting mean in a Selected Items field?
This means that more than one object has been selected and
they have different values for that property. For example, if
you select two slab objects that have different thicknesses
then the thickness field displays conflicting.
Note: In versions prior to 3.0 the field would be blank in
such instances.
39.4 Units
What units can I use?
See Chapter 7, Choosing Units.
Can I switch units after creating a file?
See Changing the units on page 25.
39.5 Codes
Can I change codes after creating a file?
Yes. See Code options on page 150.
39.6 Sign Conventions
What is the sign convention for moments shears and
reactions?
See Selecting sign convention on page 27 and About
plot sign convention on page 28.
Can I change the sign convention?
Yes. See Changing the sign convention on page 28.
39.7 Structure
39.7.1 Mesh Input layer
Why is it necessary to have priorities?
Without the priority system the modeling of floors would
require one of two methods:
Objects for slabs of different thicknesses, beams,
openings etc. could not overlap - this would be very
tiresome for all but very simple floors, or
Depths would have to additive. For example, you would
have to deduct slab depth from beam depth. If you had to
change the slab depth then a change would be required for
the beam, unless its depth changed by the same amount.
Can I copy columns or walls below to the same above?
Yes.
1 Select all of the columns or walls you wish to copy.
2 Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy
The pasted objects are the current selection.
5 Change Support Set from Below to Above, and click OK.
Note: It is important that you do not abandon the process
after pasting. Otherwise, you will have two supports below
at various locations, which causes calculation errors.
The meshing operation produces a very irregular mesh. Is this
satisfactory?
This depends upon a number of factors. See Deciding
what mesh element size to use on page 75 and Improving
the mesh on page 76.
Can I vary the mesh intensity at different locations?
Indirectly. See Selectively refining the mesh on page 76.
What value should I use for the area springs Z force constant?
The geotechnical engineer commonly provides a value
called the subgrade modulus or modulus of subgrade
reaction.
As a guide only: realistic values vary from 100 pci
(approx. 25 MN/m
3
) for soft clay to 750 pci (approx. 200
MN/m
3
) for very dense gravel.
39.7.2 Element layer
How can I view the slab without the mesh?
Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan
206
Chapter 39
RAM Concept
What is the difference between beam and slab elements?
There is no difference unless you modify their behavior.
See discussion of behavior in Slab area properties on
page 70 and Beam properties on page 72.
How many nodes or elements are allowed?
There is no limit, other than the limitations of your
computer.
How many elements should I use per span or panel?
This cannot be answered directly as it depends upon the
structure and loads. See Deciding what mesh element size
to use on page 75.
39.7.3 Columns
Do columns restrain the slab?
Depending upon the defined fixity, columns can provide
rotational and lateral restraint.
If the far end of a column is defined as a roller support
(or both ends of the column are pinned) then the column
does not provide any lateral restraint to the slab.
Do columns above the slab support the slab vertically?
No. Columns only restrain the slab rotationally and
laterally.
39.7.4 Walls
Do walls restrain the slab laterally?
Yes, if you select Shear Wall as a property. If the Shear
Wall is unchecked then the slab is allowed to slip freely
over the top of the wall. The walls rotational stiffness is
independent of the Shear Wall setting; use the fixity
settings to control the walls rotational stiffness about its
longitudinal axis.
What is the effect of specifying walls above?
Wall elements can be used to model the stiffness and
spanning ability of walls connected to the slab. You should
exercise caution when using them. See Walls above on
page 199.
Do walls above the slab support the slab vertically?
No, they act like beams. See Walls above on page 199.
Do walls above the slab provide rotational restraint?
There is no restraint at the far end of a wall above. (Even if
Rotationally Fixed at Far End is checked, it is ignored).
39.7.5 Mats (rafts)
How do I design a mat foundation?
The Chapter 48, Mat Foundation Tutorial introduces the
concepts for mat design.
Does Concept ignore soil tension?
You can reduce the tension by iteration. The tension gets
closer to zero with an increase in the number of iterations.
See Zero tension iteration options on page 150 for more
information.
Does Concept design for soil heave?
Not directly. You could draw spring supports that
approximate varying soil support.
Do I need to draw the columns above in a mat foundation
model?
No, but it is a good idea. It ensures a node is placed at that
location where there is likely to be a heavy point load.
Can Concept design for pile supports?
Yes. Use either (flexible) columns under, or point springs.
Skin friction is not considered.
Can Concept design for pile and mat (raft) action together?
Yes, but the results could be very susceptible to variations
in geotechnical parameters. For example, if the soils
stiffness is overestimated, the actual pile reactions could be
significantly underestimated. Use caution.
Does the area spring support have to match the mesh?
No.
Can the soil stiffness vary?
Yes. You can vary the stiffness in two directions. See Area
spring properties on page 69.
Where do I select the allowable soil bearing pressure?
This is not an input parameter. You need to look at soil
bearing pressure plans (which have a maxima / minima
legend) to assess the maximum pressures. Also, see the
FAQ on Soil bearing on page 216 (in the results section).
Does Concept iterate to remove tension in a point or line
spring?
No, only for area springs.
207 RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.8 Tendons
Why are some tendons shown at the wrong elevation in the
tendon perspective?
The soffit elevation at each profile point is determined
during the Analyze All and Calculate All commands. If one
of these commands is not performed since the drawing (or
moving, etc.) of a tendon, or since a change in the mesh,
the tendon elevations in perspectives are not accurate.
The same is true for elevations optionally shown as text on
the plans.
It is quicker to analyze (but not using Calculate All) with
Process > Analyze All. This avoids processing the design
calculations.
What do Latitude and Longitude Tendons mean?
In the USA, Britain and other countries it is typical practice
to place all the tendons in one direction in a concentrated
band over column lines. If the designer is using another
practice then we recommend that you still use the Latitude
and Longitude tendon layers because it makes editing the
PT easier. i.e. Put the tendons in the X direction on one
layer and the Y tendons on the other. Latitude and
Longitude are just layer names.
Do I have to draw the tendons for a post-tensioned slab?
Yes. It is not difficult, and encourages you to address
detailing issues before they become field problems.
How do I draw tendons?
See About drawing individual tendons on page 141,
Drawing single tendons on page 141 and Drawing
multiple tendons on page 142.
You double click the tendon tool to change default tendon
properties and then draw tendons span by span, or panel by
panel.
You can select a specific tendon segment and right-click to
change that segments properties.
You can seek and change profile points that have the same
value in one operation. See Change profiles tool on
page 144.
Can I harp tendons?
Yes. Any tendon segment can be declared to be harped. The
half-span tendon tool is useful for any harp point (or any
low point) that is not at mid-span. Multiple harp points can
be located in any span by using multiple tendon segments.
Does it matter how I draw half tendons?
Yes. The inflection point is measured from the first point
clicked and the profiles are specified in the order of the
points clicked. To be compatible with the tendons created
using the Full Span Tendon tool, we strongly recommend
that you always start at the high point.
Can I terminate some strands past a column?
This can be done with one of two methods.
1 The tendon can be forked such that the number of
strands decreases. As shown in Figure 39-1, if the transition
is from 15S (15 strands) to 10S (because an adjacent span
does not require that many strands) then terminate 5S using
a half span tendon. It is common to terminate strands at
quarter span and at the slab centroid.
Note: You should only use this method for tendons with no
jacks attached. This is because a jack attached to tendons of
different lengths has inaccurate seating (wedge draw-in)
loss calculations.
Figure 39-1 Termination of strands (no jacks)
2 The second method can be used when jacks are modeled.
If the total number of strands is 15S then one tendon with
10S needs to be continuous with an additional tendon with
5S alongside. It is common to terminate tendons at quarter
span and at the slab centroid.
Figure 39-2 Termination of strands / tendons (jacked). Plan alignment of
tendons is subjective.
Does Concept check to make sure the number of strands in
connected tendon segments is consistent?
Yes. See section 40.3.3 of Chapter 40, Errors and
Warnings.
How does Concept calculate friction losses?
Concept only calculates friction losses if jacks are
specified.
Concept performs friction loss calculations considering the
(elevation view) curvature of the tendons, the (plan view)
horizontal kinks in the tendon and the jacking and friction
parameters. The stress in the tendon is assumed to vary
linearly along each tendon segment.
208
Chapter 39
RAM Concept
Along each tendon the following formula used is:
P2 = P1 * exp-(mu * theta + k * L)
where
P1 is the known stress at one end of a tendon segment
P2 is the unknown stress at the other end of a tendon
segment
mu is the angular friction coefficient (in units of
1/radians)
theta is the total angular change along the tendon
segment
k is the wobble coefficient (in units of 1/length)
L is the tendon segment length
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in
particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the
accidental angular change per unit length. These commu-
nities can calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept
uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWob-
bleCoefficient * mu.
At the joints between tendon segments Concept uses the
following formula:
P4 = P3 * exp-(mu * angle)
where
P4 is the unknown stress in the next tendon segment
P3 is the known stress in the previous tendon segment
(or the jack stress)
mu is the same angular friction coefficient as above
angle is the total angle change at the tendon profile
point (includes both horizontal and vertical kinks)
Concept incorporates seating loss (wedge draw-in loss)
into the losses using the standard strain integration
formulation. The equations above are still used, but the
known and unknown values are swapped. Concept adjusts
the tendon stresses iteratively until the integration of the
strain change in the tendon equals the specified anchorage
seat loss.
Long term losses are input by the user as a jack parameter.
See About jacks and Jack properties on page 144 for
more information.
Do I have to specify jacks?
No. Concept uses the relevant value of f
se
(specified in the
Materials criteria page) as the effective stress for any
tendon without a jack.
Does Concept calculate elongations (extensions)?
Yes, if jacks are specified. Use the Visible Objects dialog to
view Jack Elongation on a plan.
Do the elongations (extensions) include the effect of the
seating distance (wedge draw-in)?
Yes. The elongation reported includes the deduction of the
seating distance.
Where are tendon profiles measured from?
See discussion on Profile in Choose the Banded Tendon
Polyline tool (). on page 137.
It's much easier to take all the strands and put them into one
tendon bundle instead of having to lay them all out. Is there
much difference to the model whether you distribute tendons
over the tributary or not?
This is a matter of engineering judgment. There is certainly
no need to lay out individual strands and it is usually
satisfactory to group strands in larger tendon groups than
that installed in the field. Keep in mind that design strip
cross sections consider only the tendons that they cut
through to calculate strength etc. There could be instances
where you want to model banded tendons in multiple
groups (if the band is very wide).
I have laid out the longitude tendons but want to change the
number of strands per group. Do I have to lay them out again?
No. The number of strands in a tendon does not have to be
an integer, so you can change it by any increment.
Can I determine the force in a tendon?
Yes. Use the Visible Objects dialog to view the Tendon
Forces on a plan.
Does Concept check for tendons being outside of the
concrete?
Yes. See discussion in sections 40.3.4 and 40.3.5 of
Chapter 40, Errors and Warnings.
Do I need to do a load balancing calculation with all the
tendons?
No. The load balance tool is available to help you calculate
low points, but is not mandatory.
The load balancing percentage shown on the design strips plan
does not make sense. How is this calculated?
Concepts balanced load percentage calculation assumes
that what you define as a span, actually behaves like a span.
Sometimes this is not the case.
To calculate the effective dead load applied, Concept uses:
D = 8 M
d
/ L
2
209 RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Where:
D is the dead load to be calculated
M
d
is the total dead load span moment (calculated from the
moments at the first, middle and last cross sections of the
span)
L is the span length (as determined from the span segments,
support conditions, etc.)
The calculation for the effective balance load is similar:
B = 8 M
b
/ L
2
The percentage balanced is 100 . (-B/D)
If, for example, the dead load moments at the start, middle
and end cross sections are not negative, positive and
negative then percentage balance calculation will not be
useful.
This does not mean your strips are wrong, but it might
mean that your tendon layout is not doing what you think it
is doing. Look at the DL (or DL + LL) deflections (without
balance loading) and try to get a better feeling for how the
structure is working and from there determine where to add
and remove tendons.
39.9 Loadings
Is pattern loading possible?
Yes. See Chapter 21, Creating Pattern Loading.
For an irregular structure it is very time consuming to draw the
area loads to match the structure. Is there a faster way?
It is not necessary for area loads to match the structure.
Area loads can overlap each other and they can overhang
the floor. This is shown in the PT tutorial.
Are area loads additive or does the maximum govern?
Loads are additive.
How do Lateral Self Equilibrium loadings work?
Refer to Self-equilibrium analysis on page 387 of
Chapter 50, Analysis Notes.
However, the best way to understand Lateral SE could be
this simple example:
Example 39-1 Lateral SE
Consider the structure with two elevated floors shown in
Figure 39-3. Each level is 3m high and the structure is 10m
wide.
Figure 39-3 Example with two elevated floors
Assume the following:
a frame analysis has been performed on the building for
this 100kN loading and the column forces are known
a very simple distribution of forces (reasonable for
beams much stiffer than columns)
The forces on the top level slab (including column
reactions) are:
Figure 39-4 Forces on top level slab
F
x0
= 100kN
F
x1
= -50kN F
x2
= -50kN
F
z1
= -15kN F
z2
= 15kN
M
y1
= 75kN-m M
y2
= 75kN-m
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to
the slab in a lateral SE loading. Concept then calculates the
correct forces in the slab, design strips and punching
checks.
210
Chapter 39
RAM Concept
For the intermediate level there are more forces to consider
(all of these are from the frame analysis). The forces that
the columns apply to the slab are:
Figure 39-5 Forces on intermediate level slab
F
x3
= 50kN F
x4
= -50kN
F
x5
= 50kN F
x6
= -50kN
F
z3
= 15kN F
z4
= -45kN
F
z5
= -15kN F
z6
= 45kN
M
y3
= 75kN-m M
y4
= 75kN-m
M
y5
= 75kN-m M
y6
= 75kN-m
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to
the slab in a lateral SE loading.
Since the 3 and 4 forces occur at the same location,
they can be added together and applied as a single load
(same for 5 and 6).
Concept then calculates the correct forces in the slab,
design strips and punching checks.
Note: There is one simplification - if you do not care about
diaphragm forces, then you can ignore all the Fx and Fy
forces. This assumes that the Fx and Fy forces act at the
center of your slab and that the centroid elevation of your
slab is constant. When these two assumptions are not true,
the effects of these forces are typically still not large, but you
may need to use some judgment before you ignore them.
Can I input thermal loads into Concept?
Rationally considering thermal loads and stresses is
difficult. Concept does not make it significantly easier.
The most important thing to remember is that thermal loads
cause deformations, not forces. It is the restraint of the
deformations that induce forces into the slab.
If there is no temperature gradient through the slab (and the
slab is flat), then the thermal expansion/contraction will not
cause any out-of-plane deformation, but will cause in plane
stresses if the temperature changes are not uniform across
the slab, or if the supports restrain the slab from lateral
movement.
This situation is very much like shrinkage/swelling.
Expansion / swelling generally causes compressive stresses
in the slab which enhance its strength (they act similar to
prestressing) and can usually be ignored.
Shrinkage/contraction generally causes tension stresses
which are more troublesome. Many designers take the
approach that shrinkage is primarily a deformation
compatibility problem and as soon as cracks form in the
slab (or supports), most of the shrinkage forces are
relieved. These designers ensure that there is enough
reinforcement to control cracking and take measures to
reduce the shrinkage, but generally do not design for the
shrinkage forces.
For temperature gradients across the slab, transverse
deformations (like slab curling) happen. Cracking will also
partially relieve these stresses, but the situation is not as
simple as in-plane temperature changes.
Concept does offer a means to model the thermal forces,
but it takes some work, and does not consider the reduction
in stresses that happens after cracking. Here is the
approach:
Add a Thermal loading, set its Analysis type to Lateral
SE (the loading will be a self-equilibrium loading, but
wont be lateral). Leave the loading type as Other.
Set the load combo load factors for the Thermal
Loading.
Apply the thermal restraint reactions to the Thermal
Loading, but dont apply any load that simulate the
thermal deformations themselves. This set of reactions is
in self-equilibrium (more on how to calculate these
below).
This approach will appropriately design for the thermal
(restraint) forces in the slab, but will not appropriately
consider the thermal deformations in the deflection
predictions.
There are two methods to calculate the thermal restraint
reactions: get them from another analysis or iteratively
determine them in Concept.
You may be able to model the thermal loads in SAP. If so,
you can just apply the reactions to the slab from the walls
and columns as the thermal loads. The reactions will be a
self-equilibrium set of forces.
To determine the reactions loads iteratively in Concept:
Apply loads to the Thermal Loading that create the
thermal strains assuming the slab is free to deform. These
loads should be a self-equilibrium set of forces.
Analyze the slab (and see that the loads cause the slab to
separate from the walls and columns).
Change the Thermal Loading analysis type to Normal
(temporarily)
211 RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Analyze the slab (and see that the reactions keep the slab
attached to the supports).
Apply the support reactions as loads (they will be a self-
equilibrium set). Ensure that the load elevations are set
correctly.
Change the Thermal Loading analysis type back to
Lateral SE.
Analyze the slab (and see that the reaction loads keep
that slab attached to the supports).
Remove the original loads that caused the thermal
strains. The remaining loads are still a self-equilibrium set
- and are the loads for which to design.
39.10 Analysis
Should I use Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions in
the Calc Options?
This is only necessary if your structure has no lateral
stability, such as an elevated floor with columns on rollers,
or a mat (raft) with no X or Y direction springs. Auto-
stabilize does not work if there are lateral loads.
39.11 Design Issues
What support width is used for round columns?
Concept calculates the support width for an equivalent (in
area) square column.
What is the relevance of the Include Detailed Section Analysis
box in Criteria > Design Rules?
That box instructs Concept to do a cracked section analysis
even if one is not required for the code criteria.
The only reason to check the box is if you want to see
cracked section stresses even when they are not used for
code checking / design.
The only reason not to check the box is that cracked section
analyses can be slow. See Detailed Section Analysis on
page 154 of Chapter 28, Calculating Results.
39.12 Results
39.12.1 Reactions
Does Concept include the weight of columns and walls in self
weight calculations?
Concept never includes the weight of supports below.
You decide if the weight of supports above is included.
This is a choice you can make in the Calculation Options.
Can I choose which column and wall reactions are shown?
Yes - you can change what Concept plots. See Reaction
on page 167 and Figure on page 167.
If there are columns (and or walls) above and below an
elevated slab you can select (through the Plot dialog) which
reactions are shown. The choices are
the total reaction on the slab (below and above)
the reaction below
the reaction above
The reaction plans show many small values for Fx and Fy
which makes the plan difficult to read. Can I look at just Fz?
You can control this in two ways. The simplest way is to
turn off F
x
and F
y
with the plot settings. See Changing
which results plot on page 158.
Alternatively, you can filter out small reactions and
moments through the Units window. See Specifying
report as zero on page 25.
The wall reactions are shown per straight section of wall. Can I
see the reaction per wall element?
No. This is not available because there would be too much
information shown.
I have modeled columns at the end of walls. The column
reactions are huge and the wall reaction is negative. Is this
realistic?
The huge result is mathematically correct but may not be
realistic. Try modeling the column and walls in question as
vertically compressible. This may reduce the column
reaction to a more realistic value.
How can I determine the reaction at the end of a wall?
Reactions are reported for continuous walls, so if you need
discrete reactions leave a gap in the wall or specify a
column at the end of a wall.
212
Chapter 39
RAM Concept
39.12.2 Plots
Why is there moment shown at a free edge about an axis
parallel to the edge?
Figure 39-6 Plan of moment about Y-Y axis at opening. The circled mo-
ment is displayed as non-zero.
The plotted moments are smoothed curves of the element
center moments.
A slab element at a free edge may have a small moment at
it center. The values shown between element centers are
interpolated, but since there is no element outside the edge,
there is no way for that value to ever reach zero.
For better visual results (values closer to zero at the edge),
you should use smaller elements at the edge. The distance
from the edge to the edge element center is the most
important parameter.
I have a pinned column at the edge of the slab. Why is there
moment shown at the edge about an axis parallel to the edge?
The explanation is the same as the preceding question.
Why are there two lines for deflection in the strip plots?
The two plots for maximum and minimum differ if you
have one of the following conditions:
Alternate envelope factors that are not the same as the
load factors (see About alternate envelope factors on
page 41 of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations).
For example, for the service load combination, the
load factor on live load could be 1.0 and the
alternate envelope factor could be 0.0. This would
produce differing maximum and minimum values.
Pattern loadings
More than one load combination using the same rule set.
The default plot shows the maximum and minimum
deflections. You could choose to show just the maximum
values via the plot dialog, but remember that the absolute
of minimum could be more than the maximum. It would be
possible that minimum governs if you have upward
deflection.
Note: This also applies for plots of demand for resultants
such as moment or shear.
39.12.3 Torsion
I have set the Behavior of a beam to No-torsion. Why is there
still torsion in the beam?
When you set your beams to have no torsion, you are
really setting them to have no twist (Mxy).
Twist is only one component of torsion. Torsion is a
moment that in Concept is measured about the centroid
point of the cross section. The z-coordinate of this centroid
is the mathematical centroid elevation of the cross section,
the x- and y- coordinates of the centroid are the centre of
the core portion of the centroid.
The vertical shear in the cross section will create torsion
unless it is centred upon the centroid. In an edge beam, the
vertical shear at the ends must be centered on the column,
or there MUST be torsion to maintain equilibrium.
39.12.4 Envelopes
What is the significance of Envelopes in the Audit?
An envelope is a resultant (set of forces) in which one of
the force values is a maximum or minimum for an item
(such as a cross section) under consideration. All of the
force values within a single envelope occur simultaneously.
Audit envelopes are created by the following process:
for each rule set, 6 envelopes are added to a list (Max M,
Min M, Max V, Min V, Max P, Min P)
duplicates are removed (if Max M and Max V are
identical, one of them will be removed)
torsion conversion is performed (this can modify the
torsion values, it can also create additional envelopes)
213 RAM Concept
Chapter 39
The result is a list of envelopes (possibly just one, but also
possibly up to 12).
Note: Some torsion conversions (such as modifying the
bending moment due to the torsion) can double the number
of envelopes in effect.
39.12.5 Reinforcement
Can I determine the reinforcement spacing?
Yes.
1 Choose the appropriate reinforcement plan.
3 Check Bar Spacings under the Span Designs or Section
Designs columns.
Note: Plotted reinforcement quantities cannot show bar
spacing.
Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed on the wrong
slab face?
This sometimes happens for an ACI318 or BS8110 / TR43
design.
Concept locates the minimum reinforcing required by
certain design criteria on the tension face of the slab (or the
face with the least amount of compression); this normally
works well for both elevated slabs and mat foundations.
However, in certain cases the moment at a design strip
cross section is of the opposite sign of what would be
expected given the location. For an elevated slab this can
lead to reinforcing at columns being at the bottom of the
slab and reinforcing at mid-span being at the top of the
slab.
For example, for ACI318 or TR43 if there is no tension at a
slab location under service conditions, then Concept places
the minimum support rebar on the face with the least
amount of compression. This could be the bottom face at a
column.
You can overrule this by choosing Elevated Slab for the
design strip property CS Min. Reinforcement Location.
See Span segment properties, which starts on page 96.
The description of CS Min. Reinforcement Location
follows Figure 22-7.
I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this?
This can be for a number of reasons. The common ones are:
1 The floor is post-tensioned and yet you have not checked
the Consider as Post-Tensioned option. Concept is ignoring
the tendons. See the description in Span segment
properties on page 96.
2 The depth of the span segment strip cross section
contributes to a large amount of minimum reinforcement.
This may be because the cross section depth is based upon
a thickened area.
3 The bonded tendons are not in the tensile zone.
Why are the reinforcement results on the Design Status layer in
different colors?
The default Appearance scheme uses different colors for
Failed Span Design and OK Span Design.
39.12.6 AS3600 specific reinforcement
questions
I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this?
The default setting for design strip Environment is Normal.
Changing to Protected can reduce the amount of
reinforcement. See Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and
Temperature on page 536 for further clarification.
39.12.7 BS8110 / TR43 specific reinforcement
questions
Why is there bottom steel at the column?
There are a couple of possibilities.
1 See Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed
on the wrong slab face? on page 213.
2 TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that additional
un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to cater for
the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural
tensile stresses in the concrete for Support zones in all flat
slabs.
The note under TR43 table 2 states that the support zone
shall be considered as any part of the span under
consideration within 0.2 x L of the support, where L is the
effective span.
This often means that there is tension on the bottom face
near the edge of the support zone, beyond contraflexure.
Per 6.10.5, Concept adds reinforcement to the bottom face
in such instances.
Note: Concept might draw reinforcement bars to the
column, but a plot could reveal that is only required over a
limited zone.
Note: Using column and middle strips for a TR43 PT flat
plate tends to increase the likelihood of this situation.
214
Chapter 39
RAM Concept
Why is there mild service reinforcement near midspan of a
bonded post-tensioned flat plate?
When designing to TR43 (BS8110) with bonded tendons,
many designers are surprised to see bottom service
reinforcement.
TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that .... additional
un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to cater for
the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural
tensile stresses in the concrete for .... span zones in flat
slabs using unbonded tendons where the tensile stress
exceeds .
Many designers consider that they do not have to provide
un-tensioned reinforcement if they use bonded tendons.
However, what they miss is that the reinforcement shall be
placed in the tensile zone, as near as practicable to the outer
fibre.
Concept examines the location of the bonded tendons and
determines if it is effective. See Calculation of
Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5 on
page 571 for further explanation.
The following figures show where bonded tendons would
not provide serviceability crack control.
Figure 39-7 Assumed stress distribution
Figure 39-8 Example 1: tendons in compression zone (not effective)
Figure 39-9 Example 2: ineffective tendons in tension zone: (i) small num-
ber of strands (ii) near neutral axis
39.12.8 Punching Shear
How does Concept check punching shear?
See Chapter 66, Punching Shear Design Notes.
Does Concept check punching shear at the ends of the walls?
No.
What is the stress ratio?
The ratio of maximum stress to allowable stress.
Does Concept use redistributed moments in punching shear
checks?
No. The biaxial moments are factored elastic moments.
Is the design insufficient if the stress ratio exceeds 1.0?
The punching shear at such a column is either:
1 sufficient if provided with design punching shear
reinforcement, or
2 insufficient (reinforcement cannot solve the problem and
the concrete form needs revision).
Why is there a punching failure at a beam? I thought that
punching shear failures occur only in flat slabs.
The code provides formula for calculating punching shear.
This does not apply any logic as to whether a punching
failure can occur.
Concept is only doing a punching check at a column
supporting a beam because the user drew a punching check
there. You should decide the nature of the potential failure
mechanism and thus whether punching check is
appropriate.
Shallow beams could certainly have punching failure. Deep
beams are less likely to have punching failure, and one-way
shear failure would be the likely failure mechanism.
For example, column A in Figures 39-10 and 39-11 is
satisfactory for one-way shear (with reinforcement in the
beam) but the code equation determines that there is a
punching failure. You need to decide if this is appropriate.
0.15 f
cu
215 RAM Concept
Chapter 39
It would be possible, but very rare, for a punching failure at
column B since it is satisfactory for one-way shear in the
beam (with reinforcement).
Figure 39-10 Mixed form: flat slab with column capitals and beams
Figure 39-11 Shear results
39.12.9 Shear reinforcement (one-way)
Why does my flat slab (or flat plate) model have one-way shear
reinforcement results? I would expect punching shear to
govern, not one-way shear.
[Similarly: Why does my flat slab (or flat plate) model have one-
way shear failures?]
When engineers design flat slabs by hand, they often
IGNORE the one-way checks. They decide that punching
is all that is appropriate. (This is often decided without
much consideration it just seems right).
Concept does not make this decision, as nowhere does the
code advise to ignore one-way shear checks in a flat slab or
flat plate. Nonetheless - you should decide what the
possible failure mechanism is and so what is appropriate. It
may, or may not, be appropriate to ignore the one-way
shear results. For example, columns C in Figures 39-10 and
39-11 are satisfactory for punching shear (without
reinforcement) but the mathematics of the code requires
one-way shear reinforcement. It is up to you to decide if
this is appropriate.
Note: In fact, ACI 318-02 rule 11.12.1.1 specifically
requires a one-way shear check in flat plates.
The results have a lot more shear reinforcement than
expected.
This is likely to be a shear core issue. Refer to About shear
core on page 105 and Shear core in slabs on page 106 of
Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips.
For a post-tensioned beam, the reason could be that
Concept is deducting a fraction of the (bonded) duct from
the web width per the appropriate code rules.
Concept calculates the number of duct by dividing the
Strands per tendon by the Max strands per duct (as
specified in the Materials) and rounding up to the next
integer.
Refer to the following sections for an explanation of
Concepts shear web calculation:
For AS 3600, Section 8.2 Shear Design on page 533
For BS 8110, Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of
beams on page 566.
For IS 456, Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of
beams on page 593.
For EC2, Section 6.2 Design shear resistance on
page 614.
For CSA A23.3, Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of
Beams on page 635
Note: There is no ACI318 rule concerning deduction of
ducts.
216
Chapter 39
RAM Concept
What does this audit text mean: Depth d is zero - replacing
with column effective depth. Depth is still zero - giving up.?
The is likely a combination of two things:
there is net compression force and a small moment, and
as such the bending designer does not provide any
reinforcement
the minimum designer has been turned off
If this is the case, you should consider turning the
minimum designer back on.
39.12.10 Deflection
Is cracking taken into account for deflection?
Not all deflection results consider creep and cracking. It is
very important that you understand which ones do and
which do not. See Chapter 65, Load History Deflections.
Does Concept warn if deflection is too high?
No. Allowable deflection is a very subjective issue and
Concept does not warn if deflections exceed conventional
limits.
Note: Concept does display a warning when deflections
are so large that the analysis itself may no longer be valid.
This typically happens for structures that are unstable or
nearly unstable. Often the instability is related to
unrestrained lateral displacements.
39.12.11 Soil bearing
There are many soil bearing pressure plans. Is there a
summary?
The Soil Bearing Design rule set envelopes the maximum
and minimum bearing pressures for all load combinations.
Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design >
Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
39.13 Performance
What are the graphics cards requirements?
It is recommended that you use a graphics card supported
by DirectX 9.0. See the graphics card manufacturer for
latest information on DirectX drivers.
If no graphics card supported by DirectX can be found,
Concept attempts to use software emulation under
Windows XP SP2 ,Vista and Windows 7. At least 128 MB
of video RAM is recommended, but 256 MB is more
desirable. For optimal performance, graphics display color
depth should be set to 24-bit or higher. When using a color
depth setting of 16-bit, some inconsistencies will be noted.
217 RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40 Errors and Warnings
RAM Concept has many error and warning messages that
can be triggered during modeling and analysis. Some
messages are self-explanatory and do not warrant further
explanation.
This chapter explains some of the more complicated
warning and error messages that commonly arise.
Most errors and warnings advise of a coordinate (x,y) or an
object number. Concept shows coordinates at the bottom of
the workspace (see Figure 2-1 on page 5). You can turn on
object numbers with the Visible Objects ( ) dialog box.
To show an object number:
1 Choose Layers > Plan.
3 Check the Numbers box under the appropriate objects
column, then click OK.
40.1 Meshing
Concept can generate several different errors and warnings
for meshing. A general description of meshing limitations
is in Limitations of the automatic meshing on page 75.
It is strongly advised that you heed such errors and
warnings and fix the problems. Otherwise, Concept
generates the mesh everytime you do a Calc All.
Note: Nearly all meshing problems are due to the users
failure to use snapping properly.
40.1.1 Two or more slab areas or beams with
the same priority overlap at (x,y)
Overlapping slabs and beams should have different
priorities. This is explained in The priority method on
page 70.
The error is generated when two or more overlapping slab
or beam objects have the same priority.
To fix this error:
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan.
3 Check the Priorities boxes under Beams and Slab Areas,
then click OK.
4 Use the coordinates in the error dialog box to find the
location of the problem, and revise the assigned priorities.
Usually this requires making sure that the thickest slab or
beam have the higher priority (the lowest priority is 1).
Note: The highest priority is not always assigned to the
thickest element. For example, where a standard slab area
overlaps a depressed slab area.
40.1.2 Line is too short at (x,y)
Concept has a minimum element size of 50 mm
(approximately 2 inches). This is effectively a snap
distance. When an object such as a slab area has two nodes
closer than this distance the line between them is too short.
In such cases, Concept merges the two nodes together and
reports the coordinates of this occurrence in the dialog box.
You can view the resulting elements and nodes in the
element standard plan.
40.1.3 Feature eliminated at (x,y)
This warning is a result of one of two things:
A feature is too small to model (for example, a 1"
(25mm) wide slab area), or
Failure to use snapping, causing small overlaps.
40.1.4 Recursion too deep
If the mesh ends up with 3 nodes at a tight angle, Concept
attempts to use recursion numerous times to adjust the
nodes and make the minimum angle larger. In such a case,
the standard number of recursions did not solve the tight
angle, so the warning message reported that the recursion
was too deep.
This does not generally cause a problem, although it is
indicative that there is a pointy element which can affect
the contour plots. Generally it is best to avoid this situation.
See Feature eliminated at (x,y).
Note: You should investigate the meshing / modeling of the
problem area to ensure that Concept's elements are
reasonable for the area.
Note: This error is usually caused by a failure to use
snapping while drawing: two lines that are supposed to be
in the same place are instead slightly off parallel and
intersect.
218
Chapter 40
RAM Concept
40.1.5 An error has been found. Two column
elements below the slab are at the same
location. Delete column element #a or #b.
This error occurs when you inadvertently draw a column at
the same location twice, or copy and paste a column and do
not change the Support Set (above or below).
To fix this error:
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan.
3 Check the Column numbers box.
4 Place the cursor at the appropriate column, double click
and delete.
40.1.6 An error has been found. A column
element below the slab is not attached to the
slab. Revise column element #a (below the
slab)
This error occurs when a column is outside the slab
boundary (or within an opening). To fix the problem you
should move the column or edit the slab such that the
column is within the slab boundary.
40.1.7 It is good modeling practice to
connect wall centerlines. Click on the Fix
button to move wall endpoints to a nearby
centerline
This warning occurs when the end of a wall is drawn within
close proximity, but not coincident with another wall
centerline. Walls should be modeled this way in order to
create the best analytical finite element mesh.
The dialog box offers an automatic fix (Click on the Fix
button). If you click this button, Concept moves the wall
endpoint to the centerline of the nearby wall.
40.2 Loads
40.2.1 An error has occurred while
assembling the load vector. A point load is not
on the slab. Revise point load #a.
A point load that is not on a finite element is considered an
error. Apart from generating the error, Concept essentially
ignores the load.
40.2.2 An error has occurred while
assembling the load vector. A line load is not
totally on the slab. Revise line load #a.
A line load that is not completely on finite elements
generates this error. There may be times you ignore the
error, such as when a line load crosses an opening. Concept
ignores the part of the load crossing the opening.
Note: You should closely investigate such an error. A line
load may appear to be on a slab edge, but actually be
outside it. If you believe you have a line load across an
opening and ignore the error, you may miss a real problem.
40.3 Tendons
40.3.1 Tendon # has a radius (a) that is less
than the minimum allowable (b).
Parabolic tendons with a large drape relative to their length
have a small radius. A warning is triggered when the
tendon segment radius is less than the minimum radius for
that tendon system.
A tendons minimum (vertical) radius is specified in the
Materials section. Concept does not check horizontal radii
as tendon segments are straight in plan.
The radii shown are suggestions based on industry
standards. You can change them based on advice from
prestress companies.
Note: The warning can be indicative of an overbalanced
condition (too much uplift) for parabolic tendons.
To remove the warning you can adjust the tendon profile or
change the minimum radius in the Material section.
To edit the minimum radius:
2 Edit the minimum radius for the PT system.
40.3.2 Cannot auto-position profile point at
(x,y) due to profile point value
This warning occurs when both of the following are true
for two tendon segments that share a Profile Point 2:
1 The tendon segments have the Position Profile Point 2 for
equal balance loads option checked, and
2 One, and only one, of the tendon segments is flat (that is, the
values for Profile Point 1 and Profile Point 2 produce a flat
tendon segment: this usually occurs when the two values are
equal).
219 RAM Concept
Chapter 40
The Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option
is intended to move the plan position of Profile Point 2 so
that the uplift is equal for both tendon segments. This is not
possible when one tendon segment is flat (zero drape) as
there is no uplift in that tendon segment.
40.3.3 An error has occurred while trying to
calculate a profile. A profile point is not on the
slab. Click on the Fix button to correct the
profile point at (x,y).
This occurs when a tendon extends beyond the slab edge.
To fix this error, stretch the profile point so its end is on the
edge or slightly inside the slab edge.
The dialog box offers an automatic fix (Click on the Fix
button). If you click this button, Concept moves the profile
point to the nearest concrete element.
calculate a profile. A profile point is not within
the slab (vertically). Adjust the profile at (x,y).
This occurs when a tendon profile point is not within the
slab thickness. Profile values are always relative to the slab
or beam soffit at the location of the profile point. The
easiest way to find these problems is to look at a tendon
perspective.
If a profile point is at a top or bottom surface step, Concept
moves the profile point so that there is no ambiguity. You
should check that the profile point is within the expected
slab area.
calculate the tendon profiles. A tendon is out
of the slab at (x,y).
This is different to 40.3.4 in that the profile points are
within the slab, but the tendon is out of the slab somewhere
between the profile points. This usually occurs when there
is a top or bottom surface step.
40.3.6 Tendon #a is harped, and hence
violates the minimum allowable radius (b)
A harped tendon has (vertically) straight segments. There is
thus a zero radius at the profile point(s).
To avoid the harped tendon warning:
2 Create a new PT system (possibly called Harped).
3 Set the minimum radius for the new PT system to zero.
4 Use the new system for the harped tendons.
calculate the tendon effective stresses. A
tendon has a different number of strands than
an adjacent tendon. Investigate tendon #a.
You can vary the number of strands along a continuous
tendon, but it is discouraged. This warning alerts you that
the number of strands within the tendon is variable.
To avoid the warning go to the appropriate tendon layer
(the dialog box indicates on which layer the tendon is
located) and change the number of strands in the tendon.
Note: It is usually best to use the Select Connected Tendons
tool.
See Can I terminate some strands past a column? on
page 207 of Chapter 39, Frequently Asked Questions for
more advice.
calculate the tendon effective stresses. A
tendon is not connected to any jacks.
Investigate tendon #a. [If any tendons are
stressed then all tendons must be stressed.]
Concept calculates losses in tendons that have one or two
jacks attached. Concept does not allow a (latitude or
longitude) tendon layer to have some tendons with jacks
but other tendons with no jacks. You can have one tendon
layer (say, latitude) with jacked tendons and the other
tendon layer with no jacks.
When you encounter this error, find the tendon (from the
number given) and draw at least one jack on the tendon.
40.4 Load History Deflections
40.4.1 An error has been found while
calculating load history deflections. The floor
may have incomplete design strip/cross
section coverage to accurately calculate load
history deflections. The slab coverages are a
and b in orthogonal directions
In order to accurately calculate load history deflections,
Concept needs each element containing significant forces
to be covered by the tributary of a design strip cross section
or design section tributary. In order to make sure the user
hasnt forgotten to define strips over a large portion of the
slab, Concept performs some rudimentary checks to make
220
Chapter 40
RAM Concept
sure a large portion of the slab is covered by cross section
tributaries in two pependicular directions. This warning can
be safely ignored in one-way slab regions where the
spanning direction is appropriately covered by cross
sections.
40.5 Miscellaneous
40.5.1 An Error occurred while trying to
calculate everything. An error has occurred
while triangularizing the stiffness matrix. The
structure is unstable at node: a, DOF: Y-Axis
Translation. Revise the structure.
This means that the structure has no lateral stability. You
need to either provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear
walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral
springs etc.) or auto-stabilize the structure.
To auto-stabilize the structure:
1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options
2 Choose the General tab
3 Check the Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions
box.
Note: This does not work if there are lateral loads.
40.5.2 An error occurred: Loading has
horizontal loads, but the structure is
automatically stabilized in the X and Y
directions.
You cannot auto-stabilize the structure if there are
horizontal loads (other than tendons).
You must (1) uncheck the Auto-stabilize structure in X and
Y directions box in the General tab of the Calc Options, and
(2) provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear walls, columns
with sufficient moment connections, lateral springs etc.).
40.5.3 The code rules selected in Rule Set
Service Design do not appear compatible
with the load factors in the load combinations
using the rule set. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained
Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have a
load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the
presence of tendons) and load factors of no more than 1 for
dead and live loadings. Concept provides the warning when
this is violated.
The warning usually occurs when you have added load
combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading
load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors
for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load
combinations that utilize the service (sustained service /
max service) rule sets.
40.5.4 Load Combination Service
(Sustained Service / Max Service) has unusual
balance and / or hyperstatic load factors. This
is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained
Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have a
load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the
presence of tendons) and a load factor (and alternate
envelope factor) of zero for the Hyperstatic Loading.
Concept provides the warning when this is violated.
combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading
load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors
for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load
combinations that utilize the service (sustained service /
max service) rule sets.
40.5.5 Rule Set Strength Design is being
used by load combinations that appear to
have load factors set for different purposes.
This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Strength (or Ductility)
rule sets should logically have a load factor (and alternate
envelope factor) of 1 for the Hyperstatic Loading
(regardless of the presence of tendons). Concept provides
the warning when this is violated.
combinations and forgotten to enter the Hyperstatic
Loading load factors. To avoid the warning change all load
factors (and alternate envelope factors) for the Hyperstatic
Loading to 1 for all of the load combinations that utilize the
strength or ductility rule sets.
40.5.6 The mat / raft is likely unstable. There
is less that 25% contact area.
When the mat (raft) has a significantly reduced bearing
area it is likely that bearing pressures are very high and
there could be instability.
221 RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.5.7 Punching Check #a is not located at a
column
This error occurs when a column is relocated after the
punching checks have been drawn and the punching check
is no longer centered on the column. You need to remove
and redraw the punching check. It usually helps to show the
punching check number.
To display the punching check number (as opposed to column
number):
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan.
3 Check the Punching Shear Checks numbers box.
40.5.8 Too many slab shapes intersecting the
column shape at (x,y)
RAM Concept uses very sophisticated algorithms to find
the critical sections around the column and slab
irregularities. If the column intersects a large number of
slab thickness changes (such as where beams frame in on
each side), the run time could be very long. In this instance,
Concept just reports this error. This error can be resolved
by making the punch check smaller, simplifying the slab
geometry around the column, or deleting the punch check.
40.5.9 An error has been found. The cross
section trimming for strip ab-c has caused
there to be no concrete remaining at one or
more locations.
This error is typically reported at steps in the slabs.
The inter cross section slope limit is trimming the entire
cross section away at the step. See Inter Cross Section
Slope Limit Trimming on page 108 for more information.
You can avoid the problem by setting the inter cross section
slope limit to a large value in spans containing large steps.
You should, however, consider the underlying reason for
the error.
40.5.10 An error has been found. [Design
strip] ab-c has reinforcing bars with too much
cover (the bottom bar is closer to the top than
the top bar).
The trimmed cross section has a thickness and covers such
that the location of the bars is illogical.
This is likely to happen with thin slabs, or steps.
222
Chapter 40
RAM Concept
223 RAM Concept
Chapter 41
41 Simple RC Slab Tutorial
This chapter describes the steps for modeling a single panel
two-way flat plate with uniform loads.
The objective of the tutorial is to help you learn some basic
modeling skills and expose you to a number of tools and
methods that should prove useful for real projects.
The codes used are ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001,
BS8110:1997, EC2 - 2004, IS 456 : 2000, and CSA A23.3-
04.
The instructions show US units for an ACI 318 design,
with metric values and units in square brackets for AS3600,
BS8110, EC2, IS 456, and CSA A23.3. The metric values
are not exact conversions.
For information on creating a new file, see Creating and
opening files on page 5.
41.1 Defining the structure
You start by drawing the structure and generating the
element mesh.
Define the column locations and properties:
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan.
2 Double click the Column tool ( ).
3 In the Default Column Properties dialog box:
Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa
for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 & EC2, M40 for IS
456; 30 MPa for CSA A23.3].
Set Width to 24 inches [600 mm].
Set Depth to 24 inches [600 mm].
4 Click OK.
Define the column locations by one of the following three
methods. We strongly recommend you try all of them for
the purpose of learning different procedures.
5 Enter the following coordinates (x, y) and press return
after each:
0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m]
24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m]
0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
Note: The coordinates will appear in the command line,
see Figure 2-1 on page 5.
Note: Do not enter the actual units (ft., m)
6 Go to Draw the slab area:, or select and delete the four
columns and try the next method.
7 Right click over the plan and choose Grid.
8 In the Grid Setup dialog box:
Set x and y to 1 foot [0.25 meters].
Click OK.
9 Turn on Snap to Grid ( ).
10Click the Column tool ( ).
11Place the cursor near the following coordinates and click
(the cursor will snap to the grid and the coordinates appear
in the command line):
0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m]
24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m]
0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
12Go to Draw the slab area:, or select and delete the four
columns and try the next method.
13Draw the two columns at 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m] and 24, 0 ft.
[7.25, 0 m] by one of the previous two methods.
14Select the two columns.
15Click the move tool ( ).
16Hold down shift and click anywhere on the workspace.
17Type r0,20 [r0, 6], and press Return.
Note: This copies the two columns using the relative
command. See Using relative coordinates on page 18 for
further explanation.
Draw the slab area:
1 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
2 If previously turned on, turn off Snap to Grid ( ).
3 Double click the Slab Area tool ( ) to edit the default
properties.
4 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 & EC2, M40 for IS
456; 30 MPa for CSA A23.3].
Set Thickness to 12 inches [300 mm].
Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1.
Click OK.
5 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the four
corners of the slab by snapping at the outside corner of
each column.
6 Complete the rectangle by clicking at your starting point
(or type c in the command line and press Return).
224
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
Hatch the slab area:
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.
2 Check Hatching under Slab Areas, and then click
OK.
You have now defined the slab but the element mesh does
not yet exist.
Figure 41-1 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab area (hatched), and the columns.
Generate the mesh:
2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to
2 feet [0.6 m].
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This produces
reasonable results, but a regular mesh is better. You can
regenerate a significantly improved mesh once you have
defined design strips. This mesh is shown in Figure 41-4.
Figure 41-2 Element: Standard Plan (ACI318 example dimensions).
Figure 41-3 Element: Standard Plan (AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS 456 and
CSA A23.3 example).
225 RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Figure 41-4 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration (for ACI318 ex-
ample; the metric codes produce a similar mesh)
View the structure:
1 Choose Layers > Element > Structure Summary
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) to rotate
the floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool ( ).
Upon returning to this perspective, you can look at the
saved view by clicking Show Set Viewpoint ( ).
Figure 41-5 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
41.2 Drawing the loads
RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight
automatically. There is no limit to the number of loadings
than can be specified but this example defines only Live
Loading.
Draw live loads:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading >
All Loads Plan.
2 Double click the Area Load tool ( ).
3 In the Default Area Load Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 50 psf [2.5 kN/m
2
].
Click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 50 psf [2.5 kN/ m
2
].
4 Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four
corners of a quadrilateral and then typing c. This shape
need not match the slabs exact dimensions, but should
cover the slab.
Figure 41-6 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on): ACI318 example.
226
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
hatching turned on): AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS 456, & CSA A23.3 example.
41.3 Defining the design strips
Design strips are an essential part of RAM Concept
because they link finite element analysis with concrete
design. Their properties include reinforcement bar sizes,
cover, and parameters that Concept uses to determine
which code rules are applicable for cross-section design.
There are two directions named Latitude and Longitude.
It is normal practice to design two-way RC flat plates with
column and middle strips in two orthogonal directions, and
that practice is used here.
Draw latitude design strips:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool ( ).
3 The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
Generation properties.
Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is
the default for the AS3600 and IS 456 templates).
Click the General tab.
Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
Click the Column Strip tab.
Change CS Top Bar to #6 [N20 for AS3600; T20
for BS8110; H20 for EC2; T20 for IS 456; 20M for
CSA A23.3].
Change CS Bottom Bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600;
T16 for BS8110; H16 for EC2; T16 for IS 456].
Click the Middle Strip tab.
Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip
Properties box.
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude (as shown in Figure 41-8):
Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet [0.6 meters].
Click OK.
Figure 41-8 Generate spans dialog box
The latitude spans appear, as shown in Figure 41-9.
Generate Strips.
The latitude design strips appear, as shown in Figure 41-10.
Figure 41-9 Latitude direction spans
227 RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Figure 41-10 Latitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Draw longitude design strips:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Longitude Design Spans
Plan.
3 Click the Column Strip tab in the Default Span Properties
dialog box.
The defaults set up in the Latitude Design Spans Plan will
have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the
same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal
direction.
Change CS Top Cover to 2.25 inches [60 mm].
Change CS Bottom Cover to 1.38 inches [41 mm].
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
Set Spans to Generate to Longitude.
Click the up-down orientation button, and click
OK.
The longitude spans appear, as shown in Figure 41-12.
Generate Strips.
The longitude design strips appear, as shown in Figure 41-
13.
Figure 41-12 Longitude direction spans
228
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
Figure 41-13 Longitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Now that there are design strips, you can generate a much
more regular mesh.
Regenerate the mesh:
2 Click Generate.
3 There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the
Element Standard Plan.
Refer to Figure 41-4 to view the new mesh.
41.4 Drawing punching shear checks
Drawing the punching checks is very straightforward.
Draw punching shear checks:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan.
2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( ).
3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog
box:
Change Cover to CGS to 2.25 inches [60 mm] (the
average top cover)
Click OK.
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool.
See Figure 41-14 to view the punching checks.
Figure 41-14 Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan
41.5 Calculate and view the results
You can run the file at any time during modeling to
analyze and check for errors. After you have drawn design
strips, Concept can analyze and design. You can then view
the results.
Calculate:
1 Click Calc All ( ).
41.5.1 Design status
The purpose of status plans is to indicate whether there are
any violations of code limits for ductility, one-way shear,
and punching shear.
View Status:
For ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the status plan shows OK
for all design strips and punching shear checks. See Figure
41-15.
The BS8110 status plan shows punching shear failure. See
Figure 41-16.
The EC2 and CSA A23.3 status plan show OK for all
design strips and OK with SSR for all punching shear
checks.
Note: Status does not flag excessive deflections.
229 RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Figure 41-15 Design Status: Status Plan for ACI318, AS3600 & IS 456
Figure 41-16 Design Status: Status Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2)
41.5.2 Design reinforcement
You can view reinforcement results as bar drawings or
plots.
View Reinforcement:
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each
of the eight design strips. See Figures 41-17 through 41-20.
Figure 41-17 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for ACI318
Figure 41-18 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for AS3600
230
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
Figure 41-19 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 &
#2)
Figure 41-20 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for IS 456
Such plans often suffer from information overload with
congested results. For this reason, you can access plans in
the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement
according to: face (top or bottom), direction (latitude or
longitude), and type (flexural or shear). You should decide
which plans best convey the results without too much
clutter.
View Specific Reinforcement:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Latitude Bottom
Reinforcement Plan.
See Figures 41-21 through 41-24.
Concept provides you with the code clause numbers that
control the maximum top and bottom reinforcement at any
design strip cross section. The following uses latitude
bottom reinforcement as an example.
View Reinforcement Controlling Criteria:
Reinforcement Plan.
3 In the span designs (not section designs) column:
uncheck Bar Descriptions and check Controlling Criteria,
and click OK.
See Figures 41-25 through 41-28 for latitude bottom
reinforcement controlling criteria.
Figure 41-21 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for
ACI318.
AS3600.
231 RAM Concept
Chapter 41
BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 41-24 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS
456.
ACI318 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and controlling Criteria
checked.
AS3600 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria
checked.
BS8110 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria
checked.
232
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
Figure 41-28 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS
456 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria checked.
41.5.3 Design reinforcement plots
Concept has plotting options that you can use to view
various strip-based results such as moment, shear,
precompression, reinforcement and crack width.
This section steps you through setting up a reinforcement
plot.
You can bypass this section, but there are steps that help
you learn the more powerful aspects of the program.
To create a new plan that plots latitude bottom reinforcement:
1 Choose Layers > New Plan.
2 Enter a name for the plan, such as Plot: Latitude Bottom
Reinforcement. (Concept automatically prepends the layer
name and appends the word Plan).
3 Select the Design Status layer, and click OK.
4 Click Show Nothing and click OK.
The Plot dialog box appears with the Section Design
dialog.
6 Check the Active box.
7 Select the Bottom radio button.
8 Change Max Frame Number to 2, and click OK.
See Figures 41-29 to 41-32 for the reinforcement plots.
Figure 41-29 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan
for ACI318.
for AS3600
233 RAM Concept
Chapter 41
for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
for IS 456
41.5.4 Punching shear
You can view punching shear results on dedicated plans.
View Punching Shear:
Plan.
You can see that, for ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the
unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0 and hence
punching shear capacity is satisfactory. These results are
shown in Figure 41-33, Figure 41-34 and 41-37.
The USR for BS8110 is 1.17, as shown in Figure 41-35.
Since the stress ratio exceeds 1.0, shear reinforcement is
required. Concept designs stud shear reinforcement (SSR)
for such situations.
View SSR:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
The result for BS8110 is shown in Figure 41-36.
Figure 41-33 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for ACI318.
Figure 41-34 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for AS3600
234
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
Figure 41-35 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for BS8110 (Amd
#1 & #2).
Figure 41-36 Design Status: SSR Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 41-37 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for IS 456
41.5.5 Deflection
Usually you are interested in deflections for Service (Dead
and Live Load plus PT if applicable) and Long Term.
Concept uses gross section inertia for deflection contours.
You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and
cracking with Load History Deflections. See Chapter 65,
Load History Deflections for more information.
Note: The following deflection plans DO NOT consider
cracking, creep or shrinkage.
View service deflection:
Deflection Plan.
The service deflection contours should be visible, as shown
in Figures 41-38 through 41-41.
Note: These models use compressible columns and hence
the deflection includes column deflection.
Note: The AS3600 template uses 70% of live load for the
Service LC.
Figure 41-38 Service LC: Deflection Plan for ACI318.
Figure 41-39 Service LC: Deflection Plan for AS3600.
235 RAM Concept
Chapter 41
.
Figure 41-40 Service LC: Deflection Plan for BS8110.
Figure 41-41 Service LC: Deflection Plan for IS 456.
View service deflection without colors:
Deflection Plan.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ) to change
Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour.
Note: As previously mentioned, you are strongly advised to
review Chapter 65, Load History Deflections to under-
stand how Concept considers cracking, creep and shrinkage
for deflection calculations.
41.5.6 Bending Moments
While it is not necessary to view bending moments, it can
be useful, especially for irregular structures. Even though
principal moments are important, the default moment
contours plans are for Mx (moment about the x-axis) and
My. This is because most designers detail reinforcement
orthogonally, and the directions are usually the x- and y-
axes. You can view moments about any axes, including the
principal axes.
It is not particularly easy to assess the moment contours.
This is why Plot Distribution Tools are so useful.
Note: Plot Distribution Tools are useful for qualitative
results but not quantitative results. Refer Section distri-
bution plots on page 158, and, in particular, the
Summary on page 160
View Moments:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Code Specific
Load Combination > Mx Plan.
For ACI318, use Factored LC: 1.4D.
For AS3600, use Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5 L.
For BS8110, use Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6L + 1.6S.
For IS 456, use Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5 L + 1.6S.
For EC2, use Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75S
For CSA A23.3, use Factored LC: 1.4D.
The contours are moment per unit length about the global
x-axis.
2 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( )
3 Click the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ).
4 Click first at the top of the structure and again on the
bottom side.
This shows the bending moment shape, about the x-axis,
along the line you have drawn. See Figures 41-42 through
41-45.
5 Now click from left to right across the structure.
This shows how Mx varies along the span. If you do it
through the column centers, you will see how the column
strip has large negative moments and a small positive
moment near midspan. If you do it in the middle strip, you
will see only positive moments.
See About plot sign convention on page 28 of Chapter 8,
Choosing Sign Convention for further information.
236
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
Figure 41-42 Factored LC: 1.4D: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribu-
tion tool for ACI318.
Figure 41-43 Ultimate LC: 1.2D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool for AS3600.
tribution tool for BS8110.
tribution tool for IS 456.
41.6 Drawing reinforcement
Version 3.0 introduces vastly improved tools for drawing
reinforcement bars.
41.6.1 Drawing a bottom reinforcement mat
In this section you are shown how to draw a bottom
reinforcement mat and see the ramifications.
Draw bottom reinforcement:
1 Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan.
2 Double click the Distributed Reinf. Cross in Perimeter
tool ( ).
3 The Default Distributed Reinforcement Properties dialog
box opens.
237 RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Note that Elevation Reference is set to Bottom
Cover.
Change Elevation to 0.75 inches [25 mm for
AS3600, BS8110, IS 456, EC2, and CSA A23.3].
Change Bar Type to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16 for
BS8110; T16 for IS 456; H16 for EC2; 15M for
CSA A23.3].
Change Spacing to 12 inches [225 mm for
AS3600; BS8110, IS 456, EC2, and CSA A23.3].
4 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
6 Click at another point to the left or right to define the
orientation of the (primary) reinforcement.
A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the
file is run you can view the individual bars via the Visible
Objects dialog box.
Note: This creates three objects: a polygon matching the
slab outline, a reinforcement object that belongs to the
latitude reinforcement layer and a reinforcement object that
7 Using the Stretch tool, you can adjust the bar grip
postilions for a better appearance.
Refer to Figures 41-46 to 41-47 for ACI 318.
Refer to Figures 41-49 to 41-51 for AS3600, BS8110 and
IS 456.
Figure 41-46 ACI 318: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan
Figure 41-47 Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C
appears such that AC = AB. The bars are shown to points A and B but the
symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
Figure 41-48 Bottom mat modified by stretching grip points at B and C.
238
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
Figure 41-49 AS3600, BS8110, IS456: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan
Figure 41-50 Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C
appears such that AC = AB. The bars are shown to points A and B but the
symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
Figure 41-51 Bottom mat modified by stretching grip points at B and C.
239 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
42 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08
This chapter describes the steps for modeling a post-
tensioned two-way flat plate with uniform loads.
The objective of this tutorial is to build on the skills learned
in the Chapter 41 RC tutorial and introduce new steps, such
as using a CAD drawing and post-tensioning.
Some tools and methods described in the RC tutorial are
not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that you
first do the RC tutorial.
This is not a particularly aggressive design. After you
have completed the tutorial, you may wish to make the slab
thinner to investigate the ramifications.
You could also use this as a reinforced concrete tutorial by
making a few adjustments (for example, a thicker slab).
42.1 Import the CAD drawing
The CAD file you import is located in your RAM Concept
program directory
Import the CAD file:
2 Select the CAD drawing file flat_plate.dwg.
3 Select Inches (the units used in the CAD file) and click
OK.
42.2 Define the structure
To use the CAD file you need to make it visible on the
Mesh Input layer.
Show the drawing on the mesh input layer:
3 Click the Drawing Import tab.
4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
Draw the slab area:
1 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap to Point
( ).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi.
Set Thickness to 10 inches.
Click OK.
4 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the 10
vertices of the slab outline by snapping to the imported
drawings slab corners.
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
86, 27 ft and 86, 29 ft. Cursor plan coordinates display next
to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
(or type c in the command line and press Enter).
Figure 42-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the balcony slab area:
properties.
Change Thickness to 8 inches.
Change Surface Elevation to -2 inches.
Change the Priority to 2, and click OK.
240
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
3 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the six
vertices of the balcony outline by clicking at each vertex,
and then click at your starting point (or type c in the
command line and press Enter).
Figure 42-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
Change Thickness to 20 inches.
Change Surface Elevation to 0, and leave the
Priority as 2.
Click OK.
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate.
4 Go to Draw the opening:, or try the next method
5 With the Selection tool ( ), select (by double-clicking)
and delete the drop cap at B-2.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
tools available for this button.
7 Place the mouse over the Slab Area tool ( ) and press
down on the left mouse button for one second.
A pop-up menu appears.
8 Select the Drop Cap tool from the menu.
The selected tool becomes current for that button.
9 Click at the column at B-2.
A Drop Cap Tool dialog box appears.
10Enter an angle of zero degrees.
11Enter a side dimension of 3.75 feet and click OK.
Draw the opening:
1 Select the Slab Opening tool ( ).
2 Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each
location, and then click at your starting point.
Figure 42-3 The opening on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Hatch the slab areas:
2 Check Hatching under Slab Areas.
3 Check Hatching under Slab Openings, and click OK.
1 Double click on the Column tool ( ).
Set Width to 24 inches.
Set Depth/Diameter to 24 inches.
3 Click OK.
4 Click at the center of all 13 column locations shown on
the imported drawing.
Define the wall location and properties:
2 Double click on the Wall tool ( ).
3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:
4 Click OK.
241 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on
the centerline.
Place the cursor near 29.5, 87 ft and it will snap to
where the center of the wall intersects the edge of
the slab, and click.
Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2
(it will snap orthogonally) and click.
You have now defined the structure but the element mesh
does not yet exist.
6 Go to Generate the mesh:, or try the next method.
7 The wall should be highlighted as it is the current
selection. If not, select it by double-clicking and press
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
9 Place the mouse over the Wall tool ( ) and press down
on the left mouse button for one second.
10Select the Left Wall tool from the menu.
11Click at the extreme corner of the slab near D-2.
12Click at Grid C, near C-2.
the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
Generate the mesh:
3 feet.
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
Figure 42-5 Element: Standard Plan.
View the structure:
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) to rotate the
floor.
242
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
42.3 Define the loads
automatically.
Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to
define areas with increased area loads is to draw a
blanket area load over the entire floor, and then draw the
additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be
specified.
Define the typical live load:
All Loads Plan.
Change Fz to 40 psf and click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 40 psf.
cover the slab.
Define the balcony live load:
2 Define an area load by snapping to the six vertices of the
balcony (and then type c). In this situation, it is best for
the load to match the balconys dimensions.
You have drawn another 40 psf load. This load should be
highlighted as it is the current selection. If not, select it
before proceeding by double-clicking with the selection
tool.
4 In the dialog box, change Fz to 60 psf and click OK.
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 100 psf.
Note: You could have drawn the 60 psf load by first
changing the area load default properties and then using the
tool.
Figure 42-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the bal-
cony area load).
hatching turned on).
Define the other dead loading:
All Loads Plan.
2 With the Selection tool ( ), select both area loads
(fencing the balcony load selects both loads).
3 Choose Edit > Copy.
4 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All
Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All
Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool ( ), select the blanket load
by double clicking in the center of the floor.
7 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
from the popup menu.
8 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 20 psf, and
click OK.
243 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
9 Double-click the balcony load.
The balcony load should be the only selected load.
10Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
11In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to -20 psf, and
click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 42-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatch-
ing turned on).
244
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
42.4 Define the post-tensioning
Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to
country. In the USA it is common to use the banding
technique for detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding
means concentrating the tendons over support points in one
direction, and distributing them uniformly in the
orthogonal direction. This method is generally used in
conjunction with full-panel design strips. That is, column
and middle strips are not used.
Note: RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called
latitude and longitude. Refer to Using the latitude and
longitude prestressing folders on page 133 for more infor-
mation.
Note: The tutorial in Chapter 49 explains the use of Strip
Wizard to establish an estimate of the number of strands
required for the critical band.
Define the manual latitude tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Prestressing > Manual
Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
4 Click Show All, and click OK.
Showing the CAD file makes the following instructions
easier to follow.
5 Double click the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) to edit its
default properties.
6 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
Set Strands per Tendon to 9.
Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches.
Set Profile at end 2 to 1.25 inches, and click OK.
Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand
determines these profiles.
8 With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a
tendon along grid A:
Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
section A-1.
Click at the center of the column at A-2.
Right click, and then click Enter.
default properties.
10In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
Set Strands per Tendon to 21, and click OK.
11With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a
tendon along grid B:
section B-1.
Click at the center of the column at B-2.
tendon along grid C:
section B.8-1.
Click at the center of the column at C-2.
The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab.
13With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated
tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap, by:
Double clicking at grid intersection B-1.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at B.8-
1.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at C-4.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-2.
15In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 5
inches and click OK.
tendon segments over a drop cap, by:
Double clicking at grid intersection A-1.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at A-3.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the
centroid of the 10-inch slab, rather than the centroid of the
drop cap.
19With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon
segment at B-2.
245 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
21In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 18.75
segment at C-2.
inches, and click OK.
Note: This accounts for the step near this location.
25With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segments
between C-2 and C-3.
26Click the Calc Profile tool ( ).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
current balance load is -2.58 kips/ft. If this is not the
number then you probably selected only one tendon
segment.
27Click Cancel.
28With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon between
C-3 and C-4.
30Input the desired balance load as -2.6 kips/ft in the Calc
Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc.
The low point (end 2) adjusts to 5.01 inches.
31With the Selection tool ( ), select all the end span
tendons between grids 3 and 5.
Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to
determine a low point that produces a similar average uplift
in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually
changed the low points for practical reasons.
Figure 42-10 Manual Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan
Define a latitude tendon polyline:
This example shows that the tendon generation can be
mixed between the tendon parameters and manual tendon
layers. In most cases you would use exclusively one or the
other to work with tendons.
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Prestressing > Latitude
Tendon Parameters.
4 Double click the Banded Tendon Polyline tool ( ) to
edit its default properties.
5 In the Default Banded Tendon Polyline Properties dialog
box:
Set Number of Strands to 9, and click OK.
6 With the Banded Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected,
draw a banded tendon polyline:
Click at the center of the column at D-4.
Click at the edge of the slab near D-2.
Define the latitude profile polylines:
1 Double click the Profile Polyline tool ( ) to edit its
default properties.
2 In the Default Profile Polyline Properties dialog box:
Set Elevation to 5 inches.
3 Draw a profile polyline:
Click at the top of the column intersection with column
line 4 at D-4.
246
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
Click at the bottom of the column intersection with line
4 at D-4.
Right click and select Enter.
Click at the top of the column intersection with column
line 3 at D-3.
Click at the bottom of the column intersection with line
3 at D-3.
Click at the corner of the slab at D-2.
Type r0,-2.
Right click and select Enter
6 Select the profile polyline at D-3, right click and choose
Selection Properties. Change the elevation to 1.25 inches.
7 Select all 3 drawn profile polylines.
8 Choose the Generate Span Polylines tool ( ).
9 Set the Elevation to 1.25 inches, and click OK.
Figure 42-11 Latitude Tendon Parameters: Standard Plan
Define the manual longitude tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Longitude Prestressing > Manual
Longitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
3 Double click the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) to
Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches.
Set Profile at end 2 to 1.25 inches, and click OK.
Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand
determines these profiles. Strictly speaking, you should
adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with
latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
5 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
draw tendons in the bottom left panel:
section A-1.
6 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
Set Spacing to 6 feet, and click OK.
Note: This spacing exceeds some code maxima, but the
tendon layout is for design purposes and not necessarily for
detailing.
draw tendons in the next panel:
section B-1.
Click at the center of the column at B.8-1.
Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
9 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap
Orthogonal ( ).
10With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
draw tendons in the balcony:
section B.8-1.
Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 59 ft.
Click at the tendon profile point at 24, 56.6 ft.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 24, 59 ft.
Click at the tendon profile point at 24, 56.6 ft.
11In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
247 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
inches and Profile at end 2 to 4 inches, and click OK.
14With the Selection tool ( ), select the two shortest of
the half-span (cantilever) tendon segments.
Note: This makes the short tendon segments flat.
17With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
section A-2.
Set Spacing to 6 feet.
Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
section B-2.
20In the Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to accept the
last choices. Alternatively, you could select Auto Connect,
but you would have to uncheck Skip Start Tendon.
Note: This sequence is counterclockwise.
section C-3.
Enter 31, 86 (feet).
Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
Set Auto Connect.
Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.
section B-3.
Set Layout to Splayed.
Set Spacing to 6 feet.
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the tendons at the first click
because there are already two tendon segments connected at
that point.
The panel in the top right has too many tendons and some
should be deleted.
27Select the second tendon in this panel.
28Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon in this panel,
and press Delete.
draw tendons that terminate in this panel:
Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
Click at the profile point at 63.2, 58 ft.
Type r0,7.
Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 72.8, 65 ft.
Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft.
248
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab.
tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap or within
the balcony slab:
Fence the tendon segments that end on grid A.
Hold the Shift key down and repeat the procedure
until you have selected all applicable end tendon
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids B
and D).
centroid of the 10-inch slab, rather than the centroid of the
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
Finally, you need to move the tendon that goes through the
opening.
42With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment
that passes through the opening.
43Choose the Move tool ( ).
44Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-1.5,0.
above the moved tendon.
46Choose the Stretch tool ( ).
47Stretch the end of the tendon segment to meet the end of
the moved tendon.
48Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon.
Note: You could cut down the number of steps in moving
the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This
combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to
Expanding tool buttons on page 6 and Using the Utility
tool to move and stretch on page 20 for further infor-
mation.
Figure 42-12 Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
Replace some manual longitude tendons with a distributed
tendon quadrilateral:
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendons between
lines 1 and 2, and press the delete button.
2 Choose Layers > Longitude Prestressing > Longitude
Tendon Parameters.
5 Double click the Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral tool
( ).
Change the Tendon Orientation Angle to 90 degrees.
Change the Number of Strands to 0.6667 /feet, and click
OK.
6 With the Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral tool ( )
selected:
Click the corner of the slab at A-1.
Click the corner of the slab at C-1.
Click the center of the column at C-2.
Click the edge of the slab at A-2.
249 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Define the longitude profile polylines:
1 Double click the Profile Polyline tool ( ) to edit its
default properties.
2 In the Default Profile Polyline Properties dialog box:
Set Elevation to 5 inches.
3 Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
Click at the intersection of the slab edge with line B.8
near line 1.
Click at the intersection of the slab edge with line B near
line 1.
Click at the intersection of the slab edge with line A near
line 1.
8 Hold down the shift key, click anywhere on the plan, and
type r0,-0.75.
9 Select the profile polyline between B-1 and B-2.
10Right click and choose Selection Properties.
11Change the elevation to 1.25 inches.
12Select the profile polyline between B.8-1 and C-2.
13Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) .
15Stretch the end of the profile polyline at C-2 to approxi-
matley mid way between lines 1 and 2.
17Change the Elevation Reference to Above Soffit and the
Elevation to 6 inches, and click OK.
18Choose the Profile Polyline tool ( ).
19Turn off Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) .
20Turn on Snap to Point ( ).
21Draw a profile polyline:
Click at the end of the profile polyline point stretched to
mid way between lines 1 and 2.
23Change the Elevation Reference to Above Soffit and the
Elevation to 4 inches, and click OK.
24Select all four profile polylines on the longitude tendon
parameters layer along lines C/B.8, B, and A.
25Choose the Generate Span Polylines tool ( ).
26Set the Elevation to 1.25 inches and the Span Orientation
Angle to 90 degrees, and click OK.
27Choose the Generate Tendons tool ( ) and inspect the
generated tendons on the Generated Latitude Tendon and
Generated Longitude Tendon layers.
Figure 42-13 Longitude Tendon Parameters: Standard Plan
42.5 Create the design strips
which code rules are applicable for section design. There
are two directions called Latitude and Longitude.
Generate the latitude spans:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
3 Click the General tab.
250
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
4 Change Environment to Class U (corrosive).
Note: This actually has no effect because ACI 318 requires
two-way post-tensioned slabs to be designed as class U.
Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already
checked in the ACI 318 template.
5 Click the Column Strip tab.
6 Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle.
7 Change CS Top Cover to 1 inch.
8 Change CS Code Min. Reinforcement Location to
Elevated Slab.
9 Click OK.
10Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process >
Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude.
11Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet and click OK.
The span segments appear in the latitude direction.
Figure 42-14 Design Strip: Latitude Design Spans Plan.
Two span segments are skewed. How you treat skewed
strips is often a subjective matter, but in this tutorial we
suggest one strip is straightened and the other edited in a
different manner.
Generate the latitude strips:
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the latitude direction.
Figure 42-15 Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some edit-
ing is now required.
Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always
produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips,
as shown in Figures 42-16 through 42-18. You can make
corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned
on.
Hatch the strips:
2 Check Hatching under Latitude Span Segment Strips, and
click OK.
Figure 42-16 Skewed span segment that snapped to end of wall
Straighten a span segment:
1 Select span segment 4-2 (between the wall and grid D3),
as shown in Figure 42-16.
251 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
3 Select the Rotate tool ( ).
4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3.
5 Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6 Enter 180 and press Enter.
The selected span segment is now horizontal.
Figure 42-17 Diagonal strip that warrants manual improvement.
Edit the span cross section orientation:
1 Select span segment 3-1 as shown in Figure 42-17.
2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
or below the first click.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
vertical.
Figure 42-18 Design strip with excessive width.
Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
1 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( ).
2 Click at the intersection of Grid B and Grid C design
strips near Grid 3 (point A in Figure 42-18).
3 Click to the right of the slab edge (point B).
4 Right-click, and click enter.
Regenerate the latitude span strips:
1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ).
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as
shown in Figure 42-19.
Figure 42-19 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after strip regen-
eration.
Generate the longitude spans:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Design
Spans Plan.
direction.
Change CS Top Cover to 1.63 inches.
Change CS Bottom Cover to 1.25.
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
Click the up-down orientation button tool ( ).
252
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
Click OK.
The spans appear in the longitude direction, as shown in
Figure 42-20.
One span segment on grid 2 is slightly skewed due to the
column wall detail at C2. Another span segment overlays a
wall and is unnecessary since the slab is continuously
supported (see Drawing design strips near walls on
page 113 for discussion).
Figure 42-20 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan.
1 Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (the
highlighted span segment in Figure 42-20).
4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
The selected span segment is now vertical.
Delete the span segment over the wall:
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press
Delete.
1 Select the diagonal span segment between B-5 and C-4.
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
left or right of the first click.
horizontal.
Generate the longitude strips:
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
Figure 42-21 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip gen-
eration.
Check for punching shear:
box:
Change Cover to CGS to 1.63 inches (cover to
centroid of top reinforcement).
Click OK.
253 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Figure 42-22 Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan.
42.6 Regenerate the mesh
the mesh.
2 Enter Element Size of 2.5 feet and click Generate.
There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element:
Standard Plan.
Figure 42-23 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration.
254
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
After you run the model, you can view the results of the
analysis and design calculations.
Review Calc Options:
1 Choose > Criteria > Calc Options
2 Review the options, and click OK.
Note: See Calculating the results on page 149 of
Chapter 28 for more information.
Calculate:
An error message appears concerning a problem with a
tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2 Click Continue three times to clear the error message.
The source of the error messages must be investigated.
View the design strips with tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Cross
Sections Perspective.
3 Click the Tendons tab.
4 Select the Longitude Tendons layer, check Tendons, and
click OK.
5 Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool ( ) and the
Zoom Rectangle ( ) tool to view the problem location
shown in Figure 42-24 and Figure 42-25.
Figure 42-24 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude ten-
dons visible.
Figure 42-25 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 42-
24.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
is causing a problem because of the combination of the
drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
Edit span segment 6-2:
Spans Plan.
3 Check the Numbers box under Longitude Span
Segments, and click OK.
4 Select span segment 6-2.
7 Change CS Cross Section Trimming to Inverted T or L,
and click OK.
Recalculate:
Concept completes the calculations without errors.
See Cross Section Trimming on page 105 for a thorough
explanation of Cross Section trimming.
Look at design status:
Figure 42-26 Design Status: Status Plan.
This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there
are no violations of code limits for ductility, flexural stress
and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive
deflections.
255 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
There are punching shear status results at each column.
You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching
plan.
Plan.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column
locations and OK with SSR at one column.
Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it
means is that at least one of the critical sections that
Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly
fit one of the three ACI 318-05 cases: interior, edge and
corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-
standard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: ACI
318 and CSA A23.3 on page 162 of Chapter 29 for more
information.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0,
the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any
reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning
Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports
OK with SSR.
If Concept reports Failed then SSR does not solve the
problem and a thickening is required.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
view the stud shear reinforcement.
Figure 42-27 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan.
Look at design reinforcement:
Figure 42-28 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan.
of the design strips. Since the slab is post-tensioned, there
is not much reinforcement. You might choose to view all
design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access
plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement
according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or
longitude).
2 Choose the plans that best convey the results without too
much clutter.
Figure 42-29 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed
reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so
that the number is consistent each side of columns.
256
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
Look at detailed top reinforcement:
Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Top Bars Plan.
Figure 42-30 Reinforcement: Top Bars Plan
42.7.3 Concrete stresses
ACI 318-05 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to
flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon
averaging rather than peak values.
Stress contour plots of the net flexural stresses are available
in Concept. Most designers will not be interested in these
plots because, in following the code, Concept does not use
the contours directly in design.
What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the
concrete stresses plotted along the design strips. These are
the average stresses based upon the design strip widths.
View top stress plan:
Top Stress Plan.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ).
3 In the Plot Settings dialog box:
Change Max Frame # to 4.
Click OK
Figure 42-31 Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
To view the Max Demand more easily you can uncheck
Max Capacity in the plot options.
Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers >
Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
42.7.4 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
Calculate Load History Deflections:
1 Click Calc Load History Deflections ( ), or choose
The Maximum Short Term Load, Sustained Load, and
Final Instantaneous Load History Deflection Layers
provide contour plans for deflection.
View maximum short term load deflection:
1 Choose Layers > Load History Deflections> Maximum
Short Term Load> Std Deflection Plan.
257 RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Figure 42-32 Maximum Short Term Load: Deflection Plan.
View sustained deflection:
1 Choose Layers > Load History Deflections> Sustained
Load> Std Deflection Plan.
Figure 42-33 Sustained Load: Deflection Plan.
principal axes.
View Factored LC Moments:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC:
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr > Mx Plan.
The Mx contours should be visible.
4 Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid
intersection D-3.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
have drawn.
5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-
1, and then click at grid intersection B-3.
This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights
the approximate nature of the ACI318-05 post-tension
design method.
See Section distribution plots on page 158 for more
information.
Figure 42-34 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr: Mx Plan showing use of
Plot Distribution tool.
258
Chapter 42
RAM Concept
View the balanced load percentages:
Plan
3 Choose Balanced Load Percentages in the Visible
Objects dialog box and click OK.
See Calculating the balanced load percentages on
259 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
43 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001
program directory
2 Select the CAD drawing file flat_plate_metric.dwg.
3 Select Millimeters (the units used in the CAD file) and
click OK.
Mesh Input layer.
Draw the slab area:
( ).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of 32 MPa.
Set Thickness to 250 mm.
Click OK.
26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.
properties.
Change Thickness to 200 mm.
Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm.
260
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
Priority as 2.
Click OK.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
11Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK.
Draw the opening:
3 Check Hatching under Slab Openings, and then click
OK.
Set Width to 600 mm.
Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm.
3 Click OK.
261 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
4 Click OK.
the centerline:
Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will
snap to where the center of the wall intersects the
edge of the slab, and click.
does not yet exist.
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
Generate the mesh:
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
View the structure:
Perspective.
floor.
262
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
automatically.
additional loads.
specified.
All Loads Plan.
Change Fz to 2 kN/m
2
and click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 2 kN/ m
2
.
cover the slab.
You have drawn another 2 kN/m
2
load. This load should be
tool.
4 In the dialog box, change Fz to 3 kN/ m
2
and click OK.
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 5 kN/ m
2
.
Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m
2
load by first
tool.
cony area load).
All Loads Plan.
Loads Plan.
by fencing the entire area.
8 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 1 kN/ m
2
, and
click OK.
263 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
11In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to -1 kN/ m
2
, and
click OK.
ing turned on).
264
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
country. In Australia, engineers use column and middle
strips for post-tensioned flat plate design, and, generally,
detail (bonded) tendons in both the column and middle
strips.
mation.
Note: For use of the tendon parameters layers as an alter-
native and perhaps quicker means of defining prestressing,
please refer to PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08 on
page 239.
Define the manual latitude tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Prestressing > Latitude
Tendon > Standard Plan.
easier to follow.
5 Double click the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) to
Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm.
Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK.
Note: The 25 mm cover to the 19 mm high duct (containing
12.7 mm diameter strand) determines these profiles.
7 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap Orthogonal
( ).
8 With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
section A-1.
Set Spacing to 2 m, and click OK.
10With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
section B-1.
Click at the grid intersection C-1.
Set Spacing to 2 m,
draw tendons in the next two panels:
section A-2.
Set Auto Connect.
14Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
section B-3.
section C-2.
Click at grid intersection D-2.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
265 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
that point.
21With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected,
double-click the tendon on grid B.
23In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon
to 10, and click OK.
double-click the tendon directly above grid B.
25Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly
below grid B.
to 5, and click OK.
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
the balcony slab:
Fence the tendon segments that end on grid 1.
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids 2, 3,
4 and 5).
mm and click OK.
segment above B.8-1 that terminates within the 200 mm
balcony slab.
mm and click OK.
34With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the tendon
segments that terminate over a drop cap, by:
mm and click OK.
centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
segment at C-2.
41Hold down the Shift key, and double click the tendon
segment immediately below (profile point at (9,15.7)).
mm and click OK.
between D-2 and D-3.
current balance load is -5.67 kN/m. If this is not the number
then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
46Click Cancel.
C-3 and C-4.
49Input the desired balance load as -6 kN/m in the Calc
The low point (end 2) adjusts to 126 mm.
266
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
mm and click OK.
Finally, you need to adjust the tendon that goes through the
opening.
53Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap
Orthogonal ( ).
mm and click OK.
58With the one tendon segment selected, stretch the profile
point at grid 3 to the other side of the opening.
Note: The Snap Nearest Snapable Point snaps the cursor
to the edge of the opening.
Figure 43-10 Manual Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
Define the longitude tendons:
Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan
remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust
Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude
tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
section A-1.
section B-1.
Orthogonal ( ).
8 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
section B.8-1.
Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 17.8 m.
Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 7.2, 17.8 m.
mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK.
mm, and click OK.
267 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
section A-2.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
section B-2.
Note: This sequence is anti-clockwise.
section C-3.
Enter 9.25, 26, and press Enter.
Set Auto Connect.
Uncheck Skip Start Tendon, and click OK.
section B-3.
Set Spacing to 1.8 m.
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
that point.
should be deleted.
25With the Selection tool ( ), select the second tendon in
this panel.
26Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
Delete.
Click at the profile point at 19, 17.5 m.
Type r0,2.1.
Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 22, 19.6 m.
mm, and click OK.
double-click the tendon on grid 2.
double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
35Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
the right of grid 2.
268
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
to 5, and click OK.
the balcony slab:
and D).
mm and click OK.
mm, and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
opening.
49Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-.5,0.
the moved tendon.
mation.
Figure 43-11 Manual Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
Plan.
4 Change Environment to Protected.
Note: This setting often has a significant effect on
reinforcement quantities.
checked in the AS3600 template.
269 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
7 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm.
8 Click the Middle Strip tab.
9 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
box.
10Click OK.
Generate Spans.
Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.5 meters.
12Click OK.
different manner.
Generate Strips.
corrections with a number of tools.
on.
Hatch the strips:
click OK.
1 Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as
shown in Figure 43-14).
270
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
1 Select the diagonal span strip as shown in Figure 43-15.
vertical.
The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There
is one more to edit.
Figure 43-17 Span segment C-2 to C-3.
3 Click at point B.
5 Click at point C.
6 Click at point D.
8 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
9 Click at point E as shown in Figure 43-17.
10Click at point F, to the right of the opening.
11Right-click, and click enter.
12Select the span segment (between grid C2 and C3).
14In the Properties dialog box, change Span Width Calc to
Manual.
15Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
16Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and
click OK.
This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes
through the opening, and hence uses less concrete section.
17Click the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).
271 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown
in Figure 43-18.
Figure 43-18 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regenera-
tion.
Spans Plan.
direction.
Change CS Top Cover to 41 mm.
Change CS Bottom Cover to 37 mm.
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
Click OK.
The spans appear in the longitude direction.
1 Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2
(highlighted in Figure 43-19).
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall.
2 Press Delete.
Generate Strips.
272
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
eration.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You
can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
Figure 43-21 Grid B3-C3 span segment and strips.
Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries
highlighted line in Figure 43-20).
3 Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK.
5 Click at point A as shown in Figure 43-21.
6 Click at point B.
8 Click at point C and D.
10Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
11Click at point E as shown in Figure 43-21.
12Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G
(another corner).
14Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3.
1 Select the diagonal span strip between B-5 and C-4.
horizontal.
5 Click the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).
The new design strips appear, as shown in Figure 43-22.
Figure 43-22 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
Note: Some of the latitude and longitude design strips
(span segment strips) have different widths either side of a
column. You could rationalize these strips such that they
have similar widths at the column, especially the cantilever.
See the discussion in Defining strip boundaries manually
on page 102 of Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips. In
particular, Example 22-2 on page 103 and Example 22-4 on
page 104.
273 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
box:
Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to
Click OK.
the mesh.
2 Enter Element Size of 0.75 m and click Generate.
Standard Plan.
274
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
Calculate:
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with
a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2 Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be
investigated.
Two more errors appear to do with reinforcement detailing.
3 Click Continue twice to clear the reinforcement error
messages.
click OK.
dons visible.
25.
Spans Plan.
and click OK.
Plan.
3 Check the Numbers box under Latitude Span Segments,
and click OK.
7 Change CS Cross Section Trimming to None.
8 Change CS Inter Cross Section Slope Limit to 0.
10Uncheck the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
box.
11Change MS Top Cover to 25 mm.
12Change MS Span Detailer to None, and click OK.
275 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
The above changes are made to eliminate the reinforcement
warnings. In a proper design you should investigate this
further.
Recalculate:
Concept completes the calculatons without errors.
Note: See Cross Section Trimming on page 105 for a
thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-way
shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
plan.
Plan.
You can see that ten columns have an unreinforced stress
ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Two columns report OK with
SSR which means stud shear reinforcement is required.
One column fails in punching. SSR does not solve the
problem. A thickening is required.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at five column
locations. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an
error. What it means is that at least one of the critical
sections that Concept is investigating for that column does
not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and
standard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections:
AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456 on page 162 of Chapter
29 for more information.
OK with SSR.
276
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
of the design strips. You might choose to view all design
reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in
longitude).
much clutter.
43.7.3 Deflection
evaluate both.
277 RAM Concept
Chapter 43
principal axes.
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Ultimate LC:
1.2D + 1.5L > Mx Plan.
intersection D-3.
have drawn.
the different column and middle strip moments.
information.
Figure 43-33 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool.
Plan
278
Chapter 43
RAM Concept
279 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
44 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43
BS8110 does not cover post-tensioned flat plates, and
refers the designer to specialist literature. The Concrete
Society prepared Technical Report 43 for this purpose.
RAM Concept currently uses the first edition of TR43.
program directory
click OK.
Mesh Input layer.
Draw the slab area:
( ).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of C32/40.
Click OK.
properties.
280
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
command line and press Return).
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
Priority as 2.
Click OK.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
Draw the opening:
3 Click OK.
281 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
4 Click OK.
the centerline.
does not yet exist.
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
Generate the mesh:
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
View the structure:
Perspective.
floor.
automatically.
282
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
additional loads.
specified.
All Loads Plan.
Change Fz to 2 kN/m
2
and click OK.
2
.
cover the slab.
2
tool.
2
and click OK.
2
.
2
load by first
tool.
cony area load).
All Loads Plan.
Loads Plan.
2
, and
click OK.
283 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
2
, and
click OK.
ing turned on).
284
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
In the United Kingdom, engineers are directed towards
Technical Report 43 (BS8110 does not cover post-
tensioned flat plates) and that document encourages the use
of full panel design strips with the banding technique. This
method, with bonded tendons, is used in this tutorial.
mation.
page 239.
Define the latitude tendons:
easier to follow.
default properties.
Set PT System to 12.9mm Bonded.
7 Turn Snap to Intersection ( ).
section A-1.
tendon along grid D:
section D-4.
Click at the corner of the slab near D-2.
12Double click the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) to edit its
default properties.
section B-1.
section B.8-1.
285 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
1.
mm and click OK.
mm and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
segment at C-2.
mm and click OK.
33Click Cancel.
C-3 and C-4.
mm and click OK.
section A-1.
286
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
section B-1.
Orthogonal ( ).
section B.8-1.
mm, and click OK.
section A-2.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
section B-2.
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
section B-3.
287 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
that point.
should be deleted.
this panel.
Delete.
Type r0,2.1.
mm, and click OK.
to 5, and click OK.
the balcony slab:
and D).
mm and click OK.
mm, and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
opening.
the moved tendon.
288
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
mation.
289 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Full
Width.
Note: Environment is already set to Class 3 - 0.1 mm.
checked in the BS8110 template.
Elevated Slab.
7 Click OK.
Generate Spans.
9 Click OK.
different manner.
Generate Strips.
290
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
on.
Hatch the strips:
click OK.
6 Enter 180 and press Return.
vertical.
291 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
tion.
Spans Plan.
direction.
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
Click OK.
Delete.
5 The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
horizontal.
292
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
Generate Strips.
box:
Click OK.
the mesh.
Standard Plan.
293 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Calculate:
click OK.
dons visible.
22.
Spans Plan.
and click OK.
Recalculate:
This shows OK for all but one design strip. OK means
that there are no violations of code limits for ductility,
flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not
flag excessive deflections.
294
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-3 is TR43
6.10.2. You can look up this clause in TR43 to see that it is
the transfer condition. It is known as the Initial Service
Rule Set in Concept.
It is not surprising that there is a problem in this span as
there are 25 strands in half a panel. A solution would be to
terminate some strands at grid 3.
plan.
Plan.
locations and OK with SSR at eight columns.
fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept
still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Refer to Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2
and IS 456 on page 162 of Chapter 29 for more
information.
OK with SSR.
longitude).
much clutter.
295 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
TR43 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure
and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon averaging
rather than peak values.
Top Stress Plan.
Click OK
44.7.4 Deflection
evaluate both.
296
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
principal axes.
1.4D + 1.6L > Mx Plan.
intersection D-3.
have drawn.
the approximate nature of the TR43 post-tension design
method.
information.
Figure 44-32 Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6 Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool.
297 RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Plan
298
Chapter 44
RAM Concept
299 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
45 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: EC2 / TR43
RAM Concepts EC2 implementation considers the base
EC2 code, the UK National Annex and the second edition
of the Concrete Societys Technical Report 43 for post-
tensioned slab design.
program directory
click OK.
Mesh Input layer.
Draw the slab area:
( ).
properties.
Click OK.
properties.
300
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
Priority as 2.
Click OK.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
Draw the opening:
3 Click OK.
301 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
4 Click OK.
the centerline.
does not yet exist.
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
Generate the mesh:
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
View the structure:
Perspective.
floor.
automatically.
302
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
additional loads.
specified.
All Loads Plan.
Change Fz to 2 kN/m
2
and click OK.
2
.
cover the slab.
2
tool.
2
and click OK.
2
.
2
load by first
tool.
cony area load).
All Loads Plan.
Loads Plan.
2
, and
click OK.
303 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
2
, and
click OK.
ing turned on).
304
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
In the United Kingdom, engineers are directed towards
Technical Report 43 and that document encourages the use
of full panel design strips with the banding technique. This
method, with bonded tendons, is used in this tutorial.
mation.
page 239.
easier to follow.
default properties.
Set PT System to 12.9mm Bonded.
section A-1.
section D-4.
default properties.
section B-1.
section B.8-1.
305 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
1.
mm and click OK.
mm and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
segment at C-2.
mm and click OK.
33Click Cancel.
C-3 and C-4.
mm and click OK.
section A-1.
306
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
section B-1.
Orthogonal ( ).
section B.8-1.
mm, and click OK.
section A-2.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
section B-2.
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
section B-3.
section C-3.
307 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
Set Auto Connect.
that point.
should be deleted.
this panel.
Delete.
Type r0,2.1.
mm, and click OK.
to 5, and click OK.
the balcony slab:
and D).
mm and click OK.
mm, and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
opening.
the moved tendon.
308
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
mation.
309 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
Width.
Note: Environment is already set to Normal.
checked in the EC2 template.
Note: CS PT Service Design Type is already set to Stress &
Crack Width. You may change this to perform only stress
checks or only crack width designs.
4 Set Cross Section Trimming to Slab Rectangle.
Elevated Slab.
7 Click OK.
Generate Spans.
9 Click OK.
different manner.
Generate Strips.
310
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
on.
Hatch the strips:
click OK.
vertical.
311 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
tion.
Spans Plan.
direction.
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
Click OK.
Delete.
horizontal.
312
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
Generate Strips.
box:
Click OK.
the mesh.
Standard Plan.
313 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
Calculate:
click OK.
dons visible.
22.
Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting is
causing a problem because of the combination of the drop
cap and thinner balcony slab.
Spans Plan.
and click OK.
Recalculate:
This plan shows many failures due to EC2 section 7.3.
314
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
45.7.2 Stress and Crack Width Designs
Note: Some UK slab designers consider that designing
slabs according to TR 43 is deemed to comply with the
EC2 crack width provisions and hence the EC2 crack width
calculations need not be checked.We will take that approach
here.
To have Concept use only the TR43 stress limits:
1 Open the Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans plan.
2 Select all of the design spans and edit their properties.
3 On the Column Strip tab in the properties dialog, change
the CS PT Service Design Type to Stress and click OK
4 Make the same changes to the Longitude Design Spans
Calculate and Review Updated Status:
Figure 45-25 Design Status: Updated Status Plan.
This shows OK for all but two design strips. OK means
that there are no violations of code limits for ductility,
flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not
flag excessive deflections.
5.8.1. This is due to a slightly too high tensile stresses at
the column face. This can be resolved by adding one more
tendon along grid B (not done in this tutorial).
5.8.2. You can look up this clause in TR43 to see that it is
the transfer condition. It is known as the Initial Service
Rule Set in Concept.
It is not surprising that there is a problem in this span as
there are 25 strands in half a panel. A solution would be to
terminate some strands at grid 3 (not done in this tutorial).
plan.
Plan.
locations and OK with SSR at eight columns.
Refer to Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2
and IS 456 on page 162 of Chapter 29 for more
information.
OK with SSR.
315 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
longitude).Choose the plans that best convey the results
without too much clutter.
TR43 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure
and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon averaging
rather than peak values.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Characteristic
Service Design > Top Stress Plan.
Click OK
316
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
Figure 45-30 Characteristic Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
Rule Set Designs > Characteristic Service Design > Bottom
Stress Plan.
45.7.5 Deflection
evaluate both.
317 RAM Concept
Chapter 45
principal axes.
View Ultimate LC Moments:
1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L > Max Mx Plan.
Lets modify this plan to show moments for the Standard
context (full load, with standard load factors) instead of the
Max context (maximum value for any set of standard or
alternate load factors and any load pattern).
3 In the plot window that opens, the Slab tab should be
active. Change the Context item from Max to Standard.
Click OK.
Now lets draw some section distribution plots.
intersection D-3.
have drawn.
the approximate nature of the TR43 post-tension design
method.
information.
Figure 45-33 Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L Max Mx Plan showing
use of Plot Distribution tool.
Plan
318
Chapter 45
RAM Concept
319 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
46 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000
program directory
click OK.
Mesh Input layer.
Draw the slab area:
( ).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of M40.
Click OK.
properties.
320
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
Priority as 2.
Click OK.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
Draw the opening:
3 Check Hatching under Slab Openings, and then click
OK.
Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
321 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
the centerline:
does not yet exist.
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
Generate the mesh:
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
View the structure:
Perspective.
floor.
322
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
automatically.
additional loads.
specified.
All Loads Plan.
Change Fz to 2 kN/m
2
and click OK.
2
.
cover the slab.
2
tool.
2
and click OK.
2
.
2
load by first
tool.
cony area load).
All Loads Plan.
Loads Plan.
2
, and
click OK.
323 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
2
, and
click OK.
ing turned on).
324
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
country. In India, engineers commonly use column and
middle strips for post-tensioned flat plate design, and,
generally, detail (bonded) tendons in both the column and
middle strips.
mation.
page 239.
easier to follow.
7 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap Orthogonal
( ).
8 With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
section A-1.
10With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
section B-1.
Click at the grid intersection C-1.
Set Spacing to 2 m,
draw tendons in the next two panels:
section A-2.
Set Auto Connect.
section B-3.
section C-2.
Click at grid intersection D-2.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
325 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
that point.
double-click the tendon directly above grid B.
25Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly
below grid B.
to 5, and click OK.
the balcony slab:
Fence the tendon segments that end on grid 1.
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids 2, 3,
4 and 5).
mm and click OK.
segment above B.8-1 that terminates within the 200 mm
balcony slab.
mm and click OK.
34With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the tendon
segments that terminate over a drop cap, by:
mm and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
segment at C-2.
41Hold down the Shift button, and double click the tendon
segment immediately below (profile point at (9,15.7)).
mm and click OK.
between D-2 and D-3.
46Click Cancel.
C-3 and C-4.
49Input the desired balance load as -5.3 kN/m in the Calc
326
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
mm and click OK.
Finally, you need to adjust the tendon that goes through the
opening.
53Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap
Orthogonal ( ).
mm and click OK.
58With the one tendon segment selected, stretch the profile
point at grid 3 to the other side of the opening.
Note: The Snap Nearest Snapable Point snaps the cursor
to the edge of the opening.
Figure 46-10 Manual Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
section A-1.
section B-1.
Orthogonal ( ).
8 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
section B.8-1.
mm, and click OK.
327 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
section A-2.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
section B-2.
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
section B-3.
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
that point.
should be deleted.
this panel.
Delete.
Type r0,2.1.
mm, and click OK.
328
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
to 5, and click OK.
the balcony slab:
and D).
mm and click OK.
mm, and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
opening.
the moved tendon.
mation.
Plan.
Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Code Slab.
4 Check the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
329 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
9 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
box.
10Click OK.
Generate Spans.
12Click OK.
different manner.
Generate Strips.
corrections with a number of tools.
on.
Hatch the strips:
click OK.
330
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
vertical.
The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There
is one more to edit.
Figure 46-17 Span segment C-2 to C-3.
3 Click at point B.
5 Click at point C.
6 Click at point D.
8 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
9 Click at point E as shown in Figure 46-17.
10Click at point F, to the right of the opening.
12Select the span segment (between grid C2 and C3).
14In the Properties dialog box, change Span Width Calc to
Manual.
15Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
16Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and
click OK.
This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes
through the opening, and hence uses less concrete section.
331 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown
in Figure 46-18.
tion.
Spans Plan.
direction.
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
Click OK.
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall.
2 Press Delete.
Generate Strips.
332
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
eration.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You
can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
Figure 46-21 Grid B3-C3 span segment and strips.
Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries
highlighted line in Figure 46-20).
3 Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK.
5 Click at point A as shown in Figure 46-21.
6 Click at point B.
8 Click at point C and D.
10Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
11Click at point E as shown in Figure 46-21.
12Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G
(another corner).
14Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3.
1 Select the diagonal span strip between B-5 and C-4.
horizontal.
5 Click the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).
The new design strips appear, as shown in Figure 46-22.
Figure 46-22 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
Note: Some of the latitude and longitude design strips
have similar widths at the column, especially the cantilever.
See the discussion in Defining strip boundaries manually
on page 102 of Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips. In
particular, Example 22-2 on page 103 and Example 22-4 on
page 104.
333 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
box:
Click OK.
the mesh.
Standard Plan.
334
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
Calculate:
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with
a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2 Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be
investigated.
One more error appears to do with reinforcement detailing.
3 Click Continue to clear the reinforcement error message.
click OK.
dons visible.
25.
Spans Plan.
and click OK.
Plan.
3 Check the Numbers box under Latitude Span Segments,
and click OK.
7 Uncheck the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
box.
8 Change MS Top Cover to 25 mm.
9 Change MS Span Detailer to None, and click OK.
The above change is made to eliminate the reinforcement
warning. In a proper design you should investigate this
further.
335 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
Recalculate:
Concept completes the calculatons without errors.
Note: See Cross Section Trimming on page 105 for a
thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
46.7.1 Design Status
are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-way
shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
plan.
Plan.
You can see that seven columns have an unreinforced stress
ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Six columns report OK with
SSR which means stud shear reinforcement is required.
locations. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an
error. What it means is that at least one of the critical
sections that Concept is investigating for that column does
not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and
standard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections:
AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456 on page 162 of Chapter
29 for more information.
OK with SSR.
336
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
of the design strips. You might choose to view all design
reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in
longitude).
much clutter.
46.7.3 Deflection
evaluate both.
337 RAM Concept
Chapter 46
principal axes.
1.5D + 1.5L > Mx Plan.
intersection D-3.
have drawn.
the different column and middle strip moments.
information.
Figure 46-33 Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool.
Plan
338
Chapter 46
RAM Concept
339 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
47 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: CSA A23.3-04
program directory
click OK.
Mesh Input layer.
Draw the slab area:
( ).
properties.
Click OK.
properties.
340
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
Priority as 2.
Click OK.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
Draw the opening:
3 Click OK.
4 Click OK.
341 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
the centerline.
does not yet exist.
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
Generate the mesh:
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
View the structure:
Perspective.
floor.
automatically.
342
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
additional loads.
specified.
All Loads Plan.
Change Fz to 2 kN/m
2
and click OK.
2
.
cover the slab.
2
tool.
2
and click OK.
2
.
2
load by first
tool.
cony area load).
All Loads Plan.
Loads Plan.
2
, and
click OK.
343 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
2
, and
click OK.
ing turned on).
344
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
mation.
page 239.
easier to follow.
default properties.
Set PT System to 12.7mm Unbonded.
section A-1.
section D-4.
default properties.
section B-1.
section B.8-1.
1.
345 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
mm and click OK.
mm and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
segment at C-2.
mm and click OK.
current balance load is -43.57 kN/m. If this is not the
number then you probably selected only one tendon
segment.
33Click Cancel.
C-3 and C-4.
mm and click OK.
section A-1.
346
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
section B-1.
Orthogonal ( ).
section B.8-1.
mm, and click OK.
section A-2.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
section B-2.
section C-3.
Set Auto Connect.
section B-3.
section C-3.
347 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Set Auto Connect.
that point.
should be deleted.
this panel.
Delete.
Type r0,2.1.
mm, and click OK.
to 5, and click OK.
the balcony slab:
and D).
mm and click OK.
mm, and click OK.
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
opening.
the moved tendon.
348
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
mation.
349 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Width.
3 Set the Environment to Full PT - 18.3.2(c).
checked in the CAN template.
5 Set Cross Section Trimming to Slab Rectangle.
Elevated Slab.
8 Click OK.
Generate Spans.
10Click OK.
different manner.
Generate Strips.
350
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
on.
Hatch the strips:
click OK.
vertical.
351 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
tion.
Spans Plan.
direction.
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
Click OK.
Delete.
horizontal.
352
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
Generate Strips.
box:
Click OK.
5 Select the punch checks at B.8-1 and C-3.
7 Change the Maximum Search Radius to 2 m.
8 Click OK.
the mesh.
Standard Plan.
353 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Calculate:
click OK.
dons visible.
22.
Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting is
causing a problem because of the combination of the drop
cap and thinner balcony slab.
Spans Plan.
and click OK.
Recalculate:
This shows OK for all design strips. OK means that
there are no violations of code limits for ductility, flexural
stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag
excessive deflections.
354
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
plan.
Plan.
locations and OK with SSR at one column.
OK with SSR.
longitude).Choose the plans that best convey the results
without too much clutter.
355 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
CSA A23.3 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to
flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon
averaging rather than peak values.
Top Stress Plan.
Click OK
47.7.4 Deflection
evaluate both.
356
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
principal axes.
View Ultimate LC Moments:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC:
1.25D + 1.5L + 1.5S > Max Mx Plan.
Lets modify this plan to show moments for the Standard
context (full load, with standard load factors) instead of the
Max context (maximum value for any set of standard or
alternate load factors and any load pattern).
3 In the plot window that opens, the Slab tab should be
active. Change the Context item from Max to Standard.
Click OK.
Now lets draw some section distribution plots.
intersection D-3.
have drawn.
This shows how Mx varies across the panel.
information.
357 RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Figure 47-31 Factored LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S Max Mx Plan showing
use of Plot Distribution tool.
Plan
358
Chapter 47
RAM Concept
359 RAM Concept
Chapter 48
48 Mat Foundation Tutorial
This chapter will walk you through the steps for modeling a
mat foundation, also known as a raft. Alternative metric
values and units are identified in square brackets [] next to
the US units. The metric values are not exact conversions.
The code used is ACI 318-05.
opening files on page 5. You should ensure that you select
mat foundation in the new file dialog box.
Most mats support columns and walls. You may choose to
model the columns and walls but you should be aware that
this could affect the mat behavior. In particular, if there are
lateral loads then you should be very careful in defining the
supports above as having no horizontal restraint.
Otherwise, the supports above rather than the soil (springs)
below could resist some lateral moment and shear.
A mat need not have columns and walls modeled above.
The reasons to model columns and walls above include
improving the appearance of the model, and providing snap
points for point and line loads. Additionally, a wall above
will stiffen the mat in a beneficial way.
program directory.
2 Select the CAD drawing file mat_tutorial.dwg
[mat_tutorial_metric.dwg].
3 Select Inches [Millimeters] (the units used in the CAD
file) and click OK.
Mesh Input layer.
Draw the slab area:
( ).
properties.
for AS3600; C25/30 for BS8110 and EC2].
Click OK.
corners of the slab by snapping to the imported drawings
slab corners.
Note: You can type c to close the polygon instead of
entering the last point.
1 Turn on Snap to Center ( ).
Set Height to 10 feet [3 m].
Set Support Set to Above.
Set Width to 30 inches [750 mm].
Set Diameter to 30 inches [750 mm].
Check Roller at Far End.
Uncheck Fixed Near and Fixed Far.
4 Click OK.
Set Height to 10 feet [3 m].
Set Support Set to Above.
360
Chapter 48
RAM Concept
Uncheck Shear Wall.
Uncheck Fixed Near and Fixed Far.
4 Click OK.
5 Define each wall by snapping to the start and end points
of the wall centerlines shown on the CAD drawing.
Define the area spring location and properties:
1 Double click on the Quad-Area Spring tool ( ).
2 In the Default Area Spring Properties dialog box:
Set an r-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001
N/mm
3
].
Set an s-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001
N/mm
3
].
Set a z-force constant of 250 pci [0.07 N/mm
3
],
and click OK.
Note: You need horizontal springs (r and s) with very small
stiffnesses since there are lateral loads.
3 Define an area spring over the entire slab by clicking four
corners of a quadrilateral. This shape need not match the
slabs exact dimensions, but should cover the entire slab.
does not yet exist.
Generate the mesh:
2 feet [0.7 m].
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
View the structure:
Perspective.
floor.
Figure 48-1 Mesh Input: Standard Plan
Figure 48-2 Element: Standard Plan
361 RAM Concept
Chapter 48
Mat loads could consist of point, line and area loads for a
number of loadings (such as live, other dead, north seismic,
east seismic, north wind and east wind). For simplicity, this
tutorial will not use area loads (except for the automatic
calculation of self-weight) and will adopt loads belonging
only to other dead, live, and ultimate seismic east loadings.
Loads Plan.
easier to follow.
6 Double click the Point Load tool ( ).
7 In the Default Point Load Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 40 Kips [180 kN], and click OK.
8 Define 40 Kip [180 kN] point loads by snapping to
column centers at the following locations:
A-1
A-3
D-1
D-3
9 Define the rest of the point loads as shown in Figures 48-
3 and 48-4.
10Double click the Line Load tool ( ).
11In the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
Set Fz to 8 kip/ft [120 kN/m], and click OK.
12With the Line Load tool ( ) selected, draw a Line Load
along the centerline of the wall on grid 2.
13Repeat for the wall at grid 2.5 with a load of 5.5 kip/ft
[80 kN/m].
Note: Draw these loads to the outside face of the inter-
secting walls.
Copy to the live (reducible) loading layer:
For simplicity, use the same loads for other dead and live
(reducible) loads
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the other dead
loads by fencing the entire slab.
All Loads Plan.
This pastes the other dead loads onto the Live (Reducible)
Loading: All Loads Plan.
Figure 48-3 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
Figure 48-4 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan [METRIC]
362
Chapter 48
RAM Concept
Define the ultimate seismic east loading:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Ultimate Seismic East
Loading > All Loads Plan.
6 Double click the Line Load tool ( ) and in the Default
Line Load Properties dialog box:
Set the elevation above the slab surface to 360
inches [9000 mm].
Set Fx to 4.1 kip/ft [60 kN/m].
Set all other items in the dialog box to 0.
Click OK.
7 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection
points, as shown in Figure 48-5 and Figure 48-6.
Figure 48-5 East Seismic: All Loads Plan
Figure 48-6 East Seismic: All Loads Plan [METRIC]
8 Double click the Line Load tool ( ) and in the Default
Set Fy to -12.8 kip/ft [-174 kN/m].
Click OK.
9 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection
10Double click the Line Load tool ( ) and in the Default
Set Fy to (+)12.8 kip/ft [(+)174 kN/m].
Click OK.
11Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection
Figure 48-7 East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set)
Figure 48-8 East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set) [METRIC]
Note: The seismic loads are approximations for a five-
storey building. The load elevation is the average floor
height (third storey).
Note: The loads in the y-direction cancel the couple about
the mat centroid.
363 RAM Concept
Chapter 48
Draw latitude design strips:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
3 The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is
the default for the AS3600 template).
Click the General tab.
Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
Click the Column Strip tab.
Change CS Top Bar and CS Bottom Bar to #8
[N25 for AS3600; T25 for BS8110; H25 for EC2].
Change CS Top Cover and CS Bottom Cover to 2
inches [50 mm].
Set the Min. Reinforcement Location to Tension
Face.
Click the Middle Strip tab.
Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip
Properties box.
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude (as shown in Figure 48-9).
6 Click OK.
Choosing span segments in a mat is a subjective matter.
produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips.
It is recommended that some span segments in this tutorial
are deleted.
7 With the Selection tool ( ), select the seven span
segments highlighted in red in Figure 48-10 and press
Delete.
364
Chapter 48
RAM Concept
Generate Strips.
Hatch the strips:
click OK.
Two span segments are slightly skewed. How you treat
skewed strips is also a subjective matter, but in this tutorial
we suggest the span segment strips cross sections are
manually reoriented.
Edit the cross section orientation:
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select span segments 5-2
and 6-2 as shown in Figure 48-11.
2 Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
4 Click near one of the span segments, and then again
above or below the first click.
vertical.
Generate Strips.
Figure 48-12 Latitude design strips after editing and regeneration.
Draw longitude design strips:
Spans Plan.
7 Change CS Top Cover and CS Bottom Cover to 3 inches
[75 mm], and click OK.
Generate Spans.
Click OK.
10The spans appear in the longitude direction, as shown in
Figure 48-13.
Similar to the latitude direction, some editing of the span
segments is required.
365 RAM Concept
Chapter 48
11With the Selection tool ( ), select the span segments
over the walls (highlighted in red in Figure 48-13) and press
Delete.
12Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
13With the Span Segment tool ( ), draw a span segment
by clicking at the wall intersections at point A and B in
Figure 48-14.
14Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and
15In the dialog box, change:
Min Number of Divisions to 0.
Max Division Spacing to 30 feet [10 m], and click OK.
This span segment has been drawn to assist with Concepts
span segment strip width calculation.
16Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ) and Snap Nearest
Snapable Point ( ).
17With the Span Segment tool ( ), draw a span segment
by clicking at the wall intersection at point B and then at
point C in Figure 48-14 (it should snap to the visible grid
line).
18Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and
19In the dialog box:
Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
Uncheck Consider End 2 as Support.
Change Support Width at End 1 to 12 inches [300 mm],
and click OK.
Figure 48-14 Manually drawn span segments
Generate Strips.
Two span segments are slightly skewed. We suggest the
span segment strips cross sections are manually
reoriented.
366
Chapter 48
RAM Concept
Figure 48-15 Longitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some ed-
iting is now required.
Edit the cross section orientation:
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select span segments 9-3
and 12-1 as shown in Figure 48-15.
2 Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
3 Click near one of the span segments, and then again to the
left or right of first click.
horizontal.
Regenerate the longitude span strips:
Generate Strips.
Figure 48-16 Longitude design strips after editing and regeneration
Note: Many of the latitude and longitude design strips
have similar widths at the column, especially the canti-
levers. See the discussion in Defining strip boundaries
manually on page 102 of Chapter 22, Defining Design
Strips. In particular, Example 22-2 on page 103 and
Example 22-4 on page 104.
box:
Change Cover to CGS to 3 inches [60 mm] (cover
to centroid of top reinforcement).
Click OK.
367 RAM Concept
Chapter 48
the mesh.
2 Enter Element Size of 2 feet [0.7m] and click Generate.
Standard Plan.
368
Chapter 48
RAM Concept
2 Review the options.
3 Uncheck Auto-stabilize structure in x- and y-direc-
tions, and click OK.
Note: See General options on page 150 of Chapter 28
Calculate:
Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
Look at reinforcement and design status:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Total Status Plan.
This shows OK for all design strips and punching checks.
This means that there are no violations of code limits for
ductility, one-way shear, and punching shear. Note that
status does not flag excessive deflections.
plan.
Plan.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at the corner
column locations.
fit one of the three ACI 318-02 cases: interior, edge and
standard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: ACI
318 and CSA A23.3 on page 162 of Chapter 29 for more
information.
3 Choose Layers > Design Status > Total Reinforcement
Plan.
of the design strips. The results are, however, too congested
to be useful. You can access plans in the Design Status
layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or
bottom), direction (latitude or longitude), and type (flexural
or shear). You should decide which plans best convey the
results without too much clutter.
View Specific Reinforcement:
Reinforcement Plan.
3 Check Bar Spacings under Latitude Span Designs, and
click OK.
369 RAM Concept
Chapter 48
48.6.1 Bearing stresses
Maximum bearing stress is a critical consideration when
designing a mat. Contour plots of the bearing stresses are
available in RAM Concept. These will vary according to
the load combination. Note that the minimum and
maximum bearing values often occur for different load
combinations.
The Soil Bearing Design rule set envelopes the maximum
and minimum bearing pressures for all load combinations.
The maximum bearing pressure plan is probably the most
useful for your design.
View bearing stress plans:
Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Figure 48-22 Service LC: Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
2 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design
> Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Figure 48-23 Soil Bearing Design: Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
370
Chapter 48
RAM Concept
371 RAM Concept
Chapter 49
49 Strip Wizard Tutorial
This chapter walks you through the steps for using Strip
Wizard to provide a preliminary design for the slab (grid B)
in the PT Flat Plate Tutorial.
Alternative metric values and units are identified in square
brackets [] next to the US units. The metric values are not
exact conversions.
The codes used are ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001,
BS8110:1997, EC2 - 2004 and IS 456.
For more information, see Using Strip Wizard on
page 193.
49.1 Start Strip Wizard
When you choose File > Strip Wizard, the New File dialog
automatically opens before the Strip Wizard dialog box is
opened. After you create the new RAM Concept file, the
Strip Wizard dialog appears.
Start the Strip Wizard:
1 Choose File > Strip Wizard.
2 In the New File dialog box, set the Structure Type to
Elevated and choose the Code.
3 Click OK.
4 The Strip Wizard dialog box appears; click Next to
proceed to the General Parameters page.
49.2 Set the general parameters
On the General Parameters page, you define the structure
type, number and type of spans, and concrete mixes.
Set the general parameters as follows:
1 Choose Two-Way as the structural system.
2 Check Post-tensioned.
3 Set the number of spans to 3.
4 Check Asymmetric strip.
5 Set the concrete mix for slabs and beams to 5000 psi [32
MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 and EC2; M40 for IS
456].
6 Set the concrete mix for supports to 5000 psi [32 MPa for
AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 and EC2; M40 for IS 456].
7 Click Next to proceed to the Span Data page.
49.3 Enter the span data
Enter the span dimensions and data on the Span Data page.
(The type of data entered depends on which structural
system you chose on the General Parameters page.)
Set the span data as follows:
1 Set the length of Span 1 and 2 to 30 ft [9 m].
2 Set the length of Span 3 to 25 ft [7.75 m].
3 Set the thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
Note: To set all the values in a column at once, enter the
value in the Typical row (first row) of that column. For
example, for the step above, you can simply type 10 [250] in
the Typical row of the Thickness column to set the
thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
4 Set the left start width of Span 1 to 11.5 ft [3.5 m].
5 Set the left start width of Span 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m].
6 Set the right start width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m].
7 Set the right start width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].
8 Set the left end width of Spans 1, 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m].
9 Set the right end width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m].
10Set the right end width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].
Figure 49-1 The Span Data page.
11Click Next to proceed to the Support Data page.
372
Chapter 49
RAM Concept
49.4 Create the supports below
Add the four supports in the Supports Below table on the
Support Data page.
Set the supports below as follows:
1 Set the depth of all four supports below to 24 inches [600
mm].
2 Set the width of all four supports below to 24 inches [600
mm].
3 Set the height of all four supports below to 10 ft [3 m].
4 Leave the bottom and top fixity of all supports below as
Fixed.
5 Click Next to proceed to the Drop Caps and Drop Panels
page.
49.5 Add drop caps
Enter the dimensions for a drop cap at Supports 2 and 4 in
the Drop Caps table (top table) on the Drop Cap and Drop
Panels page.
Set the drop cap data as follows:
1 For Support 2 in the Drop Caps table set the following
values:
Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].
Set the left width to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
Set the right width to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
Set the before length to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
Set the after length to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
2 For Support 4 in the Drop Caps table set the following
values:
Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].
Set the left width to 33 inches [900 mm].
Set the right width to 12 inches [300 mm].
Set the before length to 33 inches [900 mm].
Set the after length to 0 inches [0 mm].
3 Click Next to proceed to the Loads page.
49.6 Specify the loads
Enter the area loads on the Loads page.
Set the loads as follows:
1 Set the typical Dead Area Load to 20 psf [1 kN/m
2
].
2 Set the typical Live Area Load to 40 psf [2 kN/m
2
].
3 Click Next to proceed to the Post-Tensioning page.
Note: You can leave the Dead Line Load and Live Line
Load fields blank (no need to enter zero).
Enter the post-tensioning parameters on the Post-
Tensioning page.
Set the post-tensioning as follows:
1 Uncheck the stressing Start and End check boxes.
2 Set the minimum P/A to 140 psi [1 MPa].
3 Set the minimum balance load percentage to 65%.
4 Click Next to proceed to the Reinforcement page.
49.8 Specify the reinforcement
parameters
Enter the reinforcement parameters on the Reinforcement
page.
Set the reinforcement as follows:
1 Set the top reinforcing bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16
for BS8110 and IS456; H16 for EC2].
2 Set the bottom reinforcing bar to #4 [N12 for AS3600;
T12 for BS8110 and IS456; H12 for EC2].
3 Set the top and bottom reinforcement clear cover to 1
inch [25 mm].
Note: Strip Wizard does not differentiate between cover to
tendons and reinforcement bar.
4 Check the Perform punching shear checks box.
5 Set Cover to CGS to 1.625 inch [41 mm].
6 Click Next to proceed to the Completion page.
49.9 Complete the Strip Wizard
Completing the Strip Wizard is the final page of the Strip
Wizard dialog box. You can save the data you just entered
in a Strip Wizard Settings file by clicking Save. When you
click Finish, Strip Wizard creates your strip in the open
RAM Concept file.
373 RAM Concept
Chapter 49
Complete the strip:
1 Click Save and name the file in the Save Strip Wizard
File As dialog box that appears.
2 Click Finish.
49.10 Proceed with RAM Concept
After you have completed Strip Wizard, you can proceed
with RAM Concept. After you have created your strip,
generate the mesh (with a 2.5-foot [0.75 m] mesh) and run
a calculation analysis. Refer to the relevant manual
chapters, or one of the three PT Flat Plate tutorials for
further information.
View your strip:
Figure 49-2 The completed strip on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Figure 49-3 The Element: Standard Plan showing the completed strip af-
ter the mesh has been generated.
Figure 49-4 The Element: Standard Plan after calculation and mesh re-
generation.
Figure 49-5 The completed strip on the ManualLatitude Tendon: Standard
Plan.
49.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate
Tutorial
The results of the Strip Wizard analysis are similar but not
the same as the PT Flat Plate Tutorial. The reasons for
different results include:
Strip Wizard does not automatically consider transverse
continuity effects.
Increased balcony loads not considered by Strip Wizard.
Strip Wizard automatically modified the drapes in spans
2 and 3 (you can change these if you wish).
Longitude tendons not considered by Strip Wizard.
49.12 Conclusion
Strip Wizard allows you to perform a preliminary or final
design for a strip within a floor. The results are similar to
those generated by any strip program, but not as accurate as
a RAM Concept model that considers all of the
irregularities within a floor.
374
Chapter 49
RAM Concept
375 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
50 Analysis Notes
This chapter provides general information on finite element method (FEM) plate analysis as well as specific information on
how RAM Concept calculates analysis results.
50.1 Review of plate behavior
In RAM Concept, slab areas are modeled as plates. Engineers have historically used approximate methods for designing
plates; these approximate methods assume that the plate behaves in a beam-like manner in two perpendicular directions.
Because engineers have used these approximate methods for so long, RAM Concepts true elastic plate analysis results can
sometimes be confusing. This section will review plate analysis theory, so engineers can better understand RAM Concepts
results.
50.1.1 In-plane and out-of-plane behavior
Slabs are subject to both in-plane and out-of-plane forces.
In-plane forces stretch and shear the slab, but do not cause it to deviate from the plane defined by the slab centroid. For
horizontal slabs (like those in RAM Concept), in-plane forces cause stretching, compressing and shearing of the centroid
plane in plan view only.
Out-of-plane forces cause the slab to bend and twist, moving it perpendicular to the plane defined by the slab centroid. For
horizontal slabs (like those in Concept), out-of-plane forces cause the slab to deflect vertically from the original centroid
plane.
In a horizontal slab that has one continuous centroid elevation, the equilibrium equations of in-plane and out-of-plane forces
are totally separate. However, if there is a shift in the centroid, the two sets of forces become interrelated due to equilibrium
considerations and must be solved for simultaneously; RAM Concept handles this interrelation automatically.
For slabs that are not made of a linear-elastic material, the strains due to the in-plane and out-of-plane forces can no longer
be linearly superimposed, so the equilibrium equations of the two force systems become indirectly related through their
strains.
This interrelation of the two force systems strains for non-linear elastic materials can be seen in the simple example of a flat
concrete slab that is subject to transverse loads that cause out-of-plane forces and deflections. If a uniform in-plane
compression force is applied to the same slab, the slab will have less cracking, smaller out-of-plane displacements and a
somewhat different out-of-plane force pattern.
Concepts global analysis of structures assumes that the concrete behaves like a linear-elastic material. However, the
following discussion of the in-plane and out-of-plane forces is based purely on equilibrium considerations, and therefore is
valid for any material.
Note: P-delta effects are not considered.
50.1.2 In-plane behavior
In-plane forces can be quantified as an axial stress in two perpendicular directions, along with a shear stress. For a
differential element (with no loads applied) the stresses are shown as follows:
376
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the in-plane forces can be shown to be:
F
x
/x + V
xy
/y = -P
x
F
y
/y + V
xy
/x = -P
y
where P
x
and P
y
are applied loads.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the forces in terms of these new axes have a Mohrs circle
relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes:
F
r
= F
x
cos
2
+ F
y
sin
2
+ 2F
xy
sin cos
F
s
= F
x
sin
2
+ F
y
cos
2
2F
xy
sin cos
V
rs
= V
xy
(cos
2
sin
2
) + (F
y
F
x
) sin cos
This Mohrs circle relationship is based on equilibrium considerations, so it is valid for all materials.
For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular principal axes where the shearing stresses are zero and
the forces in the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values. The angle between the principal
axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point to point in the slab.
377 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
50.1.3 Out-of-plane behavior
Out-of-plane forces can be quantified as bending moment about two perpendicular axes, a torsional moment and vertical
shears on the two perpendicular faces. For a differential element the moments and shears are shown as follows:
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the out-of-plane forces can be shown to be:
Vxz/x + Vyz /y = -Pz
Mx/y + Txy/x = -Vyz
My/x + Txy/y = -Vxz
where Pz is an applied load.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the moment in terms of these new axes have a Mohrs circle
relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes, the shear forces have a simple vector-like relationship:
378
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
M
r
= M
x
cos
2
+ M
y
sin
2
- 2T
xy
sin cos
M
s
= M
x
sin
2
+ M
y
cos
2
+ 2T
xy
sin cos
T
rs
= T
xy
(cos
2
sin
2
) + (M
x
M
y
) sin cos
V
rz
= V
xz
cos

+ V
yz
sin

V
sz
= -V
xz
sin

+ V
yz
cos

Again, these relationships are based on equilibrium considerations, so they are valid for all materials.
For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular principal axes where the torsion moments are zero and
the bending moments about the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values. The angle between
the principal axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point to point in the slab.
50.1.4 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane behavior
Where the centroid plane of a slab changes elevation, there is an interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane forces. The
interaction of the two sets of forces is simple and is defined purely by moment and force equilibrium. A simple centroid step
is shown in elevation view below:
379 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
F
x
= F
x
V
xy
= V
xy
V
xz
= V
xz
M
y
= M
y
- F
x
d
M
xy
= M
xy
- V
xy
d
50.1.5 RAM Concept plotting and relevant axes
RAM Concept can plot its results relative to the x-axis, the y-axis, a specific axis (specified with an angle) or a maximum or
minimum axis. The minimum axis is defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the minimum value for the
quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis used will vary from point to point in the plot. Similarly the maximum axis is
defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the maximum value for the quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis
used will vary from point to point in the plot.
50.2 Finite element analysis
RAM Concept uses a linear-elastic finite element formulation based on gross section properties for its global analysis.
50.2.1 About finite element analysis
Finite element analysis (also known as the finite element method) has become the standard way for engineers to analyze
complicated structures. While explaining the theory of the finite element method is beyond the scope of this chapter,
engineers using RAM Concept should understand how the parameters they specify affect the program's analysis.
50.2.2 Finite element formulation used in RAM Concept
RAM Concept models the slab portion of the structure with triangular or quadrilateral slab elements. These slab elements are
based on a formulation by Robert Cook [Two Hybrid Elements for Analysis of Thick, Thin and Sandwich Plates,
International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, Volume 5, pages 277-288, 1972]. The elements consider both
in-plane and bending deformation. Five degrees of freedom are used per node.
50.2.3 Slab element general properties
The slab elements used in RAM Concept have the following general properties:
The elements consider both in-plane and out of plane forces.
380
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
The elements can (optionally) have different stiffnesses in two orthogonal directions.
The elements consider transverse shear deformations.
The elements consider the relative elevations of adjacent slab elements.
50.3 Orthotropic behavior
RAM Concept allows you to specify six stiffness factors that modify the behavior of the slab elements (see description of the
orthotropic behavior settings in Slab area properties on page 70 and Beam properties on page 72 of Chapter 17,
Defining the Structure). When all of the factors are set to 1.0, the slab element behave as an isotropic material (a material
having the same properties in all directions). When the factors are different from each other, the slab elements behave as an
orthotropic material (a material having different properties along its three perpendicular axes.)
Care must be used when setting these stiffness factors. With certain combinations of factors, the structure can become
unstable and the results can become unreliable. Also, the interaction of the stiffness factors may be more complex than it
appears upon first inspection. This section gives some guidance to assist in avoiding these issues.
50.3.1 K Factors and Instability
When K factors other than 1 are used (either directly, or indirectly by setting the slab or beam Behavior), it is possible that
the structure may become unstable or nearly unstable. This is generally not a problem unless the Custom option is used.
Interaction of KMrs and KMr or KMs Stiffness Factors
If custom settings are used, and both KMrs and KMr or both KMrs and KMs are reduced, the elements may become unstable
and the analysis results may be suspect. For this reason we recommend that these parameters be kept within a limited range:
KMr / KMs > 0.5 or KMrs / KMs > 0.5
KMs / KMr > 0.5 or KMrs / KMr > 0.5
Similar instabilities can occur with KVrs and KFr/KFs.
50.3.2 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses
In situations where the centroid of the slab is not at a uniform elevation, the in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses of
Concept's slab elements will interact. For example, in a T-beam, the axial stiffness of the web and the flanges will interact
with their bending stiffnesses (creating a stiffer section than just the web and flange bending stiffnesses added together).
In these situations, you may need to modify the in-plane behavior to modify the out-of-plane behavior. For example, if you
want to reduce a T-beam bending stiffness by half, you would need to set both KMs and KFr to 0.5.
50.4 Deep beam considerations
50.4.1 Analysis of slab and beam elements
RAM Concept assumes that beam elements and slab elements behave the same; unless their behavior is specified for the
finite elements.
The first analysis assumption that Concept makes for slab elements is that linear sections remain linear; this is analogous
to plane sections remain plane in beam theory.
381 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
The second analysis assumption that RAM Concept makes for slab elements is that the force and stress patterns in the
element are that of a typical slab location. The following table shows the possible slab element forces and their associated
stresses.
Figure 50-6 Linear Sections Before Defor-
mation
Figure 50-7 Linear Sections After Defor-
mation
Symbol Force Related Stress
Fx Axial force on x-face Uniform axial stress
x
Fy Axial force on y-face Uniform axial stress
y
Vxy In-plane shear force Uniform shear stress
xy
Vxz Transverse shear force on x-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress
xz
Vyz Transverse shear force on y-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress
yz
Mx Bending moment about x-axis Linear (along z-axis) axial stress
y
My Bending moment about y-axis Linear (along z-axis) axial stress
x
Txy Torsional moment Linear (along z-axis) shear stress
xy
Table 50-4 Relation between force and stress
Figure 50-8 In-Plane Actions (Plan View) Figure 50-9 Out-of-Plane Actions (Plan
View)
382
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
50.4.2 Analysis and design of deep beams For bending moment and shear
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will assume a linear distribution of bending
stress over the deep beam, while the actual stress distribution will be non-linear.
These analysis simplifications are generally not significant and are normally ignored.
In design, Concept will not perform any special capacity calculations that are appropriate only for deep beams and Concept
will not provide any deep beam detailing information. Concepts shallow beam calculations will generally be conservative
for deep beams.
The engineer will need to ensure that the deep beam is laterally stable. The engineer will also need to provide appropriate
detailing for the deep beam.
Figure 50-10 RAM Concept Analysis Bending Stresses
Figure 50-11 True Bending Stresses
383 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
50.4.3 Analysis and design of deep beams with transverse bending moments
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will over-estimate the stiffness of a deep beam
subjected to transverse bending moments. Concepts analysis will assume that the entire beam is effective in resisting the
transverse moment.
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored.
In design, it is important that Concepts design sections have the appropriate ignore depth settings, so only the portion of the
beam that is truly effective is used in the capacity calculations.
Figure 50-12 RAM Concept Analysis Bending/Axial Stresses
Figure 50-13 True Bending/Axial Stresses
Figure 50-14 Before Ignore Depth
384
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
50.4.4 Analysis of deep beams with torsion
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will over-estimate the torsional stiffness of
deep beams. At the worst case, Concepts assumptions lead to a torsional stiffness at the deep beam that is proportional to
bh
3
, while the true torsional stiffness is proportional to b
3
h. Typically Concepts overestimation is not that great as the slab
elements have a transverse shear stiffness that makes the beams more flexible. The larger the number of elements across a
deep beam, the smaller the overestimation of torsional stiffness.
The torsion in the beam may be necessary for a complete structural load path - for this reason it cannot be ignored. It may be
appropriate to reduce the torsional stiffness of the beam (this will modify the structural load path to one that is less
Figure 50-15 After Ignore Depth
Figure 50-16 RAM Concept Analysis Torsion Shear Stresses
Figure 50-17 True Torsion Shear Stresses
385 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
dependent upon the beam torsional capacity). Concept provides four options of considering this torsion in design. See
Torsion Considerations on page 405 for more information.
Note: When the torsion stiffness of a beam has been reduced using a K-factor, it is generally recommended to provide a
minimum level of torsion stirrups/ligatures/links to ensure that the beam can torsionally crack without precipitating a failure.
50.4.5 Analysis and design of moment transfer through step-beams
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will not consider that a step beam could bend
about its longitudinal axis. Concepts assumption that linear sections remain linear prohibits this type of bending and will
cause Concept to over-estimate the stiffness of the step-beam for moment transfer.
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored. However, it is up to the engineer to
assure that step-beam has the capacity and detailing to transfer the analyzed moment.
50.5 Wall behavior
50.5.1 Walls above slab
RAM Concept considers walls above the slab to act as beams. It appropriately analyzes the influence of these walls on the
slab, but it does not report the wall-beam forces nor does it design the wall-beams. Design strips and design sections that
cross walls ignore both the capacity of the wall-beam in the cross section and the forces in the wall-beam. Wall-beams
interpret some wall properties differently than walls below the slab:
Figure 50-18 RAM Concept Step-Beam Bending Stresses
Figure 50-19 True Step-Beam Bending Stresses
386
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
Fixed Near = wall has torsional stiffness
Fixed Far = (ignored)
Shear Wall = beam has axial stiffness
Compressible = (ignored)
Note that while the prediction of the bending behavior of the slab and beam is accurate, the division of shear between the
wall and the slab is not well predicted. For a combined wall-beam / slab section the proportion of the vertical shear force
carried by the slab will be between the two extremes:
A
s
/ A
total
, and
I
s
/ I
total
Where
A
s
= cross-sectional area of slab in section
A
total
= cross-sectional area of slab and wall together
I
s
= moment of inertia of slab
I
total
= moment of inertia of slab and wall together
50.6 Post-tensioning loadings
50.6.1 Hyperstatic loading
RAM Concept calculates the effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects (elements, springs, support, design sections,
design strip segment cross sections and punching checks) by using the following vector relationship:
F
h
= F
b
- F
p
where
F
h
= the hyperstatic forces and moments
F
b
= the balance loading forces and moments (tendon forces on real structure)
F
p
= the primary forces and moments in the object (forces in object due to PT if the object was not restrained, but
still contained tendons if any)
For objects that do not contain tendons (walls, columns, springs, rigid supports, design sections without tendons and design
strips without tendons), F
p
is zero, so:
F
h
= F
b
For slab elements the calculation of F
p
for every element is not performed, as there is no clear definition of F
p
for anything
except a cross section. Concepts slab analysis plots assume F
p
= F
b
(F
h
= 0), but these plotted values are NOT used in the
slab design and checking. Concept calculates design section and design strip cross section forces (without the assumption of
F
p
= F
b
) as follows:
F
h
= F
b
- F
p
387 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
Concept bases the calculation of F
p
on the tendons at each cross section.
Note: Because of this issue, it is incorrect to use Concepts slab analysis plots for cross-section design values in PT struc-
tures. (It is not recommend using slab analysis plots in RC slabs either, but that is because design strips and design sections
provide much higher accuracy).
Note: For a more detailed discussion, refer to Complete Secondary (Hyperstatic) Effects by A. Bommer; PTI Journal,
January 2004, Vol 2 No. 1).
50.7 Self-equilibrium analysis
RAM Concept can analyze loadings using a self-equilibrium analysis.
50.7.1 About self-equilibrium analysis
Any static loading on a structure, when combined with the structure support reactions (considered as additional loads), is a
self-equilibrium loading. In such a loading the total loads upon the structure are in force and moment equilibrium. However,
the equilibrium loads still produce moments and forces in the structure.
In certain cases, it is desirable to analyze a self-equilibrium loading upon a floor system while ignoring the effects of the
floor system supports. We call this type of analysis a self-equilibrium analysis.
50.7.2 Uses of Self-Equilibrium Analyses
Load Paths Compatible with Full Building Lateral Analysis
The most common use of self-equilibrium analyses is to ensure that a load path in Concept is consistent with a load path in a
lateral analysis performed by a separate program.
If a lateral analysis of a building (perhaps using RAM Frame) is performed, and that analysis considers the slab to be part of
the lateral load path, the slab - including the slab-column connections - needs to be designed to resist the forces and moments
determined in the lateral analysis. This design can be performed using a self-equilibrium analysis. The forces/reactions from
all of the supports (above and below the slab) onto the slab are considered as loads to the slab, any forces directly applied to
the slab (such as a story-force in a seismic analysis) are also included.
The result of this self-equilibrium analysis is a slab load path that is fully consistent with the lateral analysis of the entire
building. The distribution of forces (and the displacements) within the slab may not match those in the building lateral
analysis, but the distribution of slab forces in Concept is almost always more accurate than those predicted in the full-
building analysis.
Other Uses
While there are other potential uses of the self-equilibrium analysis, they are rare and not covered in this manual.
50.7.3 Using Self-Equilibrium Analyses
Setting the Loading Analysis Type
To have Concept analyze a loading using a self-equilibrium analysis, the loading's analysis type must be changed to Lateral
SE (lateral self equilibrium). The loading analysis type can be changed in the loading window. See Changing Analysis on
page 35 of Chapter 10, Specifying Loadings.
Note: The term Lateral SE is used instead of Self Equilibrium to remind users that this analysis type is primarily
intended for lateral loadings.
388
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
Defining the Loads
There is no limit to the type or quantity of loads that can be applied in a self-equilibrium loading. However, the loads applied
must be nearly in self-equilibrium. If the loads are out of equilibrium Concept will apply restraints to the slab to ensure that
equilibrium can be maintained. The restraint reactions can be viewed in the Calc Log.
Note: See Importing a database on page 49 of Chapter 14, Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System for
information on how to automatically import self-equilibrium lateral loads.
Note: Mat/Raft foundations are typically not well suited for self-equilibrium analyses as the soil reactions are not known
before the analysis.
50.7.4 Self-Equilibrium Analyses Details
Floating Stiffness Matrix
If you use self-equilibrium loadings, Concept creates an internal floating stiffness matrix in addition to the regular stiffness
matrix. The floating stiffness matrix considers the slab, but not the supports above or below the slab. Concept also adds some
minimal supports to the matrix to make it stable.
Minimal Supports
The minimal supports that Concept adds to the floating stiffness matrix are located at real support locations, but not at every
real support location. Typically, Concept adds three supports to provide full stability, but not to provide any restraint.
Note: Concept gives a warning if there are not at least two support locations where minimal supports can be added.
The motivation for adding the minimal supports at the same location as real supports is that these locations are likely to be
locations where self-equilibrium loads are applied, so any reactions at these locations can typically be considered as
corrections to the self-equilibrium loads.
Punching Check Reactions
Punching checks consider the loads applied at the punching check location in their reaction calculations. Punching checks
are the only support that have reactions from self-equilibrium analyses.
Displacements
Concept reports all displacements for self-equilibrium loadings as zero. Self-equilibrium loadings have no effect on the
displacements calculated for load combinations or rule sets.
Pattern Loading
Pattern loading can be used in a self-equilibrium analysis, but it should almost never be used. When used, all patterns should
contain a self-equilibrium set of loads.
Note: For an example, see Example 39-1 on page 209 of Chapter 39, Frequently Asked Questions.
50.8 Design strip and design section forces
50.8.1 Design section axes and sign convention
Design sections have a local coordinate system, with r, s and z axes:
R-axis is collinear with the design section and is positive in the direction from end 1 to end 2. This direction is also referred
to as Lateral.
S-axis is 90 degrees counter-clockwise to the r-axis (still in the x-y plane) and goes through the design centroid (see
below). This direction is also referred to as Axial
389 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
Z-axis is parallel to the global z-axis and goes through the design centroid. This direction is also referred to as Vertical
Forces for the design section are considered as the forces that the structure in the positive-s region applies to the structure in
the negative-s region.
A design section drawn from point B to point A will have the same forces as a design section drawn from point A to point B
except that the following two forces will have opposite signs:
V
z
(vertical shear on the s-face)
M
z
(moment about the z axis)
50.8.2 Design strip segment axes and sign convention
Design strip segments have a local coordinate system for each internal cross section. An internal cross section is
perpendicular to the design strip segment spine and extends from the left tributary boundary to the right tributary boundary.
Each internal cross section is treated exactly like a Design Section with its own r, s and z axes (see above).
All of a DSSs cross sections will have coordinate systems that are parallel, but for certain structure geometries the s-axes of
each cross section will not be collinear. This is due to each cross section determining its own design centroid (see below).
50.8.3 Design centroids
Each design strip (span segment strip) segment cross section and design section and determines its own design centroid
location. The location is determined as follows:
1 A final cross section is determined by considering (i) the trimmed cross section for design strip segments, and (ii) the top
and bottom ignore depths for design sections.
2 The centroid z-elevation of this final cross section is the design centroid z coordinate.
3 A cross section core is determined (see Concrete Core Determination on page 405). For a T shaped section the core
will be the stem from the bottom of the section to the top of the section. For a rectangular section, the core will be the entire
section.
4 The cores x and y centroid coordinates are the design centroids x and y coordinates.
5 You can view the centroid of a design strip segment cross section in the first page of an audit. See Chapter 31, Using the
Auditor for more information.
50.8.4 Calculating the forces on the cross section
RAM Concept calculates the cross section forces about the design centroid of the cross section (after trimming has been
taken into account).
For each of the same slab elements that make up the initial concrete cross section (before trimming has been taken into
account), the elements nodal forces (for all the elements nodes on one side of the design section) are transformed to the
centroid of the final concrete section and added to the design section forces. For slab elements that contain the end of the
design section, only a fraction (proportional to the length of the design section in the element divided by the length across
the element along a line collinear with the design section) of the nodal forces are included.
Nodal forces are used in place of integrations of slab stresses because slab stress results may have local spikes caused by
odd-shaped elements. These local spikes can significantly alter the total integrated value. The nodal forces used by Concept
are not affected by the local stress spikes and always give results that will be in equilibrium with the nodal loads.
50.8.5 Calculating the balanced load percentages
RAM Concept calculates the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning within design strips. See Viewing
balanced load percentages on page 156 for instructions on accessing this information.
Each design strip segment reports two values:
390
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
xx% DL Balanced
xx% DL + RLL Balanced
The values reported are valid for the last Calc All (tendon changes after that are not reflected).
The values are calculated based on the total static moment for the span, for the balanced loadings and the dead and live
loadings.
For a cantilever span, the effective load is:
where:
M = moment at first cross section
L = clear span
For a regular span (with supports at both ends), the effective load is:
where
M = (M
1
+ M
2
)/2 - M
3
M
1
= moment at first cross section
M
2
= moment at last cross section
M
3
= moment at cross section closest to midway between first and
last cross sections
L = clear span
The percentage is defined as:
% = -100 W
b
/W
l
where
W
b
= effective load due to balance and transfer balance loadings
W
l
= effective load due to load combination under consideration
(DL or DL + RLL)
There is no possible calculation for design strip segments that are not part of a span. These have an undefined balance load
percentage.
The balance calculation may have some differences from the calculation available in the tendon plans. The difference are
due to:
diversion of PT effects
clear span vs total span
moment taken at first and last sections, not at support centerlines
In the calculations, DL is based on the dead loading types, and means:
Self Weight + Dead + Dead (transfer) but does NOT include Stressing Dead
w 2M L
2
=
w 8M L
2
=
391 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
In the calculations, RLL is based on the new loading types, and means:
Live (reducible) + Live (unreducible) + Live (storage) + Live (parking) + Live (roof) + Live (reducible)(transfer) + Live
(unreducible)(transfer) + Live (storage)(transfer) + Live (roof)(transfer)
All of these loadings are reduced per the live load reduction code before addition to the total.
50.8.6 Using the Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option
Design sections and span segments contain an option (checkbox) with the label Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to
Sign Change. If this option is selected, Concept will perform five integrations of the cross section forces for every loading
and load pattern:
1. Standard Integration - this is as described in Calculating the forces on the cross section on page 389.
2. Max Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated bending moment
value are considered.
3. Min Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated bending moment
value are considered.
4. Max Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated vertical shear value
are considered.
5. Min Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated vertical shear value
are considered.
The intent of this option is to allow for safe, conservative designs where cross sections include regions of moment (or shear)
with opposite signs that cause the moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be less than that for a shorter sub- cross
section.
The values from the above integrations may not be considered in certain circumstances:
Standard Integration - all values always considered.
Max Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending moment in
Standard Integration.
Min Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending moment in
Standard Integration.
Max Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in Standard
Integration.
Min Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in Standard
Integration.
When the Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option is selected, the design forces are always more
conservative than when the option is not selected. This option should not be used without due consideration.
Note: These selective integrations are performed independently for each loading. Load(ing) Combinations cross section
forces therefore may include (and exclude) forces from different elements in each loading. This adds to the conservatism of
the option.
50.9 Result categories in RAM Concept
RAM Concept keeps track of 2 categories of results: standard and envelope.
392
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
50.9.1 Standard results
Standard results - loadings
Standard Results for a loading are the results due to the application of all loads of the loading with no patterns considered.
These results consists of the results on the Slab tab, the Standard context results on the Reaction tab and the Standard
context results for the Strip tab.
Standard results - load combinations
Standard Results for a load combination are the linear combination of loading standard results using the standard load
factors. These results consist of the results on the Slab tab, the Standard context results on the Reaction tab and the
Standard context results for the Strip tab.
Note: Standard results also include all of the results for items other than design strip segments, design sections and punching
checks. Items such as slab bending moments, column reactions and soil reactions are included in the standard (non-
enveloped) results.
Note: For rule set layers, there are no standard results; only envelope results are calculated.
50.9.2 Envelope results
Envelope results are kept for only 3 object types - design strip segments, design sections and punching checks. Envelope
results fully consider pattern loadings and alternate envelope factors (as well as standard factors).
For design strip segments and design sections all of the cross-section forces are calculated, and there are six envelope result
sets kept:
Max M (forces in place at time of maximum M)
Min M (forces in place at time of minimum M)
Max V (forces in place at time of maximum V)
Min V (forces in place at time of minimum V)
Max P (forces in place at time of maximum P)
Min P (forces in place at time of minimum P)
Note: Min refers to the minimum signed value, not the minimum absolute value.
For punching checks all the reaction forces are calculated and there are 6 envelope result sets kept:
Max Fz (reaction forces at time of maximum Fz reaction)
Min Fz (reaction forces at time of minimum Fz reaction)
Max Mx (reaction forces at time of maximum Mx reaction)
Min Mx (reaction forces at time of minimum Mx reaction)
Max My (reaction forces at time of maximum My reaction)
Min My (reaction forces at time of minimum My reaction)
50.9.3 How RAM Concept calculates envelope results
Envelope Results - Loadings
Envelope results for a loading are determined by comparing the results for the full loading and the results of all of the pattern
loadings (considering the pattern factors). Envelope results consist of a subset of results which occur simultaneously with
minimum and maximum values of certain resultants.
393 RAM Concept
Chapter 50
For example, for a design section, all of the pattern results would be compared, and the pattern result with the largest
bending moment would become the Max M result for that design section; other design sections Max M results might be
determined by other patterns.
If the loading is not patterned, then all of the envelope results are identical to the standard results.
Envelope Results - Load Combinations
Envelope results for a load combination are determined by comparing all the permutations of standard and alternate load
factors multiplied by all envelopes for each loading in the load combination. For each location and envelope type, the chosen
load factors are those that create the most extreme envelope.
In mathematical terms:
There are 2
n(p+1)
results for n loadings and p patterns.
These 2
n(p+1)
results are enveloped together.
The actual calculations that RAM Concept uses do not consider 2
n(p+1)
load combinations, but the result of the RAM
Concepts calculations is the same as if it did.
Envelope Results - Rule Sets
Envelope results for rule sets are determined by comparing all the envelopes for all of the load combinations that use the rule
set. For each location and envelope type, the chosen values are those that occur simultaneously with the most extreme
envelope.
Envelope results for a loading, load combination or rule set are all the results on the Reaction tab and Strip tab except for
those with the Standard context. The Standard context for these plots is sometimes referred to as the standard envelope,
but technically it is not an envelope at all.
Note: RAM Concepts enveloping finds the critical cases in most regular and complicated models. It would be possible,
however, for the six envelopes to miss the critical case. If you believe that a set of forces not included in the envelopes may be
critical for the design, you can manually create additional loadings (without patterning) and/or additional load combinations
(without alternate load factors) and/or additional rule sets (using a single load combination) to ensure that the force set of
concern is considered in the design.
394
Chapter 50
RAM Concept
395 RAM Concept
Chapter 51
51 Section Design Notes
This chapter explains RAM Concepts general approach to the analysis and design of cross sections. The specific handling of
each codes requirements are detailed in the chapters that follow.
51.1 General Design Approach
51.1.1 Strip and Section Design A 3 Step Process
RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps:
Step 1: Each Rule set performs its Phase 1 selection of reinforcement. For most rule sets this is the entire design.
Step 1b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized.
Step 2: Each Rule set performs its Phase 2 selection of reinforcement needed in addition to that summarized in step 1b. For
most rule sets nothing happens in this step, but for some rule sets such as shear design and ductility design the summarized
step 1 reinforcement needs to be known before the design can be performed.
Step 2b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized.
Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no reinforcement is added in this step) and final analysis.
51.1.2 Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves
RAM Concept considers mild steel reinforcement to be a perfectly elastic/plastic material as defined by the modulus of
elasticity and the yield stress.
51.1.3 Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves
RAM Concept uses a post-tensioning steel stress-strain curve base on a standard power formula that has been used in
various forms for 25 years:
f
p
=
p
[A + B/{1 + (C
p
)
D
}
1/D
] f
pu
Where A, B, C and D are coefficients chosen to best fit the experimental stress-strain curve data.
RAM Concept uses coefficients A, B, C and D based on an analysis of prestressing steel stress-strain curves included a paper
by Develapura and Tadros [Develapura, R. K. and Tadros, M. K.,Critical Assessment of ACI 318 Eq. (18-3) for
Prestressing Steel Stress at Ultimate Flexure, ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 5, September-October 1992, pp. 538-546].
RAM Concepts values are:
A = 0.0311 E
p
B = E
p
- A
C = 0.958 E
p
/f
py
D = 7.36
These values provide exact correspondence with the recommended parameters for 270 ksi (1860 MPa) strand with f
py
of 0.9
f
pu
. For other prestressing materials, there may be small differences (a few percent) from the theoretical curves in the region
between the start of yield and ultimate strength.
396
Chapter 51
RAM Concept
51.1.4 Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains
The strains in a cross section can be determined using the plane sections remain plane assumption. However, due to the
effects of prestressing and the sequence of construction, the strains in the post-tensioning in a cross section are not equal to
the strains in the adjacent concrete.
Conceptually, to calculate the strain in a bonded tendon at that corresponds to the adjacent concrete strain is simple:
p
=
c
+ (
pi

ci
)
Where
p
= strain in tendon
c
= strain in concrete adjacent to tendon
pi
= strain in tendon at time of bonding
ci
= strain in adjacent concrete at time of bonding (typically negative)
RAM Concept uses the following procedure and assumptions when calculating the
pi
and
ci
values for each tendon in each
design cross section:
All tendon long-term losses (relaxation, elastic shortening, creep and shrinkage) occur before bonding.
The formwork applies an upward force on the concrete exactly the same as the weight of the concrete. The only forces in
the concrete are those due to the balance loading.
The concrete strains can be determined using gross section properties and the initial concrete modulus.
51.1.5 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves General Theory
RAM Concepts treatment of the effect of cross section strains on ultimate unbonded tendon stresses is loosely based on a
paper by Naaman, Burns, French, Gable and Mattock [Naaman, A. E. et. al, Stresses in Unbonded Prestressing Tendons at
Ultimate: Recommendation, ACI Structural Journal, V. 99, No. 4, July-August 2002, pp. 518-529]. In the paper the
authors, who are members of the Subcommittee of Stresses in Unbonded Tendons of Joint ASCE-ACI committee 423,
Prestressed Concrete, recommend code modifications for ACI 318.
The paper provides an equation for estimating tendon stresses at ultimate bending strength of a cross section. The proposed
equation is shown to have a correlation with test results that is 2.5 times better than the ACI equations 18-4 and 18-5. The
equation is:
0 0.005 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.035
0
100
200
300
300
0
Fp strain ( )
Fpu
Fpy
0.04 0.00 strain
397 RAM Concept
Chapter 51
f
ps
= f
se
+
u
E
p

cu
(d
p
/c 1)(L
1
/L
2
) 0.80f
pu
where
f
ps
= tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
f
se
= effective prestress in prestressed reinforcement
E
p
= elastic modulus of prestressed reinforcement
cu
= failure strain of concrete (typically assumed as 0.003)
d
p
= distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement.
c = depth of neutral axis at ultimate strength
L = span under consideration
L
1
= sum of lengths of loaded spans
L
2
= total length of tendon between anchorages
u
= K(d
p
/L) where K = 3 for uniform or third point loadings and 1.5 for midspan loading
f
pu
= specified tensile strength of prestressed tendons
It can be shown that:
where
p
= change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective prestress level to ultimate bending
With this substitution (and the one for
u
) the equation becomes:
f
ps
= f
se
+ K(d
p
/L) E
p

p
(L
1
/L
2
) 0.80f
pu
L can both realistically and conservatively be assumed to equal L
1
as it is unlikely for two spans to simultaneously have
large inelastic deformations. This simplifies the equation further to:
f
ps
= f
se
+ E
p
(Kd
p
/L
2
)
p
0.80f
pu
It is obvious that in the above equations that (Kd
p
/L
2
) is a strain reduction factor that accounts for the distribution of the
localized strain over the length of the tendon. The

numerator is a consideration of the length of the yielding (high strain)
region, while the denominator is a consideration of the length over which this strain is distributed.
51.1.6 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation
RAM Concept assumes that unbonded post-tensioning stresses are not affected by service loading.
For ultimate strength considerations, RAM Concept treats unbonded tendons as partially bonded tendons:
f
ps
= F(
pse
+ k
p
) f
limit
where
f
ps
= tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
F() = post-tensioning material stress strain curve (described above)
cu
d
p
c 1 ( )
398
Chapter 51
RAM Concept
pse
= strain in tendon at effective prestress level
p
= change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective prestress level to ultimate bending
k = strain reduction factor, taken as 0.1
f
limit
= limit stress as defined by the effective code
For ACI 318-99, f
limit
is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of
p
used in the ACI equations, RAM
Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting stress value is
used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
For AS 3600-2001, f
limit
is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of b
ef
d
p
used in the AS equations, RAM Concept
assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for
both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
51.1.7 Tendons External Load or Internal Force?
Tendons need to be considered as an external load for some purposes and as an internal force for other purposes. It is
important that the tendon treatment be consistent throughout a calculation.
RAM Concept always considers tendons as internal forces in strength calculations. The full force of the tendon is an internal
force, while any hyperstatic effects generated by the tendons are considered as external forces. The balance loading should
never be included in load combinations used for strength calculations, while the hyperstatic loading should always be
included (as an external load) in strength calculations.
Concept always considers the initial prestress in tendons as external forces in service calculations. Changes in the tendons
stress (from effective stress levels) if any are considered as internal forces. For example if a bonded tendon is stressed
with a final effective stress of 175 ksi (1207 N/mm
2
), but applying the service loadings to the structure results in a stress
increase to 185 ksi (1276 N/mm
2
), then Concept will consider the 10 ksi (69 N/mm
2
)stress change as an internal force, while
the 175 ksi (1207 N/mm
2
) initial stress is assumed to be considered in the applied loads. For this reason, the balance loading
should always be included in load combinations used for service calculations, The hyperstatic loading should never be
included in service calculations.
51.1.8 Tendons inclusion of force vector on a cross section
Tendons are excluded from a cross section if they cross the section at an angle of less than 15 degrees (i.e. if they are nearly
parallel to the cross section).
51.1.9 Tendons calculation of number of ducts
The calculation of number of tendon ducts for Code bar spacing rules uses the following:
an integral number of ducts is calculated from the area of prestressing steel and the specified A
ps
/ duct
the number is then modified by the vector component of the tendon
This is true regardless of the angle of the tendon to the cross section, so long as the tendon is considered in the cross section
(see Section 51.1.8).
51.1.10 Concrete Stress-Strain Curves
RAM Concept uses a parabolic-plastic stress-strain curve for concrete based on the Portland Cement Associations parabolic
stress-strain curve [see PCAs Notes on ACI 318-99 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Figure 6-8]. This
curve is used for both strength and service cross section analyses. The curve is totally defined by two parameters:
f
c
= Concrete Cylinder Strength
399 RAM Concept
Chapter 51
E
c
= Concrete Elastic Modulus (tangent at zero strain)
A third parameter, the strain at which the concrete behavior changes from parabolic to linear, is calculated:
0
= 2 (0.85 f
c
)/ E
c
For
c
< 0 (tension)
f
c
= 0
For 0 <
c
<
0
(parabolic range)
f
c
= 0.85 f
c
[2(
c
/
0
) (
c
/
0
)
2
]
For (plastic range)
f
c
= 0.85 f
c
51.1.11 Creep and Shrinkage Effects
RAM Concept considers creep and shrinkage in any cross section by modifying the concrete stress strain curves to be:
= f(( -
cs
)/k
c
)
where:
= stress in concrete
k
c
= concrete creep factor (typically 3.35 = 2.35 + 1.0)
= strain in cross section
cs
= shrinkage strain
f()= concrete material short-term stress-strain curve
This modified concrete stress-strain curve is only used in the ECR calcs. It is never used for gross-section or cracked-section
stress predictions.
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a default.
0 0.001 0.002 0.003 0.004

0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Fcstrain ( )
0.85fc
strain
400
Chapter 51
RAM Concept
51.1.12 Cracked Section Analyses
RAM Concept performs cracked section analyses by iteratively solving for a cross section strain (top strain and bottom
strain) that results in the cross section bending moment and axial force being equal to the applied moment and axial force.
In the cracked section analyses, Concept considers concrete to have no tension strength. Since concrete obviously does have
some tension strength, Concepts assumption is equivalent to considering that the concrete has been previously cracked by
some other loading condition. Concepts assumption is conservative. This pre-cracked assumption is used to determine the
cracked cross section stresses and the cracked moment of inertia. This assumption does not effect the ECR calculations as
Bransons formula does not consider the cracked moment of inertia unless the cross section stresses exceed the modulus of
rupture.
When a cross section with no concrete tension strains is analyzed with a cracked section analysis, Concepts analysis
methods result in a transformed section analysis.
The parameters considered in a Rule Sets cracked section analysis are
For ECR (Effective Curvature Ratio) Calcs Only - The creep coefficient as specified in the Load History / ECR tab of the
Calc Options dialog. This coefficient is the value of (total strain under constant stress) / (initial strain under same stress); a
typical value is 3.35 (1.0 for initial strain and 2.35 for creep strain)
For ECR Calcs Only - The shrinkage strain as specified in the Calc Options dialog.
The standard instantaneous concrete stress-strain curve as defined above.
All mild steel reinforcement (from all rule sets) in each cross section this is the value reported by the Design Status area
of steel plots, which will often be somewhat less than the value of the detailed reinforcement (number of bars and lengths).
The displacement of concrete by reinforcement is not considered.
The tendon stress strain curve for the type of rule set (see Tendons External Load or Internal Force? on page 398).
Cracked section analysis is not available for rule sets such as Minimum Design that do not inherently have a tendon
stress-strain curve type associated with them.
51.1.13 Bransons Stress Ratio
The most common method for determining an effective moment of inertia in concrete members is Bransons Formula:
I
e
= (M
cr
/M
a
)
4
I
g
+ [1 (M
cr
/M
a
)
4
] I
cr
where
I
e
= the effective moment of inertia
I
g
= the gross concrete moment of inertia
I
cr
= the cracked concrete moment of inertia
M
cr
= the gross cross section cracking moment
M
a
= the applied moment
As Bransons formula does not consider axial forces which may be present (especially in post-tensioned structures), we have
modified it to consider axial forces:
I
e
= (f
cr
/f
a
)
4
I
g
+ [1 (f
cr
/f
a
)
4
] I
cr
where
f
cr
= the concrete flexural tensile strength
f
a
= the cross-section tensile fiber stress (based on gross section properties)
401 RAM Concept
Chapter 51
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to Bransons formula. If there are axial forces, this formulation is
a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of Bransons formula.
We call the value (f
cr
/f
a
)
4
Bransons Stress Ratio. Its value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.
Note that you will more commonly see Bransons formula used with a power of 3 instead of 4. The power of 3 is appropriate
when a peak moment in a span is used to determine an effective moment of inertia for the entire span. The power of 4 is
appropriate for determining a local effective moment of inertia using local section forces [Branson, Dan E., Instantaneous
and Time-Dependent Deflections of Simple and Continuous Reinforced Concrete Beams, Report #7, Part 1, Alabama
Highway Research Department, Bureau of Public Roads, August 1963, pp.1-78].
51.1.14 Eurocode 2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio
The Eurocode 2 method for determining a distribution coefficient similar to Bransons stress ratio is given in Eurocode 2
equation 7.19:
where
= a coefficient taking account for the duration of loading
= 1.0 for a short-term loading (characteristic or frequent service rule set)
= 0.5 for sustained loads (quasi-permanent service rule set)
M
cr
= the gross cross section cracking moment
M
a
= the applied moment
This stress ratio is only the right hand side of equation 7.19 as we use this ratio to modify the uncracked results. In Eurocode
2 this stress ratio is subtracted from unity to be applied to the cracked results. As this formula does not consider axial forces
which may be present (especially in post-tensioned structures), we have modified it to consider axial forces:
where
f
cr
= the concrete flexural tensile strength
f
a
= the cross-section tensile fiber stress (based on gross section properties)
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to the eq. 7.19 formulation. If there are axial forces, this
formulation is a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of the Eurocode formula. This value is always
limited to be less than or equal to 1.0
51.1.15 Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio
RAM Concept calculates an effective curvature ratio at every cross section:
ECR = C
e
/ C
g
Where
ECR = the effective curvature ratio
C
e
= the effective cross section curvature (see calc below)
SR
M
cr
M
a
---------

2
=
SR
f
cr
f
a
------

2
=
402
Chapter 51
RAM Concept
C
g
= the gross section curvature
C
e
is calculated by the approximate formula:
C
e
= (k
c
BSR C
g
) + ((1 BSR) C
ccs
)
where
k
c
= the concrete material creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain / elastic strain
BSR = Bransons Stress Ratio or Eurocode 2 Stress Ratio (see Bransons Stress Ratio on page 400 or Eurocode
2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio on page 349)
C
ccs
= the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and shrinkage (see Cracked Section Analyses on
page 400)
Note that if gross-section stresses are kept below the concrete tensile strength, then the effective curvature ratio will be equal
to the concrete material creep factor (k
c
).
If post-tensioning is considered as an internal force (not an external load) for the active design rules, then the gross-section
calculations are performed with the post-tensioning primary forces added to the calculated cross section forces.
It is unusual, but possible, for the ECR value to be less than the concrete material creep factor (k
c
). These cases occur if the
amount of reinforcement is so large that the cracked stiffness (including concrete creep) is greater than the gross stiffness
(including concrete creep).
51.1.16 Use of ECR
ECR values are defined for curvatures of cross sections - we need to be able to transform them into a span deflection
multiplier for convenient design use.
The deflection of a span is proportional to the elastic energy in the span. Considering only bending energy of the gross
section:
Considering the ECR as softener of the gross section stiffness, this equation becomes:
From these two equations we can create a span deflection multiplier for convenient design use:
Deflection Multiplier =
ecr
/
g
Note that this multiplier will likely be conservative for indeterminate structures as the bending moments in the structure will
become rearranged (stiffer sections will attract more moment) in a manner that will reduce
ecr
.
Note: The deflection multiplier will always be less than the maximum ECR value in the span.
Note: The L.T. deflection plot uses this integral.
g
k M ( )
M EI ( )dl =
ecr
k M ( ) ECR ( )
M EI ( )dl =
k M ( ) ECR ( )
M EI ( )dl k M ( )
M EI ( )dl
M ( ) ECR ( )
M EI ( )dl M ( )
M EI ( )dl
403 RAM Concept
Chapter 51
51.1.17 Crack Width Predictions
Unless the design code in use specifies a calculation for estimating crack widths, RAM Concept estimates crack widths
based on a paper by Frosch [Frosch, R. J.,Another Look at Cracking and Crack Control in Reinforced Concrete, ACI
Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 3, May-June 1999, pp. 437-442].
In cracked concrete, with the concrete assumed to carry only small tension stress, the crack width can be calculated as:
w
c
=
c
s
c
where:
w
c
= crack width
c
= cross section strain at crack elevation
s
c
= crack spacing
The cross section strain (
c
) at the crack elevation can be easily calculated in a cracked-section analysis using the plane
sections remain plane assumption.
The crack spacing (s
c
) is more difficult to predict.
For reinforcement with no bond to the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be:
h s
c
2 h
where:
h = height of the tension zone
For reinforcement with no-slip with the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be:
d
*
s
c
2 d
*
where:
d
*
= distance from crack to centroid of nearest reinforcement
= for a single layer of reinforcement
where:
c = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement centroid
s
b
= spacing of reinforcement
For deformed bars without special coatings (such as epoxy), Frosch has shown that:
s
c
= 2 d
*
leads to reasonable predictions of the maximum crack width. RAM Concept uses this assumption, but limits d* to a
maximum value of h (the crack height); this limiting value typically only controls in slabs without bonded reinforcement.
The final equation RAM Concept uses for crack width calculation can be written as:
w
c
= 2
c
d
*
(d
*
h)
For multiple bars and layers of reinforcement, the reinforcement can be optimally placed such that:
d
*
= for all reinforcement i
c
2
s
b
2 ( )
2
+ ( )
c
i
2
s
i
2 ( )
2
+ ( )
404
Chapter 51
RAM Concept
w =
where:
c
i
= perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement i centroid
s
i
= length along on concrete tension face allocated to reinforcement i
w = width of concrete tension face
RAM Concept iteratively solves for d* (to within 1 mm), using all bonded reinforcement that when considered minimizes
the value of d*. When using bonded post-tensioning, each duct is considered as a reinforcing bar equivalent. Unbonded and
external post-tensioning are ignored. Tendons at an angle of less than 45 degrees to the cross section are ignored also.
51.1.18 Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations
Many design codes require that cross sections have a minimum moment capacity of at least some factor (often 1.2) times the
cracking load of the cross section. The cracking load is derived as follows:
f
cr
= (M
L
+ M
B
)/S (P
L
+ P
B
)/A
where:
f
cr
= the cracking stress
M
L
= the bending moment due to applied loads at time of cracking
M
B
= the bending moment due to the balance loading (same sign as M
L
)
S = the section modulus for the direction of bending (Z in some communities)
P
L
= the axial compression due to applied loads at time of cracking
P
B
= the axial compression due to the balance loading
A = the section area
Solving for M
L
results in:
M
L
= (f
cr
+ (P
L
+ P
B
)/A)S - M
B
Assuming that P
L
is zero:
M
L
= (f
cr
+ P
B
/A)S - M
B
Replacing M
B
with M
P
+ M
H
and P
B
with P
P
+ P
H
:
M
L
= (f
cr
+ (P
P
+ P
H
)/A)S (M
P
+ M
H
)
where:
M
P
= the primary post-tensioning bending moment
M
H
= the hyperstatic post-tensioning bending moment
P
P
= the primary post-tensioning axial compression
P
H
= the hyperstatic post-tensioning axial compression (typically negative)
Multiplying by 1.2 to get 1.2 times the cracking load:
1.2 M
L
= 1.2 (f
cr
+ (P
P
+ P
H
)/A) S 1.2 (M
P
+ M
H
)
s
i
405 RAM Concept
Chapter 51
To get the design bending moment, we add in the hyperstatic bending moment:
M
D
= 1.2 M
L
+ M
H
= 1.2 (f
cr
+ (P
P
+ P
H
)/A) S 1.2 (M
P
+ M
H
) + M
H
Simplifying:
M
D
= 1.2 (f
cr
+(P
P
+ P
H
)/A) S 1.2 M
P
0.2 M
H
It is common and usually conservative to assume that P
H
is zero:
M
D
= 1.2 (f
cr
+P
P
/A) S 1.2 M
P
0.2 M
H
It is common (although not technically correct) to ignore the 0.2 M
H
, giving the final design moment equation:
M
D
= 1.2 (f
cr
+ P
P
/A) S 1.2 M
P
51.1.19 Concrete Core Determination
The core of the cross section is used in various calculations.
Refer to About shear core on page 105 of Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips for explanation of the core calculation.
Tendon ducts in this core are investigated.
Ducts are assumed to have the same heights as their widths and are assumed to be rectangular in shape. For all
standard ducts, these assumptions give a conservative approximation of overlapping.
Ducts are assumed to be centered on the prestressing steel that they contain (this is not true in the real structure, but
this assumption rarely has any impact on the calculation result).
Any horizontal line across the core is investigated to determine the maximum total width of duct across the shear
area. Bonded duct widths and unbonded duct widths are multiplied by factors that differ for each code. For example,
in BS 8110, 2/3 of bonded duct widths are considered, and full unbonded duct widths are considered. For ACI, the
factors are zero, so the duct width is never excluded.
The web width is equal to the core width minus the maximum total width of duct across the shear area.
51.1.20 Torsion Considerations
RAM Concept can consider torsion on a cross section in four different ways, depending upon the properties of the design
strip segment or the design section. The four approaches are:
The methods considered are:
Beam
Considers torsion by designing with code beam torsion equations.
As Shear
Assumes torsion is carried entirely by varying shear across the cross-section core length L.
The shear force per unit length is v = 6 T / L
2
The design shear force is V
d
= V +/- 6 T / L
As Bending
Considers torsion by adding the torsion to the bending moment and designing bending for the combined total M
d
=
M +/- T.
Wood-Armer
Refer to Wood-Armer Torsion Design on page 406.
None
Torsion is not considered in any way.
406
Chapter 51
RAM Concept
51.1.21 Wood-Armer Torsion Design
This new torsion design option allows the designer to use the Wood-Armer approach to handle twisting moments in slabs.
To provide this torsion design options, a new cross section analysis quantity, Absolute Twist, is calculated.
You can plot Absolute Twist, as shown in Figure 30-5 of Chapter 30, Plotting Results.
When you choose the Wood-Armer torsion design, every set of design forces is converted into two sets of design forces,
identical to the original except with the design moments changed to:
M
d
= M + AT, and
M
d
= M - AT
where AT = absolute twist
The Wood-Armer method (as originally developed by Wood and Armer) was intended to be applied at every point in the
slab; Concepts implementation is an extrapolation of the method for use in cross sections.
The Wood-Armer method is NOT applicable to beams, and is not recommended for strips containing beams.
References
Wood, R. H., The Reinforcement of Slabs in Accordance with a Pre-Determined Field of Moments, Concrete, vol. 2,
pp. 69-76, February 1968.
Armer, G. S. T., Discussion, Concrete, vol. 2, pp. 319-320, August 1968.
407 RAM Concept
Chapter 52
52 Live Load Reduction Notes
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of live load reduction.
52.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets
RAM Concept individually applies live load reduction to each loading of each column, punching check, design strip
segment and design section. For example, the reduction factor for a column may be different for a Live (Reducible) Loading
than for a Live (Storage) Loading.
52.1.1 Loadings
While RAM Concept calculates the live load reductions per loading (and per member), the reductions do not affect the
loading analysis. The analysis results that Concept displays for loadings are never reduced by live load reduction.
52.1.2 Load Combinations and Rule Sets
When RAM Concept combines loadings into load combinations, it considers the live load reduction of each loading added to
the load combination. The analysis results that Concept displays for load combinations are always reduced by live load
reduction.
Similarly when Concept envelopes load combinations into Rule Sets, it considers live load reduction as all of the load
combinations being enveloped have already been modified by the reduction factors. The analysis results that Concept
displays for rule sets are always reduced by live load reduction.
Note: Remember that Concept only reduces live load on columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design
sections.
Note: See Viewing live load reduction results on page 157 for more information.
52.2 Tributary Area Calculations
When a loading on a structure is uniform, it is common to assign to each structural member a tributary area that the
member (alone) supports. This assignment is typically performed by a simplistic visual analysis. The assigned area is not
truly supported by only the member to which it is assigned. The effects of the (true) uniform loading on the member are
similar to the effects if the entire load of the tributary area was applied to the member. Most design codes use the tributary
area as the primary parameter in the live load reduction calculations.
RAM Concept calculates tributary areas by applying a unit uniform load to the entire slab and analyzing the flow of the
vertical forces. The tributary areas for the following members are calculated from the unit load as follows:
Columns - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero.
Walls - (not currently reduced).
Punching Checks - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero.
Design Strip Segments - the absolute value of the difference between the vertical shears at both ends. When multiple
segments make up a span, the segments combined tributary areas are used in calculations.
Design Sections - the absolute value of the shear.
With the above calculations, it is possible (but not common) for the sum of the tributary areas of walls and columns to
exceed the total floor area. This happens when one or more of the support reactions are negative.
408
Chapter 52
RAM Concept
52.3 Influence Area Calculations
ASCE-7 and IBC 2003 use an influence area instead of a tributary area in their live load reduction calculations. The
influence area is defined as the floor area over which the influence surface for structural effects is significantly different
from zero.
Influence areas are not calculated when BS 6399 or AS/NZ 1170.1 are used.
RAM Concept uses heuristic methods to calculate influence areas. These methods tend to define areas that are similar to
those of that engineers would produce visually, but the methods do not calculate areas that are exactly the same as an
engineer might calculate manually. Concept's influence areas can be shown on the plans so you can inspect the areas that
Concept is using in its live load reduction calculations.
Per ASCE-7 and IBC 2003, Concept limits the influence areas to be no larger than the following multiple of the tributary
area:
Figure 52-1 Maximum multiple of influence area to tributary
52.3.1 Example of Influence Areas
Figure 52-2 through Figure 52-6 shows RAM Concept's influence areas and the influence areas commonly used by
engineers for a few slab conditions.
Some engineers might (erroneously) suggest that the tributary area of the column in Figure 52-2 is 600 square feet, but
continuity effects would obviously increase that value. The results show that the tributary area is actually 952 square feet.
Figure 52-2 Slab layout with dimensions in feet from center of column to centerline of walls. An engineer would typically deem the influence area to be 2400
square feet.
Tributary Area Multiple
Columns 4
Punching Checks 4
Beam Design Strips 2
Slab Design Strips 1
409 RAM Concept
Chapter 52
Figure 52-3 Column and punching check influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
Figure 52-4 Design strip segments
410
Chapter 52
RAM Concept
Figure 52-5 Design strip segment influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
Figure 52-6 Column and punching check influence areas for an irregular floor.
52.4 ASCE-7 2002 Live Load Reduction
ASCE-7 live load reduction is specified in code section 4.8. Live load effects on members with influence areas of less than
400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except
that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 4.8.2 and 4.8.3. These two load
types must be drawn on a Live (storage) loading to be considered appropriately.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section 4.8.4. These
loads must be drawn on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately
The tributary area of one-way slabs is not limited per section 4.8.5. However, if you limit the design strip width to 1.5 times
the span length, and the behavior is that of a one-way slab, then the requirements of this code section will be met.
Note: ASCE-7 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
411 RAM Concept
Chapter 52
52.5 ASCE-7 2010 Live Load Reduction
ASCE-7 live load reduction is specified in code section 4.7. Live load effects on members with influence areas of less than
400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except
that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 4.7.3 and 4.7.4. These two load
types must be drawn on a Live (storage) loading to be considered appropriately.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section 4.7.5. These
loads must be drawn on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately
The tributary area of one-way slabs is not limited per section 4.7.6. However, if you limit the design strip width to 1.5 times
the span length, and the behavior is that of a one-way slab, then the requirements of this code section will be met.
Note: ASCE-7 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
52.6 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction
IBC 2003 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.9. Live load effects on members with influence areas of less
than 400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction.
IBC 2003 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except
that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 1607.9.1.1 and 1607.9.1.2. These
two load types must be drawn on a Live (storage) loading to be considered appropriately.
IBC 2003 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section
1607.9.1.3. These loads must be drawn on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately.
The reduction of live loads for one-way slabs is not permitted per section 1607.9.1.4. RAM Concept will never reduce one-
way slab loads if IBC 2003 is selected.
Note: IBC 2003 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
IBC 2006 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section
1607.9.1.3. These loads must be drawn on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately.
The reduction of live loads for one-way slabs is not permitted per section 1607.9.1.4. RAM Concept will never reduce one-
way slab loads if IBC 2006 is selected.
412
Chapter 52
RAM Concept
IBC 2009 requires that live loads of 100 psf and at areas where fixed seats are located in Group A occupancies cannot be
reduced per section 1607.9.1.4. These loads must be drawn on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately.
The tributary area of one-way slabs is limited by section 1607.9.1.1.
52.9 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction
UBC 1997 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.5. Live load effects on members with tributary areas of 150
square feet or less are not modified by live load reduction.
Equation (7-2) [R = 23.1 (1 + D/L)] is not considered in live load reduction calculations. This value needs to be calculated
and set by the user in the maximum reduction property.
UBC 1997 requires that storage loads in excess of 100 psf shall not be reduced, except that live loads on columns may be
reduced up to 20%. These loads must be drawn on a Live (Storage) loading to be considered appropriately.
UBC 1997 requires that other live loads in excess of 100 psf or in places of public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced.
These loads must be drawn on a Live (Unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately.
UBC 1997 can be used as IBC 2003 alternate live load reduction in accordance with IBC section 1607.9.2. Because
minimum parking loads in UBC 1997 are higher than IBC 2003 minimum parking loads, it may not be appropriate to apply
UBC 1997 parking garage reduction provisions to IBC 2003 loadings. For this reason, parking garage loads should be drawn
on a Live (Storage) loading and thus will get a maximum 20% reduction on columns and no live load reduction on other
members.
52.10 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction
AS/NZS 1170.1 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.4.2.
When using AS/NZS 1170.1 to perform live load reduction, only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced.
Live (Storage) loadings are assumed to have loads greater than 5 kPa and are therefore not reducible per 3.4.2(ii).
Loading effects on one-way slabs are not reduced per 3.4.2(v).
For other member types, the reduction is calculated per the formula in 3.4.2(b).
Note: Section 3.4.2 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).
52.11 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction
BS 6399 live load reduction is specified in code sections 6.1 through 6.3.
413 RAM Concept
Chapter 52
Only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced.
For columns, the Table 2 and Table 3 values from the code are calculated and the greater of the two reductions is used. For
other members, the Table 3 values are used.
For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same reduction factor as the axial force values; this is different
from what is specified in the note in Section 6.2 of BS 6399. This does not affect any design in RAM Concept (or the RAM
Structural System), but it does affect the reported column reaction values.
Live load reduction is not used for one-way and two-ways slabs.
52.12 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction
IS 875 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.2.
For columns, only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced. For beams, both Live (Reducible) and
Live (Storage) loadings are reduced.
For columns, the table in section 3.2.1 is implemented. The 5 kN/m2 provisions in section 3.2.1.1 are not implemented.
For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same reduction factor as the axial force values.
For beams, the reductions in section 3.2.2 are implemented. The limitations of subsections a through d are not
implemented as all loads on a Live (Reducible) or Live (Storage) loading layer are assumed to be reducible.
Live load reduction is not used for one-way slabs, two-way slabs and punching checks.
52.13 Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction
Eurocode 1 live load reduction is specified in code clause 6.3.1.2(10-11) and UK NA 2.5-2.6.
Only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced.
For columns, equation NA.1 and NA.2 values from the UK National Annex are calculated and the greater of the two
reductions is used. For other members, equation NA.1 values are used.
Note: Eurocode 1 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).
52.14 National Building Code of Canada 2005 Live Load Reduction
NBC 2005 live load reduction is specified in code clause 4.1.5.9.
Only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) , Live (Storage), and Live (Parking) types are reduced. Live (Reducible)
loads are reduced in accordance with 4.1.5.9 2), and Live (Storage) and Live (Parking) types are reduced in accordance with
4.1.5.9 3).
52.15 Mat Foundations
In the design of mat foundations supporting columns (and/or walls) supporting levels above, the live load reductions need to
be applied to the loads instead of the member forces. The loads need to be reduced instead of the member forces for two
414
Chapter 52
RAM Concept
reasons: 1) there is a clear understanding of the tributary area for the loads while (in most cases) there is not a clear
understanding of the tributary area for the design strips; and 2) the zero-tension soil reaction iterations need to be performed
with the reduced loads.
For mat foundations, the live load reduction code should always be set to None. Otherwise the live loads may be reduced
twice.
Mat foundation loads that are imported from the RAM Structural System will be automatically reduced appropriately (by the
RAM Structural System). User-drawn loads will need to be reduced manually.
52.16 Special Member Considerations
52.16.1 Columns Above the Slab
Columns above the slab will have zero tributary area and zero influence area assigned to them in the automated area
calculations. If you want to have live load reduction applied to columns above the slab you will need to manually specify the
areas to use.
52.16.2 Columns Above and Below the Slab
When the reactions for columns above and below the slab are reported together, the live load reduction for the column below
the slab is used.
Because of this, the separate reported reactions for the column below and the column above will not necessarily sum to the
reported reaction for the column above and below.
415 RAM Concept
Chapter 53
53 Reinforcement Notes
This chapter provides information on how RAM Concept
utilizes span detailing, calculates reinforcement
development lengths and lays out and details
reinforcement.
53.1 Span detailing
Span Detailing is the process of determining the peak
reinforcement requirements in a region (normally support
or mid-span) and then extending the reinforcement based
upon code or user defined rules.
Code based span detailing are rules prescribed by the
applicable building code. The detailed reinforcement for
these spans can be non-symmetrical depending upon
whether or not the span is continuous. The Code span
detailing option uses the applicable code rules for
continuous and end spans (as well as cantilevers), where
applicable. Concept's Code span detailing generally
implements some, but not all, of the specified detailing
rules for a code. Refer to the code span detailing sections
for further information (Sections 53.1.3, 53.1.4, 53.1.6 and
53.1.7 on page 416).
User defined span detailing rules are controlled via the
following screen accessed via Criteria > Detailing Rules.
Figure 53-1 Span Detailing Parameters (Criteria > Detailing Rules)
A, B, and C represent different sets of reinforcement used
to detail rebar in the support region. E, F, and G represent
different sets of reinforcement used to detail rebar in the
span region. Each set of reinforcement has an associated
fraction which is the amount of the peak reinforcement
quantity to assign to that set. The sum of the three fractions
should always be between 0 and 1. The R1, R2 values
represent factors to be multiplied by the span length to
arrive at a set's desired bar lengths.
Span detailing in accordance with user rules is always
symmetrical in a span (but not in a cantilever). The R1
value is applied to the cantilever such that the cantilever is
assumed to be that portion of a full span up to the point of
contraflexure, assumed to be 20% of a continuous span's
length (hence the factor of 5 applied to Lc).
Span Detailing is controlled via the span segment dialog.
See Section 22.5 of Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips.
Figure 53-2 Span segment dialog box
53.1.1 About Concepts detailing calculations
Two sets of design results are calculated in Concept - With
span detailing and Without span detailing.
Without span detailing simply considers the results without
extending any reinforcement for span detailing. This is
termed the raw reinforcement.
With Span Detailing considers the results considering the
detailed reinforcement as a minimum requirement.
Some other modifications to the span detailed summary
diagram are done. The developed requirements are
removed from inside the support regions (there is still the
requirement that the reinforcement is developed at the face
of the support). Also, for cantilevers, the span detailed
requirements are removed from the last cross section to the
end of the span. Also, in the summary reinforcement, at the
end of each pass an assumed amount of developed
reinforcement is calculated from the AsRaw requirements
and the length available for development, and applied as a
minimum AsDev requirement in each cross section.
416
Chapter 53
RAM Concept
53.1.2 Span detailing assumptions
The following general assumptions are made when
performing span detailing:
The peak reinforcement in each region is determined by
taking the maximum reinforcement demand in every cross
section over the following regions:
Support - from support to 0.15L into the span
Span - from 0.35L to 0.65L
For a cantilever, the entire span is considered to be in the
support region, and none of the span is considered to be in
the span region
For a span with no supports defined, the entire span is
considered to be in the span region, and none of the span
is considered to be in the support region
Bar length calculations either consider the span length
to center of support, or the clear span length depending
upon the code rules (see specific code sections for more
details: sections 53.1.3, 53.1.4, 53.1.6 and 53.1.7).
Bar length calculations consider the support width as
necessary (see specific code section for more details)
At the supports, the lengths of the adjacent span's bar
sets are considered in order to keep the detailed bars
centered on the supports as much as possible. If an
adjacent span has different fractions than the one being
detailed, the bar length for this span is determined by
selecting the longer of the following length fractions:
the span length and length fraction corresponding
to this bar set
the span length and length fraction of any adjacent
span bar set whose fraction overlaps this bar set's
fraction
The span detailing is performed in pass 0 before the main
design steps begin. The following outlines the pass 0
process:
1 Any user defined reinforcement is removed from the
cross sections in the span.
2 A normal pass 1 is designed on the span (with the user
defined reinforcement removed).
3 From the resulting design, the peak reinforcement in each
region (support and span) is detailed according to the user
specified or code span detailing rules.
4 The user defined reinforcement is subtracted from the
step 3 requirements, which results in the final pass 0 span
detailed requirements. The resulting pass 0 design can be
approximate if the subtracted user defined reinforcement
does not have the same properties as the program designed
reinforcement at that location. The final designed
reinforcement for each cross section, which will be deter-
mined in future passes, will always be accurate.
The pass 0 summarized span detailed design requirements
are used as the starting point for the pass 2 span detailed
design.
53.1.3 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05, 318-08,
318-11 Code Span Detailing Rules
RC Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 12.12.3 is
implemented in support regions. For this provision, the
inflection point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span
from the face of support. ACI 12.11.1 is implemented in
span regions.
RC Two-Way Slabs Figure 13.3.8 (without drop panels)
is implemented in support and span regions.
PT Beams, One-Way Slabs, and Two-Way Slabs
Rule 18.9.4.2 is implemented in support regions. Rule
18.9.4.1 is implemented in span regions.
53.1.4 AS 3600 - 2001 Code Span Detailing
Rules
RC and PT Beams Rule 8.1.8.6 (a) and (b) is
implemented in support and span regions.
RC and PT One-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.2 is
RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.4 is
53.1.5 AS 3600 - 2009 Code Span Detailing
Rules
RC and PT Beams Rule 8.1.10.6 (a) and (b) is
RC and PT One-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.2 is
RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.4 is
53.1.6 BS 8110 - 1997 Code Span Detailing
Rules
RC Beams and Slabs, PT Beams and One-Way
Slabs Figures 3.24 and 3.25 are implemented in support
and span regions.
PT Two-Way Slabs TR-43 rule 6.10.6 is implemented in
support and span regions.
417 RAM Concept
Chapter 53
53.1.7 IS 456 - 2000 Code Span Detailing
Rules
RC and PT Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 26.2.3.4
is implemented in support regions. For this provision, the
inflection point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span
from the face of support. Rule 26.2.3.3 is implemented in
span regions.
RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 16 (without drop
panel) is implemented in support and span regions.
53.1.8 EC2 Code Span Detailing Rules
RC Beams and Slabs, PT Beams and One-Way
Slabs Figures 8 and 10 from Chapter 10 of The Concrete
Centre publication How to Design Concrete Structures
using Eurocode 2 are implemented in support and span
regions.
PT Two-Way Slabs TR-43 rule 5.8.8 is implemented in
support and span regions.
53.2 Development lengths / anchorage
Note: The term development length is used in this chapter.
In some countries, the term anchorage is used rather than
development length.
This section presents an overview of the development
length calculations performed in RAM Concept.
Development length calculations in Concept can be treated
as per Code Rules, or development lengths can be specified
by the user for a particular reinforcing bar as a multiple of
the bar diameter.
The general implementation used for calculating
development lengths is:
The clear spacing of the bars will be detailed to be
greater than twice the minimum cover. This is the respon-
sibility of the user, and is not checked by Concept.
Each Code has a desired extension length beyond the
theoretical cutoff point of the reinforcement.
The desired extension length for ACI 318, BS 8110, and
IS 456 is the maximum of d (effective depth) or 12 times
the diameter of the bar. This is required primarily because
diagonal tension cracks in a flexural member without
transverse shear reinforcement may shift the location of
the calculated tensile stress in a bar approximately d
(effective depth) towards a point of zero moment. Refer to
ACI 318 12.10.3, BS 8110 3.12.9.1, and IS 456 26.2.3.1.
For AS 3600, the desired extension length, D, is used to
satisfy provision 8.1.8.1 (2001) or 8.1.10.1 (2009)
requiring use of a shifted moment diagram for design.
While this implementation is not in strict compliance with
the Code provisions near the ends of a member, it meets
the design intent away from the ends.
For a user defined bar, the effective development for any
point along the bar is calculated in accordance with the
following diagram. This approach is not used for AS 3600
- see section 53.2.2 on page page 418 for more details.
The end of any user defined bar that is close to a
slab edge such that it could not be extended will use
a desired extension length of zero.
For any length less than the additional extension
length, the effective development is zero.
For any length greater than or equal to the desired
additional extension length, but less than the full
development length, the effective percentage devel-
opment is (provided length)/(full development
length) x 100%. This is accomplished by consid-
ering a fraction of each bar developed.
For any length greater than the full development
length, the effective development is 100%.
Figure 53-3 Effective development at any point along a bar. (This does not
apply to AS3600 - see Figure 53-4)
When laying out program-designed bars, Concept uses
the first option in the following list that fits in the slab:
Straight bar end with full development length and
full extension length.
Straight bar end with full development length and
partial (or no) extension length.
90 degree hook bar end with 90 degree hook
development length
180 degree hook bar end with 180 degree hook
development length
Anchored bar end with no development length
If the end of a bar is closer to a slab edge than the
specified end cover, the bar will automatically be labeled
anchored in Concept and considered to be fully
developed.
418
Chapter 53
RAM Concept
Development lengths of bars in compression are not
considered. Tension development lengths are used in all
locations where development of reinforcement is
required, regardless of the actual stresses on the
reinforcing bar.
53.2.1 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05, 318-08,
318-11 Development Lengths
Basic straight tension development length is calculated
using equation 12-1. The following factors are used in this
equation:
= reinforcement location factor
concrete below is taken as the depth from the rebar
center to the bottom of the concrete section
1.3 for concrete below > 12 inches
1.0 for concrete below < 12 inches
= coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar)
less than 3d
b
(spacing is not calculated)
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
1.0 for uncoated bars
Note: the product is never taken as greater than 1.7.
= reinforcement size factor
0.8 for #6 and smaller bars
1.0 for #7 and larger bars
= lightweight aggregate concrete factor
1.3 for concrete density < 120 pcf
1.0 for concrete density > 120 pcf
c = cover dimension, vertical distance from the center of
the bar to the nearest concrete surface (spacing is not
considered)
The term (c + K
tr
)/d
b
is never taken greater than 2.5
K
tr
= conservatively assumed to be zero
For development of standard hooks, basic tension
development length is calculated in accordance with the
following equation:
The following factors are used to modify this basic length:
Bar yield strength factor = f
y
/ 60 where f
y
is in ksi
(12.5.3.1)
Lightweight aggregate concrete factor:(12.5.3.5)
1.3 for concrete density < 120 pcf
1.0 for concrete density > 120 pcf
Epoxy-coated reinforcement factor = 1.2(12.5.3.6)
The following factors / provisions are not used:
Concrete cover (12.5.3.2) and Ties or stirrups
(12.5.3.3)
In accordance with ACI 318 12.10.3, the extension length
used for this Code is the maximum of 12 d
b
or the effective
depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical
distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the
farthest concrete surface.
53.2.2 AS 3600 Development Lengths
For a user defined bar, the effective development for any
point along the bar is calculated in accordance with Figure
53-4.
The end of any user defined bar that is close to a
slab edge such that it could not be extended will use
a desired extension length of zero. For other situa-
tions, the desired extension length is D, the overall
depth of the member
For any length less than the desired extension
length D, the effective development is zero.
For any length greater than or equal to the
additional extension length, but less than the full
development length, the effective percentage devel-
opment is (provided length - desired extension
length) / (full development length) x 100%. This is
accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar
developed.
For a program designed bar, when the bar is
detailed the bar will be extended the full devel-
opment length plus the desired extension length. If a
bar is unable to be extended this full desired length,
Concept will attempt to extend the bar just the
straight development length, then the 90 degree
hook development length, and the 180 degree hook
development length. If there is not enough extension
space to satisfy any of these conditions, an anchor
will be placed at the end of the bar and it will be
considered fully developed from that point.
Figure 53-4 Effective development at any point along a bar for the undis-
placed moment diagram (for AS3600 ONLY)
1200d
b
f
c
------------------
419 RAM Concept
Chapter 53
AS 3600-2001
using equation 13.1.2.1(a). The following factors are used
in this equation:
k
1
concrete below is taken as the depth from the
bar center to the bottom of the concrete section
1.25 for concrete below > 300 mm
1.0 for concrete below < 300 mm
k
2
= 2.4 (conservatively)
f
sy
= yield stress of bar
A
b
= cross sectional area of reinforcing bar
2a + d
b
= twice the vertical distance from the
nearest concrete surface to the center of the bar
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are
applied:
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of
bar) less than 3d
b
(spacing is not calculated)
lightweight aggregate concrete factor:
1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m
3
1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m
3
development length is calculated as half the straight tension
development length in accordance with Clause 13.1.2.4.
In accordance with 8.1.8.1, the extension length used for
this Code is the overall depth of the section. This extension
is applied in addition to the required development length.
Concept applies the extension length to satisfy the Code
provision requiring the displacement of the bending
moment envelopes by a distance D. There are some
noteworthy differences between Concept's approach and
the Code provision:
In most circumstances, extending the bar by a distance
D beyond the required development length will satisfy the
intent of the Code.
Near the ends of members, where the displaced moment
diagram would cause an increased design moment,
Concept will design for the unmodified moment diagram,
but will still ensure proper development is satisfied.
AS 3600-2009
using equation 13.1.2.2. The following factors are used in
this equation:
k
1
concrete below is taken as the depth from the
bar center to the bottom of the concrete section
1.3 for concrete below > 300 mm
1.0 for concrete below < 300 mm
k
2
= (132 - d
b
)/100
f
sy
= yield stress of bar
c
d
= assumed to be the vertical clear cover,
implying that the minimum bar clear spacing is
greater than or equal to twice the clear cover
In addition, the following factors are applied:
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars
3
3
development length is calculated as half the straight tension
development length in accordance with Clause 13.1.2.6.
this Code is the overall depth of the section. This extension
is applied in addition to the required development length.
53.2.3 BS 8110-1997 Development Lengths
using combined equations 48 and 49.
The resulting equation is:
where:
f
y
= yield stress of the bar
d
b
= diameter of the bar
= material strength reduction factor
l
d
f
y
d
b
m
4 f
cu

------------------------------------- =
m
420
Chapter 53
RAM Concept
= 0.5 (assumed Type 2 bars with minimum links in
beams)
Note: If any bars other than Type 2 deformed bar are used
or if minimum links in accordance with Table 3.7 are not
provided, the development lengths will need to be specified
manually. Table 3.27 can assist with this.
applied:
coating factor
bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
3
3
For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is
assumed to be 2d
b
for bar diameters less than or equal to
18mm and 3.5d
b
for bar diameters greater than 18mm.
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is
4 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed 12d
b
in
accordance with 3.12.8.23 (b)
For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook
is 8 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed 24d
b
in
accordance with 3.12.8.23 (a)
this Code is the maximum of 12 d
b
or the effective depth of
the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from
the center of the reinforcing bar to the farthest concrete
surface.
53.2.4 IS 456-2000 Development Lengths
using clause 26.2.1:
where:
f
y
= yield stress of the bar
= design bond stress given in Table 26.2.1.1
For high strength deformed bars, the bond stress can be
increased by 60 percent. This increase is assumed for any
bar with f
y
> 250 N/mm
2
.
applied:
coating factor
3
3
For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is
assumed to be 2d
b
for bars with yield stress less than or
equal to 250 N/mm
2
and 4d
b
for bars with yield stress
greater than 250 N/mm
2
.
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is
8 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with 26.2.2.1
(1).
For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook
is 16 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with
26.2.2.1 (2).
this Code is the maximum of 12 d
b
or the effective depth of
the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from
the center of the reinforcing bar to the farthest concrete
surface.
53.2.5 EC2 Development Lengths
Basic anchorage length is calculated using clause 8.4.3:
where:
= design yield stress of the bar =
= ultimate bond stress given by equation 8.2
The design anchorage length is calculated in accordance
with 8.4.4:
l
d
f
y

4
bd
--------------- =
bd
l
b rqd ,
sd

4 f
bd
---------------- =
sd
f
yk
m
-------
f
bd
421 RAM Concept
Chapter 53
where:
= bar shape factor from Table 8.1
= concrete factor from Table 8.1
= 1.0 (tranverse reinforcement not considered)
= 1.0 (transverse reinforcement not considered)
= 1.0 (transverse pressure not considered)

For beams, the minimum cover c
d
is assumed to be 25 mm.
As such, the minimum clear spacing between bars should
be detailed as 50 mm.
For slabs, the minimum cover c
d
for straight bars is
calculated as the minimum vertical clear cover to the
nearest concrete surface. For bent bars the cover c
d
is
calculated as 5 times the bar diameter. The minimum clear
spacing between bent bars should thus be detailed as 10
times the bar diameter.
Anchorage length for bent bars is determined using Figure
8.1(a) and using the minimum bend diameters from Table
8.1N(a)
A concrete density factor calculated in accordance with
equation 11.1 is applied to the calculation of f
bd
in equation
8.2.
In addition, the following factor (from ACI 318) are
applied:
coating factor
53.3 How RAM Concept lays out program
reinforcement
Note: This section describes Concept's layout of longitu-
dinal program reinforcement. Neither transverse
reinforcement nor SSR are considered here.
Concept considers all of the spans' and all of the design
sections' designs when laying out program reinforcement.
Concept's layout algorithm uses 5 steps as follows:
Step 1 Divide reinforcement requirements into groups.
Concept divides all the span and section reinforcement
requirements into similar groups by considering the
following characteristics:
Span Direction - latitude or longitude
Slab Face - top or bottom
Reinforcement Elevation - the absolute elevation of the
reinforcement
Reinforcement Orientation - the plan view orientation of
the reinforcement (always perpendicular to the cross
sections)
Requirements with all similar characteristics are grouped
together for further processing.
Step 2 Find regions of overlapping and nearby
requirement
For each requirement group, Concept then finds
requirements in a region that may be able to be satisfied by
the same reinforcement callout.
Step 3 Create preliminary callouts for each region
For each region's requirements, Concept creates an optimal
set of reinforcement callouts considering the cost factors
specified in the General tab of the Calc Options dialog.
These preliminary callouts do not consider development
lengths.
Step 4 Consider development lengths
For each preliminary callout, Concept investigates all of
the related cross sections and determines (considering the
area of developed reinforcement and the total area of
reinforcement required at each cross section) the necessary
extension of the bar beyond the related cross sections.
If the required bar extension cannot be provided (due to a
slab edge or bar end cover requirements), reduced
extensions using 90-degree or 180-degree hooks are
investigated. If the hooks will not provide the adequate
development, anchors will be placed at the end of the bar.
Note: Any bar that is required to extend to within the end
cover distance of a slab edge will be given an anchor end
condition.
Step 5 Convert to concentrated program reinforcement
As a final step, Concept converts the bar callouts (including
development lengths and bar end conditions) into
concentrated program reinforcement.
l
bd
5
l
b rqd ,
l
b mi n ,
=
5
l
b mi n ,
max 0.3l
b rqd ,
10 100mm , , { }
422
Chapter 53
RAM Concept
See also Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters
on page 151 of Chapter 28, Calculating Results.
53.4 How Concept details user and
program reinforcement
Concept generates individual bars from concentrated and
distributed user reinforcement. This facilitates the
consideration of the individual bars in its cross section and
span design calculations.
Also, the generation of individual bars allows Concept to
display program or user reinforcement in perspective
drawings.
The bars are still tagged as user since they are generated
directly from user reinforcement.
Concept also generates individual bars from its
concentrated design reinforcement. These program
individual bars are for display purposes only and are not
used in calculations.
The concentrated and distributed reinforcement is detailed
into individual bars in 5 steps as follows:
Step 1 Create a preliminary layout of bars
Using the shape of the reinforcement region (rectangle or
parallelogram for concentrated, and polygon for
distributed), the reinforcement orientation and the
spacing/quantity of bars, Concept determines a preliminary
layout of parallel bar locations.
For Concentrated bars, the first and last bars from the edge
are always inset by a half bar spacing distance.
Step 2 Determine the elevation of the bars
Each concentrated or distributed reinforcement callout has
an elevation reference point. For Concentrated
reinforcement, the elevation reference point is the location
where the (symbolic) bar and the extent arrow intersect.
For distributed reinforcement, the elevation reference point
is shown as a circle in the center of the (symbolic) bar.
The elevation of the surface and soffit of the slab are
determined at the elevation reference point and this
information along with the reinforcement elevation
reference (absolute, above surface, above soffit, top cover
or bottom cover) and elevation values determines the
absolute elevation of the bars that the callout creates. See
Figures 53-5 and 53-6.
Step 3 Determine the slab shape at the bar elevation
For each bar elevation, Concept determines the shape of the
slab. This shape may be one contiguous shape or it may be
comprised of multiple separate shapes.
Step 4 Trim the preliminary layout of bars with the
elevation slab shape
The preliminary layout of bars is trimmed by the slab shape
determined in step 3. Additionally, the required end cover
(as defined in the General tab of the Calc Options dialog)
may shorten a bar further. This trimming may convert a
single bar into multiple bars, or may eliminate a bar
altogether.
Note that bars with anchor ends do not consider the
required end cover. They are only trimmed by the slab
shape at the bar elevation.
Step 5 Convert the trimmed bar locations to individual
bars
Lastly, Concept converts the trimmed preliminary layout of
bars into individual bars. This conversion sets the
individual bars generated from user reinforcement to be
423 RAM Concept
Chapter 53
user bars and those generated by program
reinforcement to be program bars.
Note: The detailing of user reinforcement takes place
before the design calculations and the detailing of program
reinforcement takes place after the design calculations.
Figure 53-5 Stepped one-way slab with two reinforcement objects identi-
cal except for the respective location of the elevation reference point.
Figure 53-6 Reinforcement bars detailed by Concept from Figure 53-5
53.5 How Concept treats transverse
reinforcement and individual transverse
bars
Concept generates transverse reinforcement and individual
transverse bars from the results of its shear and torsion
calculations. This generated reinforcement is for display
purposes only - it is not used in calculations and cannot be
changed to user reinforcement.
At locations of complicated geometry (such as multiple
beams in a single span design, or curved beams), Concept
may not be able to create an appropriate representation of
the reinforcement required by the design calculations. The
correct design quantities can always be viewed in the
Section Design plots of the Design Status layer.
Note: Reinforcement required for torsion should always
have 2 legs selected in the design spans. Otherwise
Concept's design will show a correct overall quantity of
reinforcement, but will not show a correct selection of
closed and open ties.
Note: Transverse reinforcement required by design
sections is NOT shown on the Reinforcement layer. This is
another reason why design spans are preferable to design
sections.
53.6 Example 1: reinforcement results
The introduction of the reinforcement layer and
reinforcement detailing makes Concept much more
powerful and complicated.
The following example shows the effect, for a two span
slab supported by walls, of:
using the span detailer set to code in design strips, and
different plot options
using Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters
in the General tab of the Calc Options tab
two different rule sets: strength and code minimum
53.6.1 Strength (only) calculations
This section shows results where only the strength rule set
is considered.
Design Status layer
The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on
the reinforcement for the design status layer.
Figure 53-7 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan
424
Chapter 53
RAM Concept
Note that with code detailing:
the top bars are longer
some bottom bars are continuous
Note: The no detailing example is very similar to results
obtained with version 2.1.
Reinforcement layer
The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on
the reinforcement on the reinforcement layer.
Figure 53-8 Reinforcement: Standard Plan
Note that:
these program bars are rationalized such that the number
of top bars is consistent either side of a support
these program bars could be changed to User bars
individual bars can be shown via the visible objects
Concept details the top bars at the right hand support
with a 90 degree bend
Effect of Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters
The Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters affect
the reinforcement bar layout, Figure 53-9 exhibits different
reinforcement results from Figure 53-8 when changes are
made to one parameter (in this case, the Bar Length Cost
parameter is 3 rather than 1). See Reinforcement layout
and detailing parameters on page 151 of Chapter 28,
Calculating Results.
Figure 53-9 Reinforcement: Standard Plan with the Bar Length Cost pa-
rameter set to 3.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code
has no effect.
Figure 53-10 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [without span detailing]
Note: See Section 30.6 of Chapter 30, Plotting Results
for more information about reinforcement plotting.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:
The span detailing plot uses skyline plotting.
Figure 53-11 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [with span detailing]
425 RAM Concept
Chapter 53
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code
produces more reinforcement.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span
detailing:
This plot is exactly the same as Bottom without span
detailing (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because this
example uses just the Strength Rule Set and all such
reinforcement must be developed.
Figure 53-12 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH
Span Detailing
53.6.2 Code Minimum and Strength
calculations
This section shows results where both the Code Minimum
and Strength rule sets are considered.
Reinforcement layer
The following figure shows the reinforcement for
minimum and strength.
Figure 53-13 Reinforcement: Standard Plan
Note that the minimum designer has increased the bottom
bars in the left hand span for the no detailing case. See
Figure 53-8.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code
has no effect.
Figure 53-14 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITHOUT span de-
tailing]
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:
The span detailing plot uses skyline plotting.
Figure 53-15 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITH span detailing]
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code
produces more reinforcement.
426
Chapter 53
RAM Concept
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) without span
detailing:
This plot is different from Bottom without span detailing
(that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the Minimum
reinforcement is not required to be developed.
Figure 53-16 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITHOUT
span detailing
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span
detailing:
This plot is different from Bottom with span detailing
(that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the Minimum
reinforcement at the end supports is not developed, and so
the plotted value is zero.
Additionally, portions of the raw reinforcement are now
assumed to be developed because the span detailing
process for the design status layer considers that
continuous bars, whether they are required to be developed
or not, become at least partially developed.
Figure 53-17 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH
span detailing
427 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54 ACI 318-99 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of ACI 318-99.
The six sections outline the following:
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
54.1 ACI 318-99 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new ACI 318-99
file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are
discussed here.
54.1.1 Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading
This loading type describes a temporary loading that is present during construction when the contractor stresses the tendons.
As it is a temporary load, it is generally only included in the Initial Service Load Combination.
If a permanent load is present at stressing, you should define the load on the Temporary Construction (At Stressing) loading
layer as well as the appropriate permanent loading layer. Alternatively, you can include a permanent loading present at
stressing with appropriate use of load factors.
54.2 ACI 318-99 default load combinations
This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept
creates when you start a new ACI 318-99 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove
or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from ACI 318-
99, unless noted otherwise.
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations.
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
54.2.1 All Dead LC
This load combination sums all of the dead loadings, with a load factor of 1.0, that act simultaneously in the standard service
condition. This load combination is for information only - it is not used by RAM Concept for design purposes.
428
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
54.2.2 Initial Service LC
This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon application of prestress. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes a 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at
this stage)
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
54.2.3 Service LC: D + L + Lr
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000
section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
54.2.4 Service LC: D + L + S
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000
section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
54.2.5 Sustained Service LC
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. For the purpose of this load combination, 100%
of the Live (Storage) Loading and 50% of all other live loading is assumed to be permanent loading. The load factors used
are:
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
429 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
54.2.6 DL + 0.25LL LC
This load combination is intended for checking the requirements of UBC section 1918.9.2.2. This load combination is used
by the DL + 0.25LL Design Rule Set. The load factors used are:
54.2.7 Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7S
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.4 (std) and 0.9 (alt)
Live Loading: 1.7 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 1.7 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
54.2.8 Service Wind LC: D + L + Lr + W
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. It is currently
only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used
are:
Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
54.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + L + S + W
only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used
are:
430
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
54.2.10 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + W
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is currently only
generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
54.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + L + Lr + 0.7E
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. It is
currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load
factors used are:
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.7 (std & alt)
54.2.12 Service Seismic LC: D + L + S + 0.7E
currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load
factors used are:
Snow Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
54.2.13 Service Seismic LC: 0.6D + 0.7E
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic loads. It is currently only
generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
431 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L + 1.28S + 1.6W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors
used are:
Dead Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.9 (alt)
Note: Since directionality factors were introduced in ASCE 7-98, the wind portion of the Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L
+ 1.28S + 1.6W load combination has been increased to 1.6 to account for this effect. The need for this change is described
in detail in ACI-02 9.2.1(b) and commentary. If directionality factors are not applied to the wind loads, the wind factors may
be reduced in accordance with the original ACI 318-99 combinations.
54.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f
1
L + 0.7S + E
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. This load
combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.2.1. The load factors used are:
54.3 ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors
It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw:
assembly loads (or live loads in excess of 100 psf) on a Live (Unreducible) layer
54.4 ACI 318-99 material behaviors
This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, non-prestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement
when using ACI 318-99.
54.4.1 Concrete Behavior
You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 8.5.1 with or without
the inclusion of W
c
, an equation from another code, or a specified value.
432
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
When you directly specify values, there must be two elastic modulus values:
E
ci
= value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses
E
c
= value for all other conditions
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (w/ W
c
) is selected the following values are used:
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no W
c
Where
f
ci
= cylinder strength at stressing
f
c
= 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 398 of
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
54.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behavior
This material is described in Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves on page 395 of Chapter 51, Section
Design Notes.
54.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior
This material is described in Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 395, and Relationship of Bonded
Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 396, of Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
54.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior
For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains.
For DL + 0.25LL strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concepts general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is
detailed in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 397 of Chapter 51,
Section Design Notes.
For ACI 318-99, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, f
limit
, is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of
p
,
RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting
stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
E
ci
w
c
1.5
33 f
ci
=
E
c
w
c
1.5
33 f
c
=
E
ci
57000 f
ci
=
E
c
57000 f
c
=
433 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54.5 ACI 318-99 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which ACI 318-99 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment
or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.
54.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement
The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (beam, one-way slab, two-
way slab).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The placement of the reinforcement is based on the min. reinforcement location selection for the design strip segment
or design section:
Elevated Slab Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan.
Mat Foundation Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan.
Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set
(reinforcement may be required on both faces).
Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement
requirement (see Service on page 434).
Section 18.8.3 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded post-tensioning, even though the code technically requires it.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
54.5.2 Initial Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.3, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.3, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab 7.12 18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
Table 54-1 Minimum reinforcement rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Table 54-2 Initial service rule mapping
434
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
54.5.3 Service
on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
54.5.4 Sustained Service
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
54.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 405 for how torsion is implemented.
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.6.4 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c, 18.9.3.2
Table 54-3 Service rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2a
Table 54-4 Sustained service rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
Table 54-5 Strength rule mapping
435 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54.5.6 Ductility
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
54.5.7 UBC DL + 0.25 LL
UBC section 1918.9.2.2 is implemented.
faces).
Unbonded tendons are assumed to have no stress.
A strength reduction factor () of 1.0 is used in the ACI calculations.
54.6 ACI 318-99 code implementation
54.6.1 Section 7.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented
The gross area of concrete after taking into account the ignore top depth and the ignore bottom depth is used to
determine the reinforcement specified in 7.12.2.1.
For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be satisfied for
whichever provides the least amount of reinforcement. In the calculation of 7.12.2.1(c) only reinforcement with f
y
= 60,000
psi will be used in the calculation.
Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.3 18.8.1
One-Way Slab 10.3.3 18.8.1
Two-Way Slab 10.3.3 18.8.1
Table 54-6 Ductility rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 11.4, 18.7 (=1)
One-Way Slab (none) 11.4, 18.7 (=1)
Two-Way Slab (none) (none)
Table 54-7 UBC DL + 0.25LL rule mapping
436
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2.
The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements.
Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the
total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
54.6.2 Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)
Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area.
Strain compatibility design is used
RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-
reinforced section. See Ductility on page 435 for more information on applying ductility requirements.
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of design
strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the
required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different
elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely
cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam,
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads
(by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
User E
s
values are used
For sections with multiple values of f
c
, the f
c
of each concrete block is used appropriately.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which
would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for
axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
54.6.3 Section 10.3.3 Ductility (Non prestressed)
The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non
prestressed) on page 436 for details).
The neutral axis depth is limited to:
(0.75) * (0.003 /(0.003 +
y
)) * d
where
y
= maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross section in tension
d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid (excluding PT)
Due to very large bar covers or other unusual conditions, the compression bar will be considered when determining d
if the compression bar is in tension.
For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see Unified Design Recommendations for
Reinforced.... by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2, April-March 1992
437 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54.6.4 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed)
Equation 10-3 and the 200 b
w
d/f
y
criteria are implemented
Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum f
c
, minimum f
y
, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate face).
b
w
is taken the core width (see Concrete Core Determination on page 405). If the core width is zero (there is no core),
then b
w
is taken as the width of the section.
The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 M
cr
. This will only control in odd circumstances such as
where the specified cover is extremely large.
Equation 10-5 and the 12(36/f
s
) criteria are implemented
A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement.
Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used.
The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with
stems in tension, this will typically be the sum of the stem widths.
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make the width
start and end with a bar.
Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section calculations).
RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than necessary in two circumstances:
The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked section analysis.
Compression reinforcement added later in the design process lowers the reinforcement demands.
54.6.6 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Non Prestressed)
See Concrete Core Determination on page 405.
c
, the minimum f
c
is used
Equations 11-5, 11-13, 11-15 are implemented.
Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).
Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
Lightweight concrete is not considered.
A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is
waived per 11.5.5.1a.
Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on page 438 for further requirements.
54.6.7 Section 11.4 Shear Resistance of Beams (Prestressed)
c
, the minimum f
c
is used
If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing
depth; otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth.
Equation 11-9 is used if the 40% criterion of section 11.4.1 is met; otherwise equation 11-5 is used. When equation 11-5
is used, both the tension mild steel and the PT in the tension zone is used to determine
w
.
438
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
Equations 11-13 and 11-15 are implemented.
Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
54.6.8 Section 11.6 Beam Torsion
Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design.
If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib:
rib width = total core width / num ribs
with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up
by the number of ribs (* num ribs).
To get a more detailed and exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib.
The side cover is assumed to be equal to the lesser of the top cover and the bottom cover.
A
cp
and p
cp
only consider the cross section core.
A
o
is assumed to be equal to 0.85 A
oh
per 11.6.3.6.
in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine f
cp
.
The minimum f
c
of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete
mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs:
Transverse Reinforcement:
Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number
of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM
Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2.
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high
torsions, this can make shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
A
1
f
y1
T
n
p
h
2A
0
( ) cot =
A
1
f
y1
5 fc A
cp
25psi ( ) p
h
b
w
=
439 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining
effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
54.6.9 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems)
With the exception of span detailing, this chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations, specifically:
Section 13.5.3.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)
This section is not considered.
54.6.10 Section 18.4.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit
0.6 f
ci
is the limiting value.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
54.6.11 Section 18.4.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit
The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary,
so no section will fail this criterion.
Bonded tendons that are at an angle (vertical or horizontal) to the cross section will only have their component perpen-
dicular to the cross section considered.
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6f
y
and 30,000 psi.
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross
section considered.
54.6.12 Section 18.4.2a Sustained Compressive Stress Limit
0.45 f
c
Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used.
54.6.13 Section 18.4.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit
0.60 f
c
3 fci
440
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
54.6.14 Section 18.4.2c Service Tensile Stress Limit
54.6.15 Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed)
See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 436. Note that if axial forces are included in
the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will
cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description Relationship of Bonded Post-
tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 396).
If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross
section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded Post-
tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 397).
If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be
possible.
54.6.16 Section 18.8.1 Ductility (Prestressed)
The strain distribution used in section 18.7 calculations is used (see Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance
(Prestressed) on page 440 for details).
(0.36/0.85) * d
where
d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid
To be rational (instead of literally following the code), d is taken as the depth of the total tension reinforcement, not just
the depth of the PT
For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see Unified Design Recommendations for
Reinforced.... by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2, April-March 1992
54.6.17 Section 18.8.3 Cracking Moment
For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored
if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support.
For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if
the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these regions will
contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack;
This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it.
The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement
Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section.
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 404 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment.
6 fc
441 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
Modulus of rupture (f
cr
) is times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f
c
for the cross section is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
54.6.18 Section 18.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way
the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support.
For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is
always applied.
See Minimum Reinforcement on page 433 for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the
reinforcement will have the reinforcement added.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to
two-way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2000 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for
any two-way slabs.
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid
is counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not
orthogonal to the cross section.
54.6.19 Section 18.9.3.2 Midspan Two Way Minimum Reinforcement
if the section location is inside of L/3 of the support.
the section location closer than L/6 from a support.
never applied.
See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement
will have the reinforcement added.
For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for two-way slabs of uniform thickness (RAM
Concept uses it for all slabs declared as two-way; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs that do not have a
uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is acceptable to use this criterion for all two-way slabs.)
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and
reported.
If is exceeded the entire tensile load, N
c
, is taken by bonded reinforcement.
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted
toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that are not orthogonal
to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (f
py
-f
se
), (0.5 f
py
) and 30 ksi.
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 f
py
) and 30 ksi.
The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed , the minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not
considered.
7.5 fc
2 fc
2 fc
442
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
54.6.20 Section 18.9.3.3 Support Two Way Minimum Reinforcement
For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied at the face of support.
the section location further than L/6 from a support.
never applied.
See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement
will have the reinforcement added.
For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for two-way slabs of uniform thickness (RAM
Concept uses it for all slabs declared as two-way; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs that do not have a
uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is acceptable to use this criterion for all two-way slabs.)
A
cf
is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length. This will not
always exactly match the code requirement
The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked.
The number of bars (4 bars or wires) is not checked.
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the
centroid is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that
is not orthogonal to the cross section.
54.6.21 Punching Shear Design
Refer to Chapter 66, Punching Shear Design Notes.
443 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
This appendix details RAM Concepts implementation of ACI 318-02.
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
discussed here.
or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from ACI 318-02
/ IBC 2003, unless noted otherwise.
The load and strength reduction factors changed significantly in the ACI 318-02 code. In general, the load factors were
reduced and are now in agreement with the strength design of other materials. The strength reduction factors were generally
reduced in order to provide similar design results as the previous code (ACI 318-99).
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. The factor on L in ACI
318-02 equations (9-3), (9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Unreducible)
Loading, 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading, and 1.0 for Live (Parking) Loading.
444
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
55.2.1 All Dead LC
Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes an 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at
this stage)
55.2.3 Service LC: D + L + Lr
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. This load combination is taken from IBC 2003.
The load factors used are:
are:
445 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55.2.6 Factored LC: 1.4D
55.2.7 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
55.2.8 Factored LC: 1.2D + f
1
L+ 1.6Lr
55.2.9 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.6(std) and 0.0 (alt)
446
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
1
L+ 1.6S
55.2.11 Service Wind LC: D + L + Lr + W
only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
447 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55.2.14 Service Seismic LC: D + L + Lr + 0.7E
currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
55.2.15 Service Seismic LC: D + L + S + 0.7E
55.2.17 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f
1
L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W
used are:
448
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
1
L+ 0.5S + 1.6W
used are:
55.2.19 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W
used are:
55.2.20 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6S + 0.8W
used are:
1
L+ f
2
S + E
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load factors
used are:
449 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
the inclusion of W
c
E
ci
E
c
c
c
Where
f
ci
E
ci
w
c
1.5
33 f
ci
=
E
c
w
c
1.5
33 f
c
=
E
ci
57000 f
ci
=
E
c
57000 f
c
=
450
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
f
c
strain limits.
55.4.2 Nonprestressed Reinforcement Behavior
Design Notes.
limit
p
,
RAM Concept assumes that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same
limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
55.5.1 Code Minimum Reinforcement
way slab).
or design section:
451 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55.5.2 User Minimum Reinforcement
RAM Concept allows you to specify minimum reinforcement ratios for each span segment.
About User-Specified Minimum Reinforcement Ratios
Each span segment has four user-specified reinforcement ratio values:
Column Strip Top Reinforcement
Column Strip Bottom Reinforcement
Middle Strip Top Reinforcement
Middle Strip Bottom Reinforcement
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross section. These
values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the bending strength reinforcement
reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 39of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2, 18.9.2
452
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
55.5.4 Service
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Design System RC PT Class U PT Class T PT Class C
Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.3.3, 18.4.2b,
18.9.3.2
(not applicable) (not applicable)
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
453 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
55.5.7 Ductility
7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented.
y
= 60,000
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)
One-Way Slab 10.3.5 (none)
Two-Way Slab 10.3.5 (none)
454
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The
number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4.
In critical span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever
span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within
L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the
critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized.
assumed.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.
There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural members according to the 318-02 Code.
Axial/flexural members are classified as compression controlled or tension controlled in accordance with 10.3.3 and
10.3.4 depending upon the tensile strain in the extreme tension reinforcement at the ultimate strain conditions (when the
concrete compressive strain reaches 0.003). When the tensile strain is sufficiently large as to provide ample ductility, the
section is defined as tension controlled and a strength reduction factor of 0.9 is used. When the tensile strain is at or below
the balanced strain condition, the member is defined as compression controlled and a strength reduction factor of 0.65 is
used. Between these tensile strain values a linear transition between 0.65 and 0.9 is used.
RAM Concept uses the ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force (rather than the depth of the
extreme tension steel) to calculate the strength reduction factor. For singly reinforced sections, the results will be identical to
using the depth of the extreme tension steel. For sections with multiple layers of reinforcement (including post-tensioning),
this implementation will provide a smoother transition and will be conservative. In determining the compression-controlled
strain limit, Concept uses the maximum of 0.002 and f
y
/ E
s
. The tension-controlled strain limit is 0.005.
Strain compatibility design is used.
Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-reinforced
section. See Ductility on page 453 for more information on applying ductility requirements.
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of design strip
segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required
moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by
selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
User E
s
values are used
c
, the f
c
455 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by Concept may exceed the amount
necessary. This is because Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary
to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the
cross section.
The ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force is limited such that the section strain at the location
of the resultant tensile force is a minimum of 0.004.
Application of this section is limited to cross sections with net axial load (compression) less than 0.10f
c
A
g
, in accordance
with section 10.3.5.
w
d/f
y
criteria are implemented.
c
', minimum f
y
b
w
then b
w
cr
A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. For typically sized beams, this limit will not control the amount
of reinforcement.
The provisions of section 10.5.2 are not implemented.
Equation 10-4 and the 12(36/f
s
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make the width start
and end with a bar.
456
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
c
, the minimum f
c
is used.
Equations 11-5, 11-13 (including 50b
w
s/f
y
), 11-15 are implemented.
Axial tension and compression are considered in accordance with sections 11.3.2.2 and 11.3.2.3.
c
, the minimum f
c
is used
If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing depth;
otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth.
Equation 11-9 is used to determine the shear capacity.
Equations 11-13 (including 50b
w
s/f
y
) and 11-15 are implemented.
The side cover is assumed to be equal to the greater of the top cover and the bottom cover.
457 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
A
cp
and p
cp
A
o
oh
per 11.6.3.6.
cp
.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.6.1(c).
The minimum f
c
mixes.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs.
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this
can make shear capacity negative.
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective
depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
A
1
f
y1
T
n
p
h
2A
0
( ) cot =
A
1
f
y1
5 fc A
cp

At
s
------

p
h
f
yv =
458
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
55.6.10 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit
A cross-section is defined as Class U, Class T, or Class C using the design strip segment or design section property
Environment. The limiting tensile stress values are outlined in the following table.
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of
10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
0.6 f
ci
The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so no
section will fail this criterion.
section considered.
y
and 30,000 psi.
Class U Class T Class C
Assumed behavior Uncracked Transition between
uncracked and cracked
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calcula-
tion
Gross section Gross section Cracked sec-
tion
Tensile stress limit No limit
Deflection calcula-
tion
Gross section Consider effects of crack-
ing
Consider
effects of
cracking
Crack control No requirement No requirement 10.6.4 /
18.4.4
Computation of f
s

for crack control
Not applicable Not applicable Cracked sec-
tion analysis
Table 55-7
ft 7.5 fc 7.5 fc ft 12 fc <
3 fci
459 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
0.45 f
c
0.60 f
c
55.6.15 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members
The provisions of section 10.6.4 are utilized, modified by the provisions of 18.4.4.
See Section 10.6.4 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) on page 455.
The following procedure is used to determine the maximum bar spacing:
The maximum fs in the cross section is determined, including all bonded tendons in the tension zone and all bar positions.
For bonded PT in tension zone, an effectively reinforced width is calculated:
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon will be limited to 36 ksi in
accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon w
i
or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width
and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 454. Note that if axial forces are included in the
design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a
hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
w
i
min
540
maxf
s
--------------- 2.5cci
432
maxf
s
--------------- ,

2
3
--- numberofducts =
fps
460
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded Post-tensioning
Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 397).
possible.
For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the
section location is outside of L/3 of the support.
For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the
section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these regions will contain
the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack;
cr
) is times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f c for the cross section is used.
section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support.
always applied.
See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will
have the reinforcement added.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to two-
way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2003 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for any two-
way slabs.
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is
counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not
7.5 fc
461 RAM Concept
Chapter 55
For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied when the span ratio is in the middle one-third of the span.
always applied.
reported.
c
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted toward
the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that are not orthogonal to the
cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (f
py
f
se
), (0.5 f
py
) and 30 ksi.
py
) and 30 ksi.
considered.
For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than L/6.
A
cf
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the centroid
is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that is not
2 fc
2 fc
462
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
463 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
discussed here.
Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. The factor on L in ACI 318-
05 equations (9-3), (9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) Loading,
1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading, and 1.0 for Live (Parking) Loading.
For the default Load History specification, RAM Concept uses the Service LC: D + L combination for the maximum load
case. This load combination does not contain any roof loads. For floors that contain roof loads, a more appropriate load
combination will need to be specified for the maximum load history step.
464
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
56.2.1 All Dead LC
this stage)
56.2.3 Service LC: D + L
56.2.4 Service LC: D + Lr
56.2.5 Service LC: D + S
56.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr
465 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
56.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S
are:
56.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr
466
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
1
L+ 1.6Lr
56.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S
1
L+ 1.6S
56.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + W
467 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
56.2.15 Service Wind LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.75W
56.2.16 Service Wind LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S + 0.75W
56.2.18 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.7E
468
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
56.2.19 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.525E
56.2.20 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S + 0.525E
1
L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W
used are:
469 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
1
L+ 0.5S + 1.6W
used are:
used are:
used are:
1
L+ f
2
S + E
used are:
470
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
the inclusion of W
c
E
ci
E
c
c
c
Where
f
ci
f
c
strain limits.
E
ci
w
c
1.5
33 f
ci
=
E
c
w
c
1.5
33 f
c
=
E
ci
57000 f
ci
=
E
c
57000 f
c
=
471 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
Design Notes.
limit
p
,
way slab).
or design section:
472
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2, 18.9.2
473 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
56.5.4 Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
18.9.3.2
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
474
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
56.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
56.5.7 Ductility
y
= 60,000
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6
*
11.4, 11.6
*
, 18.7
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)
475 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
assumed.
There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural members according to the 318-05 Code.
strain limit, RAM Concept uses the maximum of 0.002 and f
y
/ E
s
User E
s
values are used
c
, the f
c
476
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
c
A
g
, in accordance
w
d/f
y
c
', minimum f
y
b
w
then b
w
cr
of reinforcement.
Equation 10-4 and the 12(40,000/f
s
and end with a bar.
477 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
c
, the minimum f
c
is used.
w
s/f
y
c
, the minimum f
c
is used
w
s/f
y
478
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
A
cp
and p
cp
A
o
oh
per 11.6.3.6.
cp
.
The minimum f
c
mixes.
A
1
f
y1
T
n
p
h
2A
0
( ) cot =
A
1
f
y1
5 fc A
cp

At
s
------

p
h
f
yv =
479 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft <= 6 root fc'
0.6 f
ci
section considered.
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calcula-
tion
tion
Deflection calcula-
tion
ing
Consider
effects of
cracking
18.4.4
Computation of f
s

for crack control
tion analysis
Table 56-7
ft 7.5 fc 7.5 fc ft 12 fc <
3 fci
480
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
y
and 30,000 psi.
0.45 f
c
0.60 f
c
If any tendon w
i
and is ignored.
w
i
min
600000
maxf
s
------------------ 2.5cci
480000
maxf
s
------------------ ,

2
3
--- numberofducts =
fps
481 RAM Concept
Chapter 56
possible.
cr
always applied.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to two-
way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2003 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for any two-
way slabs.
7.5 fc
482
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
always applied.
reported.
c
py
f
se
), (0.5 f
py
) and 30 ksi.
py
) and 30 ksi.
considered.
A
cf
2 fc
2 fc
483 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
discussed here.
484
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
57.2.1 All Dead LC
this stage)
57.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr
485 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
57.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S
are:
57.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr
486
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
1
L+ 1.6Lr
57.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S
1
L+ 1.6S
487 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
488
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
1
L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W
used are:
489 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
1
L+ 0.5S + 1.6W
used are:
used are:
used are:
1
L+ f
2
S + E
used are:
490
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
57.2.27 Factored Seismic LC: 0.9D + E
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic loads. The load factors used are:
the inclusion of W
c
E
ci
E
c
c
c
Where
f
ci
E
ci
w
c
1.5
33 f
ci
=
E
c
w
c
1.5
33 f
c
=
E
ci
57000 f
ci
=
E
c
57000 f
c
=
491 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
f
c
strain limits.
Design Notes.
limit
p
,
way slab).
or design section:
492
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
Section 18.8.2 is is only applied to cross sections with bonded tendons, including two-way slabs.
Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2 (bonded), 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2 (bonded), 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2 (bonded)
18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
493 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
on both faces).
57.5.4 Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
18.9.3.2
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
494
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
57.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
57.5.7 Ductility
y
= 60,000
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.2, 11.5
*
11.3, 11.5
*
, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.2, 11.5
*
11.3, 11.5
*
, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.2, 11.5
*
11.3, 11.5
*
, 18.7
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)
495 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
assumed.
y
/ E
s
User E
s
values are used
c
, the f
c
496
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
c
A
g
, in accordance
w
d/f
y
c
', minimum f
y
b
w
then b
w
cr
of reinforcement.
s
and end with a bar.
497 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
c
, the minimum f
c
is used.
w
s/f
y
Lightweight concrete is considered.
c
, the minimum f
c
is used
w
s/f
y
498
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
A
cp
and p
cp
A
o
oh
per 11.5.3.6.
cp
.
The minimum f
c
mixes.
A
1
f
y1
T
n
p
h
2A
0
( ) cot =
A
1
f
y1
5 fc A
cp

At
s
------

p
h
f
yv =
499 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
0.6 f
ci
57.6.12 Section 18.4.1c Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit
is the limiting value. The simply supported stress limit is not considered.
section considered.
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calcula-
tion
tion
Deflection calcula-
tion
ing
Consider
effects of
cracking
18.4.4
Computation of f
s

for crack control
tion analysis
Table 57-7
ft 7.5 fc 7.5 fc ft 12 fc <
3 fci
500
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
y
and 30,000 psi.
0.45 f
c
0.60 f
c
If any tendon w
i
and is ignored.
w
i
min
600000
maxf
s
------------------ 2.5cci
480000
maxf
s
------------------ ,

2
3
--- numberofducts =
fps
501 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
possible.
This criterion is only applied to cross sections containing bonded tendons.
cr
always applied.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs.
7.5 fc
502
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
always applied.
reported.
c
py
f
se
), (0.5 f
py
) and 30 ksi.
py
) and 30 ksi.
considered.
A
cf
2 fc
2 fc
503 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
discussed here.
/ASCE 7-10 unless noted otherwise.
504
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
58.2.1 All Dead LC
this stage)
58.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr
505 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
58.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S
are:
58.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr
506
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
1
L+ 1.6Lr
58.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S
1
L+ 1.6S
58.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + 0.6W
507 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Ultimate Wind Loading: 0.6 (std & alt)
58.2.17 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + 0.6W
508
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
1
L+ 0.5Lr + W
used are:
509 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
1
L+ 0.5S + W
used are:
used are:
used are:
1
L+ f
2
S + E
used are:
510
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
58.2.27 Factored Seismic LC: 0.9D + E
58.3 ACI318-11 / ASCE-7 / live load factors
the inclusion of W
c
E
ci
E
c
c
c
Where
f
ci
E
ci
w
c
1.5
33 f
ci
=
E
c
w
c
1.5
33 f
c
=
E
ci
57000 f
ci
=
E
c
57000 f
c
=
511 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
f
c
strain limits.
Design Notes.
limit
p
,
way slab).
or design section:
512
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
Section 18.8.2 is is only applied to cross sections with bonded tendons, including two-way slabs.
Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2 (bonded), 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2 (bonded), 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2 (bonded)
18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
513 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
on both faces).
58.5.4 Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
18.9.3.2
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
514
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
58.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
58.5.7 Ductility
y
= 60,000
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.2, 11.5
*
11.3, 11.5
*
, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.2, 11.5
*
11.3, 11.5
*
, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.2, 11.5
*
11.3, 11.5
*
, 18.7
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)
515 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
assumed.
y
/ E
s
User E
s
values are used
c
, the f
c
516
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
c
A
g
, in accordance
w
d/f
y
c
', minimum f
y
b
w
then b
w
cr
of reinforcement.
s
and end with a bar.
517 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
c
, the minimum f
c
is used.
w
s/f
y
c
, the minimum f
c
is used
w
s/f
y
518
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
A
cp
and p
cp
A
o
oh
per 11.5.3.6.
cp
.
The minimum f
c
mixes.
A
1
f
y1
T
n
p
h
2A
0
( ) cot =
A
1
f
y1
5 fc A
cp

At
s
------

p
h
f
yv =
519 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
0.6 f
ci
58.6.12 Section 18.4.1c Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit
is the limiting value. The simply supported stress limit is not considered.
section considered.
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calcula-
tion
tion
Deflection calcula-
tion
ing
Consider
effects of
cracking
18.4.4
Computation of f
s

for crack control
tion analysis
Table 58-7
ft 7.5 fc 7.5 fc ft 12 fc <
3 fci
520
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
y
and 30,000 psi.
0.45 f
c
0.60 f
c
If any tendon w
i
and is ignored.
w
i
min
600000
maxf
s
------------------ 2.5cci
480000
maxf
s
------------------ ,

2
3
--- numberofducts =
fps
521 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
possible.
This criterion is only applied to cross sections containing bonded tendons.
cr
always applied.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs.
7.5 fc
522
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
always applied.
reported.
c
py
f
se
), (0.5 f
py
) and 30 ksi.
py
) and 30 ksi.
considered.
A
cf
2 fc
2 fc
523 RAM Concept
Chapter 59
59 AS 3600-2001 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of AS 3600-2001.
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
59.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new AS 3600-2001
discussed here.
59.1.2 Snow Loading
For generation of load combinations, this loading type describes the design snow load for a particular floor or roof, which
generally consists of the ground snow load modified by any necessary factors to adjust for roof snow loads, roof shape
coefficients, drifting, etc.
59.2 AS 3600-2001 default load combinations
creates when you start a new AS 3600-2001 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can
remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from
AS/NZS 1170.0, unless noted otherwise.
Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. For the short-term case the
factor will be equal to 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage) and 0.7 for all other live loadings. For the long-term
and combination cases, the factor will be equal to 0.6 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage), 0.4 for Live (Reducible),
and 0.0 for Live (Roof).
524
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
59.2.1 All Dead LC
this stage)
Self-Dead Loading: 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
59.2.5 Max Service LC: D + L
525 RAM Concept
Chapter 59
59.2.6 Ultimate LC: 1.35D
59.2.7 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L
59.2.8 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + L + S
59.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + L + W
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load
factors used are:
526
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
59.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + L + E
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load
factors used are:
Service Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
59.2.11 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + L + W
used are:
59.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + L + E
used are:
This load combination is intended for use in load history deflection calculations. The long-term factors from AS/NZS
1170.0:2002 Table 4.1 are used. The load factors used are:
527 RAM Concept
Chapter 59
59.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors
assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
roof loads used for floor type activities on a Live (Reducible) layer or Live (Unreducible) layer
59.4 AS 3600-2001 material behaviours
when using AS 3600-2001.
You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 6.1.2, an equation
from another code, or a specified value.
E
ci
E
c
When the AS 3600-2001 code section 6.1.2 is selected the following values are used:
Where
f
cmi
= mean value of cylinder strength at stressing
f
cm
= mean value of 28 day cylinder strength
strain limits.
E
ci
1.5
0.043 f
cmi
=
E
c
1.5
0.043 f
cm
=
528
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
59.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behaviour
Design Notes.
For AS 3600-2001, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, f
limit
, is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of b
ef
d
p
, RAM
Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress
value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
59.5 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which AS 3600-2001 code rules to apply based on the design strip
segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.
Amendments #1 and #2 are included in RAM Concepts implementation. However, the rules pertaining to Class L
reinforcement are not included in RAM Concept.
way slab).
or design section:
529 RAM Concept
Chapter 59
Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
530
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
59.5.4 Service
on both faces).
59.5.5 Max Service
This is intended for service load combinations where = 1.0.
on both faces).
59.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 405 for an explanation how torsion is implemented.
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 8.1.4.2
One-Way Slab (none) 8.1.4.2
Two-Way Slab (none) 8.1.4.2
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) 8.6.2
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) (none)
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
Table 59-4 Maximum service rule mapping
531 RAM Concept
Chapter 59
59.5.7 Ductility
59.6 AS 3600-2001 code implementation
Note: Class L reinforcement provisions are not included in RAM Concepts implementation
59.6.1 Concrete Modulus of Elasticity
The modulus of elasticity for concrete is calculated per 6.1.2(a).
The value of f
cm
in the calculation is taken from Table C6.1.2. Linear interpolation is used between the table values. Values
outside the range of the table are interpolated conservatively (if f
c
< 20 MPa, f
cm
= 1.2 f
c
; if f
c
> 50 MPa, f
cm
= f
c
+ 6.5
MPa).
This calculation must be selected in the Materials window to be used.
59.6.2 Concrete Flexural Tensile Strength
The flexural tensile strength for concrete is calculated per 6.1.1.2(a).
59.6.3 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Stress-Strain Curves
The bonded post-tensioning stress-strain curves are used, but altered as detailed below.
For service level (elastic) analysis, unbonded tendon stresses are assumed to be independent of section strains.
The tendon stress is never reduced below
p.ef
.
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
One-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
Two-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.3 8.1.3
One-Way Slab 8.1.3 8.1.3
Two-Way Slab 8.1.3 8.1.3
532
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
The tendon stress is never exceeds f
py
.
The tendon stress is limited by code section 8.1.6 equation (a) or (b) as appropriate.
Note: The program does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the
engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.
59.6.4 Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending
Strain compatibility design is used. See General Design Approach on page 395 for a description of RAM Concepts
strain compatibility design.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 398 and for tendon, concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress strain
curves
User E
s
values are used
c
, the f
c
reinforced section. See Ductility on page 531 for applying ductility requirements.
If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design
The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions of the structure) will cause a hyperstatic
(secondary) tension in many cross sections, as is appropriate.
RAM Concept does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the
Section 8.1.8 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is not implemented.
The standard strength reduction factor () of 0.8 is used.
59.6.5 8.1.4 Minimum Flexural Strength
Cross sections within 1/6 span from supports or 1/6 span from midspan are considered at critical sections.
If the design section is not declared as post-tensioned in the design section or design strip segment, then the P/A
g
and Pe
terms of 8.1.4.1 are assumed to be zero (even if the cross section includes tendons).
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 404 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking load.
59.6.6 8.1.4.2 Transfer Compressive Stress Limits
The second clause in 8.1.4.2 is implemented.
533 RAM Concept
Chapter 59
The cross section is analyzed as cracked. This analysis is somewhat more conservative than the gross section calculation
suggested in the code.
The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 f
cp
.
If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to limit the concrete stress; depending on the bending
moment and axial forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both will be added.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute value) stress
limit of all of the individual concrete areas.
59.6.7 Section 8.1.3 Ductility of Beams in Bending
See General Design Approach on page 395 for general information on cross section calculations.
The neutral axis depth (k
u
) is limited to 0.4 per section 8.1.3. Reinforcement is added to minimise the neutral axis depth.
If the reinforcing bar covers are such that the compression bar is outside of the 0.4 d zone, then a solution may not be
possible.
In certain circumstances it may not be possible to simultaneously provide positive moment ductility and negative moment
ductility. This most commonly happens if there is a large post-tensioning tendon near the center of the cross section.
59.6.8 Section 8.2 Shear Design
See Concrete Core Determination on page 405 for the web width (b
w
) calculations.
Half of the width of bonded ducts and all of the width of unbonded ducts that are located in the shear core are deducted
from the b
w
width to determine the b
v
width. Where ducts are at different elevations within the core, the elevation with the
maximum effective duct width is used to determine b
v
.
If the section is declared as post-tensioned, d
0
is taken as the maximum of the depth of all tension reinforcement or
0.8D. No check is made to verify that the structure actually is post-tensioned.
If the section is not post-tensioned d
0
is taken as the maximum depth of all tension reinforcement.
A
st
is taken as the area of longitudinal reinforcement (excluding PT) that is in the tension zone for the cross section forces
under consideration.
The vertical component of inclined prestressing tendons, P
v,
is ignored (taken as zero).
Flexure-shear V
uc
is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (a) (for non-prestressed members the A
pt
and V
0
evaluate to zero).
V
0
is calculated as M
0
/(M
*
/V
*
) for both determinate and indeterminate structures.

2
is taken as 1.0 (no axial force considered).

3
is taken as 1.0.
A
pt
is taken as the sum of all post-tensioning (bonded and unbonded) in the tension zone. Vector components of the tendon
areas are used for tendons that are not perpendicular to the design section.
Web-shear V
uc
is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (b) (for both prestressed and non-prestressed members). The calculation is
performed at the centroid of the member, but the net web width (b
v
) is used to determine the shear stress at the centroid. The
balance analysis prestressing forces and the gross section properties are used to determine the axial stress at the centroid.
V
us
is calculated per 8.2.10 (a).
No increases of capacity are considered for sections or loads close to supports.
If beam torsion is selected, torsion design is also performed (see Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design on page 534).
Maximum shear capacity is reduced by section 8.3.3. If torsion reinforcement is required, then Section 8.3.4(b) is used to
reduce available shear capacity.
Stirrup spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c).
534
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
59.6.9 Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design
Section 8.3 is followed.
Torsion reinforcement is not provided if the requirements of 8.3.4(a)(i) are met [T
*
< 0.25 T
uc
]. The requirements of
8.3.4(a)(ii) and (iii) are conservatively ignored.
All torsion is assumed to be taken by the core. See Concrete Core Determination on page 405 for calculation of the
core.
Where the core consists of multiple ribs, the calculations are based on an average rib (and then factored up by the number
of ribs).
Section 8.3.3 is used to reduce the maximum shear capacity.
In calculating A
t
and u
t
, the side cover to the centroid of the longitudinal bar is assumed to be the maximum of the top
cover and bottom cover to the centroid of their respective longitudinal bars.
Longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the compression zone is not reduced by the flexural compression force [8.3.6(a) is
used for both tension and compression faces]
Torsion capacity is not reported; instead shear capacity is reduced by the fitments, etc. that are used to provide the required
torsion capacity.
When shear acts simultaneously with torsion, Section 8.3.4(b) is considered when designing the transverse closed ties.
Transverse closed ties (A
sw
) are provided for the lesser of T
*
and T
u,max
. If T
*
is greater than T
u,max
, then the section will
be reported as failing sections 8.2 and 8.3. The minimum requirements of 8.3.7(a) are also met.
Longitudinal reinforcement is provided based on the A
sw
value calculated for the lesser of T
*
and T
u,max
.
Closed tie spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c), even if the cross section is in pure torsion (no shear).
59.6.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control
If there are no tension stresses in the cross section, no reinforcement is provided.
The cross section is considered as a tension member if both faces are in tension based on gross section stresses for the
cross section forces being considered. (The code uses the term primarily tension.).
section considered.
Section (a) - This section is not implemented here. Clause 8.1.4.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement design.
Section (b) This section is always used in the service design, but never used in the max service design.
Reinforcement is added on each face in tension to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm. All bars on the appropriate face
(including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered for spacing requirements. A
fractional number of bars and spaces may be used.
Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar diameter on the face being considered are
converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion
is based upon area.
Section (c) This section is used if the cross section is a tension member and the environment is not protected.
For the service design:
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A).
The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.1(A).
For the max service design:
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 f
sy
.
Section (d) This section is used if the cross section is not a tension member and the environment is not protected.
535 RAM Concept
Chapter 59
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A) or Table
8.6.1(B), whichever is larger.
The bar spacing for Table 8.6.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional compo-
nents for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar
diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of
half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area. A fractional number of bars and number of
spaces may be used.
Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 f
sy
.
59.6.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control
If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed then there is no need for crack control reinforcement and
none of the following applies.
Section (a) with the limit is ignored because it does not give any guidance on how much reinforcement is
necessary. Section (b) is always used instead.
Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the 200 MPa as the moment
changes from decompression to service level.
In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete
stress exceeds ) this criterion is skipped as adding reinforcement will reduce the compression (increase the
tension) making it impossible to satisfy the criterion by increasing the reinforcement.
The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated using gross section strains, while the service reinforcement
stress is calculated using cracked section strains.
Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing of 200 mm or less.
For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct that is in the tension zone (based on gross-section stresses) is
considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calcu-
lation, all effective tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars
required the plan layout of the ducts is ignored.
A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
section considered.
59.6.12 Section 9.1 Strength of Slabs in Bending
Section 8.1 is used for calculating the bending strength of slabs. Any reinforcement required is reported as being due to
8.1. See Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending above for details on the 8.1 implementation.
59.6.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control
section considered.
Section (a) This section is not implemented here. Clause 9.1.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement design via
clause 8.1.4.1.
Reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm or two times the cross section depth. All bars on the appro-
priate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered for spacing require-
ments. A fraction number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
0.25 fc
0.6 fc
0.25 fc
536
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
is based upon area.
Section (c) This section is only used for service design, but is not used in protected environments.
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 9.4.1(A) or Table 9.4.1(B),
whichever is larger.
The bar spacing for Table 9.4.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components
for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar diameter
on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the
maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
Section (d) This section is only used for max service design, but is not used in protected environments.
sy
.
59.6.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control
section considered.
Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the 150 MPa as the moment
changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in
compression, even though the concrete stress exceeds ) this criterion is skipped.
The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated by determining gross section decompression cross-section strains
and applying the strains to the reinforcement.
Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing of 500 mm or less. For this
requirement, each bonded tendon duct (that is in the tension zone based on gross section stresses) is considered to be equiv-
alent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts
are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars required. A fractional number of bars and
number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
59.6.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature
This criterion is applied as part of the minimum reinforcement designer as it is independent of the magnitude of forces
upon a cross section.
This criterion is applied to both beams and slabs, although its application to beams is not required by AS 3600.
Reinforcement may be applied to both faces if the cross section is subject to both positive and negative moments and the
tension face reinforcement location is chosen.
section considered.
The amount of reinforcement provided is equal to 0.75 (per 9.4.3.2(b)) times the amount specified by either 9.4.3.4(a)(i),
9.4.3.4(b)(i), or 9.4.3.4(c).
For protected environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: A
s
= (0.75)(1.75 2.5
cp
)(A
g
)/1000
For normal environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: A
s
= (0.75)(3.5 2.5
cp
)(A
g
)/1000
0.25 fc
0.5 f c
0.25 fc
537 RAM Concept
Chapter 59
For corrosive or very corrosive environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: A
s
= (0.75)(6.0 2.5
cp
)(A
g
)/1000
For non-PT design strips and design sections,
cp
is taken as zero.
538
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
539 RAM Concept
Chapter 60
60 AS 3600-2009 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of AS 3600-2009.
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
60.1 AS 3600-2009 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new AS 3600-2009
discussed here.
60.1.2 Snow Loading
generally consists of the ground snow load modified by any necessary factors to adjust for roof, snow loads, roof shape
coefficients, drifting, etc.
60.2 AS 3600-2009 default load combinations
creates when you start a new AS 3600-2009 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can
remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from
AS/NZS 1170.0:2002 including the latest Amendment 3 (2011) incorporating the new earthquake combination factors,
unless noted otherwise.
Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. For the short-term case the
factor will be equal to 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage) and 0.7 for all other live loadings. For the long-term
and combination cases, the factor will be equal to 0.6 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage), 0.4 for Live (Reducible),
540
Chapter 60
RAM Concept
and 0.0 for Live (Roof). In the case of seismic load combinations will be equal to 0.3 for Live (Reducible) or Parking
loads.
60.2.1 All Dead LC
this stage)
Self-Dead Loading: 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
541 RAM Concept
Chapter 60
60.2.5 Max Service LC: D + L
60.2.6 Ultimate LC: 1.35D
60.2.7 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L
60.2.8 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + L + S
60.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + L + W
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load
factors used are:
542
Chapter 60
RAM Concept
60.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + L + E
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load
factors used are:
60.2.11 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + L + W
used are:
60.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + L + E
used are:
543 RAM Concept
Chapter 60
This load combination is intended for use in load history deflection calculations. The long-term factors from AS/NZS
1170.0:2002 Table 4.1 are used. The load factors used are:
60.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors
roof loads used for floor type activities on a Live (Reducible) layer or Live (Unreducible) layer
60.4 AS 3600-2009 material behaviors
when using AS 3600-2009.
You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 3.1.2, an equation
from another code, or a specified value.
E
ci
E
c
When the AS 3600-2009 code section 3.1.2 is selected the following values are used:
when
when
when
when
Where
f
cmi
= mean value of cylinder strength at stressing
E
ci
1.5
0.043 f
cmi
= f
cmi
40MPa
E
ci
1.5
0.024 f
cmi
0.12 + = f
cmi
40MPa >
E
c
1.5
0.043 f
cm
= f
cm
40MPa
E
ci
1.5
0.024 f
cm
0.12 + = f
cm
40MPa >
544
Chapter 60
RAM Concept
f
cm
= mean value of 28 day cylinder strength
strain limits.
60.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behaviour
Design Notes.
For AS 3600-2009, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, f
limit
, is defined by section 8.1.8. In the calculation of b
ef
d
p
, RAM
Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress
value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
60.5 AS 3600-2009 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which AS 3600-2009 code rules to apply based on the design strip
Amendments #1 and #2 are included in RAM Concepts implementation. However, the rules pertaining to Class L
reinforcement are not included in RAM Concept.
way slab).
or design section:
545 RAM Concept
Chapter 60
Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
546
Chapter 60
RAM Concept
60.5.4 Service
on both faces).
60.5.5 Max Service
This is intended for service load combinations where = 1.0.
on both faces).
60.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 405 for an explanation how torsion is implemented.
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 8.1.6.2
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) 8.6.2
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) (none)
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
Table 60-4 Maximum service rule mapping
547 RAM Concept
Chapter 60
60.5.7 Ductility
60.6 AS 3600-2009 code implementation
Note: Class L reinforcement provisions are not included in RAM Concepts implementation
60.6.1 Concrete Modulus of Elasticity
The modulus of elasticity for concrete is calculated per 3.1.2(a).
The value of f
cm
in the calculation is taken from Table 3.1.2. Linear interpolation is used between the table values. Values
outside the range of the table are interpolated conservatively (if f
c
< 20 MPa, f
cm
= 1.2 f
c
; if f
c
> 50 MPa, f
cm
= f
c
+ 6.5
MPa).
This calculation must be selected in the Materials window to be used.
60.6.2 Concrete Flexural Tensile Strength
The flexural tensile strength for concrete is calculated per 3.1.1.3 as function of f'
c
(using the alternative option due to
absence of data).
60.6.3 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Stress-Strain Curves
The bonded post-tensioning stress-strain curves are used, but altered as detailed below.
For service level (elastic) analysis, unbonded tendon stresses are assumed to be independent of section strains.
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
One-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
Two-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3
*
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.5 8.1.5
One-Way Slab 8.1.5 8.1.5
Two-Way Slab 8.1.5 8.1.5
548
Chapter 60
RAM Concept
The tendon stress is never reduced below
p.ef
.
The tendon stress is never exceeds f
py
.
The tendon stress is limited by code section 8.1.8 equation (a) or (b) as appropriate.
Note: The program does not consider section 17.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the
60.6.4 Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending
Strain compatibility design is used. See General Design Approach on page 395 for a description of RAM Concepts
strain compatibility design.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 398 and for tendon, concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress strain
curves
User E
s
values are used
c
, the f
c
reinforced section. See Ductility on page 547 for applying ductility requirements.
If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design
The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions of the structure) will cause a hyperstatic
(secondary) tension in many cross sections, as is appropriate.
RAM Concept does not consider section 17.3.5, which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the
Section 8.1.10 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is not implemented.
The standard capacity reduction factor () of 0.8 is used.
60.6.5 8.1.6 Minimum Flexural Strength
Cross sections within 1/6 span from supports or 1/6 span from midspan are considered at critical sections.
If the design section is not declared as post-tensioned in the design section or design strip segment, then the P
e
/A
g
and P
e
e
terms of 8.1.6.1 are assumed to be zero (even if the cross section includes tendons), where P
e
is the total effective prestress
force considered.
Cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 404 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking load.
549 RAM Concept
Chapter 60
60.6.6 8.1.6.2 Transfer Compressive Stress Limits
The second clause in 8.1.6.2 is implemented.
The cross section is analyzed as cracked. This analysis is somewhat more conservative than the gross section calculation
suggested in the code.
The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 f
cp
for all cases (conservative side).
60.6.7 Section 8.1.5 Ductility of Beams in Bending
See General Design Approach on page 395 for general information on cross section calculations.
The neutral axis depth (k
ou
) is limited to 0.36 and M* < 0.6Mu per section 8.1.5. Reinforcement is added to minimise the
neutral axis depth. Where M* is the design bending moment at a cross section and Mu is the ultimate strength in bending
moment of the cross section. It is important to note that the neutral axis depth is obtained without considering the axial force.
If the reinforcing bar covers are such that the compression bar is outside of the 0.36 d zone, then a solution may not be
possible.
In certain circumstances it may not be possible to simultaneously provide positive moment ductility and negative moment
ductility. This most commonly happens if there is a large post-tensioning tendon near the center of the cross section.
60.6.8 Section 8.2 Shear Design
See Concrete Core Determination on page 405 for the web width (b
w
) calculations.
Half of the width of bonded ducts and all of the width of unbonded ducts that are located in the shear core are deducted
from the b
w
width to determine the b
v
width. Where ducts are at different elevations within the core, the elevation with the
maximum effective duct width is used to determine b
v
.
If the section is declared as post-tensioned, d
0
is taken as the maximum of the depth of all tension reinforcement or
0.8D. No check is made to verify that the structure actually is post-tensioned.
If the section is not post-tensioned d
0
is taken as the maximum depth of all tension reinforcement.
A
st
is taken as the area of longitudinal reinforcement (excluding PT) that is in the tension zone for the cross section forces
under consideration.
The vertical component of inclined prestressing tendons, P
v,
is ignored (taken as zero).
Flexure-shear V
uc
is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (a) (for non-prestressed members the A
pt
and V
0
evaluate to zero).
V
0
is calculated as M
0
/(M
*
/V
*
) for both determinate and indeterminate structures.

2
is taken as 1.0 (no axial force considered).

3
is taken as 1.0.
A
pt
is taken as the sum of all post-tensioning (bonded and unbonded) in the tension zone. Vector components of the tendon
areas are used for tendons that are not perpendicular to the design section.
Web-shear V
uc
is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (b) (for both prestressed and non-prestressed members). The calculation is
performed at the centroid of the member, but the net web width (b
v
) is used to determine the shear stress at the centroid. The
balance analysis prestressing forces and the gross section properties are used to determine the axial stress at the centroid.
V
us
is calculated per 8.2.10 (a).
No increases of capacity are considered for sections or loads close to supports.
If beam torsion is selected, torsion design is also performed (see Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design on page 550).
Maximum shear capacity is reduced by section 8.3.3. If torsion reinforcement is required, then Section 8.3.4(b) is used to
define the extra transverse and longitudinal reinforcement required in addition to any other reinforcement.
550
Chapter 60
RAM Concept
The stirrup spacing is no longer multiplied by 0.8 when the hook is in tension zone as Section 8.2.12.4 of the former AS
3600-2001 Specification was deleted in the current version (AS 3600-2009).
60.6.9 Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design
Section 8.3 is followed.
Torsion reinforcement is not provided if the requirements of 8.3.4(a)(i) are met [T
*
< 0.25 T
uc
]. The requirements of
8.3.4(a)(ii) and (iii) are conservatively ignored.
All torsion is assumed to be taken by the core. See Concrete Core Determination on page 405 for calculation of the
core.
Where the core consists of multiple ribs, the calculations are based on an average rib (and then factored up by the number
of ribs).
Section 8.3.3 is used to reduce the maximum shear capacity.
In calculating A
t
and u
t
, the side cover to the centroid of the longitudinal bar is assumed to be the maximum of the top
cover and bottom cover to the centroid of their respective longitudinal bars.
Longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the compression zone is not reduced by the flexural compression force [8.3.6(a) is
used for both tension and compression faces]
Torsion capacity is reported.
Section 8.3.4(b) is considered when designing the transverse closed ties.
Transverse closed ties (A
sw
) are provided for the lesser of T
*
and T
u,max
. If T
*
is greater than T
u,max
, then the section will
be reported as failing sections 8.2 and 8.3. The minimum requirements of 8.3.7(b) are also met.
Longitudinal reinforcement is provided based on the A
sw
value calculated for the lesser of T
*
and T
u,max
.
Closed tie spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c), even if the cross section is in pure torsion (no shear).
60.6.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control
If there are no tension stresses in the cross section, no reinforcement is provided.
The cross section is considered as a tension member if both faces are in tension based on gross section stresses for the
cross section forces being considered. (The code uses the term primarily tension.).
section considered.
Section (a) - This section is not implemented here. Clause 8.1.6.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement design.
Reinforcement is added on each face in tension to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm. All bars on the appropriate face
(including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered for spacing requirements. A
fractional number of bars and spaces may be used.
is based upon area.
Section (c) This section is used if the cross section is a tension member and the environment is not protected.
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A).
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 f
sy
.
551 RAM Concept
Chapter 60
Section (d) This section is used if the cross section is not a tension member and the environment is not protected.
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A) or Table
8.6.1(B), whichever is larger.
The bar spacing for Table 8.6.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional compo-
nents for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar
diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of
half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area. A fractional number of bars and number of
spaces may be used.
sy
.
60.6.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control
Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the values given in Table 8.6.2
as the moment changes from decompression to service level.
In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete
stress exceeds ) this criterion is skipped as adding reinforcement will reduce the compression (increase the
tension) making it impossible to satisfy the criterion by increasing the reinforcement.
The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated using gross section strains, while the service reinforcement
stress is calculated using cracked section strains.
Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing of 300 mm or less.
For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct that is in the tension zone (based on gross-section stresses) is
considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calcu-
lation, all effective tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars
required the plan layout of the ducts is ignored.
A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
section considered.
60.6.12 Section 9.1 Strength of Slabs in Bending
Section 8.1 is used for calculating the bending strength of slabs. Any reinforcement required is reported as being due to
8.1. See Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending above for details on the 8.1 implementation.
60.6.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control
section considered.
Section (a) This section is not implemented here. Clause 9.1.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement design via
clause 8.1.6.1.
0.25 fc
0.6 fc
0.25 fc
552
Chapter 60
RAM Concept
Reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm or two times the cross section depth. All bars on the appro-
priate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered for spacing require-
ments. A fraction number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
is based upon area.
Section (c) This section is only used for service design, but is not used in protected environments.
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 9.4.1(A) or Table 9.4.1(B),
whichever is larger.
The bar spacing for Table 9.4.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components
for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar diameter
on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the
maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
Section (d) This section is only used for max service design, but is not used in protected environments.
sy
.
60.6.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control
section considered.
Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the values given in Table 9.4.2
as the moment changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare circumstances (where the service
reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete stress exceeds ) this criterion is skipped.
The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated by determining gross section decompression cross-section strains
and applying the strains to the reinforcement.
Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing not exceeding 300 mm or
two times the cross section depth. For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct (that is in the tension zone based on gross
section stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing
calculation, all bonded tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars
required. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
60.6.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature
This criterion is applied as part of the minimum reinforcement designer as it is independent of the magnitude of forces
upon a cross section.
This criterion is applied to both beams and slabs, although its application to beams is not required by AS 3600.
Reinforcement may be applied to both faces if the cross section is subject to both positive and negative moments and the
tension face reinforcement location is chosen.
section considered.
The amount of reinforcement provided is equal to 0.75 (per 9.4.3.2(b)) times the amount specified by either 9.4.3.4(a)(i),
9.4.3.4(b)(i), or 9.4.3.4(c).
0.25 fc
0.6 f c
0.25 fc
553 RAM Concept
Chapter 60
For protected environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: A
s
= (0.75)(1.75 2.5
cp
)(A
g
)/1000
For normal environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: A
s
= (0.75)(3.5 2.5
cp
)(A
g
)/1000
For corrosive or very corrosive environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: A
s
= (0.75)(6.0 2.5
cp
)(A
g
)/1000
For non-PT design strips and design sections,
cp
is taken as zero.
Refer to Chapter 66, Punching Shear Design Notes (no change with respect tot he former code).
554
Chapter 60
RAM Concept
555 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
61 BS 8110: 1997 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of BS8110: 1997 and Technical Report 43 (known as TR 43).
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
61.1 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new BS 8110 file.
As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed
here.
61.1.1 Default Pattern Loading Factors
To fulfill the requirements of considering Adverse and Beneficial loadings required in code section 2.4.3.1, RAM
Concept uses pattern loading factors. For dead loadings, RAM Concept uses pattern factors of 1.0 and 1.0/1.4, or 0.71. For
live loadings, RAM Concept uses Pattern factors of 1.0 and 0. See About load pattern on page 36 for further information.
The applied dead load pattern factors have the side effect that the self-weight is patterned in the Initial Service LC which can
cause conservative calculations for the Initial Service Design. If problems are experienced with this design, a separate model
and investigation can be used without the dead load pattern factors to investigate the Initial Service Design.
61.2 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations
creates when you start a new BS 8110 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or
modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from BS8110-1:
1997, unless noted otherwise.
556
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
61.2.1 All Dead LC
this stage)
61.2.4 Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6L + 1.6S
only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:
557 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:
61.2.7 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2S + 1.2W
used are:
61.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: D + 1.4W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind loads. The load factors used are:
61.2.9 Accident LC
This load combination is intended to fulfill the requirements of code section 2.4.3.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4. The load
factors used are:
Live Loading: 0.35 (std) (this is 1.05/3) and 0.0 (alt)
This load combination is used by the Accident Design Rule Set.
This load combination is intended for use in load history deflection calculations. For the purpose of this load combination,
100% of the Live (Storage) Loading and 50% of all other live loading is assumed to be permanent loading. The load factors
used are:
558
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
61.3 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors
61.4 BS 8110/TR43 material behaviours
when using BS 8110 / TR 43.
61.4.1 Concrete Behaviour
This elastic modulus of concrete is defined by the user in the materials window. The user can choose to use the code equation
of BS8110 Figure 2.1, an equation from another code, or a specified value.
When values are directly specified, two elastic modulus values must be specified:
E
ci
E
c
When the BS 8110 code equation is selected the following values are used:
Where
f
cui
= cube strength at stressing
f
cu
= 28 day cube strength
For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress
or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses four different stress strain curves are used. All four stress-strain curves are parabolic-
linear curves as detailed in. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 2f
c
/E
c
, where f
c
is the peak stress
and E
c
is the elastic modulus at zero strain.
For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is 0.67f
cui .
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.67f
cu
.
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
E
ci
5500 f
cui
1.5 ( ) =
E
c
5500 f
cu
1.5 ( ) =
559 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
0.67f
cu
/ 1.5
For accident (localised damage) strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67f
cu
/ 1.3.
For ECR calculations, the maximum tension stress in concrete is assumed to be .
For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened concrete stress
strain curve is used:
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of BS 8110-2:1985 Figure 3.1. A comparison of
the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
Figure 3.1 provision
0.6 f
cu
560
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
Concept implementation
Since Concepts crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve)
for the 0.8 f
y
provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack width design is done will
represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve.
Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve
only.
61.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behaviour
Untensioned reinforcement is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material, as is shown in code figure 2.2. The elastic
modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window instead of the code-specified 200,000 N/mm
2
.
For strength considerations, a of 1.05 is used (Amendment 1 and 2).
For strength considerations, a of 1.15 is used (Amendment 3).
For all other considerations (including accident strength) a of 1.0 is used.
61.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour
Prestressed reinforcement is modeled as using a power formula. The curve is defined by four parameters:
E
ps
= the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window)
F
py
= the yield stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
F
pu
= the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
= partial safety factor for materials
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in Chapter 51,
Section Design Notes. The three parameters are:
For strength considerations, a of 1.05 is used (Amendment 1 and 2).
For strength considerations, a of 1.15 is used (Amendment 3).
For all other considerations (including accident strength) a of 1.0 is used.
61.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour
For accident strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept's general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is
detailed in Chapter 51, Section Design Notes. For BS 8110-1997, the maximum unbonded tendon stress (f
pb
, called f
limit

in Chapter 51, Section Design Notes) is defined by equation 52 and 0.7f
pu
.
m
E
ps
' E
ps
=
F
py
' F
py
m
=
F
pu
' F
pu
m
=
m
561 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
When equation 52 is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons, the following terms are used in the calculation:
l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth
f
pu
A
ps
= sum of all the individual tendons' f
pu
multiplied by the vector component of their A
ps
.
f
cu
bd

= minimum concrete cube strength multiplied by the compression face width and the depth to the centroid of
the vector component tendon area
For BS 8110: 1997, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is: k = 5d / L
where
L = length of the unbonded tendon.
d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from furthest concrete face)
This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and zone of inelasticity of ten times this length [see BS 8110
code text that accompanies equation 52].
In equation 52, RAM Concept needs to determine d and b. RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the
more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative
moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the
tendon as when the tendon is on the wrong side of the cross section centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than f
pb
, due to
the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation.
The tendon length l in equation 52 is (conservatively) not modified to assume multiple simultaneous inelastic zones.
61.5 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which BS 8110 / TR 43 code rules to apply based on the design strip
way slab).
or design section:
562
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.
61.5.3 Initial Service (Transfer)
Design System RC PT - bonded
tendons
PT - unbonded
tendons
Beam 3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.4
4.12.2 3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.4,
4.12.2,
TR43/6.10.6
One-Way Slab 3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7
4.12.2 3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7,
4.12.2,
TR43 / 6.10.6
Two-Way Slab 3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7
TR43 / 6.10.6 TR43 / 6.10.6
563 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
on both faces).
61.5.4 Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: Class 3 (0.2 mm crack)
Normal: Class 3 (0.1 mm crack)
Corrosive: Class 2
Very Corrosive: Class 1
61.5.5 Strength
factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
4.3.5.2
4.3.5.2
Design System RC PT
Beam 3.12.11.2.1 3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
One-Way Slab 3.12.11.2.1 3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
Two-Way Slab 3.12.11.2.1 4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
564
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
faces).
Note: * - 3.4.5.13 and 4.3.9 are applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
61.5.6 Ductility
61.5.7 Accident
Strength calculations in accordance with code sections 2.4.3.2, 2.4.4.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4 are performed if appro-
priate.
Unbonded post-tensioning tendons are assumed to have zero stress.
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.5.13
*
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9
*
One-Way Slab 3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.5.13
*
4.3.7
4.4.1 / 4.3.8
4.3.9
*
Two-Way Slab 3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.5.13
*
4.3.7
4.4.1 / 4.3.8
4.3.9
*
Design System RC PT
Beam 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
One-Way Slab 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
Two-Way Slab 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
565 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
Reduced factors are used in the strength calculations. For concrete in flexure, = 1.3 and for reinforcement, =
1.0. Note that for shear reinforcement calculations, the 0.95f
yv
(Amendment 1 and 2) or 0.87f
yv
(Amendment 3) values
are changed to 1.0f
yv
.
Note: * - 4.3.9 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
61.6 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation
61.6.1 Section 3.2.2.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)
Included code sections - 3.2.2.1 (item b).
Excluded code sections - 3.2.2.1 (rest).
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies Condition 2 as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby
ensuring ductility.
The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.6 times the effective depth.
61.6.2 Section 3.4.4 Design resistance moment of beams
Included code sections - 3.4.4.1.
Excluded code sections - 3.4.4.2 through 3.4.4.5 (these are optional simplifications of section 3.4.4.1).
Items a, b, c, d and e of section 3.4.4.1 are followed.
The optional 0.1f
cu
clause at the end of section 3.4.4.1 is not followed
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035. The simplified stress block of Figure 3.3 is
not used.
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves ( = 1.5 for concrete; = 1.05 for reinforcement
(Amendment 1 and 2), = 1.15 for reinforcement (Amendment 3)).
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the stress-strain curve of each concrete block is used appropriately.
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9
*
(reduced )
One-Way Slab (none) 4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9
*
(reduced )
Two-Way Slab (none) (none)
Table 61-6 Accident rule mapping
m
566
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design span
under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment
simultaneously with the given axial force.
selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
reinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements.
61.6.3 Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of beams
Included code sections - 3.4.5.1 to 3.4.5.4, 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.12
Excluded code sections - 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.6 - 3.4.5.11, 3.4.5.13 (considered separately)
See Concrete Core Determination on page 405 for calculation of b
v
.
v
c
is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the f
cu
modifier term.
Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of A
s

used in the calculation of v
c
.
100A
s
/ b
v
d is taken as 0.15 minimum, to follow the =0.15 in table 3.8.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum f
cu
is used.
The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the bending moment and axial force in place at time of
the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression, then the effective depth is
calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active reinforcement (in this case 100A
s
/ b
v
d is
taken as 0.15).
v
c
is calculated as the minimum of Equation 6a and Equation 6b, but never less than zero.
f
yv
is limited to 460 N/mm
2
(Amendment 1 and 2) or 500 N/mm
2
(Amendment 3).
Links are provided per Table 3.7
Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam.
Maximum allowed shear stress is the smaller of 5 N/mm
2
and .
Spacing of links along the span is 0.75 d. The spacing across the span is not considered.
Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered.
Bottom loaded beams are not considered.
The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked.
Net axial forces are considered if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is checked.
0.8 f
cu
567 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
61.6.4 Section 3.4.5.13 Torsion
Included code sections - 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.4 (part) to 2.4.8
Excluded code sections - 2.4.3, 2.4.4 (part), 2.4.9, 2.4.10
Note: All code references in this section refer to BS 8110, Part 2
Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete Core Determination on page 405.
Torsional shear stress v
t
is calculated using section 2.4.4.1 equation 2.
Maximum combined shear stress v
tu
is calculated by Table 2.3, note 2 including the y
1
modification factor and compared to
v
t
. Any remaining capacity is used to calculate maximum remaining shear capacity.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with Table 2.4.
Area of torsion links and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in accordance with section 2.4.7.
Maximum spacing of links is the least of x
1
, y
1
/2 or 200 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum links will be provided at all locations.
Note: Assume in equations in table 2.3, note 2 is a misprint, and should instead be .
61.6.5 Section 3.5.4 Resistance moment of solid slabs
Included code sections - 3.5.4
Excluded code sections - none
See section 3.4.4 for additional details.
61.6.6 Section 3.5.5 Shear resistance of solid slabs
Included code sections - 3.5.5.1 to 3.5.5.3
Excluded code sections - none
Section 3.4.5 for is used to determine the shear resistance of solid slabs, except that Table 3.16 (with b
v
determined using the
shear core) is used in place of Table 3.7.
61.6.7 Section 3.12.5 Minimum areas of reinforcement in members
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned members that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
Unbonded Cross Sections on page 570 for discussion.
Included code sections - 3.12.5.1 through 3.12.5.3
Excluded code sections - 3.12.5.4
Reinforcement is provided per Table 3.25, assuming that sections are rectangular and subject to flexure.
Reinforcement is provided such that:
(Amendment 1 and 2)
(Amendment 3)
A
s
f
y
0.0013 ( ) 460N mm
2
( )A
c
A
s
f
y
0.0013 ( ) 500N mm
2
( )A
c
568
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
For sections that are not declared as post-tensioned, all post-tensioned reinforcement is ignored.
For post-tensioned beams and post-tensioned one-way slabs, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the
cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered to be equivalent to
un-tensioned 460 N/mm
2
reinforcement for Amendment 1 and 2, and 500 N/mm
2
reinforcement for Amendment 3, and will
reduce the amount of un-tensioned reinforcement necessary. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector
components of their reinforcement areas considered toward the requirement. This interpretation is somewhat more
conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
section considered.
Note: This section is never used for post-tensioned two-way slabs.
61.6.8 Section 3.12.11.2.1 Bar spacing
For all RC structures, and PT beams and one-way slabs, crack checks are performed per Part 2, 3.8.2 and crack widths are
limited to 0.3 mm. This crack width design supersedes the other requirements in this section.
RAM Concepts implementation of the crack width calculations are detailed in Part 2, Section 3.8.3.
User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section
consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for
spacing calculations.
61.6.9 Section 3.12.11.2.4 Beam Bar spacing
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
In beams, the clear distance between bars is limited to 300 mm. This code section is applied even though it is not required as
crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In post-tensioned beams, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or
are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These
ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is
somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
61.6.10 Section 3.12.11.2.7 Slab Bar spacing
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
In RC slabs and PT one-way slabs, the clear distance between bars is limited to the smaller of 750 mm or 3 d. This code
section is applied even though it is not required as crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In one-way slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are
within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These
ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is
A
s
0.0013 ( )A
c
569 RAM Concept

Chapter 61
61.6.11 Section 4.2.3.1 Redistribution of Moments (Ductility Check)
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item c as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby
ensuring ductility.
61.6.12 Section 4.3.4.2 Compressive stresses in concrete
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.33f
cu
. The
increase to 0.40f
cu
for certain portions of continuous members is not implemented.
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section
centroid are limited to 0.25f
cu
.
Two-way slab compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section centroid are limited to
0.24f
cu
in the support zone and 0.33f
cu
in the span zone [TR 43 Table 2].
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum f
cu
is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported
may be approximate.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
Note: Assume the in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
61.6.13 Section 4.3.4.3 Flexural tension stresses in concrete
The interaction of the BS 8110 requirements, the TR 43 requirements, the different classes and the use of bonded and
unbonded tendons makes describing the service tensile stress limits and requirements in text form very confusing. In some
circumstances, BS 8110 and TR 43 conflict, while in other circumstances neither one explicitly considers a particular
configuration.
Our implementation of these requirements is detailed in the table below. For each combination of tendon type, structure type
and class, two limit stresses and a reinforcement calculation are listed. The first limit stress is the maximum stress allowed if
no supplemental un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress allowed. The
reinforcement calculation details how to calculate the required supplemental reinforcement when stresses exceed the first
stress limit.
570
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
Note: * - When Tables 4.2/4.3 are used with unbonded tendons, the values for grouted post-tensioned tendons and a
0.1mm crack width are used.
61.6.14 Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections
For the purposes of this section, a cross section is considered as being with bonded tendons if the majority of the tendons
in the cross section (based on vector-component areas) are bonded. Cross sections that do not qualify as with bonded
tendons are considered as being with unbonded tendons. A cross section without tendons is therefore considered as being
with unbonded tendons.
Tendons Member
Type
Class Tension limit
without sup-
plementary
reinforce-
ment
Absolute
tension
limit
Reinforce-
ment cal-
culation
Bonded Beam 1 0 0 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 2 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25f
cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25f
cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 1 0 0 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 2 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25f
cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25f
cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Two-way All TR 43 Table 2 TR 43 Table 2 TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 1 0 0 TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 2 0 TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 3 / 0.1 mm 0 Tables 4.2 /
4.3
*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 3 / 0.2 mm 0 Tables 4.2 /
4.3
*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 1 0 0 TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 2 0 TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 3 / 0.1 mm 0 Tables 4.2 /
4.3
*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 3 / 0.2 mm 0 Tables 4.2 /
4.3
*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Two-way All TR 43 Table 2 TR 43 Table 2 TR 43,
6.10.5
Table 61-7 Flexural tension limit rule mapping
0.36 f
cu
0.36 f
cu
0.36 f
cu
0.36 f
cu
0.36 f
cu
0.36 f
cu
571 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
61.6.15 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement
Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the unreinforced stress limits are exceeded, even for the structure types
and classes where it is not anticipated by BS 8110. For example, if a class 1 beam has tension stresses exceeding 0 N/mm
2
, it
will be marked as having failed the 4.3.4.3 criterion; supplemental reinforcement will still be calculated for the class 1 beam
even though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure.
61.6.16 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per 4.3.4.3(c)
The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per 4.3.4.3(c) is as follows:
Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress
A
s
= A
ct
[(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm
2
)]
where A
ct
= cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone
section considered.
61.6.17 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5
0.625A
s
f
y
= F
1
for support regions of two-way slabs
0.625(A
s
f
y
+ A
ps
f
p
) = F
1
for span regions of two-way slabs
0.625(A
s
f
y
+ A
ps
f
p
) = F
1
for all regions of beams and one-way slabs
where
F
1
= tensile force in concrete
A
s
= area of un-tensioned reinforcement added
f
y
= yield strength of un-tensioned reinforcement
A
ps
= vector component area of bonded (grouted) tendons in tension zone
f
p
= tendon yield stress - tendon effective stress
It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete cover is
specified.
Note: For span regions of two-way slabs, and all regions of one-way slabs, this implementation is somewhat different from
a literal code interpretation as it considers the possibility of a mix of bonded and unbonded tendons in a cross section. It also
may require additional un-tensioned reinforcement for a cross section with bonded tendons, which the code does not require.
section considered.
cu
is used to determine the limit stresses and the peak stress
reported may be approximate.
61.6.18 Section 4.3.5.1 Design compressive stresses (Transfer)
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.5f
ci
.
572
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section
centroid are limited to 0.4f
ci
.
For two-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.24f
ci
in the support
region and 0.33f
ci
in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
ci
may be approximate.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned
Note: Assume the in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
61.6.19 Section 4.3.5.2 Design tensile stresses in flexure (Transfer)
For beams and one-way slabs, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to:
Class 1: 1 N/mm
2
Class 2: .
Class 3: .
For Class 2 and 3 beams and one-way slabs, where the stresses above are exceeded, bonded reinforcement is provided as
follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]: A
s
= F
i
/ (0.625f
y
)
For two-way slabs without supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete
section, are limited to 0 in the support region and in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
For two-way slabs with supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section,
are limited to . Bonded reinforcement is provided as follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]:
A
s
= F
i
/ (0.625f
y
)
ci
may be approximate.
Two way slabs can never exceed , while there is no limit for beam and one-way slabs that are class 2 or 3.
Note: Clause 4.3.5.2 is unclear on this stress limit for Class 2, as it states that additional reinforcement should be provided
if necessary. This is interpreted as reinforcement is only necessary if the tensile stress exceeds (since this stress
is less than the cracking stress). Hence the stress may exceed this limit if the additional reinforcement is provided.
61.6.20 Section 4.3.7 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure
Included code sections - 4.3.7.1, 4.2.7.2, 4.3.7.3 (partial)
Excluded code sections - 4.3.7.3 (partial), 4.3.7.4
See section 3.4.4 for general approach. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design
section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in
many design sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included. See Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 395 for tendon stress-
strain curves.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility.
0.36 f
ci
0.36 f
ci
0.15 f
ci
0.45 f
ci
0.45 f
ci
0.36 f
ci
573 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves General Theory on page 396).
possible.
Equation 51 and Table 4.4 are not used.
61.6.21 Section 4.3.8 Design shear resistance of beams
Included code sections - 4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.8, 4.3.8.10
V
co
is calculated per equation 54. The flange/web intersection is not checked.
V
cr
is calculated per equation 55
The value of V
c
is used as shown in the following table.
Note: * The calculation of M
o
uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where the section
is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with M
o
. For the unusual case of M > M
o
and the
section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are
made.
d is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-tensioning). This
is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the
tendons as defined in the code.
d
t
is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the tendons,
whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
cu
is used in calculations.
Moment V
c
Implementation
M < M
o
V
c
= V
co
V
c
= (stress)b
v
h
M > M
o
and tension is on the
tension face
*
V
c
= min (V
co
, V
cr
)
V
c
= (stress)b
v
h
M > M
o
and no tension on
the tension face
*
V
c
= min (V
co
, V
cr
)
V
c
= (stress)b
v
h
d = d
t
(assumed)
A
s
= 0 (none in tension zone)
A
ps
Table 61-8 V
c
rule mapping
574
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
s

c
.
b
v
is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds
of the width of bonded tendons is deducted from b
v
.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the f
pu
and f
pe
values used in the calculations are averaged.
v
c
is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the f
cu
modifier term, with (A
ps
+ A
s
) used in place of A
s
. See section 3.4.5
for detail of the implementation of this table.
When unbonded tendons are used, the value of v
c
is reduced by a factor of 0.9 [TR 43, 6.11.1].
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 4.3.8.6 to 4.3.8.8.
Link spacing is calculated per 4.3.8.10, with lateral spacing requirements ignored. The web thickness used in the
calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is made up of multiple webs. In such
cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one web.
Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam.
61.6.22 Section 4.3.9 Torsion
See section 3.4.5.13 for details.
61.6.23 Section 4.4.1 / 4.3.8 Slabs (shear)
One-way shear (not punching shear) design of prestressed slabs is calculated per section 4.3.8 with one exception. Links are
not required unless V is greater than or equal to V
c
.
61.6.24 Section 4.12.2 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons
Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement
Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span length from midspan are checked, as these are
considered as the likely locations of first cracking of concrete.
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 404 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment
(note that the 1.2 factor is not used in BS 8110)
The cracking stress is . For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum f
cu
for the cross section is
used.
61.6.25 Part 2, Section 3.8.3 Assessment of Crack Widths
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8f
y
.
Crack widths are calculated per BS 8110 Part 2, equation 12. A concrete stress strain curve that approximates tension
stiffening is used - see discussion on Concrete Behaviour on page 558. Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below 0.3mm (per 3.2.4.2).
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but equation 12 will not provide accurate crack width predictions for two way
slabs when wide design strip segments or wide design sections are used.
0.6 f
cu
575 RAM Concept
Chapter 61
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the balance
loading will be considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, equation 12 can be manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3a
cr
m
) / [1+2(a
cr
- c
min
) / (h-x)]
=
m
s
c
s
c
= 3a
cr
/ [1+2(a
cr
- c
min
) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
RAM Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).
RAM Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing. Bars and
tendons that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
s
c
= 3a
cr
/ [1+2(a
cr
- c
min
) / h
t
] where h
t
= (h-x) = height of tension zone
s
c
= 3a
cr
h
t
/ [h
t
+2(a
cr
- c
min
) ]
s
c
[h
t
+2(a
cr
- c
min
) ]

= 3a
cr
h
t
s
c
h
t
+2s
c
a
cr
- 2s
c
c
min
= 3a
cr
h
t
s
c
h
t
- 2s
c
c
min
= 3a
cr
h
t
- 2s
c
a
cr

s
c
h
t
- 2s
c
c
min
= a
cr
(3h
t
- 2s
c
)
a
cr
= (s
c
h
t
- 2s
c
c
min
) / (3h
t
- 2s
c
)
However, , where s
b
= half the horizontal spacing between reinforcement
Using this final equation, RAM Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling
cracking. RAM Concept iteratively determines the s
c
that gives the s
b
s that sum to the tension face width.
For bonded tendons, the cover c
min
is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the bar diameter is
assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
61.6.26 TR 43 / Section 6.10.6 Minimum un-tensioned reinforcement
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination
of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 570 for discussion.
For post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 3.12.5 and 3.12.11.2 are also applied. (Note that Table
3.27 in TR 43 refers to the 1985 BS 8110 - this table has been renumbered 3.25 in the 1997 edition). This interpretation is
For post-tensioned two-way slabs with bonded or unbonded tendons, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in support
regions as follows:
a
cr
s
b
2
c
mi n
2
+ =
s
b
2
c
min
2
+ s
c
h
t
2s
c
c
mi n
( ) 3h
t
2s
c
( ) =
s
b
2
c
mi n
2
+ s
c
h
t
2s
c
c
min
( )
2
3h
t
2s
c
( )
2
=
s
b
2
s
c
h
t
2s
c
c
mi n
( )
2
3h
t
2s
c
( )
2
c
mi n
2
=
s
b
s
c
h
t
2s
c
c
mi n
( )
2
3h
t
2s
c
( )
2
c
mi n
2
=
576
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
A
s
= 0.00075A
c
.
For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than 0.2.
For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked.
The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
section considered.
61.6.27 Punching shear design
EC2 (EN 1992-2004) punching design is used instead of BS8110. Refer to Chapter 66, Punching Shear Design Notes.
577 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
62 IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980.
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
62.1 IS 456 / IS 1343 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new IS 456 file. As
the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed
here.
62.2 IS 456 Default Load Combinations
creates when you start a new IS 456 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or
modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from IS 456 : 2000
62.2.1 All Dead LC
578
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
this stage)
62.2.4 Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L + 1.5S
only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:
579 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
62.2.7 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2S + 1.2W
used are:
62.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.5W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind loads. The load factors used are:
currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. Only the live load percentages specified in Table 8 of IS 1893 (Part 1):
2002 are applied. 25% of the Live (Unreducible) and Live (Reducible) loads are applied, and 50% of the Live (Storage)
loads are applied. No Live (Roof) loads are applied. These percentages are incorporated into the following combinations.
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)]
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.4 (std & alt) [0.5(0.8)]
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)]
Snow Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)]
62.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + E
580
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
62.2.11 Ultimate Seismic LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 0.3S + 1.2E
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. Only the live load
percentages specified in Table 8 of IS 1893 (Part 1): 2002 are applied. 25% of the Live (Unreducible) and Live (Reducible)
loads are applied, and 50% of the Live (Storage) loads are applied. No Live (Roof) loads are applied. These percentages are
incorporated into the following combinations. The load factors used are:
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) [0.5(1.2)]
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.3 (std & alt) [0.25(1.2)]
Snow Loading: 0.3 (std & alt) [0.25(1.2)]
62.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: 0.9D + 1.5E
This load combination is intended for use in load history deflection calculations. For the purpose of this load combination,
100% of the Live (Storage) Loading and 50% of all other live loading is assumed to be permanent loading. The load factors
used are:
62.3 IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors
car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer
581 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
storage loads on a Live (Storage) layer if you would like their effects to be reducible for beams (only), and on a Live
(Unreducible) layer if you do not want their effects to be reduced for any member.
Note: If you draw car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of
2.76 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
62.4 IS 456 material behaviours
when using IS 456/1343.
62.4.1 Concrete Behaviour
of clause 6.2.3.1, an equation from another code, or a specified value.
E
ci
E
c
When the IS 456 code equation is selected the following values are used:
Where
f
cui
= cube strength at stressing
f
cu
= 28 day cube strength
or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves are parabolic-
linear curves as detailed in IS456 Fig 21. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 0.002.
cui .
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67f
cu
.
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67f
cu
/ 1.5
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-section
strain analyses use the stress strain curve of IS 456 Fig 21. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will therefore be
different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR calculations.
For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened concrete stress
strain curve is used:
E
ci
5000 f
cui
=
E
c
5000 f
cu
=
582
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of IS 456 Annex F, Fig. 28. A comparison of the
stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
Fig. 28 Provision
Concept Implementation
Since Concepts crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve)
for the 0.8 f
y
provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack width design is done will
583 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve.
Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve
only.
62.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behaviour
Untensioned reinforcement with a yield stress less than or equal to 250 N/mm
2
is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic
material as is shown in code figure 23B. All other untensioned reinforcement uses the Cold Worked Deformed Bar curve as
is shown in code figure 23A. The elastic modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window instead of the code-
specified 200,000 N/mm
2
.
For strength considerations, a of 1.15 is used.
For all other considerations a of 1.0 is used.
62.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour
E
ps
F
py
F
pu
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in Chapter 51,
Section Design Notes. The three parameters are:
For strength considerations, a of 1.15 is used.
For all other considerations a of 1.0 is used.
This curve is similar but slightly different than the Stress Relieved Curve as shown in IS : 1343 - 1980 Figure 5A for normal
prestressing materials, assuming this curve depicts strain percentage and not actual strains.
62.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour
detailed in Chapter 51, Section Design Notes. For IS 456-2000, the maximum unbonded tendon stress (called f
limit
in
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes) is defined by IS 1343-1980 Appendix B, Table 12. For IS 1343: 1980, the value used as
a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is 0.1.
RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting
stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption
typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on the wrong side of the cross section
m
E
ps
' E
ps
=
F
py
' F
py
m
=
F
pu
' F
pu
m
=
m
584
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than f
pb
, due to the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross
section at the tendon elevation.
62.5 IS 456 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which IS456 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or
design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.
way slab).
or design section:
Design System RC PT
Beam 26.5.1.1 (456) 18.6.3.3 (1343)
One-Way Slab 26.5.2.1 (456) 18.6.3.3 (1343)
Two-Way Slab 26.5.2.1 (456)
31.7.1 (456)
18.6.3.3 (1343)
31.7.1 (456)
585 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Requirements
combination.
Old Files
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 39 of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
on both faces).
62.5.4 Service
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the Type of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Type 3 (0.2 mm crack)
Normal: Type 3 (0.1 mm crack)
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
One-Way Slab (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
Two-Way Slab (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
586
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
Corrosive: Type 2
Very Corrosive: Type 1
Note: Crack width design is done on all post-tensioned members except Type 1. This is required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS
456 26.3.3. Since the spacing provisions of 26.3.3 are not specifically applied, detailed crack width design is performed for
all members in accordance with 26.3.3. Crack width design is not required for Type 1 members as by definition they have no
tensile stresses, and thus no cracking. See code implementation for additional information.
62.5.5 Strength
factors).
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
26.3.3/Annex F (456) (except Type 1)
One-Way Slab 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
Two-Way Slab 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
587 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Note: * - IS 456 Clause 41 and IS 1343 Clause 22.5 are applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
62.5.6 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 38 (456)
40 (456)
41 (456)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456)
22.1 (1343)
22.4 (1343)
22.5 (1343)
18.6.3.2c (1343)
One-Way Slab 38 (456)
40 (456)
41 (456)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456)
22.1 (1343)
22.4 (1343)
22.5 (1343)
18.6.3.2c (1343)
Two-Way Slab 38 (456)
40 (456)
41 (456)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456)
22.1 (1343)
22.4 (1343)
22.5 (1343)
18.6.3.2c (1343)
Design System RC PT
Beam 37.1.1d (456)
38.1f (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
One-Way Slab 37.1.1d (456)
38.1f (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
Two-Way Slab 37.1.1d (456)
38.1f (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
588
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
62.6 IS 456 code implementation
62.6.1 Section 26.5.1.1
Included code sections - item a.
Excluded code sections - item b.
The 0.85bd/f
y
criterion is implemented
b is taken the core width (see Concrete Core Determination on page 405). If the core width is zero (there is no core),
then b is taken as the width of the section.
This provision is applied to beams only.
The provisions of item b (Maximum reinforcement) are not considered.
section considered.
62.6.2 Section 26.5.2.1
Reinforcement is provided in accordance with 0.12 percent requirement. This assumes that high strength deformed bars have
been provided.
This provision is applied to slabs only.
section considered.
62.6.3 Section 31.7.1
The spacing between bars is limited to a maximum of 2 times the slab thickness.
This provision is applied to slabs only.
If the member is designated as post-tensioned, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the
cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to
an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored.
This implementation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
62.6.4 Section 37 / 38 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)
Included code sections - 37.1.1 (item d), 38.1 (item f).
Excluded code sections - 37 (rest), 38 (rest).
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies 37.1.1 (item d) as a limit to the neutral axis depth,
thereby ensuring ductility.
589 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
The neutral axis depth is further limited to in accordance with 38.1 item f;
where = maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross section in tension.
62.6.5 Section 38 Design resistance moment of beams
Included code sections - 38.1.
Excluded code sections - none.
Items a, b, c, d and e of section 38.1 are followed. Item f is applied under Ductility design.
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035.
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves ( = 1.5 for concrete; = 1.15 for reinforcement).
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored.
cross section.
62.6.6 Section 40 Design shear resistance
Included code sections - 40.1 (partial), 40.2, 40.3, 40.4, 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6
Excluded code sections - 40.1.1, 40.5
See Concrete Core Determination on page 405 for calculation of b.
is calculated per Table 19, using the equation in SP 24 (1983).
s

used in the calculation of .
100A
s
/ bd is taken as 0.15 minimum and 3.0 as a maximum in accordance with the <=0.15 and 3.00 and above in table
19.
v
c
is calculated per the equation in SP:24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 19.
0.0035
0.0055
m
------ +
-----------------------------
c
590
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
For one-way shear in slabs, the design shear strength is increased by the depth factor in accordance with 40.2.1.1
cu
is used.
the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression, then the effective depth is
calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active reinforcement (in this case 100A
s
/ bd is
taken as 0.15).
f
y
is limited to 415 N/mm
2
.
Stirrups are provided per 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, and 40.4
In beams, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
Maximum allowable shear stress is determined in accordance with Table 20. Slabs use
1
/
2
the values in Table 20 in
accordance with 40.2.3.1.
Maximum spacing of stirrups along the span is the smaller of 0.75 d and 300 mm.
The spacing across the span is not considered.
The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked.
Enhanced shear strength close to supports is not considered.
Beams of varying depth are not considered.
Net axial compression is considered per 40.2.2 if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is checked.
Bottom loaded beams are not considered.
62.6.7 Section 41 Torsion
Included code sections - 41.1, 41.3, 41.4, 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, 26.5.1.7
Excluded code sections - 41.2
with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the
number of ribs (* num ribs).
code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design section or
design strip for each rib.
Equivalent shear V
e
is calculated per clause 41.3.1.
Equivalent bending moment M
e1
is calculated per clause 41.4.2.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with clause 26.5.1.6 and 26.5.1.7.
Area of torsion reinforcement and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in accordance with clause 41.4.
Maximum spacing of links is the least of x
1
, (x
1
+ y
1
)/4 or 300 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
591 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
62.6.8 Annex F Assessment of Crack Widths
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8f
y
.
Crack widths are calculated per Annex F. A concrete stress strain curve that approximates tension stiffening is used - see
discussion on Concrete Behaviour on page 581. Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below the following limits:
Environment:
Protected - 0.3 mm
Normal - 0.3 mm
Corrosive - 0.2 mm
Very corrosive - 0.1 mm
These limits are specified in IS 456 clause 35.3.2. They are applied to post-tensioned members as well (except type 1) even
though they do not match the limiting crack width values for Type 3 in Table 8. This results in a crack width limit design to
0.3 mm for Type 3 members and a crack width limit design to 0.2 mm for Type 2 members. This crack width design is
required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS 456 26.3.3 since bar spacing limits have not been specifically applied.
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but will not provide accurate crack width predictions for two way slabs when wide
design strip segments or wide design sections are used.
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the balance
loading will be considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, the equation can be manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3a
cr
m
) / [1+2(a
cr
- c
min
) / (h-x)]
=
m
s
c
s
c
= 3a
cr
/ [1+2(a
cr
- c
min
) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).
Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing. Bars and tendons
that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
s
c
= 3a
cr
/ [1+2(a
cr
- c
min
) / h
t
] where h
t
= (h-x) = height of tension zone
s
c
= 3a
cr
h
t
/ [h
t
+2(a
cr
- c
min
)]
s
c
[h
t
+2(a
cr
- c
min
)]

= 3a
cr
h
t
s
c
h
t
+2s
c
a
cr
- 2s
c
c
min
= 3a
cr
h
t
s
c
h
t
- 2s
c
c
min
= 3a
cr
h
t
- 2s
c
a
cr

s
c
h
t
- 2s
c
c
min
= a
cr
(3h
t
- 2s
c
)
a
cr
= (s
c
h
t
- 2s
c
c
min
) / (3h
t
- 2s
c
)
However, , where s
b
= half the horizontal spacing between reinforcement.
Using this final equation, Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling
cracking. Concept iteratively determines the s
c
that gives the s
bs
that sum to the tension face width.
For bonded tendons, the cover c
min
is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the bar diameter is
assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
a
cr
s
b
2
c
mi n
2
+ =
592
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
62.7 IS 1343 code implementation
62.7.1 Section 18.6.3.2c Minimum transverse reinforcement
When the depth of the web is more than 4 times the thickness of the web, 0.1 percent reinforcement is provided in
accordance with 18.6.3.2c.
The spacing limit related to the clear depth of the web is not implemented. This spacing, however, should normally be
comparable to the maximum spacing of 0.75 d
t
applied in other shear provisions.
62.7.2 Section 18.6.3.3 Minimum longitudinal reinforcement
Reinforcement is provided in accordance with 0.15 percent requirement. This assumes that high strength deformed bars have
been provided.
Any bonded or unbonded tendon areas are applied to this provision before calculating any required untensioned
reinforcement. Only tendons on the tension side (as determined by the minimum reinforcement setting) or within 10% of the
cross section depth are used.
section considered.
62.7.3 Section 18.6.3.3 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons
Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement
(note that the 1.2 factor is not used in IS 1343)
62.7.4 Section 21.1.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item d as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby
ensuring ductility.
62.7.5 Section 22.1 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure
See section 38 for general approach.
Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-
tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
See Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 395 for tendon stress-strain curves.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility. If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section
under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
593 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves General Theory on page 396).
possible.
62.7.6 Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of beams
V
co
is calculated per section 22.4.1. The flange/web intersection is not checked.
V
cr
is calculated per section 22.4.2.
The value of V
c
is used as shown in the following table.
Note: * The calculation of M
o
uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where the section
is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with M
o
. For the unusual case of M > M
o
and the
section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are
made.
d is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-tensioning). This
is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the
tendons as defined in the code.
d
t
is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the tendons,
whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
cu
is used in calculations.
p

c
.
b is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds of
the width of bonded tendons is deducted from b.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the f
pu
and f
pe
values used in the calculations are averaged.
Longitudinal unstressed reinforcement is converted into equivalent area of prestressed reinforcement to determine A
p
used
in Table 6.
Moment V
c
Implementation
M < M
o
V
c
= V
co
V
c
= (stress)bh
M > M
o
and tension is on the
tension face
*
V
c
= min (V
co
, V
cr
)
V
c
= (stress)bh
M > M
o
and no tension on
the tension face
*
V
c
= min (V
co
, V
cr
)
V
c
= (stress)bh
d = d
t
(assumed)
A
s
A
ps
Table 62-6 V
c
rule mapping
594
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
When calculating f
pe
/f
pu
, f
pe
is taken as the effective prestressing force divided by the equivalent area of prestressing steel.
v
c
is calculated per the equation in SP : 24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 6.
For slabs, Table 6 values are modified by IS 456 40.2.1.1 as appropriate.
Maximum shear stress is in accordance with Table 7. For slabs, this value is adjusted in accordance with IS 456 40.2.3.1.
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 22.4.3.
Minimum shear reinforcement is provided at all locations in beams.
Minimum reinforcement is provided in slabs when V
u
> V
c
.
The web thickness used in the calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is
made up of multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one
web.
62.7.7 Section 22.5 Torsion
Included code sections - 22.5.1, 22.5.3.1, 22.5.3.2, 22.5.4, 22.5.5 (item a and b)
Excluded code sections - 22.5.2, 22.5.3.3, 22.5.5 (item c and d)
with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the
number of ribs (* num ribs).
code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design section or
design strip for each rib.
Equivalent bending moment M
e1
and M
e2
are calculated per sections 22.5.3.1 and 22.5.3.2.
Transverse bending moment M
e3
is calculated and reported in the auditor per 22.5.3.3, but no transverse bending design is
performed.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with sections 22.5.4.1, 22.5.4.2, 22.5.4.3 and 22.5.4.4. In the
shear equation for A
v
in section 22.5.4.3, d
t
is substituted for d
l
to align this equation with the shear equation in 22.4.3.2
when no torsion is present. This change may not be conservative, but is consistent with the publication mentioned in the note
below.
Distribution of torsion reinforcement is calculated in accordance with section 22.5.5.
Maximum spacing of torsion stirrups is the least of x
1
, (x
1
+ y
1
)/4 or 200 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
Note: There is a typographical error in the code section 22.5.4.2 for the calculation of V
e1
. The term in the numerator should
be e
c
, not e as shown in the code. Also, equation for T
c
in section 22.5.4.1 is typographically incorrect. Refer to publications
Design of Prestressed Concrete Beams Subjected to Combined Bending, Shear, and Torsion by Rangan and Hall, ACI
Journal March 1975 and Strength of Rectangular Prestressed Concrete Beams in Combined Torsion, Bending, and Shear
by Rangan and Hall, ACI Journal April 1973 for details.
62.7.8 Section 22.7.1 Flexural tension stresses in concrete
Hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from section 22.7.1.
595 RAM Concept
Chapter 62
For type 2 members, the temporary service loads adjustment is not taken.
For bonded and unbonded cross sections, Type 3 hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from Table 8 as
Grouted post-tensioned tendons.
The values in Table 8 are multiplied by the Depth Factors in Fig. 6 as necessary.
For each section, two limit stresses are calculated. The first limit stress is the maximum stress allowed if no supplemental
un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress allowed. The supplemental un-
tensioned reinforcement is calculated in accordance with the Note under Table 8. Cross sections with unbonded tendons
(see Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 595) are classified as other members when
calculating supplemental reinforcement.
Note: When calculating supplemental reinforcement per the Note under Table 8, the additional reinforcement is calculated
as a percentage of the cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone as is done in BS 8110. This is different than a
literal reading of the IS 1343 code.
62.7.10 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement
Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the unreinforced stress limits are exceeded, even for the structure types
where it is not anticipated by IS 1343. For example, if a type 1 beam has tension stresses exceeding 0 N/mm2, it will be
marked as having failed the 22.7 criterion; supplemental reinforcement will still be calculated for the type 1 beam even
though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure.
The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per Note, Table 8 is as follows:
A
s
= A
ct
[(Stress Difference) / (100 * )]
where A
ct
and = 3 N/mm
2
for unbonded cross sections and 4 N/mm
2
for bonded cross sections
section considered.
62.7.11 Section 22.8.1 Design compressive stresses
Compressive stresses in concrete based on the concrete section are limited to the values in Fig. 7 for Zone I. Zone II values
are never applied.
Direct compression stresses at the section centroid are limited to 0.8 times the value determined from Fig. 7.
62.7.12 Section 22.8.2 Design compressive stresses (Transfer)
Compressive stresses in concrete based on the cracked concrete section at transfer of prestress are limited to the values in
Fig. 8 for post-tensioned work.
596
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
The average of the top and bottom concrete stress in the cracked section is limited to the direct compressive stress limit of
0.8 times the value from Fig. 8.
62.7.13 Punching shear design
597 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
63 EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of Eurocode 2 (EC2):2004. This section describes two
implementations of the code:
EC2 with the UK National Annex in conjunction with the TR-43 document for PT provisions
EC2 with the option to input the National Annex parameters
The version that is utilized by RAM Concept is controlled using the Code selection. Selecting Eurocode 2-2004 (UK Annex)
will activate the UK Annex option (with TR-43), while selecting Eurocode 2-2004 will activate the EC2 code with input
National Annex parameters. When Eurocode 2-2004 is active, the annex factors are accessed through the Criteria->EC2
Annex menu item.
Figure 63-1 EC2 Annex dialog
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
63.1 EC2 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new EC2 file. As
the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed
598
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
here. It is important to note that the user may create his or her own load combinations where the default loadings do not
comply with the particular national Codes.
As it is a temporary load, it is generally only included in the Initial Service Load Combination. If a permanent load is present
at stressing, it should be defined on the Temporary Construction (At Stressing) loading layer as well as the appropriate
permanent loading layer. Alternatively, you can include a permanent loading present at stressing with appropriate use of load
factors.
63.1.2 Snow Loading
coefficients, drifting, etc. RAM Concept uses the factors from Eurocode 0, Table A1.1 for sites located at altitude H less than
or equal to 1000 m a.s.l.
63.1.3 Live (Parking) Loading
For generation of load combinations, this loading type describes the load for Category F, traffic areas with vehicle weight
less than or equal to 30 kN.
63.2 EC2 Default Load Combinations
creates when you start a new Eurocode 2 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or
modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from the Eurocode
63.2.1 All Dead LC
63.2.2 Dead + Balance LC
This load combination sums all of the dead loadings with the balance loads, with a load factor of 1.0, that act simultaneously
in the standard service condition. This load combination is for information only - it is not used by RAM Concept for design
purposes.
this stage)
599 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
63.2.4 Characteristic Service LC: D + L + 0.5S
This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state. It conservatively does not
consider combination factors for live loads, even though the Code technically permits
0
to be applied to all accompanying
variable actions. The load factors used are:
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
63.2.5 Characteristic Service Snow LC: D +
0
L + S
This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:
63.2.6 Frequent Service LC: D +
1
L
This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state. It conservatively applies
1
to all live
loads, even though the Code technically permits
2
to be applied to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used
are:
63.2.7 Frequent Service Snow LC: D +
2
L + 0.2S
This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:
600
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
63.2.8 Quasi-Permanent Service LC: D +
2
L
This load combination is intended for checking the quasi-permanent serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:
63.2.9 Ultimate LC:
G,sup
D + 0.9H +
Qi

0
L +
Qi

0
S
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table A1.2 (B).
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) (Only included in BS EN 1990:2002 UK National Annex)
63.2.10 Ultimate LC:
G,sup
D + 0.9H +
Qi

0
L +
Q1
S
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table A1.2 (B).
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt) (BS EN 1990:2002 UK National Annex, = 0.925)
Dead Loading: 1.15 (std) & 1.0 (alt) (Eurocode 0, = 0.85)
601 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
63.2.11 Ultimate LC:
G,sup
D + 0.9H +
Q1
L +
Qi

0
S
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table A1.2 (B). It
conservatively applies a factor of 1.5 to all live loads, even though the Code technically permits
0
to be applied to
accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:
Note: Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
63.2.12 Accident LC
This load combination is intended for checking the accident limit state. The load factors used are:
63.2.13 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D +
0
L +
0
S + W
This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state with wind. It considers wind as the
leading action and applies
0
to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:
602
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
Wind-Service Loading: 1.0 (std) & -1.0 (alt)
63.2.14 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D +
0
L + S +
0
W
This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state with wind. It considers snow as
the leading action and applies
0
to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:
Wind-Service Loading: 0.5 (std) & -0.5 (alt) (BS EN 1990:2002 UK National Annex)
Wind-Service Loading: 0.6 (std) & -0.6 (alt) (Eurocode 0)
63.2.15 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + L +
0
S +
0
W
This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state with wind. It considers wind and
snow as the accompanying actions and treats all live loads as leading actions. The load factors used are:
63.2.16 Frequent Service Wind LC: D +
2
L +
1
W
This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state with wind.
603 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
63.2.17 Ultimate Wind LC:
G,sup
D + 0.9H +
Qi

0
L +
Qi

0
S +
Qi

0
W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table A1.2 (B).
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) ) (Only included in BS EN 1990:2002 UK National Annex)
G,sup
D + 0.9H +
Q1
L +
Qi

0
S +
Qi

0
W
The wind and snow loads are treated as accompanying actions and all live loads are treated as the leading actions. The load
factors used are:
604
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
G,sup
D + 0.9H +
Qi

0
L +
Q1
S +
Qi

0
W
The wind and live loads are treated as accompanying actions and snow loads are treated as the leading actions. The load
factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt) (BS EN 1990:2002, = 0.925)
G,sup
D + 0.9H +
Qi

0
L +
Qi

0
S +
Q1
W
The wind load is treated as the leading action and all other variable loads are treated as accompanying actions. The load
factors used are:
605 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
63.2.21 Equilibrium Wind LC: 0.9D +
Q1
W
This load combination is intended for checking the equilibrium limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10) in Table A1.2 (A).
The wind load is treated as the leading action and all other variable loads are assumed to be favorable. This combination is
Balance Loading: 1.0
Dead Loading: 0.9
Wind-Service Loading: 1.5
63.3 Eurocode 1 Part 1-1 (UK National Annex) Live Load Reduction
Domestic, residential, and office (Category A and B) loads on a Live (Reducible) layer
Assembly (Category C and D) loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
Car park loads (Category F) on a Live (Parking) layer
Storage loads(Category E) on a Live (Storage) layer.
Roof loads (Category H) on a Live (Roof) layer
Note: Live load reduction will conservatively not be considered on Assembly loads in Category C and D. However it is
necessary to assign the loads to the Live (Unreducible) type to get the appropriate factors in the load combinations.
63.4 EC2 Material behaviors
when using Eurocode 2.
The partial safety factors for the different materials will be defined by the used Annex. The BS EN 1990:2002 has fixed
values and the Generic version allows the user to specify their values.
in table 3.1, an equation from another code, or a specified value.
E
ci
E
c
When the EC2 code equation is selected the following values are used:
E
ci
= 22,000[(f
cki
+ 8)/10]
0.3
MPa (f
cki
in MPa)
E
c
= 22,000[(f
ck
+ 8)/10]
0.3
MPa (f
ck
in MPa)
Where
606
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
f
cki
= characteristic cylinder strength at stressing
f
ck
= 28 day characteristic cylinder strength
or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves are parabolic-
linear curves as detailed in clause 3.1.7. The transition strain is at
c2
.
cki
.
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.85f
ck
.
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.85f
ck
/
c,ult
(
c,ult
= 1.5 for BS EN 1990:2002 UK
National Annex).
For accident strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.85f
ck
/
c,acc
(
c,acc
= 1.2 for BS EN 1990:2002
UK National Annex).
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of
cu2
or
c2
depending upon the eccentricity of the net axial force
on the cross section. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-section
strain analyses use the stress strain curve of Figure 3.3. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will therefore be
different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR calculations.
63.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behavior
Untensioned reinforcement is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material, as is shown in code figure 3.8. The elastic
modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window.
For strength considerations, the program uses
s,ult
(
s,ult
= 1.15 for BS EN 1990:2002 UK National Annex).
For other considerations (accident or serviceability),
s,acc
and
s,serv
are used (
s,acc
=
s,serv
= 1.0 for BS EN 1990:2002 UK
National Annex).
E
ps
F
py
F
pu
m
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in Post-
tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 395. The three parameters are:
E
ps
= E
ps
F
py
= F
py
/
m
F
pu
= F
pu
/
m
For strength considerations,
s,ult
is used (
s,ult
= 1.15 for BS EN 1990:2002 UK National Annex).
607 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
For other considerations (accident or serviceability),
s,acc
and
s,serv
are used (
s,acc
=
s,serv
= 1.0 for BS EN 1990:2002 UK
National Annex).
For accident strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
detailed in Chapter 41, Section Design Notes. For Eurocode 2:2004, the maximum unbonded tendon stress (f
pb
, called
f
limit
in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 397) is defined by the
equation in TR-43 clause 5.8.5.5 for both BS EN 1990:2002 and the generic annex implementations. Since Concept uses the
tendon length instead of the distance in function of the neutral axis depth, the approach may be considered as a lower bound
solution and thus a load factor of 1.0 is used.
When this equation is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons, the following terms are used in the calculation:
l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth
f
pu
A
ps
= sum of all the individual tendons f
pu
multiplied by the vector component of their A
ps
f
ck
bd = minimum concrete characteristic cylinder strength multiplied by the compression face width and the depth
to the centroid of the vector component tendon area
For Eurocode 2:2004, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is k = 5d/L
Where
L = length of the unbonded tendon
d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from the furthest concrete face)
This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and a zone of inelasticity of 10 times this length.
RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting
stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption
typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on the wrong side of the cross section
centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than f
pb
, due to the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross
section at the tendon elevation.
63.5 EC2 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides EC2 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design
section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.
way slab).
or design section:
608
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least one load
combination.
Design System RC PT
UK National Annex
Beam 9.2.1.1 TR-43 5.8.8
One-Way Slab 9.3.1.1 TR-43 5.8.8
Two-Way Slab 9.3.1.1 TR-43 5.8.8
Generic National Annex
Beam 9.2.1.1 9.2.1.1(1) and unbonded PT Beams 9.2.1.1(4)
One-Way Slab 9.3.1.1 9.3.1.1
One-Way Slab 9.3.1.1 9.3.1.1
609 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Old Files
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 33 of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
on both faces).
63.5.4 Characteristic Service
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of
members as follows:
Protected: X0, XC1
Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4
Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3
Design System RC PT
UK National Annex
Beam (none) 5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
One-Way Slab (none) 5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
Two-Way Slab (none) 5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
All Systems (none) 5.10.2.2
610
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table:
Table 63-3 Characteristic service rule mapping
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.2(5) is only performed where crack width design is requested.
Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where stress design is requested.
63.5.5 Frequent Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: X0, XC1
Design System RC Bonded PT Unbonded PT
UK National Annex
Beam 7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
1
7.2(5)
1
One-Way Slab 7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
1
7.2(5)
1
Two-Way Slab 7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
1
TR-43 5.8.1
2
(Table 4)
TR-43 5.8.7
2

7.2(5)
1
TR-43 5.8.1
2
(Table 4)
TR-43 5.8.7
2

All systems 7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
611 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Table 63-4 Frequent service rule mapping
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.3 is only performed where crack width design is requested.
Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where stress design is requested.
63.5.6 Quasi-Permanent Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: X0, XC1
Table 63-5 Quasi-Permanent service rule mapping
Note: 1- for Unbonded PT members, 7.3 is only performed where crack width design is requested.
Note: 2- for Bonded PT members, only the decompression design is applied for the appropriate exposure.
UK National Annex
Beam (none)
7.3
1
TR-43 5.8.1
2

TR-43 5.8.1
2
TR-43 5.8.7
2
One-Way Slab (none)
7.3
1
TR-43 5.8.1
2
TR-43 5.8.1
2
TR-43 5.8.7
2
Two-Way Slab (none)
7.3
1
TR-43 5.8.1
2
(Table 5)
TR-43 5.8.7
2
TR-43 5.8.1
2
(Table 5)
TR-43 5.8.7
2
All Systems (none) 7.3 (none)
UK National Annex
All systems
7.3 7.3
2
7.3
1
All systems 7.3
7.3
2
7.3
612
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
63.5.7 Strength
factors).
faces).
63.5.8 Ductility
63.5.9 Accident
faces).
Reduced
m
factors are used in the strength calculations. For reinforcement
m
= 1.0 (BS EN 1990:2002).
Reinforcement location is determined by the Min. Reinforcement Location setting.
The minimum tensile force that an internal tie is capable of resisting varies between the BS EN 1990-2002 and the Generic
version, which uses the Eurocode general recommendation.
Design System RC PT
UK National Annex
All types 6.1
6.2
6.3
6.1 / TR-43 5.8.5
6.2 / TR-43 5.9
6.3
All types 6.1
6.2
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.3
Design System RC PT
All Systems 5.5 5.5
613 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Table 63-8 Accident rule mapping
63.6 EC2 code implementation
63.6.1 Section 5.5 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)
Included code sections (4)
Excluded code sections (1), (2), (3), (5), (6)
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies 5.5(4) as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby
ensuring ductility.
(1.0 k
1
)/k
2
* effective depth for f
ck
50 MPa
(1.0 k
3
)/k
4
* effective depth for f
ck
> 50 MPa
where k
1
, k
2
, k
3
, and k
4
are taken from the curent National Annex. Only k
1
and k
3
may be modified in the Generic version.
63.6.2 Section 5.10.2.2 Limitation of Concrete Stress (Transfer)
Included code sections (5).
Excluded code sections (1), (2), (3), (4).
The compressive stresses in the concrete, based on the cracked section, are limited to 0.6f
cki
.
63.6.3 Section 6.1 Design resistance moment
Included code sections (1), (2), (3), (7)
Excluded code sections (4), (5), (8)
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is
cu2
.
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves.
For span segments or design sections not designated as post-tensioned, post-tensioning tendon forces are ignored.
Design System RC PT
All Types 9.10 9.10
614
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
A tension design is performed for longitudinal torsion tension required by the torsion model. This design assumes the design
yield stress of the reinforcement and the calculated reinforcement is in addition to other requirements for flexure. Tension
demand on a particular face is reduced by the minimum expected value of the compression chord on that face due to flexure.
63.6.4 Section 6.2 Design shear resistance
Included code sections 6.2.1(1)(partial), 6.2.1(2), 6.2.1(3), 6.2.1(4), 6.2.1(5), 6.2.1(6), 6.2.1(7), 6.2.2(1), 6.2.2(2), 6.2.2(5),
6.2.3(1), 6.2.3(2), 6.2.3(3), 6.2.3(6)
Excluded code sections 6.2.1(1)(partial), 6.2.1(8), 6.2.1(9), 6.2.2(3), 6.2.2(4), 6.2.2(6), 6.2.2(7), 6.2.3(4), 6.2.3(5),
6.2.3(7), 6.2.3(8), 6.2.4 (all), 6.2.5 (all)
See Concrete Core Determination on page 260 for calculation of b.
V
Rd,c
is calculated using equation 6.2. For PT members uncracked in bending only equation 6.4 is used. For PT members
that are cracked in bending, the minimum of equation 6.2 and 6.4 is used.
Longitudinal untensioned tension reinforcement designed in Pass 1 and, if the member is PT, the area of bonded tendons in
the tension zone is included in the determination of A
sl
used in the calculation of V
Rd,c
.
b
w,nom
is the width of the shear core, less the width of the tendon ducts in accordance with 6.2.3(6). Bonded tendons are
considered to be grouted metal ducts. Any bonded ducts with diameter less than or equal to b
w
/8 are not considered in the
deduction. b
w,nom
is used in all shear calculations, including
w
ck
is used.
the shear being investigated. The effective depth is calculated as the distance from the compression most face to the
resultant tension force. For cross sections with no reinforcement in tension, a column style effective depth is determined
from the compression most face to the maximum depth of any reinforcement.
If the member is declared PT, the primary axial force contribution to
cp
in the calculation of equation 6.2.a, 6.2.b, and 6.4 is
multiplied by
P,fav
. The primary axial force contribution to
cp
used in equation 6.11 is multiplied by either
P,fav
or
P,unfav
,
whichever results in the lowest value of
cw
.
The shift rule required by 6.2.2(5) and 9.2.1.3 is performed for all members (with and without shear reinforcement) by
attempting to extend the reinforcement beyond the required development length by 1.125 times the effective depth. This is
calculated using eq. 9.2 and using z = 0.9d and cot = 2.5. Additional tension reinforcement in accordance with 6.2.3(7) is
assumed to be accounted for using this provision. In normal circumstances, this will be the case because the horizontal shift
required by 6.2.2(5) is related to the magnitude of the vertical shift performed according to 6.2.3(7).
In all beams at least minimum links will be provided.
Links are provided in accordance with 6.2.3 and 9.2.2. The angle is calculated as the minimum value that can satisfy the
requirement that V
Ed
V
Rd,max
, within the range specified in 6.2.3(2).
Minimum density of shear reinforcement is determined in accordance with 9.2.2(5).
Maximum shear reinforcement spacing along the span is determined by 9.2.2(6).
615 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
The shear reinforcement spacing across the span is not considered.
Net axial force is considered if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is checked.
63.6.5 Section 6.3 Torsion
Included code sections 6.3.1(part), 6.3.2
Excluded code sections 6.3.1(part), 6.3.3
with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back
up by the number of ribs (* num ribs).
code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design section
or design strip for each rib.
Torsion truss properties are calculated in accordance with 6.3.2(1). Link dimensions are determined from the location of
specified cover to longitudinal design bars and do not explicitly account for the location of user reinforcement. The truss
wall thickness, t
ef,i
is limited by:
A/u per 6.3.2(1)
b
w
/2
h/2
horizontal spacing between outermost horizontal bars
vertical spacing between outermost horizontal bars
The above limitations effectively create a truss wall with a longitudinal bar located at the center of the wall or outside the
center of the wall (which is considered to be conservative). In these calculations RAM Concept assumes that the side cover
to the longitudinal bars is the maximum of the top and bottom cover.
If the interaction equation 6.31 is satisfied, only minimum reinforcement is provided.
If equation 6.31 is not satisfied, equation 6.29 is used to calculate a maximum shear capacity by deducting the torsion
portion of the interaction capacity. This equation is used to iteratively solve for the smallest value of theta that can satisfy
the interaction equation 6.29. This theta is then used in all subsequent shear and torsion calculations.
Maximum spacing of links is calculated in accordance with 9.2.3(3).
Minimum torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with 9.2.3(2).
Minimum longitudinal tension reinforcement is calculated in accordance with equation 6.28. The tension demand on a
particular face is reduced by the minimum expected compression chord force.
If torsion design is selected and the torsion is greater than zero, at least minimum links will be provided.
63.6.6 7.2 Stress Limitation
For all RC and PT members:
For the characteristic combination of loads, the compressive stress in the concrete based upon the cracked section is
limited to k
1
f
ck
in accordance with 7.2(2). The value of k
1
= 0.6 is used for the UK National Annex. Un-tensioned
reinforcement is added to keep the concrete stresses within the prescribed limits.
616
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
For the quasi-permanent combination of loads, the compressive stress in the concrete based on the cracked section is
limited to k
2
f
ck
2
= 0.45 is used for the UK Annex. Un-tensioned reinforcement
is designed to keep the concrete stresses within the prescribed limits.
For all RC members and for PT members where crack width design is requested:
For the characteristic combination of loads, un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses
remain below k
3
f
yk
3
= 0.8 is used for the UK Annex.
63.6.7 7.3.1 Assessment of Crack Widths
Crack widths are calculated per 7.3.4. Cracked equilibrium strains are calculated assuming that concrete has no tensile
strength. Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below the required limits.
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of members
as follows:
Protected: X0, XC1
UK National Annex crack width limits are in accordance with Table NA.4 of the applied National Annex.
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs and other wide cross sections, but will not provide accurate crack width
predictions for these wide cross sections when reinforcement is not spaced according to the varying stress patterns across the
section. For narrower cross sections with a uniform stress pattern, the bonded reinforcement should be spaced uniformly.
For this reason it may not be appropriate to do a crack width only design on full panel strip widths.
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded tendons are considered, and the balance loading will be
considered if included in the load combinations. Bonded tendons are only considered effective if the average spacing of the
bonded tendons and un-tensioned reinforcement within h
c,eff
is less than or equal to 300 mm in accordance with 7.3.2(3).
Crack width = s
r,max
(sm- cm)
sm- cm = [
s
- k
t
(f
ct,eff
/
p,eff
)

(1 +
e

p,eff
)] / E
s
0.6
s
/ E
s
Concept uses a rearranged form of this equation, which utilizes strains instead of stresses
sm- cm =
s
/ E
s
- k
t
[

(f
ct,eff
/(
p,eff
E
s
) + (f
ct,eff
/E
cm
)] 0.6
s
/ E
s
s
= tension stress in un-tensioned reinforcement from a cracked section analysis, or maximum differential
bonded tendon stress from tendon stress level at zero strain in the concrete at the same level
k
t
= 0.6 for frequent service design
0.4 for quasi-permanent service design
f
ct,eff
= f
ctm
p,eff
= (A
s
+
1
2
A
p
)/A
c,eff
A
s
= area of un-tensioned reinforcement within depth h
c,eff
A
p
= area of bonded tendons within depth h
c,eff
A
c,eff
= area of concrete within depth h
c,eff
h
c,eff
= minimum of 2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, or h/2
d = depth to the outermost layer of reinforcement
617 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
1
= [ (
s
/
p
)]
= 0.5 for f
ck
C50/60
0.25 for f
ck
C70/85
Linearly interpolated between C50/60 and C70/85
s
= largest diameter of reinforcement contained within depth h
c,eff
p
= 1.6A
p
e
= E
s
/E
cm
s
r,max
= k
3
c + k
1
k
2
k
4
eq
/
p,eff
= crack spacing (eq. 7.11)
k
3
= 3.4 (Eurocode recommendation and BS EN 1990:2002, UK Annex, 7.3.4 (3))
c = average cover to reinforcement, weighted by bar/tendon units
k
1
= 0.8 for un-tensioned reinforcement
1.6 for bonded tendons
averaged for cross sections containing both tendons and un-tensioned reinforcement,
weighted by bar/tendon units
k
2
= 0.5 for bending (compression strain on one face)
(
1
+
2
) / 2
1
for tension (tension strain on both faces)
k
4
= 0.425 (Eurocode recommendation and BS EN 1990:2002, UK Annex, 7.3.4 (3))
eq
= n
1
1
2
+ n
2
2
2
+ n
i
i
2

/ (n
1
1
+ n
2
2
+ n
i
i
)
If the bonded reinforcement within h
c,eff
is less than or equal to 5(c+
eq
/2), RAM Concept uses equation 7.11 for s
r,max
. If
a larger spacing exists, RAM Concept uses a crack spacing of 1.3(h-x) in accordance with equation 7.14. RAM Concept
always assumes the maximum crack spacing is 1.3(h-x).
For bonded PT systems, decompression is checked for exposure class XC2, XC3, and XC4 for the quasi-permanent load
combination and for exposure class XD and XS for the frequent load combination. For the decompression checks, a check is
made that the entire bonded tendon lies within 25mm of concrete in compression, using cracked section properties. For the
purposes of this check the tendon is assumed to be round with a diameter equal to the width specified in the material
properties.
63.6.8 Section 9.2.1.1 Beam Minimum Reinforcement
Included code sections (1), (4)
Excluded code sections (2), (3)
This section applies only to beams.
b
t
is taken as the width on the tension face.
d is taken as the depth from the compression face (as determined from the Code Min. Reinforcement Location setting) to
the centroid of reinforcement located closest to the tension face. In PT beams the tendon locations are included in this
calculation.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum f
ck
is used.
See Code Minimum Reinforcement on page 607 for details regarding which face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement
will be added to.
For RC beams, post-tensioning is ignored.
618
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
For PT beams, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the
cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered as un-tensioned reinforcement. For A
s
F
y
requirements, tendon
(f
py
f
se
) is utilized as the available yield stress. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector
components of their reinforcement areas applied toward these requirements.
For unbonded PT beams, un-tensioned reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than 1.15
times the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based upon the Min. Reinforcement
(note that a 1.15 factor is used in EC2).
The cracking stress is taken as f
ctm,fl
in accordance with EC2 clause 3.1.8. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes,
the maximum f
ck
for the cross section is used.
63.6.9 Section 9.3.1.1 RC Slab Minimum Reinforcement
Included code sections (1), (3)
Excluded code sections (2), (4)
This section applies only to one-way slabs and two-way slabs.
d is taken as the depth from the compression face (as determined from the Code Min. Reinforcement Location setting) to
the centroid of reinforcement located closest to the tension face. In PT slabs the tendon locations are included in this
calculation.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum f
ck
is used.
See Code Minimum Reinforcement on page 607 for details regarding which face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement
will be added to.
For RC slabs, post-tensioning is ignored.
For PT slabs, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the
cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered as un-tensioned reinforcement. For A
s
F
y
requirements, tendon
(f
py
f
se
) is utilized as the available yield stress. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector
components of their reinforcement areas applied toward these requirements.
The maximum spacing between bars is limited to the minimum of 400mm or 3h. For two-way slabs in column strips in the
first cross section in a support region, the spacing between bars is limited to the minimum of 250 mm or 2h.
In post-tensioned slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or
are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar.
These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes their plan locations are ignored.
63.6.10 Section 9.10 Tying Systems for Accidental Design Situations
Each cross section is considered to act as a portion of an internal tie. Reinforcement at each cross section is placed on the
tension face in accordance with the force envelopes for the Accident Rule set. Peripheral ties are not explicitly calculated by
RAM Concept.
619 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Tie force requirements are determined in accordance with the applied National Annex clause 9.10.2.3 (3). The Generic
version uses the recommended value.
The number of stories is conservatively assumed to be 10 or more, resulting in F
t
= 60.
l
r
is calculated as this cross sections span length plus the larger adjacent span length. For design sections we calculate this
value as twice this cross sections span length.
An equivalent uniform span load (force/length) is calculated representing (g
k
+ q
k
) times the width of the span. This
uniform span load is calculated as follows:
For span segments, the total span shear is calculated as the difference in shears at each end of the span. This value is
calculated twice, once with the minimum V envelope at the span start and the maximum V envelope at the span end and
once with the maximum V envelope at the span start and the minimum V envelope at the span end. The maximum of the
differences in these values is used as the total span shear. The uniform span load is then calculated as the total span shear
divided by the span length.
For design sections, the total span shear is calculated as the twice the maximum span shear, extrapolated from the cross
section shear using the design section span ratio. The uniform span load is then calculated as the total span shear divided
by the span length. For regions of low shear near mid-span where extrapolation may not be appropriate, we calculate the
uniform span load from the moment at the cross section as M/al
2
where a = (1/24 /2) and is the span ratio from this
cross section to mid-span.
Tie requirements are considered as minimum requirements, not in addition to other requirements. The design yield stress of
bonded tendons located anywhere in the cross section are applied toward the tie requirements. Vector components are used
for tendons that are not perpendicular to the cross section.
63.6.12 TR-43 5.8.1 PT Service Stresses (Only for BS)
This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs. This section of TR43 defines hypothetical
stress limits for comparison with gross section stresses.
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of members
as follows:
Protected: X0, XC1
For bonded beams and one way slabs, it is assumed that the hypothetical tensile stresses in Table 3 exist at the limiting crack
width values given in Eurocode 2. For exposure class XD or XS, a limiting crack width value of 0.1mm is assumed for the
determination of hypothetical tensile stresses. The recommended design strip property setting PT Service Design Type is
either Stress or Stress and Crack Width. Crack Width only is not explicitly permitted by TR43.
The supplemental reinforcement for bonded beams and one way slabs in accordance with TR43 5.8.1 is calculated as
follows:
A
s
= A
ct
[(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm
2
)]
where A
ct
620
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
section considered.
For unbonded beam and one way slabs, for members with tension stresses supplemental reinforcement is always provided in
accordance with TR43 5.8.7. TR43 does not provide an absolute tensile stress limit for exceeding the Table 3 values. As
such, RAM Concept uses the Table 3 values as absolute limits and therefore does not permit enhancing the stresses by
adding un-tensioned reinforcement. The recommended design strip property setting PT Service Design Type is either
Stress or Stress and Crack Width. Crack Width only is not explicitly permitted by TR43.
For two way slabs, for members with tension stresses supplemental reinforcement is always provided in accordance with
TR43 5.8.7. Table 4 or Table 5 values are used depending upon whether or not full panel width strips are used (average
stresses) or column/middle strips are used (design strip stresses). In determination of using with bonded reinforcement
limits the average spacing of the bonded reinforcement on the tension face is checked (using bonded tendons in the tension
zone). If the bonded reinforcement spacing limit is greater than 500 mm at the time when the limits are being determined,
the without bonded reinforcement limits are used. Since the reinforcement in the service design is left in the cross section
from force envelope to envelope, it is possible that an envelope will use the without bonded reinforcement limits while the
subsequent envelope will use with bonded reinforcement limits due to the reinforcement added in the previous envelope.
Where full panel width strips are used, the recommended design strip property setting PT Service Design Type is either
Stress or Stress and Crack Width. Crack Width only is not explicitly permitted by TR43. In the case where
column/middle strips are used the recommended setting is Stress or Stress and Crack Width or Crack Width as TR43
explicitly permits the stress limits in Table 5 to be exceeded where explicit crack width checks are performed.
Member Type Exposure
Class
Code
Design
Crack
Width
(mm)
Hypothetical
Crack Width
(used to
determine
stress limits)
(mm)
Tension limit
without
supplemental
reinforcement
Absolute
Tension
Limit
Supplemental
Reinforcement
Calculation
Load
Combination
Bonded Beam,
One Way Slab
X0, XC1 0.2 0.2 1.65f
ctm
0.3f
ck
5.8.1
Frequent
1,2
XC2,
XC3,
XC4
0.2 0.2 1.65f
ctm
0.3f
ck
5.8.1
Frequent
1,2
,
Quasi-
Permanent
3
XD or XS 0.2 0.1 1.35f
ctm
0.3f
ck
5.8.1
Frequent
1,2,3
Unbonded Beam,
One Way Slab
All 0.3 - 0 1.35f
ctm
5.8.7
Frequent
2
,
Quasi-
Permanent
1
Bonded Two Way
Slab, Full Panel
Width
X0, XC1 0.2 - 0(support)
0.9f
ctm
(span)
0.9f
ctm
5.8.7
Characteristic
2
,
Frequent
1
XC2,
XC3,
XC4
0.2 - 0(support)
0.9f
ctm
(span)
0.9f
ctm
5.8.7
Characteristic
2
,
Frequent
1
,
Quasi-
Permanent
3
XD or XS 0.2 - 0(support)
0.9f
ctm
(span)
0.9f
ctm
5.8.7
Characteristic
2
,
Frequent
1,3
Bonded Two Way
Slab,
Column/Middle
Strips
X0, XC1 0.2 - 0(support)
1.2f
ctm
(span)
1.2f
ctm
5.8.7
Frequent
1,2
XC2,
XC3,
XC4
0.2 - 0(support)
1.2f
ctm
(span)
1.2f
ctm
5.8.7
Frequent
1,2
,
Quasi-
Permanent
3
XD or XS 0.2 - 0(support)
1.2f
ctm
(span)
1.2f
ctm
5.8.7
Frequent
1,2,3
Unbonded Two
Way Slab, Full
Panel Width
All 0.3 - 0(support)
0.3f
ctm
(span)
0.9f
ctm
5.8.7
Characteristic
2
,
Quasi-
Permanent
1
Unbonded Two
Way Slab,
Column/Middle
Strips
All 0.3 - 0(support)
0.4f
ctm
(span)
1.2f
ctm
5.8.7
Frequent
2
,
Quasi-
Permanent
1
621 RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Note: 1 - Used for crack width design (when requested by user)
Note: 2 - Used for hypothetical stress checks (when requested by user)
Note: 3 - Used for decompression check (when crack width design is requested by user)
63.6.13 TR-43 5.8.2 PT Initial Service (transfer) Stresses (Only for BS)
This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs.
For beams and one-way slabs, where the flexural tensile stresses exceed 0.72f
ctm
additional un-tensioned reinforcement is
designed in accordance with 5.8.7. Compressive stresses are limited to the values in 5.8.2.
For two-way slabs, the flexural compressive and tensile stresses are limited to the values in Table 5 for column/middle strip
design, or Table 4 for full panel width design, where f
ck
is replaced with f
cki
.
ck
may be approximate.
63.6.14 TR-43 5.8.3 PT Crack Control (Only for BS)
Code crack width limits are determined in accordance with Table NA.4 of the UK National Annex.
See 7.3.1 Assessment of Crack Widths for additional information.
63.6.15 TR-43 5.8.5 PT Ultimate Limit State (Only for BS)
The equation for f
pb
is used to limit unbonded tendon stress. See Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior for more
information.
63.6.16 TR-43 5.8.7 PT Un-tensioned Reinforcement (Only for BS)
This section applies to unbonded post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs, and to all post-tensioned two-way slabs.
0.625(A
s
f
y
+ A
ps
f
p
) = F
1
where
F
1
= tensile force in concrete
A
s
= area of un-tensioned reinforcement added
f
y
= yield strength of un-tensioned reinforcement
A
ps
= vector component area of bonded (grouted) tendons in tension zone
f
p
= tendon yield stress - tendon effective stress
It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete cover is
specified.
section considered.
622
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
63.6.17 TR-43 5.8.8 PT Minimum Reinforcement (Only for BS)
Note: There are no minimum un-tensioned reinforcement requirements for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs that are
primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 619 for discussion.
For primarily unbonded post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 9.2.1.1 or 9.3.1.1 are applied as
appropriate.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs in column strips, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in support regions as follows:
A
s
= 0.00075A
ct
.
A
ct
= sum of cross sectional area of column strip and adjacent middle strips(generated from the same span segment)
For design sections, this criterion is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked. The requirement that this reinforcement be concentrated between lines that
are 1.5 times the slab depth is not checked.
User defined reinforcement and bonded tendons that are at an angle to the cross section will only have the component
perpendicular to the cross section considered.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs, minimum reinforcement consisting of un-tensioned reinforcement and bonded tendons is
provided as follows:
A
s
= 0.001A
c
A
c
= area of cross section
For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The spacing of this reinforcement is limited to 500 mm. Bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side
of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as
equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes their plan
locations are ignored.
The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
63.6.18 TR-43 5.9 Shear Strength (Only for BS)
The values of
cp
calculated in accordance with Eurocode 2, Clause 6.2 are modified by the appropriate safety factor
p,fav

or
p,unfav
as appropriate. The contribution of the vertical component of the tendon is not considered in one-way shear
calculations.
623 RAM Concept
Chapter 64
64 CSA A23.3-04 Design
This appendix details RAM Concepts implementation of the Canadian Standard CSA A23.3-04.
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
64.1 CSA A23.3-04 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new CSA A23.3-04
discussed here.
64.1.2 Snow Loading
coefficients, drifting, etc. The importance factor should not be included in this loading, as it is addressed in the load
combination factors.
64.2 CSA A23.3-04 default load combinations
creates when you start a new CSA A23.3-04 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can
remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from the
National Building Code of Canada 2005 unless noted otherwise.
The assumed importance factors for the default load combinations belong to the Normal Category. Importance factors are
included in the load combinations, not the loadings. The corresponding load combinations will be generated incorporating
624
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
the appropriate importance factor for the normal category. For importance categories other than normal, the
corresponding load combinations will need to be generated manually.
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. In some cases, the assumption that all gravity loads act in
the same direction have been used to keep the number of load combinations to a minimum. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load
Combinations for further description.
64.2.1 All Dead LC
this stage)
64.2.3 Service LC: D + L + 0.45S
64.2.4 Service Snow LC: D + 0.5L + 0.9S
625 RAM Concept
Chapter 64
Service Wind Loading: 0.75 (std) & -0.75 (alt)
64.2.6 Service Wind LC: D + L + 0.45S + 0.3W
are:
626
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
This load combination is intended for checking the ultimate limit state. The load factors used are:
64.2.10 Factored LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.5 (st) and 0.0 (alt)
64.2.11 Factored LC: 1.25D + 0.5L + 1.5S
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.5 (st) and 0.0 (alt)
627 RAM Concept
Chapter 64
64.2.12 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.5L+ 0.5S + 1.4W
used are:
64.2.13 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S + 0.4W
used are:
64.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.5L+ 1.5S + 0.4W
used are:
628
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
64.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: D + 0.5L+ 0.25S + E
used are:
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std) & -1.0 (alt)
64.3 CSA A23.3-04/NBC 2005 live load factors
assembly loads less than 4.8 kPa (or important live loads) on a Live (Unreducible) layer
assembly loads of 4.8 kPa or more, manufacturing, retail stores, garages, or footbridge on Live (Parking) layer
storage areas, and equipment areas and service rooms referred to in Table 4.1.5.3 on Live (Storage) layer
live loads other than those covered by clause 4.1.5.9 sentences 1) and 2) on a Live (Reducible) layer
64.4 CSA A23.3-04 material behaviors
when using CSA A23.3-04.
You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 8.6.2.2 or a specified
value.
E
ci
E
c
When the CSA code equation 8.6.2.2 is selected the following values are used:
E
ci
3300 f
ci
6900 + [ ]
c
2300
------------

=
E
c
w
c
1.5
33 f
c
=
629 RAM Concept
Chapter 64
Where
f
ci
= cylinder strength at stressing (MPa)
f
c
= 28 day cylinder strength (MPa)
c
= density of concrete (kg/m
3
)
strain limits.
Design Notes.
For CSA A23.3-04, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, f
limit
, is defined by equation 18-2. In the calculation of (d
p
-c
y
),
64.5 CSA A23.3-04 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which CSA A23.3-04 code rules to apply based on the design strip
way slab).
or design section:
630
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.7
One-Way Slab 7.8 18.7
Two-Way Slab 7.8 (none)
631 RAM Concept
Chapter 64
on both faces).
Note: 18.3.1.1(c) is not considered. 18.3.1.1(b) is considered in all cases for tension.
64.5.4 Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: Partial PT/RC, interior exposure
Normal: Partial PT/RC, exterior exposure
Corrosive: Full PT, 18.3.2(c)
Very Corrosive: Full PT, 18.3.2(d)
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.3.1.1 and 18.3.1.3
One-Way Slab (none) 18.3.1.1 and 18.3.1.3
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.3.1.1 and 18.3.1.3
Design System RC Partial PT Full PT
18.3.2(c)
Full PT
18.3.2(d)
Beam 10.6.1 18.8.1, 18.8.3 18.8.1,
18.3.2(c)
18.8.1,
18.3.2(d)
One-Way Slab 10.6.1 18.8.1, 18.8.3 18.8.1,
18.3.2(c)
18.8.1,
18.3.2(d)
Two-Way Slab (none) (not applicable) 18.8.1,
18.3.2(d)
18.8.1,
18.3.2(d)
632
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
64.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
64.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.3.2a
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.1, 11.3* 18.6, 11.3*
One-Way Slab 10.1, 11.3* 18.6, 11.3*
Two-Way Slab 10.1, 11.3* 18.6, 11.3*
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.2 (none)
633 RAM Concept
Chapter 64
64.6 CSA A23.3-04 code implementation
64.6.1 Section 7.8 Minimum Reinforcement in Slabs
7.8.1 and 7.8.3 are implemented.
determine the reinforcement specified in 7.8.1.
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.8.3. The
critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location. For determining if the section is within the
band defined by b
b
for the negative minimum reinforcement, the distance of 1.5 times the section height is compared with
the distance to the nearest support face.
assumed.
64.6.2 Section 10.1 Factored Moment Resistance
Included code sections - 10.1, 10.3, 10.5, 10.6
Excluded code sections - 10.2, 10.4, 10.7
See Concrete Behavior on page 628 for the material stress strain curves.
c
= 0.65 for concrete;
s
= 0.85 for
reinforcement.
Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-reinforced
section. See Ductility on page 632 for more information on applying ductility requirements.
For span segments or design sections not designated as post-tensioned, post-tensioning tendon forces are ignored.
User E
s
values are used
634
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
c
, the f
c
cross section.
The shear and torsion tension forces are included in the flexural/axial design. In slabs, more longitudinal reinforcement than
is required might be provided in order to eliminate the use of tranverse reinforcement. See Section 11.3 Shear and Torsion
Tension on page 635 for additional information.
For sections declared as post-tensioned, bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatiblity (see detailed
description Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 396. Unbonded tendon
stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain
Curves Program Implementation on page 397). If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under
consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
64.6.3 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement in Beams (Non prestressed)
10.5.1.1 is implemented for beams, which considers the bending strength of the section designed to be at least 1.2M
cr
.
10.5.1.3 is not considered.
64.6.4 Section 10.5.2 Redistribution of Moments - Ductility Check (Non prestressed)
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies equation 10-5 as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby
ensuring ductility.
Although the current standard does not state an upper limit for the axial compression for ductility checks, a limit of 0.1A
g
f
c

is applied.
64.6.5 Section 10.6.1 Beams and One-way Slabs - Crack Control
Equation 10-6 is implemented. A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement. Iteration
is used to find the minimum number of bars thta meet the criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used. The section
width used to determine the spacing is the width of the extreme tension face. For beams with webs in tension, this will
typically be the sum of the web widths. The spacing is considered as the tension face width divided by the number of bars.
An additional bar is not added to make the width start and end with a bar. RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than
necessary in two circumstances:
The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked section analysis
Compression reinforcement added later in the design process lowers the reinforcement demands
w
d/f
y
c
', minimum f
y
b
w
then b
w
cr
635 RAM Concept
Chapter 64
of reinforcement.
Equation 10-6 is implemented
and end with a bar.
64.6.8 Section 11.3 Shear and Torsion Tension
Included code sections - 11.3.9.2, 11.3.9.3, 11.3.9.5, 11.3.10.6
The longitudinal reinforcement is designed including the additional tension forces caused by shear and torsion in accordance
with 11.3.9.
The calculation is performed iteratively to find the strain at mid-depth of the cross section,
x
using cracked section analysis.
The shear tension is calculated using the shear terms of equations 11-14 and 11-15 and ignoring the vertical component of
prestressing.
The calculated tension forces are modified in accordance with clauses 11.3.9.4 and 11.3.9.5, using a full reduction at the face
of support and linearly reducing it to 0 over a distance of d
v
cot . The distance dv is conservatively taken as 0.72h for this
calculation. In continuous spans the shear tension forces are set to zero at the face of support in accordance with 11.3.9.4
while at the end of discontinous spans the calculated shear tension is applied at the location of the design bar on the tension
face.
Shear tension forces are combined with torsion tension forces using equation 11-21.
In slabs, the design is performed to limit the strain at mid-depth
x
to the maximum value that would not require transverse
reinforcement. If transverse reinforcement is required, the design is performed such that
x
is limited to 0.001.
In the calculation of longitudinal strain
x
, no material strength reduction factors are applied.
64.6.9 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams
Included code sections - 11.2.8, 11.2.9, 11.2.10.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.3, 11.3.4, 11.3.5.1, 11.3.6.4, 11.3.8.1, 11.3.8.3, 11.3.10
Excluded code sections - 11.3.2, 11.3.5.2, 11.3.8.2
636
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
c
, the minimum f
c
is used.
In beams, transverse reinforcement consists of transverse reinforcement perpendicular to the axis of the member.
General equation 11-4 is used for all cases but vertical component of effective prestress force (V
p
) is conservatively not
included in the calculations.
In the determination of the effective concrete web width, the width of the shear core is considered, less the widths specified
in accordance with 11.2.10.2.
Minimum reinforcement is provided in accordance with 11.2.8 and equation 11-1.
The effective depth for shear is taken as the greater of 0.9d or 0.72h, where d is the distance from the extreme compression
fiber to the resultant tension force.
The maximum spacing limits of 11.3.8.1 are applied.
If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.3 Torsion Design on page 636
64.6.10 Section 11.3 Torsion Design
Included code sections - 11.2.9.1, 6.3.2
Torsion properties are calculated in accordance with 11.3.10.
Torsion reinforcement consists of longitudinal reinforcement and closed ties perpendicular to the axis of the member
according to 11.2.6(a).
A
cp
and p
cp
A
o
oh
per 11.3.6.
11.3.10.4 equation 11-19 is implemented such that the torsion demand reduces the shear capacity. For very high torsions, this
can make the shear capacity negative.
The longitudinal torsion tension demand is satisfied by calculating a torsion tension in accordance with equation 11-21,
incorporating it with the shear tension and then adding these forces to the section forces and then performing a bending/axial
desing in Pass 1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by equation 11-17.
637 RAM Concept
Chapter 64
Torsional and shear longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining
effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
Section 13.10.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)
64.6.12 Section 18.3.1.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit
0.6 f
ci
64.6.13 Section 18.3.1.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit
The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.3.1.3 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so
no section will fail this criterion.
section considered.
0.45 f
c
0.60 f
c
0.25 f
ci
638
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
64.6.16 Section 18.7 Cracking Moment
This criterion is not applied to two-way slabs.
cr
64.6.17 Section 18.8.2 Minimum Bonded Reinforcement
The minimum bonded reinforcement is provided in accordance with the following table.
64.6.18 Section 18.8.3 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Prestressed)
Equation 10-6 is implemented
Tensile Stress Tensile Stress
Type of tendon Type of tendon
Member Type Bonded Unbonded Bonded Unbonded
Beam 0 0.004A 0.003A 0.005A
One-way slab 0 0.003A 0.002A 0.004A
Two-way negative
moment regions
0 0.006hl
n
0.0045hl
n
0.0075hl
n
Two-way postitive
moment regions >
0 0.004A 0.003A 0.005A
Two-way positive
moment regions <
0 0 - -
Table 64-7
0.6 fc
0.5 f
c
0.5 f
c
>
0.2 f
c
0.2 f
c
639 RAM Concept

Chapter 64
Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars and bonded tendon ducts that meets the criteria. A non-integral number
of bars may be used.
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars and bonded tendon ducts. An additional bar is not
added to make the width start and end with a bar.
f
s
in bonded tendons is calculated as the difference between the stress in the bonded tendon due to the specified load moment
and the decompression moment.
py
) and 30 ksi.
640
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
641 RAM Concept
Chapter 65
65 Load History Deflections
The calculation of concrete floor deflections is complicated. There are many issues to consider, and even with adequate
consideration and calculation, any deflection prediction should only be considered an estimate.
Deflections are affected by:
member size (section properties)
concrete modulus of elasticity
reinforcement (unstressed and post-tensioning)
applied loads
load history
cracking
shrinkage
creep
dynamic effects (vibrations)
Historically, designers have usually calculated deflections of concrete members using elastic methods with modifications
made for some of the factors listed above.
Most post-tensioned floors have been designed to minimize cracking and so elastic deflection calculation methods have
generally been acceptable. The increasing usage of partial prestress methods has made deflection calculations more
important for post-tensioned design. Reinforced floors usually undergo more extensive cracking than post-tensioned floors,
which is one reason why they need more concrete section, and more consideration of deflection issues.
More aggressive designs (that is, with shallower or thinner concrete sections) require a more rigorous analysis to determine
that the deflection limit states are satisfactory. The aggressive designer must, however, have a thorough understanding of the
methods and issues to ensure satisfactory deflections.
In particular, if the designer pushes the floor design to the limit then problems may occur due to issues that are unforeseen
or not considered by Concept. These include:
poor placement of reinforcement (less effective depth resulting in more cracking)
vibrations (dynamic effects are not considered by Concept)
65.1 About RAM Concepts load history deflection calculations
RAM Concept analyzes the concrete floor using a linear elastic global analysis. All deflection contour plans are
representative of the linear elastic analysis and the particular load combinations std load factors. The load history deflection
calculations perform detailed calculations on the cross sections including the effects of cracking, creep, shrinkage, tension
stiffening, and load history and then uses the results to modify the element stiffness in the linear elastic global analysis to
calculate deflection contours considering the various effects. Dynamic effects are not considered.
In order to calculate load history deflections the load history must first be specified by the user. This is done in the Load
History criteria page.
642
Chapter 65
RAM Concept
Each load history step represents an applied load combination for a specified duration of time. Each load history step is
solved in sequence, taking into consideration the effects from all previous load history steps. For instantaneous load steps the
duration can be specified as zero. The specified sequence of load steps makes up the entire load history. The total age at the
end of each load history step is reported as a read only value in the table.
In order to calculate load history results, span segments and design sections must be specified such that each finite element
with significant stress is covered by the tributary of a design strip cross section or design section oriented appropriately for
the element stress. For one-way slabs, this could be achieved by defining span segments in the spanning direction only. For
two-way slabs, span segments should be specified in orthogonal directions to cover the entire slab. Since the load history
deflection detailed calculations are carried out on the cross sections and subsequently used to adjust element stiffness,
omission of span segments or design sections in highly stressed regions will result in an inaccurate and potentially
unconservative prediction of deflections.
RAM Concepts load history deflection calculations do not directly consider the effects from specified patterns, from live
load reduction, or from alternate load factors.
Since the load history calculations can be time consuming, they are performed separately from other calculations in RAM
Concept. They are invoked using the Calc Load History Deflections ( ) command. The button will only be active if load
steps are specified in the Load History criteria page and if the current load history results are out of date.
Results
The results for each load history step are available in the load history folder on the report tree. The results stored on each
load history step represent the state of the structure at the end of the load history step. Additional load history steps can be
added at any desired interval in order to calcuate results at any particular age of interest.
65.2 The load history deflection calculation process
Load history deflections are calculated using a mult-step process summarized below. For each load history step, the process
is performed separately for the instaneous change in loads at the beginning of the load history step and the sustained changes
over the duration of the load history step, in which the loads are assumed to remain constant:
1 Solve cross section forces
2 For each cross section, calculate curvatures including long term effects and prior load history:
Gross cross section curvature (using gross section properties)
Uncracked cross section curvature (using uncracked transformed section properties)
Cracked cross section curvature (using cracked transformed section properties)
Creep cross section curvature (takes into account cracking history of the cross section)
3 Using the calculated curvatures and the tension stiffening model, calculate an average curvature for each cross section.
4 For each element in the structure, use the average calculated curvatures for the tributary cross sections to set stiffness
factors for the element.
643 RAM Concept
Chapter 65
5 Re-analyze the structure with the adjusted element stiffnesses and check for convergence. Convergence is measured by the
deflection difference between two iterations as measured at a key node.
6 Repeat 1-5 for each load history step until convergence.
65.3 Load history calculations on the cross section
Load history deflections utilize detailed time-dependent curvature calculations on the cross section. Influence of creep,
shrinkage, cracking, and load history effects are included. Additional information on the detailed cross section calculations
was presented by Hirsch [Hirsch, J.,Accurate Long-Term Deflection Prediction in Flat Slabs Using Linear Elastic Global
Analysis, 24th Biennial Conference of the Concrete Institute of Australia, Sydney, Australia, 2009, 11 pp.].
65.3.1 Material Stress Strain Curves
Generally the service level material stress-strain curves for concrete, reinforcement, and post-tensioning are utilized in the
load history deflection calculations. The concrete stress-strain curves designated in the IS 456 and EC2 standards are not
dependent upon the modulus of elasticity of the concrete. Since this a desirable attribute in deflection calculations and the
user may want to define a custom modulus of elasticity that will be taken into account in the load history calculations, the
PCA concrete stress-strain curve in the section Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 398 is utilized in the load history
calculations for these standards.
65.3.2 Creep
Creep strains occur over time and a number of models are available to predict the percentage of total creep as a function of
time. The creep model presented in ACI 209R-92 is utilized in RAM Concepts load history calculations. The creep value
input in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog should represent the final ultimate creep value and should
take into account concrete mix, environmental considerations, etc. and can reflect any considerations required by regional
building codes. The ACI model is only used to predict the percentage of total creep as a function of time. The modification
factor
la
to account for initial load application times other than 7 days is automatically included in RAM Concepts load
history calculations and should not be incorporated into the input creep value.
Creep strains are assumed to be a linear factor of the initial load induced elastic strain for a particular load. In order to
consider loads that are applied at different times, the assumption is made that creep strains of like or opposing signs can be
superimposed. These assumptions are likely reasonable for the normal range of service loads.
An ageing coefficient is used as a modifier of creep to account for the rate of application loading, its effect on the creep
and the variation of concrete strength over the time period. While the rigorous calculation of the coefficient is rather
involved, this value can normally be taken as 0.8 with little loss in accuracy.
65.3.3 Shrinkage
Shrinkage strains occur over time and a number of models are available to predict the percentage of total shrinkage as a
function of time. The shrinkage model presented in ACI 209R-92 for moist curing is utilized in RAM Concepts load history
calculations. The shrinkage value input in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog should represent the final
ultimate shrinkage and should take into account concrete mix, environmental considerations, etc. and can reflect any
considerations required by regional building codes. The ACI model is only used to predict the percentage of total shrinkage
as a function of time. The modification factor
cp
to account for moist curing durations other than 7 days is automatically
included in RAM Concepts load history calculations and should not be incorporated into the input shrinkage value.
65.3.4 Cracking
When a flexural load or shrinkage causes the applied tensile stresses to exceed the cracking stress, the stress is relieved at
that location and a redistribution of stress occurs with a resulting increase in cross section curvature. As load increases, the
644
Chapter 65
RAM Concept
number of cracks also increases. In the cross section calculations, at the crack locations the concrete is assumed to carry no
tension. In the regions between the cracks the bonded tension reinforcement transfers tension back into the concrete. This
phenomenon is normally referred to as tension stiffening. In a partially cracked concrete member the mean curvature over a
region lies between the uncracked curvature and the curvature at the crack locations. A number of models exist for
predicting the tension stiffening behavior. The tension stiffening model presented in the Eurocode 2-2004 is utilized in RAM
Concepts load history calculations utilizing a long term factor. See Eurocode 2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio on
page 401 for additional information. The modulus of rupture for the design Code in use is used for the concrete flexural
tension strength in the tension stiffening equation.
In general, external restraint to shrinkage shortening can increase the cracking in the floor, thus increasing deflections.
Failure to account for this effect can result in underestimation of deflection values. A crude means of accounting for this is
through the Shrinkage Restraint % value in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog. This percentage is
multiplied by the input free shrinkage strain value (as a function of time) to determine a hypothetical tension strain. This
hypothetical tension strain is combined with the load induced strains which is then used to determine a hypothetical tension
stress from the concrete stress strain curve. This hypothetical tension stress is used in the tension stiffening calculation.
These stresses are not used in the cross section curvature calculations. As such, increasing this percentage will generally
increase the amount of cracking predicted and used in the tension stiffening interpolation, but will not affect the calculated
curvatures directly.
65.3.5 Load History
The tension stiffening model generally predicts the response for instantaneous loads, so some extensions are necessary to
account for the effects of the load history on the member.
Creep and shrinkage strains are included in the calculated uncracked and cracked cross section curvatures.
Creep strains for the cracked curvature calculations consider the actual cracking history of the cross section.
While calculating cracked section curvatures, creep is only applied to portions of strain change in compression.
Once a cross section is determined to be cracked during a particular load history step iteration, it is assumed to be cracked
for all future iterations and load history steps.
The mean curvature calculated for any loading level is assumed to be proportional to the mean curvature calculated at the
peak loading level.
65.4 Element stiffness adjustments
The element stiffness in a particular iteration is adjusted based upon the influence of the cross sections (from either design
sections or span segment strips) that have tributaries that intersect the element. In the instance where multiple cross sections
cover an element at various angles, a weighted average and vector components squared of each cross section is used to
determine the cross sections influence on the element stiffness.
The axial and flexural element stiffness for each element in the model is adjusted based upon the ratio of the calculated gross
curvature to the calculated mean curvature. For most normal situations, it will be possible to calculate equilibrium for the
mean curvature and for cross section curvatures predominately caused by loading the gross and mean curvatures will have
the same sign. Unusual cases are handled as follows:
For the case where equilibrium cannot be achieved in a cross section calculation, a warning is logged in the calc log and
the mean curvature is set to be 50 times the gross curvature. This is normally caused by inadequate reinforcement specified
in the cross section without performing design, or an unexpected load combination is selected. This can sometimes occur
as a normal part of the calculation process, where cracking in a highly stresses region shifts force to a less stressed region
that does not have enough reinforcement to achieve equilibrium. In this case, this softening will effectively shift load back
to the region that is designed to take it, and will predict both locations to be cracked.
For the case where the mean curvature is opposite in sign from the gross curvature, the mean curvature is set to be 2 times
the gross curvature. This will normally be caused by shrinkage strains larger in magnitude than the load induced strains,
often times in regions of low bending. As a result, this modification will many times have little effect on the deflection calcu-
lations. No warning is issued for this situation.
645 RAM Concept
Chapter 65
65.5 Why are load history deflection results different from Long Term Deflection results
plotted for the strip?
Because the methodology is entirely different, the results between the load history calculations will sometimes differ from
the long-term deflections plotted on the strip. It is common for the load history deflections to be larger or smaller than the
strip based long-term deflections. Some of the primary differences are outlined here.
Several aspects of load history deflections that can cause them to be larger than strip based long-term deflections are:
Redistribution of forces is considered, which can lead to a more realistic prediction of cracking in the structure. Cracking
in one region can lead to increased forces in adjacent regions (either laterally or along the span) which can in turn lead to
additional cracking throughout the structure.
Stresses induced in the uncracked concrete due to shrinkage being restrained by the reinforcement or by specifying a
Shrinkage Restraint % are considered in the cracking and tension stiffening calculations.
Several aspects of load history deflections that can cause them to be smaller than strip based long-term deflections are:
Compression reinforcement is always considered, whether the cross section is actually cracked or not. Uncracked trans-
formed properties are used where the cross section is not cracked.
Load history is taken into consideration. If the maximum load is not sustained through the duration of the calculation, the
load history calculations will take this into consideration.
65.6 Advice on drawing cross sections
In order to get good deflection predictions, it is necessary to define reasonable cross sections. This includes defining cross
sections that cover all regions of significant stress. Cross sections can be defined by drawing span segments and generating
span segment strips or by drawing design sections. When drawing design sections it is important to pay attention to the
tributary length property to ensure proper element coverage.
It is also advisable in structures that are cracking sensitive (like RC structures) to define cross sections that are not too wide
in regions of steep moment gradient. An example of recommended usage would be using column and middle strips in a
reinforced concrete two-way slab. Making the cross sections too wide could, due to stress averaging, cause the cracking
prediction for the cross section to be unconservative and result in underestimation of deflections.
Another example is cross sections with significant axial forces due to bending caused by eccentric element stiffness. For
example, a T beam with separate cross sections for the web and the flanges. In this case, a large portion of the bending
behavior will be captured through eccentric axial forces in the cross sections. However, since RAM Concepts load history
calculations rely on cross section curvatures and not axial strains to make element stiffness adjustments, this portion of the
bending behavior will not be captured in the load history analysis. This will generally result in an underestimation of
deflections. Therefore, drawing spans and cross sections in this manner is highly discouraged. A good approach is to utilize
a reasonable effective flange in the T beam cross section, which will minimize the axial forces on the cross sections due to
bending. One way to accomplish this is to select Code T-beam for the Column Strip Width Calc of the Span Segment.
65.7 A final word of caution
Due to the unpredictable nature and variability of early age shrinkage and cracking, it is not possible to accurately estimate
deflections in the early ages (30-90 days). As such, load history deflection results for ages less than 90 days should be used
with extreme caution. When evaluating differential deflections between long-term deflections and early age deflections
(such as at time of installation of partitions), a generally conservative approach could be to compare the long-term load
history deflections with the deflection results for the load combination (linear elastic results) in place at time of application
of partitions (which would not include the effects of shrinkage, creep, and cracking).
646
Chapter 65
RAM Concept

Additionally, deflection calculations can be somewhat sensitive to finite element mesh size. For best results using load
history calculations, at least 12 elements per bay are recommended with a cross section spacing approximately equal to the
resulting element size.
647 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
66 Punching Shear Design Notes
Ensuring that a slab will not fail in punching shear is one of the most important tasks in slab design. This chapter gives an
overview of punching shear design and advice on using RAM Concepts punching shear design capabilities.
66.1 Punching shear overview
66.1.1 What is a punching shear failure?
Large support reactions (or any load) applied over a small area of a slab can cause the slab to fail near the perimeter of the
support in shear-like failure. This punching shear is different from beam shear because the failure location is around a
perimeter instead of along a line across the slab. Bending moment reactions applied along with the reaction force tend to
lower the amount of load that can be supported without a punching failure. Local thickenings of a slab may increase the
punching shear resistance, or may just move the punching shear failure location to a perimeter outside of the thickened area.
Punching shear failures are usually brittle and sudden.
66.1.2 How are forces really transferred in a punching zone?
The transfer of forces in a punching zone is extremely complex, and the load path changes with increased cracking in the
zone. There are no simple general models to predict the behavior of the punching zone. Three-dimensional truss behavior is
probably the simplest model that can be applied to a punching zone, but even this model is too complex for design purposes.
66.1.3 How do the building codes handle punching shear?
All building codes approach punching shear by replacing the actual complicated punching behavior by relatively simple
models that do not reflect the actual behavior of the punching zone. The only reason that these simple models lead to safe
designs is that they have been calibrated with test results for the standard interior, edge and corner column cases.
It should always be remembered that for situations other than the standard interior, edge and corner cases, the building code
models might produce results that are illogical and possibly unsafe.
66.2 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear?
In RAM Concept, any slab-column connection can be designed for punching shear considerations. Concept performs the
following steps in the analysis and design of a slab-column connection for punching shear:
66.2.1 Step 1: Determine the force envelopes to be checked
Concept uses envelopes of the reactions on the column to calculate the force envelopes for determining the critical case. The
forces are enveloped about the punch check axes and the following cases are considered: Max F
z
, Min F
z
, Max M
r
, Min M
r
,
Max M
s
, Min M
s
. The controlling envelope can be displayed by checking controlling criteria in the visible objects menu
under Punching Checks on any plan that displays the Rule Set Design Layers or Design Status Layer.
Loads applied inside the critical sections
Any loads that are applied within the critical section shape could be excluded from the punching reaction since they do not
contribute to the forces passing through the critical section. Concept calculates the punching reaction by summing the
column above and below reactions with any point loads applied within the column shape. The column shape is used for this
648
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
calculation (instead of the critical section shape) as it guarantees a single set of punching reactions for each punching check.
Line and area loads are not considered in this summation.
Punching Reactions for Lateral SE Loads
Loads of analysis type Lateral SE are appropriately included in the punching reactions. These loads are typically applied at
the column/wall locations and normally consist of at least an applied out of plane concentrated force with a set of
orthogonally applied moments. These forces typically represent the total joint forces applied from the supports to the slab for
the given lateral loading. The correct punching reaction for this type of loading is simply the loading itself. Since Concept
internally removes the column and wall supports in the Lateral SE loading analysis, the resulting punching reaction will be
the summation of any loads applied within the column shape.
Contribution from the Vertical Component of Prestress
Some building codes allow the vertical component of prestress to be considered in the punching calculations. This is
normally accomplished by adding the contribution of the vertical prestress to the capacity at the critical section, or by
subtracting the vertical prestress component from the punching reaction. Concept can approximate this effect using the Calc
Option Include Tendon Component in Punch Check Reaction. If this option is selected, after the tendons have been
converted into equivalent concentrated balance loads Concept will modify (normally reduce) the punching reaction by any
concentrated forces located within the column shape.
Note: Due to the fact that the tendons are idealized as concentrated balance forces as well as the fact that Concept uses the
column shape instead of the critical section shape, this calculation is approximate. When using this option, it is extremely
important to make sure that the Concept model tendon plan locations and profile shapes match the final design and field
placement in order to obtain accurate results. As such, this option should be used with extreme caution.
66.2.2 Step 2: Determine the column critical sections
Concept investigates the slab geometry within the punching zone radius specified to find likely failure locations. Concepts
critical section calculations correctly consider slab thicknesses, but make simplifying assumptions about the elevations of
the slab regions. In certain situations this can result in improper location of critical sections.
In areas of varying thickness, Concept's punching calculations assume that the thickenings protrude toward the load
application. For example, in an elevated slab shear caps are assumed to be located below the slab, and in a mat/raft
foundation plinths are assumed to be located above the mat/raft. If this is not the case, Concept may not locate the critical
sections appropriately. See the example in Figure 66-1.
Figure 66-1 Shortcoming of Concepts consideration of failure planes
The location at some distance (usually a function of effective depth d) from the face of the column is considered to be a
likely failure area. The location at some distance from a change in section thickness is also considered to be a likely failure
area.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Sector Voids, then any slab edge or hole found within the punching zone radius
creates a sector or zone that offers no resistance to punching.
Analyzed correctly
A
B
C
Concept considers failure planes A and C,
but should consider A and B
649 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Failure Planes, then Concept investigates a number of critical sections including
sections that connect to edges or openings (which provide no punching resistance) in attempts to find the most critical
section.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Ignore Edges, then the location of the critical sections is not affected by the holes, but
any part of a section intersecting a hole will be considered to provide no punching resistance. It is recommended that Ignore
Edges is only used if the Sector Voids and Failure Planes treatments do not produce desired critical sections.
Figure 66-2 Failure plane results for the three different slab edge / hole treatments
Concept tries to connect the likely failure locations together to determine logical potentially critical sections. The method
that Concept uses tends to find the appropriate sections, but does not always find them. You should always visually inspect
the locations of the critical sections that Concept has checked to see if they are appropriate (this is usually accomplished by
a simple visual review of the Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan).
66.2.3 Step 3: Determine the code-model stresses on the column sections
Please refer to the specific code section for the description of the code model and calculation of punching demand.
66.2.4 Step 4: Determine the code-allowable stresses on the column sections
Please refer to the specific code section for the description of the calculation of punching capacity in accordance with the
code model.
66.2.5 Step 5: Design stud shear reinforcement (SSR) if necessary
If any of the calculated column critical sections have a higher demand than capacity (and thus unreinforced stress ratio
(USR) > 1.0), the user may choose to have Concept design SSR to strengthen the column, if possible. This is done by
selecting the Design SSR if necessary option on the punch check properties.
The SSR design is carried out on any sections with an USR > 1.0:
1 Check the maximum section stress against the allowable maximum stress - some codes use this provision to prevent highly
stressed sections from being reinforced. Please refer to the specific Code section for a detailed description of how each handles
this check.
2 Install Initial Rails - some initial rails are installed with an arbitrary length. The initial rails are installed to satisfy the
maximum transverse spacing requirement of the active Code at the face of the column or support.
3 Extend the Rails - the rails are iteratively extended until all cutoff section stresses are within the Code-allowable stresses
for unreinforced sections. A cutoff section is one at the Code specified offset distance outside the zone reinforced with SSR.
650
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
4 Check the calculated/designed stud spacing resulting from the current rail layout. If the spacing doesn't work, rails are
added and the design is restarted at step 2.
Note: In punch checks containing slab edges, it is possible for Concept to extend the rails to a distance within the punch
check radius, but points projected perpendicular to the slab edge would be outside the punch check radius. In this case
Concept may not find the most critical cutoff sections. This can normally be rectified by increasing the punch check radius.
The Engineer should inspect cutoff sections for appropriateness and adjust punch check properties as necessary.
66.2.6 Step 6: Summarize the Results
Finally, the results are summarized. Direct summarizing of SSR designs is not possible for a number of reasons (for
example, two independent designs might have rails of different lengths, and therefore different depths which would dictate a
different stud spacing). Therefore, if more than one design rule specifies punching shear design, the force envelopes from
each design rule are combined into a single force envelope, then a summary design is carried out for this combined force
envelope as outlined above.
For each resulting critical section the calculated stress is divided by the code allowable stress to determine an unreinforced
stress ratio (USR). If the column contains SSR reinforcement, Concept also reports a reinforced strength ratio (RSR), which
is the punching demand over the strengthened capacity. If one or more of the potentially critical sections does not fit the
standard conditions, then the column is tagged with a Nonstandard Section label in which case the engineer should review
the applicability of the code design equations to the critical section labeled nonstandard.
66.3 Using Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems
Typical values specified for an SSR System include number and arrangement of rails at the column or support, first stud
spacing, typical stud spacing, stud diameter, and rail height in addition to the typical stud properties.
Most of the properties required to specify an SSR System are available by plotting the SSR under visible objects > Punch
Checks. The overall height of the rails is not reported by Concept but can be easily determined from the geometry. Generally,
the height of the rails should be dimensioned to be as close as possible to the structural member's outer surfaces (while
observing necessary cover and other Code requirements). Concept's strength calculations assume that each individual shear
stud rail has a single effective depth, calculated as the thinnest effective depth of any slab area intersected by the shear stud
rail. A punching design may have shear stud rails with multiple depths at a column or support.
For the Ancon Shearfix system design, the input covers are used to calculate a physical rail depth and used to generate the
Ancon part numbers shown in the punching report.
66.4 Column connection type
RAM Concept calculates the allowable shear stress for each potentially critical section based on the applicable code
equations. The allowable stresses are dependent upon the column connection type.
Note: Column connection type is not used in AS3600.
66.4.1 About Connection Type
Concept determines whether a column is interior, edge or corner based on the Connection Type property of the
punching check. If the connection type property is set to Auto, then Concept assigns a connection type.
Concept attempts to determine the connection type using the total angle of voids within a punching check radius. A void
angle is defined as the angle between tangent lines to any void contained within the punching check, or the angle between
the intersection points of slab edges and the punching check perimeter.
651 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
Concept assigns the connections as follows:
if the total angle of the voids is greater than 180 degrees: corner
if the total angle of the voids is less than 180, but greater than 90 degrees: edge
otherwise: interior
Due to the possible complex geometries, Concept will not always assign the appropriate connection type, so we advise you
to use discretion when using the Auto setting.
The connection type assigned by Concept can be viewed on a plan by checking the Column Condition box under
Punching checks on any plan that displays Rule Set Design Layers, or the Design Status Layer.
For connections that don't neatly fit into one of the categories, it is conservative to select an option that has more slab edges
(i.e., if a connection appears to be somewhere between an edge and a corner, it is conservative to select corner for
connection type).
66.5 ACI 318/CSA A23.3 Punching Shear Design
The ACI/CSA Punching Shear Model
The ACI/CSA punching shear analysis and design approach uses the ACI 318 or CSA A23.3 provisions for the basis of the
implementation. A critical section is defined at d/2 from the periphery of the area of application of force. These critical
sections are arranged to minimize b
o
d. For slab edges located within the punching check, additional critical sections will be
generated by projecting perpendicular lines from the original section to the slab edges. Additionally, a set of sections will be
generated for each basic slab shape (column, drop cap, etc.). Maximum overhang (from the originating shape) can be limited
as a function of d as specified by the user. For ACI by default no limit is used. For CSA A23.3 the limit is 1.0d in accordance
with clause 13.3.3.3.
To calculate the section stresses, an elastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/reaction and
the critical section centroid is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric loading to calculate a linearly
varying stress distribution on the section. Where there are eccentricities in two orthogonal directions, they are considered
simultaneously. for each section is calculated about the principal axes for that section. For column sections, the
length/width ratios used to calculate are unmodified. For cutoff sections, the length/width ratios are modified in
accordance with ACI 421.1R99.
66.5.1 Calculation of punching resistance for the unreinforced section
This section discusses the calculation of punching resistance for an unreinforced section.
Critical section properties and equations for the calculation of actual stresses
Notation
A = area of one side of the critical section, in
2
b
o
= total length of the critical section, in.
b
1
= width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for which moments are determined, in.
b
2
= width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to b1, in.
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement, as outlined in ACI 318, in.
I
xx
= moment of inertia for bending about the x-axis for the entire critical section, in
4
v
652
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
I
xx
= moment of inertia contribution about the x-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to
the centroid of the critical section, in
4
I
yy
= moment of inertia for bending about the y-axis for the entire critical section, in
4
I
yy
= moment of inertia contribution about the y-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to
the centroid of the critical section, in
4
I
xy
= product of inertia for the entire critical section, in
4
I
xy
= product of inertia contribution for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the
critical section, in
4
L = length of one side of the critical section, in.
M
ox
= joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the x-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a
right-hand rule for sign convention, kip-in
M
oy
= Joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the y-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a
right-hand rule for sign convention, kip-in
M
ux
= column reaction, moment about the x-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
M
uy
= column reaction, moment about the y-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
v
u
= shear stress located at some point on the critical section, ksi
V
u
= axial column reaction, located at the centroid of the column with an upward column reaction being positive, kips
x = x-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
x
side
= x-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in.
x
col
= x-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in.
x
point
= x-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in.
y = y-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
y
side
= y-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in.
y
col
= y-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in.
y
point
= y-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in.
= fraction of unbalanced moment about the x-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318
= fraction of unbalanced moment about the y-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318
= angle between a side of the critical section and the positive x-axis
Equations for calculation of shear stress
The equations presented are derived from basic mechanics of materials. A similar formulation can be found in the article
Design of Stud Shear Reinforcement for Slabs by Ghali & Elgabry, ACI Structural Journal, May-June 1990. The values of
and are always calculated about the principal axes of the critical section.
vx
vy
vx
vy
653 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Note: Equation a) is based upon standard strength of materials equations for bending in an asymmetric section. If the
moments are applied about one or more axis of symmetry, then I
xy
= 0 and equation a) reduces to the more familiar:
ACI 318 equations for calculation of allowable shear stress
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from ACI-318 (11-33), (11-34), (11-35), or
(11-36).
Equation 11-33 controls in non-prestressed concrete zones with large column aspect ratios. As the aspect ratio of the column
gets larger, the allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear stress.
( ) [ ]
( ) [ ]
2
int
2
int
xy yy xx
xy ux vx uy vy po
xy yy xx
xy uy vy ux vx po
o
u
u
I I I
I M Ixx M x x
I I I
I M Iyy M y y
d b
V
v
+
+ =

) ( y y V M M
col u ox ux
+ =
) ( x x Vu M M
col oy uy
=
=
=
n
sides
xx
xx
I I
1
=
=
n
sides
yy
yy
I I
1
=
=
n
sides
xy
xy
I I
1
( )
2 2
3
) ( sin
12
side
xx y y Ld
dL
I + =
( )
2 2
3
) ( cos
12
side yy x x Ld
dL
I + =
( ) ) )( ( cos sin
12
3
side
side xy y y x x Ld
dL
I + =
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
b
b
v
+
=
y
po uy vy
x
po ux vx
o
u
u
I
x x M
I
y y M
d b
V
v
) ( ) (
int int

+ =

654
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
Equation 11-34 is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in non-prestressed zones with the ratio b
o
/d. This equation
generally controls in thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column caps.
Equation 11-35 is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non-prestressed zones, .
Equation 11-36 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to qualify as prestressed, a zone must meet the
following criterion:
1 The effective prestress, f
pc
at the column shall not be less than 125 psi. The effective prestress is calculated by averaging
the precompression in all the elements within the punching check radius. This could result in non-prestressed equations being
used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the precompression drops below 125 psi in the cap. Additionally, if large
restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the prestressing force in a region, the non-prestressed equations
would correctly be used where the average precompression is below 125 psi.
2 f
c
shall not be taken greater than 5000 psi. If a concrete strength is input greater than 5000 psi, a maximum f
c
of 5000 psi
will be used in prestressed punching zones, but the allowable shear stress will still be calculated using equation 11-36.
3 The column must not be located near a slab edge or large opening.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 11-33 through 11-35 are applied.
For the ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 standards, lightweight concrete is considered.
Note: These equation numbers are from the ACI 318-02 and ACI 318-05 standards.
ACI 318 Maximum Reinforced Section Stress
The reinforced shear stresses v
u
on the column sections are limited to a maximum of , where v
n
= per ACI 318-
05 11.12.3.2. This limit can be raised to v
n
= by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 of a higher limit for v
n
. The
higher limit is also applied to all sections in the ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 standards. Sections with unreinforced stresses
larger than these values cannot be successfully reinforced with SSR.
ACI 318 Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
Where SSR is used the punching resistance is calculated as follows:
v
n
= v
c
+ v
s
(11-2)
where
(11.12.3.1 ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05)
or
(ACI 318-08, 318-11, ACI 421.1R-99 suggestion for higher v
c
)
v
s
= A
v
f
yv
d
aveRail
/ (b
o
sd) (11-15)
Note: This equation has been extended from ACI equation 11-15 to approximately account for the situation where different
rails at a column have different heights due to geometrical irregularities.
A
v
= area in one peripheral line of stud shear reinforcement
d
aveRail
= the average effective depth of the slab containing the rails
v
s,min
= (11.11.5.1 ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11)
4 f
c
v
n
6 fc
8 fc
v
c
2 = fc
v
c
3 = fc
2 fc
655 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
ACI 318 Miscellaneous Provisions
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.4 d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99 equation 3.12. This spacing is rounded
down to the nearest 1/8 in. for US units or 5 mm for metric units.
The maximum typical stud spacing for ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, and ACI 318-05 is 0.5 d, but can be increased to 0.75 d
when is less than or equal to by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 for a higher limit for spacing. The
maximum typical stud spacing for ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 is 0.75 d when is less than or equal to and 0.5
d otherwise.
The maximum tangential spacing of rails at the face of the column is limited to 2d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99
appendix A.2 and ACI 318-02 11.12.3.3. Tangential spacing requirements are not checked at locations other than the face of
the column/support.
The SSR is extended until the cutoff section stresses are within the allowable limit of per ACI 318-02 11.12.6.2(b).
For cutoff sections outside the original column perimeter sections, is adjusted in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99
Appendix B.
CSA A23.3 equations for calculation of allowable shear stress
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from CSA A23.3 (13-5), (13-6), (13-7), or (18-
5).
Equation 13-5 controls in non-prestressed concrete zones with large column aspect ratios. As the aspect ratio of the column
gets larger, the allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear stress.
Equation 13-6 is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in non-prestressed zones with the ratio b
o
/d. This equation
generally controls in thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column caps.
Equation 13-7 is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non-prestressed zones.
Equation 18-5 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to qualify as prestressed, a zone must meet the
following criterion:
1 The effective prestress, f
pc
at the column shall not be less than 0.8 MPa. The effective prestress is calculated by averaging
the precompression in all the elements within the punching check radius. This could result in non-prestressed equations being
used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the precompression drops below 0.8 MPa in the cap. Additionally, if large
restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the prestressing force in a region, the non-prestressed equations
would correctly be used where the average precompression is below 0.8 MPa.
2 The column must not be located near a slab edge or large opening.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 13-5 through 13-7 are applied.
CSA A23.3 Maximum Reinforced Section Stress
The reinforced shear stresses on the column sections are limited to a maximum of per CSA A23.3 13.3.8.2.
CSA A23.3 Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
v
r
= v
c
+ v
s
(13.3.7.3)
where
(13.3.8.3)
and
v
u
6 fc
v
u
6 fc
2 fc
v
0.75
c
fc
v
c
0.28
c
= fc
656
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
v
s
=
s
A
vs
f
yv
d
aveRail
/ (b
o
sd) (13-11)
Note: This equation has been extended from CSA equation 13-11 to approximately account for the situation where different
rails at a column have different heights due to geometrical irregularities.
A
vs
= area in one peripheral line of stud shear reinforcement
d
aveRail
= the average effective depth of the slab containing the rails
CSA A23.3 Miscellaneous Provisions
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.4 d in accordance with clause 13.3.8.6. This spacing is rounded down to the
nearest 5 mm.
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.5d or 0.75d in accordance with clause 13.3.8.6.
The maximum tangential spacing of rails at the face of the column is limited to 2d. Tangential spacing requirements are not
checked at locations other than the face of the column/support.
The SSR is extended until the cutoff section stresses are within the allowable limit of per CSA A23.3
13.3.7.4. For cutoff sections outside the original column perimeter sections, is adjusted in accordance with ACI 421.1R-
99 Appendix B.
The minimum rail length is 2 d in accordance with 13.3.7.4.
66.6 AS 3600-2001 Punching Shear Design
The AS 3600 Punching Shear Model
The critical section for punching shear is assumed to be at d
om
/2 from the face of the loaded area or support, where d
om

represents the mean value of d
o
, averaged around the critical perimeter. Based on the derivation of the code equations, d
om
is
not meant to include the thickness of beams. Concept uses a heuristic method for determining the critical section thickness in
regions of differing slab/beam thicknesses around the punching check. The critical section thicknesses can be inspected by
turning them on using visible objects.
The AS 3600 model for punching shear assumes that the shear force V* is distributed evenly around the critical section
creating a uniform average shear stress of v = V*/ud
om
. The unbalanced moment, M
v
* is resisted by a 3-component
mechanism:
1 Difference in yield moments at the front and back faces of the slab strips.
2 Eccentricity of the uniform shear stresses v from the centroid of the support or load.
3 Torsional moment on the side faces (torsion strips).
In the model, the torsional moment in #3 is resolved into a maximum shear stress and added to the uniform average shear
stress v. The proportion of M
v
* contributing to the torsional moment in #3 is actually variable, but is assumed to be constant
to simplify the model. The value of M
v
* is taken at the centre of the column/support.
Design Equations
The resulting shear capacity V
uo
where M
v
* is zero (as well as on slab strip faces) is calculated per AS 3600 clause 9.2.3a:

Rearranged to view in terms of limiting stress, this equation becomes:

0.19
c
fc
v
V
uo
ud
om
f
cv
0.3
cp
+ ( ) =
V
ud
om
------------- f
cv
0.3
cp
+
657 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
Where Mv* is not zero, the model results in the following design equation in AS 3600 clause 9.2.4a when there are no
closed ties in the torsion strips and no spandrel beams:
This expression sets an upper limit on the combination of M
v
* and V* that can be resisted by the concrete. This equation can
be rearranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:
The code allows for increasing the punching capacity by placing a minimum quantity of closed ties in the torsion strips.
Concept provides check box items to include calculation based upon the presence of these minimum closed ties in
accordance with AS 3600 clause 9.2.4b. Concept does not calculate the quantities of minimum ties required by this clause,
which must be calculated and included by the Engineer.
When the minimum quantity of closed ties is present in the torsion strips, the equation in clause 9.2.4b is used:
This expression can also be re-arranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:
In scenarios where the shear to moment ratio is small and/or torsion strip width to effective depth is small, it is possible for
the AS 3600 equations to calculate a lower strength with ties than without.
Concept does not calculate shear capacity using the beam provisions of clause 9.2.4c and 9.2.4d.
Calculation of Maximum and Allowable Shear Stress and Corresponding Stress Ratio
The allowable shear stress calculated is: , where
and is the average prestress in the punching check region. If results in tension it reduces the allowable stress. The
reported allowable shear stresses are multiplied by .
For each set of enveloped force reactions, a maximum unreinforced shear stress is calculated as follows:
1 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the slab strip face is calculated.
2 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is calculated for bending
about the r-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
3 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is calculated for bending
about the s-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
The absolute maximum shear stress from above is reported as the maximum unreinforced shear stress for that force
envelope. The unreinforced stress ratio for each force envelope is the maximum unreinforced stress/allowable stress.
V
u
V
uo
1
uM
v
8V
ad
om
-----------------------

+
-------------------------------------------- =
M
v
8ad
om
2
----------------
V
ud
om
------------- + f
cv
0.3
cp
+
V
u
1.2V
uo
1.0
uM
v
2V
a
2
----------------

+
----------------------------------------- =
M
v
2.4a
2
d
om
-----------------------
V
1.2ud
om
-------------------- + f
cv
0.3
cp
+
f
cv
0.3
cp
+
f
cv
0.17 1
2
h
----- +

f
c
0.34 f
c
=
cp
cp
0.7 =
658
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
The SSR is used to resist direct shear stresses, but not torsion stresses. Where SSR is provided the punching resistance is
calculated as follows:
1 The following operations are performed individually on each face:
2 A minimum number of rails are installed based upon a maximum transverse rail spacing of 2d
om
. The rails are installed
at the allowable maximum spacing. The length of each rail is a minimum of 2.5d.
3 The number of strips used for strength is calculated, up to a total of 4 (2 slab and 2 torsion strips). This is accomplished by
determining how many faces contain parts of the critical section. If there is no part of the critical section on a particular face,
this face will not be used for strength design but will get rails placed, if possible, using the maximum transverse spacing
requirement.
4 The perimeter length of the face is calculated both as a slab strip and a torsion strip. The length of the torsion strip is simply
the appropriate width of the critical section. The length of the slab strip is calculated as the length remaining after any torsion
strip lengths have been deducted. If the torsion strip is broken up with holes/openings, it is possible that the slab strip length
will be less than or equal to zero. In this event no design will be reported and the status will be reported as Failed.
5 The average effective depth of the slabs containing the existing rails is calculated.
6 The number of additional rails required is calculated and added, if necessary, and step 4 and 5 are repeated until a satis-
factory solution is found.
The strength equations used in the calculation of SSR are as follows:
For slab strips:
where
and
A
vs
= cross sectional area of one peripheral line of studs in the strip
b = width of the strip
f
vy
= yield stress of the studs in the strip
d = average effective depth of the slab containing the shear stud rails
u = perimeter length of the critical section
For torsion strips:
where
and
a = width of the strip
V
u
V
uo
1 K
s
+ ( ) =
K
s
1
V
uo
---------A
vs
f
vy
d
s
---

u
b
---

=
V
u
V
uo
1
1 K
t
+
---------------
uM
v
8V
ad
om
----------------------- +
--------------------------------------------- =
K
t
1
V
uo
--------- A
vt
f
vy
d
s
---

u
a
---

=
659 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
The maximum punching shear force which can be transferred to the column is taken as the smaller of these two values of
:
where
Maximum Reinforced Strength
The maximum strength of the reinforced slab/column connection is given as:
V
umax
= 0.2f
c
ud
om
thus giving the following 2 conditions that must be satisfied:
In the slab strip,
V
uo
(1+K
t
) < 0.2ud
om
f
c
In the torsion strip,

V
uo
(1+K
s
) < 0.2ud
om
f
c
Miscellaneous Provisions
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.35 d. This spacing is rounded down to the nearest 5 mm for metric units (or 1/8
inch for US units).
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d. In seismic applications, the Engineer can limit the typical spacing to a smaller
value by specifying the typical stud spacing directly.
A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided as follows:
In the slab strip,
In the torsion strip,
When SSR reinforcement is required, the minimum quantity of reinforcement is required on all strength strips.
66.7 EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design
The EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Model
The punching shear analysis and design approach uses the EC2 provisions for the basis of the implementation. Some
condition specific EC2 provisions were generalized using CEB-FIP 90. The implementation also implements suggestions in
TR-43 regarding treatment of precompression in the shear strength equations.
A control perimeter (u
1
) is defined at 2d from the periphery of area of application of force. This control perimeter is
constructed so as to minimize its length. The corners of the perimeter are rounded.
V
u
V V
u
0.7 =
A
vs
0.35bs
f
vy
---------------- =
A
vs
0.35as
f
vy
---------------- =
660
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
For slab edges located within the punching check, additional control perimeters will be generated by projecting
perpendicular lines from the original control perimeter to the slab edges. Additionally, control perimeters will be generated
for each basic slab shape, cap, etc. This could result in a number of basic control perimeters.
To calculate the perimeter stresses, a plastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/reaction and
the control perimeter is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric loading to calculate a complete stress
distribution on the perimeter. Where there are eccentricities in two orthogonal directions, they are considered
simultaneously. The k factor in EC2 equation 6.39 is applied to the unbalanced moment after the column forces are
transformed to the plastic neutral axis of the control perimeter.
EC2 clause 6.4.3(3) requires the calculation of a factor on the basic control perimeter. The same factor is then applied
to all subsequent perimeter calculations. This simplification is made due to the complexity in the plastic section calculations.
Concept does not make this assumption, but instead calculates and applies an appropriate factor for each perimeter
calculated. This is in accordance with the approach for the cutoff section in CEB-FIP 90.
66.7.1 Calculation of punching resistance for the unreinforced section
Control Perimeter Section Properties and Equations for the Calculation of Actual Stresses
Before any calculations are performed, the following manipulations are carried out on the reactions at the column center:
1 The column reactions are transformed to the control perimeter elastic centroid.
2 k factors are calculated using ratios about the column principal axes.
3 The reactions are rotated to the column principal axes and multiplied by appropriate k factors.
4 The reactions are rotated to the control perimeter elastic principal axes.
Figure 66-3 EN 1992-2004 control perimeter
The remainder of the calculations are carried out about the elastic principal axes of the control perimeter. Since a plastic
stress distribution is used, if the punching area of the control perimeter on each side of the elastic neutral axes is not equal,
the magnitudes must vary to maintain vertical equilibrium. This is handled by using multiplication factors representing the
ratio of stress on one side of the principal axis over the stress on the other side. These factors are represented in the following
form:

a
+
d
a
+
c
b
+
d
b
+
c
area a
area b
a
r
e
a

d
a
r
e
a

c
x
Area
a
Area
b
--------------- =
y
Area
c
Area
d
--------------- =
661 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
The stresses in each quadrant (considering bending about each axis separately) can then be represented as:
Equation 1
Equation 2
Two simultaneous equations can then be set up and solved for the state of stress around the critical section:
M
ox
= unbalanced moment about the principal x-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
M
oy
= unbalanced moment about the principal y-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
d = effective depth at location in critical section
Substituting equations 1 and 2 and collecting terms,
These terms can be envisioned as plastic section moduli and each term has units of cubic length. Due to the interaction of
in the above equations and the equations below, these values are only valid for the axes about which they are calculated.
Equation 3 and 4 then become:
We can then use equations 1 and 2 to solve for and .
a
=
c
=
d
662
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
The stress in any given quadrant of the critical section is then solved for as:
Calculation of Allowable Stress
The punching resistance for an unreinforced section is calculated as follows:
(6.47)
where
d in mm
relates to bonded tension steel in y and z directions (this value is input directly by the user as a
punching check property)
f
ck
= characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days
k
1
= 0.1
average compression in the punching check region.
Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
(6.52)
d
sw
= average effective depth of slab containing shear reinforcement
s
r
= radial spacing of shear reinforcement
A
sw
= area of one peripheral line of shear reinforcement
d
i
= the average effective depth of the perimeter under consideration
f
ywd
= effective design strength of the shear reinforcement

d
i
= the average effective depth of the perimeter under consideration
Note: Because the head sizes of SSR are typically selected to ensure 100% development of the stem, the yield strength of the
SSR reinforcement is used without adjustment for effective depth, d. If the Engineer needs to make reductions to the effective
yield strength of the studs due to depth issues these modifications can be made by specifying a reduced yield stress in the SSR
Systems on the Materials page.
Limitation of Punching Stress at the Perimeter of the Column or Loaded Area
At the perimeter of the column face the maximum shear stress is limited to:
v
Ed
= v
Rd,max
(6.53)
v
Rd c ,
C
Rd c ,
k 100
1
f
ck
( )
1
3
---
k
1
cp
+ = v
mi n
k
1
cp
+
C
Rd c ,
0.18
c
---------- =
k 1
200
d
--------- + 2.0d =
l y
l z
+ 0.02 =
cp
cy
cz
+ ( ) 2 =
v
Rd cs ,
0.75v
Rd c ,
1.5 d
sw
s
r
( )A
sw
f
ywd
[ ] u
i
d
i
+ =
f
yk
=
s
663 RAM Concept

Chapter 66
where

v
Rd,max
= 0.5 v f
cd
= maximum beta from calculated control perimeters, u
1
v = 0.6[1 - f
ck
/250] f
ck
in N/mm
2
f
cd
= design value of concrete compressive strength
u
0
= length of column or loaded area periphery
u
0
is further limited as follows:
Edge columns: u
0
< 6d
Note: This simplification for edge columns was necessary due to difficulty in calculating the code equation for irregular
situations. This provision is not in strict compliance with the code and should be reviewed by the Engineer as necessary.
Corner columns: u
0
< 3d
Miscellaneous Provisions
The control perimeter at which shear reinforcement is not required is calculated using eq. 6.47. The outermost perimeter of
shear reinforcement is placed not greater than 1.5d within this perimeter.
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.5 d.
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d.
The maximum transverse rail spacing is 1.5 d within the first control perimeter and 2.0 d outside the first control perimeter.
A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided in accordance with EC2 equation 9.11:
where s
t
is assumed to be < 2d (Final rail layout should be confirmed/adjusted to be in agreement with this assumption)
Note: EC2 has special provisions for column bases. These provisions are not implemented in Concept (the provisions above
are applied to all punching checks). For slabs without prestress, this will always be conservative. For slabs with prestress,
the Engineer will need to evaluate the validity of the results.
66.8 Sign convention
The equations presented require the use of the right-hand rule sign convention. While RAM Concept allows you to set
your own sign conventions for reactions, it will internally apply the correct signs to the equations.
v
Ed
V
Ed
u
0
d ( ) =
A
sw m , in
0.08 f
ck
s
r
s
t
( ) 1.5f
yk

664
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
Figure 66-4 Positive moment reactions derived from the right-hand rule sign convention.
Concept reports the reactions applied from the column to the slab. The reactions are the forces and moments that would need
to be applied to the column joint in order to keep the system in equilibrium if the columns were removed. This can be
envisioned by removing the column from the structure and replacing it with the reported reactions applied at the column
centroid. Refer to Figure 66-5 for clarification.
Figure 66-5 Column reaction sign conventions
66.9 Advice on the selection of punching check properties
Maximum Search Radius - This radius defines the circular area around a column that RAM Concept will investigate in
its search for potential failure locations. A punching zone radius that is set to be a very large distance will always be
conservative. However, having a very large radius has two detrimental effects. First, RAM Concept will need to review a
larger area of the slab, and hence will take longer to check the column. More importantly, slab holes and slab edges that are
665 RAM Concept
Chapter 66
far from the column will be considered in determining the potentially critical sections which may result in a smaller critical
section than is appropriate.
Cover to CGS - This is the distance from the top of slab to the centroid elevation of the top reinforcement. In general this
is the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar (or the top of the bar under the top bar). This distance is
subtracted from the slab thickness to determine the d distance.
Angle - The plan angle about which punching reactions are enveloped. For some codes this also defines the angle about
which the punching calculations are performed. In general, this should either be set to the angle of the column or (if the
column is at a slab edge) the angle of the slab edge. The Align Punch Check Axis with Rectangular Columns checkbox
can be used to automatically set the angle.
Edge/Hole Treatment - See Figure 66-2.
Connection Type - Corner, edge, interior or auto. Refer to About Connection Type on page 650.
66.10 Miscellaneous information
Effect of precompression
For post-tensioned slabs, the allowable calculated by Concept may be smaller than that calculated by 2D frame programs,
because Concept uses an effective prestress value that is an average for the punching zone. This punching zone average will
reflect a lower effective prestress in column capitals and other thickened areas.
66.11 Some final words of advice
RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of potentially critical sections; for unusual geometries Concept may not
check the appropriate section and/or may check inappropriate sections that give higher than appropriate stress ratios.
The engineer must review Concepts selection of potentially critical sections, and must use engineering judgment to decide if
Concepts selections are appropriate and if the application of the code model is appropriate.
666
Chapter 66
RAM Concept
667 RAM Concept
Chapter 67
67 Vibration Analysis Notes
Structures undergo vibrations that may upset the occupants of the structure or disturb sensitive equipment. While there are a
number of sources of excitation that cause vibration, one common source of excitation is footsteps of the structure
occupants. This chapter gives an overview of vibration analysis and advice on using RAM Concepts vibration and footfall
analysis capabilities. Vibration options are available through the Calc Options dialog and the analysis is invoked using the
Calc vibration analysis ( ) command.
67.1 Dynamic Characteristics of Structures
A complete discussion of dynamic behavior of structures is outside the scope of this chapter and can be found in strucutral
dynamics textbooks. Some basic understanding of vibrations and structural dynamics is assumed.
67.1.1 Free Vibration
Free vibration of undamped structures occurs when the structure is displaced to an initial displacement, released and then
allowed to vibrate freely. It is related only to the stiffness and mass in the structure. The preferred vibration patterns of the
structure are referred to as the natural modes of vibration. Each mode of vibration has a characteristic deflected shape and an
associated vibration frequency. If an undamped structure is initially displaced to a natural mode shape and then released, the
structure will undergo simple harmonic motion (displacement vs. time curve has a sinusoidal shape). The mode shape with
the lowest natural frequency is referred to as the fundamental mode of vibration.
Floor structures may have many very closely spaced natural modes of vibration, with only small parts of the structure
participating in each one. To capture the complete dynamic response, it is necessary to calculate enough modes to include all
modes with natural frequencies of interest, which generally include modes with frequencies up to about 12-15 Hz for
resonant response analysis and up to about 2 times the fundamental mode of vibration for impulsive response.
Figure 67-1 Fundamental mode shape
Number of modes
RAM Concept allows the user to input the number of mode shapes to be calculated. The frequencies of the mode shapes can
be viewed in the text tables and the number of mode shapes calculated increased as necessary.
Dynamic concrete modulus factor
RAM Concept allows input of a dynamic concrete modulus factor which represents the ratio of dynamic modulus to the
static modulus. The dynamic modulus of elasticity of concrete (small strains for short durations) is generally higher than the
668
Chapter 67
RAM Concept
static modulus of elasticity. The dynamic modulus affects the stiffness of the structure and thus factors into the calculation of
the natural frequencies and mode shapes. The default factor in RAM Concept is 1.2.
Stiffness matrix
RAM Concept also allows selection of the stiffness matrix to use in the calculation of frequencies and mode shapes. If one of
the load history stiffness matrices is used (for example to account for cracking), the load history analysis must be run after
selecting the load history step to use for stiffness matrix and prior to the vibration calculations.
Note: Since the load history calculations use stiffness adjustments to account for long-term effects, it is not recommended
to use a load history step that has any prior load history steps with any significant duration as this can underestimate the
short term stiffness.
Mass
The structure self-mass is always considered automatically in the analysis, which can be adjusted by setting the Density for
Loads property in the concrete material properties. In some cases there is additional mass permanently in place that should
be considered in the analysis of the frequencies and mode shapes. This additional mass can be drawn on the additional mass
layer located under the Vibrations folder. This layer allows the user to define area loads, line loads, and point loads that will
be converted to mass for vibration analysis purposes.
67.1.2 Damping
Real structures have some level of damping which tends to reduce the vibratory response over time. The higher the damping,
the faster the vibration will decay and the less likely vibrations will cause adverse affects. Damping is often defined as a
fraction of critical damping, which is the level of damping that would be necessary to prevent oscillation altogether. In RAM
Concept a constant damping ratio is used in the calculation of all modes. Typical damping ratios for concrete structures
range from about 0.01 to 0.02 (1% to 2% of critical) for bare concrete floors, and 0.02 to 0.035 (2% to 3.5% of critical) for
concrete floors with typical fit out.
67.1.3 Resonant vs. Impulsive Response
In structures with modes that have lower natural frequences (less than approximately 4 times the maximum footstep
frequency) it is possible for the dynamic response to build up (increase) over time. This is caused by a phenomenon know as
resonance and occurs when the frequency of the excitation closely matches the natural frequency of a vibration mode of the
structure. Resonance is most likely to occur when the walking frequency matches the natural frequency of the structure, but
it is also possible when any of the first four harmonics of the walking frequency (f
w
, 2f
w
, 3f
w
,,4f
w
) match the natural
frequency (f
n
). Resonance at higher harmonics is much less likely.
In structures whose fundamental mode of vibration has a natural frequency larger than about 12-15Hz, the dynamic response
of each footfall tends to dissipate almost entirely before the next footfall. This type of response is referred to as impulsive
because a buildup of response due to resonance is not likely in this frequency range.
67.2 Resonant Footfall Response
RAM Concept calculates the footfall response of structures using assumed dynamic loadings that were derived from a large
number of experimentally measured footfall force time histories. These studies also showed that normal walking rates range
from about 1.5 to 2.5 steps per second.
The first four harmonics of the specified range of walking frequencies are considered. From these harmonics, a set of critical
walking frequencies are determined that would coincide with the natural frequencies of the structure and thus promote
resonance. The response must be calculated for each of these critical walking frequencies as it is otherwise not possible to
determine which frequency is most critical.
669 RAM Concept
Chapter 67
The assumed periodic footfall function can be separated into any number of harmonic components using a Fourier series.
RAM Concept uses 4 harmonic components in this evaluation.
where
W = weight of the individual walking
= dynamic load factor (refer to A Design Guide for Footfall Induced Vibration of Structures for a detailed discussion)
j = harmonic number
n = total number of harmonic components considered
T = period of the footfall
This relationship is demonstrated graphically below for a walking frequency of 1.5 Hz:
Figure 67-2 Assumed footfall forcing function built up from harmonic components
In the resonant analysis, a maximum natural frequency to use in the analysis can be input into RAM Concept. Only modes of
vibration with natural frequencies less than or equal to the input value will be used in the resonant response analysis.
p t ( ) W
j2
T
--------t

sin
j 1 =
n
=
670
Chapter 67
RAM Concept
67.2.1 Resonant Simplified (fast) Analysis
RAM Concepts Simplified (fast) Analysis is based upon a method in the Concrete Centres design guide for
vibrations[Willford, M.R. and Young, P., A Design Guide for Footfall Induced Vibration of Structures, Concrete Centre,
2006]. This method predicts the total buildup that is possible under harmonic loading under a limited number of cycles. It is
performed for each harmonic individually, and finds the peak acceleration, but provides no information about the phase of
the different harmonic results. The results from the different harmonics are combined using a square root of sum of squares
(SRSS) technique.
This method is designated the default analysis method in RAM Concept due to its fast computation time and relative
accuracy of results.
Note: Because the simplified method only calculates accelerations and response factors, velocity envelope results will not
include a contribution from the resonant response analysis. If impulsive response calculations are performed, the velocity
envelopes will only include the results from the impulsive analysis, which can be misleading. If velocity performance criteria
are being used with resonant response analyis, Modal Analysis should be used instead of the Simplified Analysis.
67.2.2 Resonant Modal Analysis
RAM Concepts Modal Analysis is based upon a classical mode superposition method, also referred to as modal analysis. In
this approach individual (uncoupled) modal equations are solved to determine the individual modal responses which are then
superimposed to obtain the total response. This approach results in a complete time history for the total response and
calculates accelerations and velocities. This analysis is performed for each harmonic individually to facilitate combination of
the response factors. Since a complete time history for each harmonic results is known the results can be combined using
direct algebraic summation. This method can be computationally time consuming.
This analysis requires a duration and time interval to be used in the calculations. The recommendation is to select a duration
that will include a minimum of approximately 30 cycles of excitation, and a time interval that is at least 10 times shorter than
the shortest harmonic excitation period. For most problems with normal footstep frequencies, a 20 second duration with a
0.01 second time interval will provide good results.
67.2.3 RMS Values for Resonant Response
The resonant response analyses result in peak accelerations and velocities, which are often not used in evaluation of
vibration performance criteria because they are not representative of the vibration as a whole. A measure of the average
response amplitude is the root mean square, or RMS values which are generally evaluated over a certain time period. The
RMS method involves squaring the velocity or acceleration at each time instant, finding the average of the squared values
over the evaluation period, then taking the square root of this average. For simple harmonic motion the RMS value is equal
to 1/ or 70.7% of the peak value. In the calculation of RMS values in RAM Concept, the RMS value is always taken as
1/ of the peak value.
67.2.4 Calculation of Response Factor
The response factor is a multiplier on the level of vibration at the threshold of human perception. Thus, a response factor of
1 would represent a level of vibration that is just at the threshold of human perception, and a response factor of 2 would
represent twice the perceivable level.. People are more sensitive to vibration at some frequencies than at others. The base
curves for human perceivability are taken from BS 6472. Since vibrations can contain a range of frequencies, the response
factor in RAM Concept is calculated individually for each harmonic excitation frequency by taking a baseline acceleration
( = 1) from the curve for that frequency, then combined using square root of sum of squares (SRSS). For resonant
response, the response factor is always calculated using accelerations.
2
2
a
RMS
671 RAM Concept
Chapter 67
67.3 Impulsive Footfall Response
The most critical response in this type of analysis is for the largest footfall rate, and thus the impulsive analysis can be
performed on just the largest footfall rate in the range (the footfall rate still affects the magnitude of the impulse). The
analysis is based upon a method in the Concrete Centres design guide for vibrations[Willford, M.R. and Young, P., A
Design Guide for Footfall Induced Vibration of Structures, Concrete Centre, 2006]. The method calculates a complete time
history velocity curve, from which a time history acceleration curve can be derived. All modes with natural frequencies up to
twice the fundamental frequency are considered in the analysis.
67.3.1 RMS Values for Impulsive Response
The impulsive response analyses result in peak accelerations and velocities, which are often not used in evaluation of
vibration performance criteria because they are not representative of the vibration as a whole. A measure of the average
response amplitude is the root mean square, or RMS values which are generally evaluated over a certain time period. The
RMS method involves evaluating the response over a period of one footfall:
67.3.2 Calculation of Response Factor
The response factor is a multiplier on the level of vibration at the threshold of human perception. Thus, a response factor of
1 would represent a level of vibration that is just at the threshold of human perception, and a response factor of 2 would
represent twice the perceivable level. People are more sensitive to vibration at some frequencies than at others. The base
curves for human perceivability are taken from BS 6472. Since the methods used in RAM Concept combine the results of
the different modes of vibration, the baseline velocity value ( = 1) is taken from the curve using the frequency of the
fundamental mode of vibration.
67.4 Evaluating Vibration Performance and Interpreting Results
67.4.1 Excitation and Response Node Options
There are a number of different combinations of excitation and response nodes available for analysis. For excitation nodes,
the following options are available.
Excitation at All Nodes
This option treats every node in the model as an excitation node.
Excitation at Critical Nodes
This option first does a preliminary analysis on every node in the structure, calculating results at only the excitation point
and using the simplified (fast) analysis to find a response factor at each node. Then, only nodes with a calculated response
factor greater than or equal to the entered Excitation response factor threshold are excited in the primary analysis.
Excitation at Specified Nodes
Excitation area polygons can be drawn on the Excitation Areas Plan (on the Vibration Layer). Only the nodes of any
elements intersected by the drawn excitation area polygons are considered as excitation nodes. This option works in
conjunction with other excitation area options. For example, if an excitation area is drawn and Excitation at Critical Nodes
is specified, only nodes that both intersect the excitation area and have a preliminary response factor greater than or equal to
v
RMS
1
T
--- v t ( )
2
0
T
t d =
v
RMS
672
Chapter 67
RAM Concept
the Excitation response factor threshold will be excited. If no excitation areas are drawn, every node is considered as an
excitation node.
Response at All DOF at All Nodes
When using Modal Analysis, this option calculates the response at all DOF (lateral, angular, vertical) at all nodes. Since the
lateral and angular components are rarely critical for floor vibrations and calculating these components increases the run
time, using this option is not normally recommended.
Response at Vertical DOF at All Nodes
This option calculates the response at only the vertical DOF at every node. As each node is being considered as an excitation
node, the response at all other nodes in the structure is calculated and enveloped.
Response at Vertical DOF at Only Excited Node
This option calculates the response at only the vertical DOF at the excited node only. As each node is being considered as an
excitation node, the response is calculated at the excitation node and is not calculated at any other node.
67.4.2 Recommendations for Analysis Options
The default setting is to use the resonant simplified (fast) calculation with all nodes considered as an excitation node and the
response calculated at the vertical DOF at the excited node only. This is generally the fastest combination to get reasonable
results calculated for the entire floor. This combination generally captures the most critical effects in each region, but doesnt
well pick up the extent of the response in each critical region. This is because the worst case response at some nodes near the
critical nodes would be from excitation of the nearby critical node and not from self-excitation. However, the default setting
is very recommended for daily design use for structures that are not vibrationally sensitive. In order to better pick up the
critical effects of the entire region, the Response Nodes setting could be changed to Vertical DOF at all nodes, but there
will normally be a considerable increase in runtime.
For structures that are vibrationally sensitive or if a higher degree of accuracy is desired, the modal analysis method is
recommended. Because this method is computationally expensive, it is generally necessary to use it in conjunction with
other settings to speed up the calculation time. One such example is to use the simplified method to evaluate the floor as a
whole, then excite and evaluate a subset of the structure using modal analysis. This can be accomplished by using the
Critical Nodes option and setting the Excitation response factor threshold to avoid exciting non-critical nodes, by drawing
excitation areas to take advantage of known areas of excitation like corridors and hallways, or a combination of the two.
Note: If the Critical nodes or excitation areas are drawn in conjunction with the Vertical DOF at only excited node
option, there will not be any response calculated at some nodes. In order to get a response at particular node it must either
be considered as an excitation node (with associated response calculated) or as a response node while another node is
considered as an excitation node (by using the Vertical DOF at all nodes setting for Response Nodes).
67.4.3 Velocity and Acceleration Contour Plots
RAM Concept calculates and displays contour plots for velocity, acceleration, and response factors. These plots represent
the envelope at each node of all the calculated cases which include resonant response calculations (for each critical
excitation frequency) and the impulsive response calculation for the critical (maximum) excitation frequency. These contour
plots can be used to evaluate performance criteria and indicate the worst case vibration response at each location.
67.4.4 Evaluation of Response Factor Plots
The response factor represents a multiple of the level of vibration that is barely perceivable to a human. A response factor of
1 indicates a vibration that is just perceivable, a response factor of 2 represents twice that, and so on. The baseline curve that
represents R=1 that is used in RAM Concept is from BS 6472 and is consistent with the ISO standard 2631-2. The curve is
reproduced below. Like the velocity and acceleration plots, the response factor contour plots represent enveloped results of
all the different analyses at each node. As such, the response factor contours are often used for evaluation of performance
673 RAM Concept
Chapter 67
criteria. The following table lists some common response factor limits mentioned in BS 6472 and ISO 2631-2 for some
different environments.
Figure 67-3 Vibration base curve for RMS acceleration (response factor = 1)
Environment Response Factor
Limit
Description of Use
Workshops, Office 8-10 Perceptible vibration, suitable for
non-sensitive areas.
Residential 4-8 Possible perceptible vibration, suit-
able for sleep areas in most cases.
Operating rooms 1-4 Near the threshold of perception,
suitable for sensitive sleep areas and
in most instances for microscopes to
100x and other low sensitivity
equipment.
Sensitive Equipment
rooms
0.0625-1 Suitable for senstive equipment,
electron microsopes, etc.
Table 67-1 Recommended response factor limits for various environments
674
Chapter 67
RAM Concept

Ram Concept

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ram Concept

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAM Concept

0 0.001 0.002 0.003 0.004

569 RAM Concept

639 RAM Concept

In the torsion strip,

663 RAM Concept

You might also like